The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About2018-11-27 Meeting Minutes Public Service Committee Meeting Commission Chamber - 11/27/2018 ATTENDANCE: Present: Hons. Guilfoyle, Chairman; Fennoy, Vice Chairman; Davis and M. Williams, members. Absent: Hon. Hardie Davis, Jr., Mayor. PUBLIC SERVICES 1. Motion to Approve a Contract Term Extension with Bateman (Compass – USA) July 1, 2017 – June 30, 2018. (See attachment for explanation) Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes 2. Motion to approve the 2019 Cooperative Agreement with CSRA Regional Commission for Senior Nutrition Services for Augusta, Georgia. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes 3. Provide information pertaining to the auto salvage yard on property at 2242 M L King Blvd. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve receiving this item as information with Planning & Development to check on the status of the property at 2218 Martin Luther King Blvd. Motion Passes 4-0. Commissioner Marion Williams Commissioner Mary Davis Passes 4. Provide as information. The Board of Elections issued a certified copy of the election results from the November 6, 2018 General and Special Election that indicates that the voters did approve for the sale of alcoholic beverages on Sunday beginning at 11:00 A.M. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes 5. At the request of the Augusta Commission, Code Enforcement will provide information on how Augusta and other cities regulate boarded up structures. Item Action: Rescheduled Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to receive a report back from Planning & Development on this matter at the second committee meeting in January. Motion Passes 4-0. Commissioner Marion Williams Commissioner William Fennoy Passes 6. Approval of Tentative Allocation for a Grant to overlay Runway 5-23 at Daniel Field Airport. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes 7. Motion to approve the Second Contract Amendment, Change Order #1 with Hebbard Electrical in the amount of $6,803.79. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes 8. Motion to approve the Johnson Controls Hangar One Fire Alarm Systems Contract in the amount of $31,523.00. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Motion Passes 4-0. Commissioner Marion Williams Commissioner William Fennoy Passes 9. Motion to approve the McCarthy Change Order #2.Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve to include verifying the accuracy of the final Commissioner William Fennoy Commissioner Mary Davis Passes figures and making any necessary corrections. Motion Passes 4-0. 10. Motion to approve the minutes of the Public Services Committee held on November 13, 2018. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes 11. Motion to approve the Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Management. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes 12. A motion to approve the Lake Olmstead Stadium Fee Recommendation. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve the recommendation of the temporary rental fees before the renovations are done. Motion Passes 4-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner William Fennoy Passes 13. Motion to approve the Southeast Site Services Contract for the Airport Electrical Vault. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes 14. Report from the Recreation Department regarding a plan for the upkeep/maintenance/cleaning and the grass cutting at the city's cemeteries. (Referred from the November 13 Public Services Committee) Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve receiving this item as information and getting an update back in three months regarding the maintenance program in the cemeteries. Commissioner Marion Williams Commissioner Mary Davis Passes 15. Motion to approve Window World Contract Amendment #1 in the amount of $7,375.00. Item Action: Approved Motions Motion Type Motion Text Made By Seconded By Motion Result Approve Motion to approve. Mr. Fennoy out. Motion Passes 3-0. Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Marion Williams Passes www.augustaga.gov Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Attendance 11/27/18 Department: Presenter: Caption: Background: Analysis: Financial Impact: Alternatives: Recommendation: Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: bqteffigil K 101 Pine Park Drive, Lafayette, LA 70508 Phone 337.593.0433 Fax 225.208,1504 August 21,2017 Augusta/Richmond County (CSRARC) 2027 Lumpkin Rd, Augusta, GA 30906 RE: Contract Term Extension To Whom it May Concern: Bateman Community Living ("Bateman") provides meals and other related services to Central Savannah River ARC under a 2016 contract between the parties effective July 5, 2016, as amended thereafter (the "Agreement"). The purpose of this letter is to acknowledge that Bateman remains the CSRARC AAA region's qualified food vendor such that the Agreement will renew for an additionaltwelve (12) month period from July 1, 2017 through June 30, 2018, as part of the broader multi-year agreement with CSRARC. There has been some confusion regarding the $1.30 delivery fee. Per the terms of the Agreement, there is a non-delivery fee of $1.30 per m eatf or all home-delivered meals. This includes, but is not limited to, any attempted meal delivery where Bateman attempts to deliver a five-pack meal, but no one is home to accept the delivery. ln this example, the non-delivery fee assessed would be a total of $6.50 ($1 .30 for each of the 5 meals in the pack), The parties agree that, subject to the terms herein, the terms of the Agreement will remain in full force and effect. Please sign where indicated below to acknowledge your consent to the terms and conditions contained in this letter. I am enclosing two copies of this letter for you to sign. Please keep one for your records and return one of thesiqned conies to our RVP Office. Thank you for allowing us to continue to be of service to Augusta/Richmond County. Please do not hesitate to let me know if you have any questions or concerns. [Signatures on Following Page] RETROACTIVE EFFECT OF FIRST RENEWAL OF AGREEMENT This first renewal of the Agreement shall be effective retroactive to July 1,2017 (Effective Date) through June 30, 2018, and shall have the same force and effect as if executed on July 1,2017. Acknowledged and Agreed to: Hardie Davis, Mayor Sincerely, lllryW, MagflBrettler Regional Vice President /sk To: Jenise Smith, City Law Department t From: Joanie Ad..r, o"prty o-ii.aol- n".r".,ion , ft/\&AIVO- Date: August 30, 2018 U Re:How to Proceed with Contract Extension for FY L7 /18 with Bateman (Comp- USA) Background A Resolution to Enter a Contract with Bateman (Comp USA) was executed by Mayor Davis on July 26,2076. The actual contract did not get sent back to the Department for execution from Bateman until an amendment to the contract was given to staff in February 2017. This caused much confusion and staff were unsure what was being requested of them as it related to the execution of the documents. After much discussion and research and getting the documents prepared correctly and signed by the company first, Bateman issued four different documents for execution: 1) Actual contract which was for one year with the option for three (3) one (1) year renewals provided that Bateman remains recognized by the CSRA AAA as it's qualified food vendor. (Executed by Mayor Davis on May 31, 2018) 2) An Amendment - Price Adjustment (Executed by Mayor on july 23,2OIBI 3) Contract Extension FY 17/tB (July 1, 2017 - June 3oth, 2018) 4) Contract Extension FY L8/t9 (July 1, 2018 - June 3oth, 2019) Approved by Consent at public services committee MeetinB August 28th and is on the commission Agenda for september 4, 2018 Due to a lapse in time of receiving these documents and in getting ltems 1 and 2 as mentioned above approved and executed before we could move forward with the other documents, we now need contract Extension FY 17/!8to be signed. Atthis point, we will be signing a contract Extension for July 1, 2017 - June 30, 201.8. Question Due to the FYLT/78 Fiscal Year being over, how should we catch up the paperwork to have this placed on the Commission Agenda for approval and executed by the Mayor? Thank you. Joanie Adams From: Sent: To: Cc: Subject: Hi, Joanie. Jenise Smith Thursday, August 30, 2018 4:.32 PM Joanie Adams Glenn Parker; Jarvis Sims; Maurice D. McDowell; Andrew G. Mackenzie; Rachel Mack RE: Bateman Contract Extension FY 17-18 Under Georgia law, "contracting parties may agree to give retroactive effect to their contracts as they may see fit," but third parties are not bound to retroactive agreemenls. Americon Cyanamid Co. v. Ring,248 Ga.673,675,286 S.E.2d 1 (1e82). ln layman's terms, Augusta and Bateman can enter into the agreement for the 2Ot7-2078 Amendment, but the amendment should state that it has a retroactive effective date of July 7,2077 (or whatever the appropriate date is). Because the history of this contract and amendments predates me, l'm not sure whether the Commission approved the 2nd amendment to the contract. lf the Commission has not, I assume that the Commission would need to approve the 2nd amendment, and approve that the amendment has a retroactive effect, so that the Mayor can executive the contract, retrooctively. As stated, I recommend that the amendment expressly states that it has a retroactive date. Again, this issue predates me so I hope that l'm understanding the facts correctly. lf l'm not, please free to chime in. Please let me know if you have additional questions or concerns. Thank you, Jenise Jenise S. Smith Senior StaffAttorney Augusta Law Department 535 Telfair Street, Building BoooAugusta, GA 3o9or-2386 From: Joanie Adams Sent: Thursday, August 30, 2018 2:77 PM To: Jenise Smith <JSmith6@augustaga.gov> Cc: Glenn Parker <GParker@augustaga.gov>; Jarvis Sims <JSims@augustaga.gov>; Maurice D. McDowell <MMcDowell@a ugustaga.gov> Subject: Bateman Contract Extension FY 17-tB Good Afternoon, Over the past few months, I have worked with both you and Rachel Mack, approving and executing the documents needed by the Senior Nutrition Food Vendor, Bateman (Compass - USA). We have worked through all but one item and I am requesting your written recommendation on how to proceed with this agenda item. I have attached a memo and other documents as it relates to this memo. I am available to answer questions or provide additional documentation as requested. Thank you for your continued help with this matter. Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM 2017-2018 Bateman Contract Extension - Senior Nutrition Department:Recreation and Parks Department Presenter:Glenn Parker Caption:Motion to Approve a Contract Term Extension with Bateman (Compass – USA) July 1, 2017 – June 30, 2018. (See attachment for explanation) Background:The Recreation and Parks Department operates six senior nutrition sites throughout the county through a partnership with the CSRA Regional Commission Area Agency on Aging that provides state and federal funds for meals to senior citizens including home delivery. Analysis:The CSRA Regional Commission selected Bateman (Compass- USA) as the qualified food vendor for FY2016 – 2019 as part of a multi-year agreement. A Resolution to Enter Contract with Bateman (Compass – USA) was approved and effective July 5, 2016. Financial Impact:The requested contract extension reflects no changes to the approved rates of $4.45 per meal and $1.30 delivery fee per home delivered meal. Alternatives:1. To approve the Contract Term Extension with Bateman (Compass-USA) July 1, 2017 – June 30, 2018. 2. To deny, which would result in forfeiting grant funds for the reimbursement of congregate and homebound meals for the senior nutrition program. Recommendation:1. To approve the Contract Term Extension with Bateman (Compass-USA) July 1, 2017 – June 30, 2018. Funds are Available in the Funds are available in the following accounts: 220054322. Following Accounts: REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM 2019 Cooperative Agreement for Senior Nutrition Program Department:Recreation and Parks Presenter:Glenn Parker Caption:Motion to approve the 2019 Cooperative Agreement with CSRA Regional Commission for Senior Nutrition Services for Augusta, Georgia. Background:The Augusta Recreation and Parks Department operates six senior nutrition sites throughout the county through a partnership with CSRA Regional Commission, which provides state and federal grant funds to provide 121,957 meals to Senior Citizens including the home delivery program. Analysis:The agreement provides the mechanism for Augusta, Georgia to receive $622,989 in 2019. Financial Impact:Augusta’s match for the 2019 Agreement is $32,666. Alternatives:1. To approve the 2019 Cooperative Agreement with CSRA Regional Commission for Senior Nutrition Services for Augusta, Georgia. 2. To deny, which would result in forfeiting grant funds and possibly terminating the program. Recommendation:1. To approve the 2019 Cooperative Agreement with CSRA Regional Commission for Senior Nutrition Services for Augusta, Georgia. Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: Funds are available in the following accounts: 220054322. REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM 2242 M L King Blvd. Auto Salvage Yard Department:Planning & Development Presenter:Rob Sherman Caption:Provide information pertaining to the auto salvage yard on property at 2242 M L King Blvd. Background:At the Administrative Services Committee meeting on November 13, 2018, the Committee members requested additional information on the auto salvage yard located at 2242 M L King Blvd. Analysis:Planning & Development will research the salvage yard operation and provide a report at the November 27, 2018 Public Service Committee meeting. Financial Impact: Alternatives: Recommendation: Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM ALCOHOL ORDINANCE AMENDMENT Department:Planning & Development Presenter:Rob Sherman Caption:Provide as information. The Board of Elections issued a certified copy of the election results from the November 6, 2018 General and Special Election that indicates that the voters did approve for the sale of alcoholic beverages on Sunday beginning at 11:00 A.M. Background:The Augusta Commission, at the regular Commission meeting held on Tuesday, July 17, 2018, approved an amendment to Section 6-2-15 Sunday Sales of the Augusta Alcohol Ordinance that is effective upon approval of a referendum to provide for the sale of alcohol on Sundays beginning at 11:00 AM in accordance with Senate Bill 117. Analysis:The purpose of this agenda item is to inform the Commissioners that the Alcohol Ordinance amendment that the Commission approved on July 17, 2018 that was effective subject to approval of a referendum, was approved by the voters and is now in effect. Financial Impact:N/A Alternatives:N/A Recommendation: Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Boarded Up Strutures Department:Planning & Development Presenter:Terrence Wynder Caption:At the request of the Augusta Commission, Code Enforcement will provide information on how Augusta and other cities regulate boarded up structures. Background:At the October 9th, 2018 Public Service Committee Meeting, Commissioner Marion Williams requested information concerning the time limit for boarded structures. After information was presented, the Commission requested staff to research how other jurisdictions handle boarded up structures. Analysis:Boarded up structures have been an ongoing issue within the community for some time. The City of Augusta has an ordinance that allows structures to become boarded for six months with an additional 3 months extension, if approved. Many homes that remain boarded continue to cause the neighborhood to decline. On the other hand, various challenges limit the government in enforcing the law when dealing with this issue. Information regarding our Code Enforcement process compared to other jurisdictions will be presented during the November 20th, 2018 Committee Meeting. Financial Impact: Alternatives: Recommendation: Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Scanned by CamScanner AUGUSTA, GEORGIA New Grant ProposaVApplication REGEIVED ADMINISTRATOR'S OFFICE Nov 0I 2010 AUGUSTA.RICHMOND COUNTY Bcfore a Depertmeot/agorcy may epply for the grenVewerd on bdrrlf of Augustr Richmond County, they must firet obtaiD approvalsignature frcm the Administntor and the Finance Director. The Adminirtretor will obtain inform"Coo on the grent progrem andreguirements from the funding agcncy and review these for fcasibility to detcrmine if this grant/eward will uenelit ,luErltrRichmond County. The Finance Director wilt reviet the funding requircmenl to dctermine if the grant will f;1 yithin our budgetstructure end financiel goals. kopoorl Projcct No. Project Title DNL FIELD The tentative allocation (TA) for the fiscal yar 2019 gratt is fu asphalr rehabilitarion on Runuay 5/23. GDOT analyzed the cores drilled from the runway asphalt and has determined that overlay versus total reclamation of the asphalt is accepable. The design for this project will be performed by Daniel Field,s engineering mnsultant, GMC. The proposed amount for the design is $l 5q000.00 The construction portion ofthis grant will go out for bid. The budgeted amount for construction is 1,470,000.00 State match: 81,000.00 (around 57o) t*c"!.-ggph required: $8 1,000.00 (around 5%) from fund balanoe. EEO,DB ffi' Stert Drte: Mll5/2019 Submit Date nh7/2}t} Totrl Budgcted Amount: 1,620,000.00 Sponsor: GM00O4 SponrorType: p Purposc: 19 End Datc: lll29l20l9 Department: 082 Total Funding Agency: Fed Aviation Adm Foderal Airport improvement Daniel Field Cerh Metch? Y 1,539,000.00 Totel Cesh Mrkh: 81,000.00 Flowlhm ID: G1r40006 GDOT Type I II) GMIOI9 Shealy, Becky Approvals Date (705)e22-04o8 Rocstved Administratofs ofroo NoY 0 8 ?018 AuBs0irQA Type FA -Ev-B. SHEALY Dept. Sigpeturc: Grent Coordinator Contacts Urcr,' Report: 1146/. - Reboca Shcaly p.se Currqtt lrt&: Currcat Tine: I lrSTl2018 l3:58:41GMI000_PROPOSAL - GMI00O: Grants Managernent: I AUGUSTA, GEORGIA New Grant Proposal/Application Bcforc r DeprrtmcoL/agalcy mly apply for the grent/ewerd on bchelf of Auguru RiclDond County, they mu firlt obadn rpprov.l3ignaaurc from ihc Administnlor rnd lhe Floence Dircclor. Ttc Adminicarator will obtrin informetion on thc granr prognm rnorcqoircmcoa! from ahe funding rgcocy rlId rcyicw ttrcse for fcuibility to dGtcrminc if tbir grut/rw!.rd will banclit AugurtrRichmond County. Thc FinErcc Dirc.lor will rcviw ltc funding rcquirrmcnr to dacrmini if thc grent will lit yithh orr budgeritructure aod ,ioancitl gorh. Proposd Projcca No. Projcct Title l.) I havc reviervod thc Grant application and enclosed materials and: g,4ind the grant/award to be f€asible to the n€eds of Augusta Riclmond County o Deny the request F u a,t r.tA r, , I &an- Financ€ Director ve reviewed the Grant application and enclosed materials and: .pprove the Deflartm€nt Ageocy to move foruard with the application form will also ao provid. thc crt€mel euditon vith informrtion on rll gratrt! for camplirtrcc and rtqlrircmcots rs requircd by the Ststc and Fedc.rel Govcromeot Date Nl l-q . ^l,u|,,(rl Jnl,rly GMIOM PROPOSAL . GMIOOO: Ur.l: Rcport: P.{c Grants lManaganent: z Ctrrrcnl D.G: Ctrrer( Tlltrr: ll,oTrorS l3:58141 /l-Rr*' Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Daniel Field Grant -Tentative Allocation for Runway 5-23 Overlay Department:Daniel Field Airport Presenter:Becky Shealy Caption:Approval of Tentative Allocation for a Grant to overlay Runway 5-23 at Daniel Field Airport. Background:The primary runway at the Daniel Field Airport is 5-23. The asphalt on this runway is in need of rehabilitation. The FAA has tentatively allocated $1,620,000 in grant funding to overlay the asphalt on Runway 5-23. This grant includes DESIGN and CONSTRUCTION of the runway overlay project. Additionally, an estimated amount of $27,000 from this grant will be a reimbursement to Daniel Field for work that was previously performed by the airport on past, unrelated projects. Analysis:The design portion of the project will be completed by Goodwin, Mills and Caywood (GMC). GMC is the civil engineer of record for Daniel Field. The construction portion of the project will go out for bid in accordance with the Augusta procurement department guidelines. Financial Impact:This is a federal grant. The FAA will pay 90% of the project with an estimated state match of 5% and an estimated local match of 5%. Alternatives:Deny the recommendation to approve the grant tentative allocation. Recommendation:Approve the grant tentative allocation for runway improvements at Daniel Field. Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: Org key: 552081205. Daniel Field is an enterprise fund. The local match estimated at $80,000 to $90,000 will be funded through the Daniel Field Airport. REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Hebbard Electrical Contract Amendment #2 CO#1 Department:Augusta Regional Airport Presenter:Herbert Judon Caption:Motion to approve the Second Contract Amendment, Change Order #1 with Hebbard Electrical in the amount of $6,803.79. Background:Aviation Commission approved Change Order #1, Second Amendment to Hebbard Electric, for the installation of additional electrical wiring, equipment and modifications at Hangar One. Total cost is $6,803.79 This is the second amendment to the original contract to Bid #18-173 for the Electrical installation at Hangar One performed by Hebbard Electric. Analysis:This Change Order is to complete the work at Hangar One caused by unforeseen, failed wiring systems due to age of the existing building system. Main feeders to an existing panel were discovered to be made of cloth wiring insulation, wiring was discovered burned in existing conduits for exterior lighting, and the service ground did not meet code, requiring additional new circuits for added equipment. Financial Impact:$6,803.79 Alternatives:To Deny Recommendation:Airport Aviation Commission approved CO#1, Second Amendment with Hebbard Electrical on November 01, 2018 and is requesting County Commission Approval. Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: 551081306-5413120 REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Johnson Controls Hangar One Fire Alarm Department:Augusta Regional Airport Presenter:Herbert Judon Caption:Motion to approve the Johnson Controls Hangar One Fire Alarm Systems Contract in the amount of $31,523.00. Background:This is to continue the upgrade for the Hangar One renovation project. Johnson Controls, Inc. is the sole source provider for all of the fire alarm security equipment to all airport buildings- facility wide. The proprietary nature that is associated with their systems deems it impossible to affiliate with any other service company. With that stated, the Director of Facilities made a thorough review and negotiated an $8,000 reduction through installation methods. Analysis:This is to properly upgrade and complete the work at Hangar One by installing the fire alarm system to a building with a non- existent present system. This affords added protection to an external building via the ability for this system to communicate to the main system’s monitoring protocols. This will also add a layer of human protection to the building, as upon completion of the renovation, the building will be operated for public use. Financial Impact:Cost of $31,523.00 Alternatives:To Deny Recommendation:Airport Commission approved on November 01, 2018 and is requesting the County Commission approve. Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: 551081306-5413120 REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER NO. 2 AIRPORT Augusta Regional Airport Date September 18, 2018 LOCATION Augusta, GA AIP No.3-13-0011-038-039 PROJECT Taxiway A Reconstruction & Extension CONTRACTOR McCarthy Improvement Company You are requested to perform the following described work upon receipt of an approved copy of this document or as directed by the engineer. Item No. Description Unit Unit Price Quantity Amount Extra Work Items P-100.1 Mobilization LS $7,465.91 1 $7,465.91 X-105.13 Remove Aifield Guidance Sign EA $150.00 3 $450.00 L-125.8 L-858 (L) Airfield Guidance Sign, 2 Module on ( E ) Base EA $4,550.00 3 $13,650.00 L-125.9 Spare Taxiway Electrical LS $4,875.00 1 $4,875.00 L-125.10 L861T MITL, LED, Elevated Taxiway Fixture, Red Lense LS $275.00 1 $275.00 Base Bid Quantity Adjustment Items P-101.1 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Removal, Full Depth SY $9.00 10,880 $97,920.00 P-101.2 Asphalt Concrete Pavement Removal, Shoulder, Full Depth SY $11.00 -1,392 ($15,312.00) P-101.3 Cold Milling SY $11.50 -47 ($540.50) P-101.4 PCC Pavement, Full Depth SY $18.00 1,521 $27,378.00 X-105.3 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, 24-inch LF $20.00 -59 ($1,180.00) X-105.5 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, 42-inch LF $31.00 283 $8,773.00 X-105.7 Remove Storm Sewer Catch Basin Structure EA $800.00 5 $4,000.00 X-105.12 Remove Pavement Markings SF $2.50 779 $1,947.50 P-152.1 Unclassified Excavation, On-Site Disposal CY $12.00 25,814 $309,768.00 P-152.2 Unclassified Excavation, Off-Site Disposal CY $15.00 -24,000 ($360,000.00) P-152.3 Unclassified Excavation, Staging Area Base CY $9.50 -6,000 ($57,000.00) P-152.4 Subgrade Preparation SY $1.00 -791 ($791.00) P-156.3 Installation and Removal of Silt Fence LF $2.50 -7,611 ($19,027.50) P-209.1 Crushed Aggregate Base Course (6” Depth) CY $50.00 1,518 $75,900.00 P-220.1 Recycled Asphalt Millings Base Course (24” Depth) CY $32.00 1,810 $57,920.00 P-306.1 Lean Concrete Base Course SY $40.00 -1,822 ($72,880.00) P-401.1 Asphalt Concrete Surface Course TON $120.00 473 $56,760.00 P-501.1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (14”) SY $75.00 -2,698 ($202,350.00) P-605.1 Joint Sealing Filler LF $3.15 9,774 $30,788.10 P-620.2 Permanent Pavement Marking SF $0.80 2,016 $1,612.80 P-620.3 Thermoplastic Preformed Markings SF $22.00 -2,200 ($48,400.00) P-620.4 Thermoplastic Surface Sign EA $6,600.00 -2 ($13,200.00) P-620.5 Reflective Media LB $3.50 -188 ($658.00) D-701.2 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 24-inch, Class III LF $56.00 -5 ($280.00) Page 2 of 11 D-701.3 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 30-inch, Class III LF $72.00 -256 ($18,432.00) D-701.4 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 36-inch, Class III LF $93.00 -4 ($372.00) D-701.5 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 42-inch, Class V LF $124.00 -10 ($1,240.00) D-701.6 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 48-inch, Class V LF $157.00 -9 ($1,413.00) D-705.1 6-inch Perforated Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40 LF $16.50 790 $13,035.00 D-705.2 6-inch Solid Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40 LF $15.50 -290 ($4,495.00) D-705.3 Underdrain Cleanout, Type I EA $730.00 -9 ($6,570.00) D-705.4 Underdrain Cleanout, Type II EA $866.00 14 $12,124.00 D-751.3 Catch Basin, Type B EA $7,340.00 -5 ($36,700.00) T-901.1 Seeding AC $1,435.00 2 $2,870.00 T-905.1 Topsoiling (Obtain on Site or Removed from Stockpile) CY $12.00 2472 $29,664.00 L-108.2 Counterpoise Wire w/ Grounding Rods LF $1.00 1,683 $1,683.00 L-110.1 1-way, 2-inch PVC, Direct Bury Type II Electrical Duct Bank LF $2.50 1,394 $3,485.00 L-110.2 2-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank LF $25.00 -1,790 ($44,750.00) L-110.4 6-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank LF $60.00 -260 ($15,600.00) L-110.5 8-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank LF $80.00 175 $14,000.00 L-115.1 Electrical Pull Box, Aircraft Rated EA $8,000.00 -7 ($56,000.00) Bid Alternative 1 Quantity Adjustment Items P-101.1 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Removal, Full Depth SY $9.00 -429 ($3,861.00) P-101.2 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Removal, Shoulder, Full Depth SY $14.00 -63 ($882.00) P-152.1 Unclassified Excavation, On-Site Disposal CY $12.00 318 $3,816.00 P-152.3 Subgrade Preparation SY $1.30 -4 ($5.20) P-156.4 Inlet Sediment Trap-Silt Saver EA $175.00 -14 ($2,450.00) P-156.8 Emergency Erosion Control Mobilization EA $500.00 -1 ($500.00) P-209.1 Crushed Aggregate Base Course (6” Depth) CY $51.00 318 $16,218.00 P-220.1 Recycled Asphalt Millings Base Course (24” Depth) CY $33.00 211 $6,963.00 P-306.1 Lean Concrete Base Course SY $40.00 -1,099 ($43,960.00) P-401.1 Asphalt Concrete Surface Course TON $120.00 -73 ($8,760.00) P-501.1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (14”) SY $75.00 -857 ($64,275.00) D-701.3 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 30-inch, Class III LF $72.00 29 $2,088.00 D-701.4 Cocnrete Sewer Pipe, 36-inch, Class III LF $93.00 -1 ($93.00) D-705.1 6-inch Perforated, Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40 LF $16.50 195 $3,217.50 D-705.2 6-inch Solid, Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40 LF $15.50 -120 ($1,860.00) D-751.2 Catch Basin, Type A EA $7,950.00 -2 ($15,900.00) D-751.3 Catch Basin, Type B EA $7,340.00 1 $7,340.00 L-108.1 #8 AWG, 5 kV Power Cable LF $1.00 -54 ($54.00) L-110.2 2-way, 4-inch PVC, Cocnrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank LF $25.00 -160 ($4,000.00) Page 3 of 11 L-115.1 Electrical Pull Box, Aircraft Rated EA $8,000.00 -1 ($8,000.00) Bid Alternative 2 Quantity Adjustment Items P-101.1 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Remove, Full Depth SY $8.00 -549 ($4,392.00) P-101.2 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Removal, Shoulder, Full Depth SY $8.00 -13,470 ($107,760.00) X-105.11 Remove Taxiway Edge Light and Base Can EA $75.00 2 $150.00 X-105.12 Remove Pavement Markings SF $5.00 520 $2,600.00 P-152.1 Unclassified Excavation, On-Site Disposal CY $12.50 5,627 $70,337.50 P-152.2 Unclassified Excavation , Off-Site Disposal CY $15.50 -5,627 ($87,218.50) P-152.3 Subgrade Preparation SY $1.30 -9 ($11.70) P-156.8 Emergency Erosion Control Mobilization EA $500.00 -1 ($500.00) P-209.1 Crushed Aggregate Base Course (6” Depth) CY $51.00 587 $29,937.00 P-306.1 Lean Concrete Base Course SY $40.00 -108 ($4,320.00) P-401.1 Asphalt Concrete Surface Course TON $120.00 -14 ($1,680.00) P-501.1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (14”) SY $75.00 -476 ($35,700.00) P-620.2 Permanent Pavement Marking SF $2.00 227 $454.00 P-620.3 Thermoplastic Preformed Markings SF $22.00 -1,465 ($32,320.00) D-705.1 6-inch Perforated Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40 LF $16.50 140 $2,310.00 P-705.4 Underdrain Clean-Out, Type II EA $865.00 -1 ($865.00) T-905.1 Topsoiling (Obtain on Site or Removed from Stockile) CY $12.00 -10 ($120.00) L-125.1 L861T MITL, LED, Elevated Taxiway Fixture EA $900.00 -2 ($1,800.00) Bid Alternative 3 Quantity Adjustment Items P-101.2 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Removal, Shoulder, Full Depth SY $15.00 -34 ($510.00) P-101.3 Cold Milling SY $125.00 -85 ($10,625.00) P-101.4 PCC Pavement Removal, Full Depth SY $17.00 328 $5,576.00 X-105.12 Remove pavement Markings SF $3.00 -190 ($570.00) P-152.1 Unclassified Excavation, On-Site Disposal CY $13.50 2,007 $27,094.50 P-152.2 Unclassified Excavation, Off-Site Disposal CY $17.00 -2,000 ($34,000.00) P-152.3 Subgrade Preparation SY $1.30 -729 ($947.70) P-501.2 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (15”) SY $80.00 -1,057 ($84,560.00) P-620.3 Thermoplastic Preformed Markings SF $22.00 -1,700 ($37,400.00) D-705.1 6-inch Perforated polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40 LF $16.50 35 $577.50 L-108.1 #8 AWG, 5kV Power Cable LF $2.00 2,229 $4,458.00 L-110.2 2-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct bank LF $2.50 -455 ($1,137.50) L-110.3 4-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct bank LF $40.00 45 $1,800.00 Extra Work Quantity Adjustment Items P-209.2 Crushed Aggregate Base Course (12” Depth) CY $54.00 -169 ($9,126) P-403.1 Asphalt Base Course (30% RAP under PCC Pavement ) – Bid Alternate 3 TON $240.58 -277 ($66,640.66) Page 5 of 11 o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 3 · X-105.2 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, Size Unknown o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · X-105.3 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, 24-inch o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · X-105.4 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, 30-inch o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · X-105.5 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, 42-inch o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · X-105.7 Remove Storm Sewer Catch Basin Structure o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · X-105.11 Remove Taxiway Edge Light and Base Can o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 2 · X-105.12 Remove Pavement Markings o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 2 and 3 · P-152.1 Unclassified Excavation, On-Site Disposal o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1, 2, and 3 · P-152.2 Unclassified Excavation, Off-Site Disposal o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 2 and 3 · P-152.3 Subgrade Preparation o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1, 2, and 3 · P-156.3 Installation and Removal of Silt Fence o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · P-156.4 Inlet Sediment Trap-Silt Saver o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1 · P-209.1 Crushed Aggregate Base Course (6” Depth) o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1 and 2 · P-220.1 Recycled Asphalt Millings Base Course (24” Depth) o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1 · P-306.1 Lean Concrete Base Course o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1 and 2 · P-401.1 Asphalt Concrete Surface Course o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1 and 2 · P-501.1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (14") o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1 and 2 · P-501.2 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (15”) o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 3 · P-620.3 Thermoplastic Pavement Markings o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 2 and 3 · P-620.5 Reflective Media o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 2 · D-701.2 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 24-inch, Class III o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · D-701.3 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 30-inch, Class III o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1 · D-701.4 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 36-inch, Class III o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1 · D-701.5 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 42-inch, Class V o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · D-701.6 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 48-inch, Class V o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · D-705.1 6-inch Perforated Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40 o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1, 2, and 3 · D-705.2 6-inch Solid Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40 Page 6 of 11 o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1 · D-705.3 Underdrain Clean-out, Type I o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · D-705.4 Underdrain Clean-out, Type II o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 2 · D-751.2 Catch Basin , Type A o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1 · D-751.3 Catch Basin, Type B o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1 · T-905.1 Topsoiling (Obtain on Site or Removed from Stockpile) o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 2 · L-108.1 #8 AWG, 5 kV Power Cable o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1 · L-110.1 1-way, 2-inch PVC, Direct Bury Type II Electrical Duct Bank o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · L-110.2 2-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid and Bid Alternative 1 and 3 · L-110.3 4-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 3 · L-110.4 6-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · L-110.5 8-way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank o Scattered throughout project in Base Bid · L-115.1 Electrical Pull Box, Aircraft Rated o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1 · L-125.1 L861T MITL, LED, Elevated Taxiway Fixture o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 2 · L-125.6 L-858 (L) Airfield Guidance Sign, 3 Module o Scattered throughout project in Bid Alternative 1 Extra Work/New Bid Item: There are several items that were erroneously not included in the original bid or extra items not included in the original bid that will be necessary to complete the approved project scope. These items include: · P-100.1 Mobilization o Required for installation of new Airfield Guidance Signs o Scattered throughout project · X-105.13 Remove ( E ) Airfield Guidance Sign o Scattered throughout project · L-125.8 L-858 Airfield Guidance Sign, 2 Module on ( E ) Base o Scattered throughout project · L-125.9 Spare Taxiway Electrical o Scattered throughout project · L-125.10 L861T MITL, LED, Elevated Taxiway Fixture, Red Lense o Base Bid, South Edge of Taxilane/Apron Changes to Construction Plans: N/A New Construction Specifications: N/A Revised Construction Specifications Page 7 of 11 Item L-125.8 Installation of Airport Lighting Systems-Spare Electrical Items, Fixtures and Transformers. The line item and definition for spare electrical was added into the L-125 specification. 2. Reason(s) for the change(s) (Continue on reverse if necessary) P-100.1 Mobilization. The addition of a new mobilization line item is due to the work associated with the installation and removal of the three new Airfield Guidance Signs and the taxiway edge light fixtures with red lenses. These three new signs take the place of existing signs that were originally intended to have new guidance sign panels installed and the new taxiway edge light fixtures are being installed at the airports request and for enhanced safety features. P-101.1 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Removal, Full Depth: The reduction of quantity in bid alternatives 1 and 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. The increase of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-101.2 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Removal, Shoulder: The reduction of quantity in bid alternatives 1, 2, and 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-101.3 Cold Milling: The reduction of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-101.4 PCC Pavement Removal, Full Depth: The increase of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. X-105.2 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, Size Unknown: The reduction of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. X-105.3 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, 24-inch: The reduction of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. X-105.4 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, 30-inch: The reduction of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. X-105.5 Remove Storm Sewer Pipe, 42-inch: The increase of quantity in base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original Page 8 of 11 contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. X-105.7 Remove Storm Sewer Catch Basin Structure: The increase of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. X-105.11 Remove Taxiway Edge Light and Base Can: The increase of quantity in bid alternative 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. X-105.12 Remove Pavement Marking: The increase of quantity in bid alternative 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. X-105.13 Remove Airfield Guidance Sign: The addition of this line item and quantity is provided due to the addition of the three new Airfield Guidance Signs which are to be installed on existing PCC sign bases. These three new signs take the place of existing signs that were originally intended to have new guidance sign panels installed. This item is reflected in the X-105 specification. P-152.1 Unclassified Excavation, On-Site Disposal: The increase of quantity in bid alternative 1, 2, and 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-152.2 Unclassified Excavation, Off-Site Disposal: The reduction of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 2 and 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. The increase of quantities of P-152.1 and reduction of P-152.2 is due to the contractor zeroing out the quantities on site. P-152.3 Subgrade Preparation: The reduction of quantity in bid alternative 1,2, and 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-156.3 Installation and Removal of Silt Fence: The increase of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-156.4 Inlet Sediment Trap-Silt Saver: The reduction of quantity in bid alternative 1 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-209.1 Crushed Aggregate Base Course (6” Depth): The increase of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 1 and 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was Page 9 of 11 performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-220.1 Recycled Asphalt Millings Base Course (24” Depth): The increase of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 1is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-306.1 Lean Concrete Base Course: The reduction of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 1 and 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-401.1 Asphalt Concrete Surface Course: The reduction of quantity in bid alternative 1 and 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-501.1 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (14”): The reduction of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 1 and 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-501.2 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (15”): The reduction of quantity in bid alternative 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-620.2 Permanent Pavement Markings: The increase of quantity in bid alternative 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. P-620.3 Thermoplastic Pavement Markings: The reduction of quantity in bid alternative 2 and 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-701.2 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 24-inch, Class III: The reduction of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-701.3 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 30-inch, Class III: The reduction of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-701.4 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 36-inch, Class III: The reduction of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 1 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is Page 10 of 11 in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-701.5 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 42-inch, Class V: The reduction of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-701.6 Concrete Sewer Pipe, 48-inch, Class V: The reduction of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-705.1 6-inch, Perforated Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40: The increase of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 1,2, and 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-705.2 6-inch, Solid Polyethylene Pipe, Schedule 40: The reduction of quantity in bid alternative 1 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-705.3 Underdrain Clean-out Type I: The reduction of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-751.2 Catch Basin, Type A: The reduction of quantity in bid alternative 1 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. D-751.3 Catch Basin, Type B: The reduction of quantity in the base bid and bid alternative 1 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. T-905.1 Topsoiling (Obtain on Site or Removed from Stockpile): The reduction of quantity in bid alternative 2 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. L-108.1 #8 AWG, 5kV Power Cable; L-108.2 Counterpoise Wire w/ Grounding Rods; L-108.3 Temporary # 8 AWG, 5kV Jumper Cable; L-110.1 1-way, 2-inch PVC, Direct Bury Type II Electrical Duct Bank; L-110.2 2- way, 4-inch PVC, Concrete Encased Type I Electrical Duct Bank; L-115.1 Electrical Pull-Box, Aircraft Rated; L-125.1 L861T MITL, LED, Elevated Taxiway Fixture; L-125.3 Base Mounted L-82 HIRL, Elevated Runway Edge Lights; L-125.5 L-858 (L) Airfield guidance Sign, 2 Module; L-125.6 L-858 (L) Airfield guidance Sign, 3 Module: The reduction of electrical quantities in the base bid and bid alternative 1, 2, and 3 is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because the work was not performed and is in the original Page 11 of 11 contracted quantity, the cost for the work must be removed from the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. The increase of quantity in the base bid is a result of the as performed quantities per the scope of work in those areas. Because additional work was performed and is in the original contracted quantity, the cost for the work must added to the project. The quantity of the item did not change substantially to justify renegotiation of the original unit price. L-125.8 L-858 (L) Airfield Guidance Sign, 2 Module on ( E ) Base: The addition of this line item and quantity is due to the three new Airfield Guidance Signs being installed on existing PCC bases. These three new signs take the place of existing signs that were originally intended to have new guidance sign panels installed. This item is reflected in the L-125 specification L-125.9 Spare Taxiway Electrical: The addition of this line item and quantity is provided so that the contractor knows to provide a total of specified spare airfield electrical items so that if needed, the airport has items on-hand to make repairs themselves. This item is reflected in the L-125 specification L-125.10 L861T MITL, LED, Elevated Taxiway Fixture, Red Lense: The addition of this line item and quantity is due to the airport requesting the contractor to install new taxiway fixtures with red lenses on the south end of the taxilane/apron for safety purposes. This item is reflected in the L-125 specification Revised Construction Specifications Item X-105 Site Demolition-Remove Airfield Guidance Sign. The contractor shall remove and dispose the existing airfield guidance sign leaving the existing PCC sign base in place. Item L-125 Installation of Airport Lighting Systems-L-858 (L) Airfield Guidance Sign, 2 Module on ( E ) Base. The contractor shall install a new 2 Module airfield guidance sign on the existing PCC sign base. Item L-125 Installation of Airport Lighting Systems-Spare Taxiway Electrical. The contractor shall leave a specified amount of spare airfield electrical items to the airport at the conclusion of construction. This will allow the airport to make repairs to any airfield electrical items with the spare items left by the contractor. The quantity shall be 10% of all airfield fixtures. Item L-125 Installation of Airport Lighting Systems-L-861T MITL, LED, Elevated Taxiway Fixture, Red Lense. The contractor shall install new taxiway edge light fixtures with red lenses at the location denoted on plans or by the engineer. Attachments: · Item X-105 Site Demolition · Item L-125 Installation of Airport Lighting Systems Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM McCarthy Change Order #2 Department:Augusta Regional Airport Presenter:Herbert Judon Caption:Motion to approve the McCarthy Change Order #2. Background: The original scope of work provides for the reconstruction and extension of Taxiway A at the Augusta Regional Airport, which was performed by McCarthy Improvement Company for a contracted amount of $16,772,436.70. This change order modifies the original construction scope due to modifications to the following: 1. Quantity Adjustments: · Asphaltic Concrete Pavement Removal · Cold Milling · PCC Pavement Removal · Removal of Storm Sewer Pipes · Removal of Storm Sewer Catch Basin · Removal of Taxiway Edge Light and Base Can · Removal of Airfield Guidance Sign · Excavation and subgrade preparation Analysis:During the project, several items included in the original bid needed adjusting in order to cover the true quantities shown on the construction plans to complete the approved project scope to the quality and standards that enhances safety on the airfield. This change order reduces the construction contract by $681,652.95 and results in a final contract amount of $16,440,424.75. These changes have been reviewed and approved by the FAA. No additional funding is required for this change order. Financial Impact:Reduction in Airport Cost of $681,652.95. Close-out Alternatives:To Deny Recommendation:Airport Commission approved Change Order #2 McCarthy on November 01, 2018 and is requesting approval by County Commission. Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: NO COST- Reduction for Airport REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Public Service Committee Meeting Commission Chamber - Llll3l20l8 ATTENDAI\ICE: Present: Hons. Guilfoyle, chairman; Fennoy, vice chairman; Davis and M. Williams, members. Absent: Hon. Hardie Davis, Jr., Mayor. PTIBLIC SERVICES 1. New Location: A. N. 18-39: A request by Synethia Morrall for an on premise Item consumption Liquor, Beer & Wine License to be used in connection with Action: Oasis Premier Nightclub located at 1511 North Leg Rd. There will be Dance. Approved District 5. Super District 9. Motions Motion Motion Textrype Motion to . aDDrove.APProve rurotionpasses 4-0. Motions Motion Motion Textrype Motion to ^ aDDrove.APProve vtotion passes 4_0. Made By Made By Commissioner Marion Williams Seconded By Seconded By Commissioner Mary Davis Commissioner Commissione Marion williams Mary Duri, " Passes Motion Result Motion Result 2. New Ownership: A.N. 18-40: A request by Ayaz Ali Vansi for a retail ltem package Beer & Wine License to be used in connection with Custer and Action: Moreland, Inc. located at 1503 Gordon Hwy. District 2. Super District 9. Approved Passes 3. Motion to approve the minutes of the Public Services Committee held on Item October 30,2018. Action: Approved Motions Motion --^.:^-'Tt^--1 f,/r-r-n ^ Motion- - ---- Motion Text Made By Seconded Byrype vvvvusvs DJ Result Motion to Approve ffi|ffiasses ;,"#Htli,t}, $"ffTjJi,"* passes 4_0. 4. Discuss the city's schedule regarding the upkeep/maintenance/cleaning and Item the grass cutting at the city's cemeteries. (Requested by Commissioner Action:Marion Williams) nescheduled Motions Motion Motion Text Made Seconded Motion r YPe By By Result It was the consensus of the committee that this item be referred back to the next committee meeting with Mr. Parker in conjunction with Warden Joseph to bring back a Passes recommendation for a comprehensive maintenance plan for all the cemeteries. www.augustaga.gov Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Minutes Department: Presenter: Caption:Motion to approve the minutes of the Public Services Committee held on November 13, 2018. Background: Analysis: Financial Impact: Alternatives: Recommendation: Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: CONTRACT FOR GROUNDS AND LANDSCAPING MAINTENANCE AT THE AUGUSTA REGIONAL AIRPORT BETWEEN AUGUSTA GEORGIA AND BRIARWOOD GROUP DBA PIEDMONT LANDSCAPING MANAGEMENT 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 2 of 55 SECTION 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS………….. ................................................ 1 1.1 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................. 1 1.2 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES .......................................................................... 3 1.3 CHANGES ....................................................................................................................... 4 1.4 TERM ............................................................................................................................... 4 1.5 CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE ............................................................................. 5 1.6 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR .............................................. 5 1.7 TERMINATION .............................................................................................................. 6 1.8 FORCE MAJEURE ......................................................................................................... 7 1.9 AIRPORT SECURITY REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 8 1.10 COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES ........................................................................................ 9 1.11 RECORDS AND AUDIT ................................................................................................ 9 1.12 CONTINGENT FEES .................................................................................................... 10 1.13 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES ........................................................................................... 10 1.14 NON-APPROPRIATIONS ............................................................................................ 10 1.15 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES .............................................................. 10 1.16 ASSIGNMENT .............................................................................................................. 11 1.17 NOTICES ....................................................................................................................... 12 1.18 WAIVER ........................................................................................................................ 13 1.19 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS ...................... 13 1.20 INSURANCE ................................................................................................................. 13 1.21 PATENT INDEMNITY ................................................................................................. 17 1.22 INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS ........................................................ 17 1.23 PERMITS ....................................................................................................................... 17 1.24 WORK PERMITS REQUIRED .................................................................................... 17 1.25 NON-DISCRIMINATION............................................................................................. 18 1.26 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. ...................................................................................... 18 SECTION 2 CONTRACTOR’S SERVICES ........................................................ 19 2.1 PERFORMANCE WORK STATEMENT .................................................................... 19 2.2 SCOPE OF SERVICES ................................................................................................. 19 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 3 of 55 SECTION 3 ............................................................. AIRPORT’S ADMINISTRATOR DUTIES 20 SECTION 4 CONTRACTOR’S EMPLOYEES ..................................................... 20 SECTION 5 COMPENSATION ............................................................................. 21 SECTION 6 NON-PERFORMANCE 212 SECTION 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS .................................................. 22 7.1 ENTIRE AGREEMENT ................................................................................................ 22 7.2 GOVERNING LAW ...................................................................................................... 22 7.3 LEGAL CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................... 23 7.4 PRIOR CONTRACTS SUPERSEDED ......................................................................... 23 7.5 COUNTERPARTS ........................................................................................................ 23 7.6 FURTHER ACTS .......................................................................................................... 23 7.7 INSPECTION................................................................................................................. 23 7.8 AMENDMENTS ............................................................................................................ 23 7.9 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OR DELAY OF PERFORMANCE OF CONTRACT ............................................................................................................................. 24 7.10 USE OF AUGUSTA, GEORGIA LANDFILL ............................................................. 24 EXHIBITS Exhibit A Scope of Work Exhibit B Required submittals Exhibit C Insurance Exhibit D Bid Sheet 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 1 of 55 THIS CONTRACT made and entered into to be effective this 1st day of January 1, 2019 by and between, AUGUSTA GEORGIA, (City) a political subdivision of the State of Georgia, acting through the AUGUSTA AVIATION COMMISSION, whose address is 1501 Aviation Way, Augusta Regional Airport at Bush Field, Augusta, Georgia 30906-9600, hereinafter called “Airport”, and Piedmont Landscape Management, a Georgia Limited Liability Company, whose address is 1048 Franke Industrial Drive, Augusta, GA 30909, hereinafter called “Contractor”. WITNESSETH: WHEREAS, the City is the owner and operator of a full service commercial airport known as the Augusta Regional Airport; WHEREAS, the City has solicited a bid for Contract Grounds and Landscaping Maintenance for the Airport; WHEREAS, the Contractor submitted a bid for said services; and WHEREAS, the City, on behalf of the Airport, accepted the Contractor’s Bid for said services; NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants, promises, and agreements herein contained, the City, and the Contractor hereby agree as follows: All Contractor Services shall be in accordance with the scope of services and all provisions provided herein. SECTION 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1.1 DEFINITIONS The following terms have the following meanings whenever used in the Contract Documents (defined below), or in related documents, the terms or pronouns used in place of them shall be defined as follows: 1.1.1 Administrator. The Airport’s representative assigned to administer this Contract and is responsible for the performance of this Contract on behalf of Airport. 1.1.2 Airport. Augusta Regional Airport. 1.1.3 Airport Executive Director. The person tasked with the day-to-day operations 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 2 of 55 of the Airport. 1.1.4 Aviation Commission. The Augusta Regional Airport Aviation Commission tasked with the overall administration of the Airport. 1.1.5 Augusta, Georgia or City. Augusta, Georgia Commission. 1.1.6 Change Order. A written order initiated by the Administrator or Airport Executive Director directing the Contractor to perform changes, additions, or deletions in the scope of work. 1.1.7 Contract. The written agreement between Augusta Richmond County and the Contractor for the performance of the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.1.8 Contract Documents. The Contract, General Conditions; Exhibits, Contractor’s Bid, together with all addenda, supplemental change orders, required exhibits, submittals and schedules. 1.1.9 Contractor. The individual, partnership, or corporation entering into this Contract with the City for the services as described herein. 1.1.10 Contractor’s Representative. Contractor’s representative in all dealings with Airport. 1.1.11 General Conditions. The general term comprising all the directions, provisions, and requirements contained herein, entitled “General Conditions” and any Addenda, which may be issued for the Contract. 1.1.12 Hazardous Material. Hazardous material(s) means any hazardous or toxic substance, material, or waste, which is or becomes regulated by any local governmental authority or the United States Government. Hazardous Material(s) include, without limitation, any material or substance which is (i) defined as a “hazardous waste”, “extremely hazardous waste”, or “restricted hazardous waste” or similar term under any laws now or hereafter enacted by the United States or the State of Georgia or any political subdivision thereof, or (ii) designated a “hazardous substance” pursuant to the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, 33 U.S.C. § 1317, or (iii) defined as a “hazardous waste” pursuant 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 3 of 55 to the Federal Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C.§ 6901 et seq., or (iv) defined as a “hazardous substance” pursuant to the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. § 9601 et seq. 1.1.13 Non-Performance and/or Unacceptable Work. When the Administrator determines that the Contractor has not perform routine work as described in the Performance Work Statement and/or Scope of Services in any service area, and/or that work has not been performed in accordance with Service Performance Standards and/or Service Performance Methods then appropriate penalties may be applied. 1.1.14 Routine Work/Service. That work/service the Contractor normally performs as defined in the Scope of Services and performed in accordance with Service Performance Standards. To be acceptable, routine work must be completed in a manner that is approved by the Airport’s Administrator. 1.1.16 Scope of Services. Defines the routine work/services the Contractor shall perform under terms of contract. Contractor shall provide all necessary management, supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials, vehicles, plants, mulch, and any other such items required to complete any or all of the following services identified herein at any and/or all of the designated Airport service areas. 1.1.17 Airport’s Secured Area. Those Airport areas, which require badged personnel or badged Contractor personnel to escort unbadged Contractor personnel at all times while in secure area. See paragraph 1.9, Airport Security Requirements. 1.1.18 Subcontractor. Any individual, partnership, or corporation who is contractually bound to the Contractor to perform a specific portion of the total work package under this Contract which is limited to special projects approved by the Administrator. 1.2 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES 1.2.1 Augusta, Georgia Airport’s Administrator. Airport’s Representative shall be 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 4 of 55 the Airport’s Executive Director or his designee. 1.2.2 Contractor’s Representative(s). The Contractor’s representative (“Contractor’s Representative”) for all dealings with Airport shall be the Airport Director of Facilities Maintenance. Contractor’s Representative may be changed upon prior written notice delivered to Airport’s Administrator. 1.3 CHANGES 1.3.1 The City may, during the Contract period, make changes to the Scope of Work, which may result in changes to the general scope of the Contract and its provisions. 1.3.2 The Parties acknowledge that there may be additional need to perform additional grounds work in preparation for the special events, such as the Masters® Golf Tournament, and other special circumstances. 1.3.3 Written/verbal agreements, changes, or amendments to this Contract shall not be binding upon the City or the Airport unless approved and signed by the Aviation Commission in advance of performing work. 1.4 TERM 1.4.1 The term of this Contract shall commence as first written above and shall continue for a period of one (1) year from that date, unless terminated earlier by Airport as provided in this paragraph. 1.4.2 The Contract may be renewed for two (2) additional one year terms at the sole option of the City and Augusta Aviation Commission . 1.4.3 The effective date of this Contract as set forth above, shall continue through to the day prior to the commencement of the contract the following year. This Contract shall: (i) terminate absolutely and without further obligation on the part of Augusta each and every December 31st, as required by O.C.G.A. § 36-60-13, as amended, unless terminated earlier in accordance with the termination provisions in Section 1.7 of this Contract: (ii) automatically renew on each January 1st, unless terminated in accordance with the termination provisions of this Agreement; and (iii) terminate absolutely, with no further renewals, on 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 5 of 55 December 31, 2022, unless extended by written amendment. The Contract Time may be extended only by written renewal approved by the Aviation Commission, the Augusta, Georgia Board of Commissioners and executed by the Augusta, Georgia Mayor and the Contractor in accordance with the terms of this Contract. 1.4.4 The City shall notify the Contractor at least ninety-(90) days prior to the expiration date of its intent to renew this Contract. 1.5 CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE 1.5.1 Contractor shall, at its own expense, furnish all necessary management, supervision, labor, technical support and other accessories and services for maintenance, and the performance of other services as described in these Contract Documents. Such services shall be performed in strict accordance with the General Conditions and Scope of Services. 1.5.2 Contractor’s performance, as provided in said General Condition and Scope of Services, shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Airport Executive Director or his designee. If the Contractor’s performance is, or becomes unsatisfactory, as determined by the Airport Executive Director, an appropriate reduction in payment due will be made from Contractor’s invoice and Contractor will be directed to correct the unsatisfactory performance. The correction of unsatisfactory work shall be at no additional cost to Airport. 1.6 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR 1.6.1 Contractor is acting, in performance of this Contract, as an Independent Contractor. Personnel supplied by the Contractor or its agents or subcontractors hereunder are not the City’s or the Airport’s employees, or agents and Contractor assumes full responsibility for their acts. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment of compensation to Contractor’s employees. The City shall not be responsible for payment of Worker’s Compensation, disability benefits, and unemployment insurance or for withholding and paying employment taxes for any Contractor employee, or Contractor’s subcontractors or agent’s employees, but such responsibility shall be solely that of Contractor. This clause of the Contract does not prevent the 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 6 of 55 Airport from requiring Contractor to have its employees follow normal rules and guidelines for work performance, redirecting the efforts of the employees to meet the needs of the facilities, performing safety or from requiring Contractor to perform the requirements of this Contract satisfactorily, according to the General Conditions and Scope of Services described herein. 1.6.2 No Partnership or Joint Venture. Nothing contained in this Contract will be deemed to create a partnership or joint venture between the City and Contractor or cause the City to be responsible for the debts or obligations of Contractor or any other party. Contractor must not represent to anyone that its relationship to the City is other than as the City’s Contractor. 1.7 TERMINATION 1.7.1 The City may, at its sole option, terminate the Contract with or without cause at any time upon thirty-(30) day’s written notice by certified mail to the Contractor without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have. 1.7.2 This Contract shall terminate immediately upon written notice by the City upon the occurrence of any of the following circumstances: 1.7.2.1 If, with or without the Contractor’s consent, a receiver, liquidator, trustee or similar administrator is appointed to take charge of all, or substantially all, of its assets; 1.7.2.2 If either the Contractor is adjudged, or becomes bankrupt or insolvent, is unable to pay its debts as they become due, or makes an assignment for the benefit of its creditors; 1.7.2.3 Of any judicial proceedings are commenced by or on behalf of the Contractor pursuant to any bankruptcy, insolvency or debtor relief law; or 1.7.2.4 If the Contractor voluntarily or involuntarily undertakes to dissolve or wind-up its affairs. 1.7.3 The Airport shall be the sole judge of non-performance, which shall include any 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 7 of 55 failure on the part of Contractor to accept the award, to furnish required documents, and/or to fulfill any portion of this Contract within the time stipulated or within thirty (30) days, whichever is earlier. 1.7.4 Upon failure of Contractor to perform any of its obligations hereunder and its failure to cure the default within ten-(10) days after notice thereof, the City may, at its option, terminate this Contract and or pursue any other remedy at law or in equity. All such remedies are cumulative and may be exercised concurrently or separately. Contractor shall pay the City’s costs and expenses, including attorney’s fees, incurred by the City in exercising any of its rights or remedies hereunder or enforcing any of the terms, conditions, or provisions hereof. 1.7.5 Notice of elective termination pursuant to this Section shall be deemed effective on the third business day after the postmark date of the certified mail notice. 1.7.6 This Contract shall terminate automatically and immediately upon the closing of the Airport facilities by the City, or if the Airport loses the funding necessary to maintain the Contract. Cancellation will be at no cost to the City, except for services already provided. 1.8 FORCE MAJEURE 1.8.1 Neither party hereto shall be considered in default in the performance of its obligations hereunder to the extent that the performance of any such obligation, except the payment of money, is prevented or delayed by any cause, existing or future, which is beyond the reasonable control of the affected party, or by a strike, lockout or other labor difficulty, the settlement of which shall be within the sole discretion of the party involved. 1.8.2 Each party hereto shall give notice promptly to the other of the nature and extent of any Force Majeure claimed to delay, hinder or prevent performance of the services under this Contract. In the event either party is prevented or delayed in the performance of this obligation because of such Force Majeure, there shall be an equitable adjustment of the schedule. 1.8.3 Contractor will not be liable for failure to perform or for delay in performance 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 8 of 55 because of Force Majeure, including the following: 1.8.3.1 any cause beyond its reasonable control; 1.8.3.2 any act of God; 1.8.3.3 inclement weather; 1.8.3.4 earthquake; 1.8.3.5 fire; 1.8.3.6 explosion; 1.8.3.7 flood; 1.8.3.8 strike or other labor dispute; 1.8.3.9 any shortage or disruption of or inability to obtain labor, material, manufacturing facilities, power, fuel or transportation from unusual sources, or any other transportation facility; 1.8.3.10 delay or failure to act of any governmental or military authority; 1.8.3.11 any war, hostility or invasion; 1.8.3.12 any embargo, sabotage, civil disturbance, riot or insurrection; 1.8.3.13 any legal proceedings; or 1.8.3.14 failure to act by Contractor’s suppliers due to any cause which Contractor is not responsible, in whole or in part. 1.9 AIRPORT SECURITY REQUIREMENTS Contractor’s employees may be required to operate in Airport’s secure areas. Contractor shall be required to obtain the Airport’s Security Identification Display Area (SIDA) badges for any employee working in the secured area. Contractor shall comply, at its own expense, with the Transportation Security Administration (TSA) and the Airport’s security requirements for the Airport including, but not limited to employee training and badges. Contractor shall cooperate with the TSA and the Airport on all security matters and shall promptly comply with any project security arrangements established by the Airport. Compliance with such security requirements shall not relieve Contractor of its 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 9 of 55 responsibility for maintaining proper security for the above-noted items, nor shall it be construed as limiting in any manner Contractor’s obligation with respect to all applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations and its duty to undertake reasonable action to establish and maintain secure conditions at and around the Premises and throughout the Airport. All employees shall be properly badged and comply with all Airport safety and security rules. 1.9.1 The required grounds/landscaping work is described, by area. Any Contractor employees assigned to work in a secured area are required to be “badged” or a “badged” Contractor employee must escort them the entire time they are in these secured areas. 1.9.2 To qualify for the badge, individual must be fingerprinted and have a background investigation completed. In addition, the Airport will conduct a background inquiry and require finger printing of all individuals who will be working on the secured side of the Airport screening point. This may also include collection of appropriate criminal history information, contractual and business associations and practices, employment histories, reputation in the business community and credit reports for the Contractor, as well as, its employees. 1.9.3 Contractor consents to such an inquiry and agrees to make available to the Airport such books and records the Airport deems necessary to conduct the review. 1.9.4 Contractor shall pay all costs associated with providing SIDA badges. 1.9.5 Contractor shall be responsible for any fines assessed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) or TSA as a result of the actions of its employees or subcontractors. 1.10 COMMERCIAL ACTIVITIES Neither Contractor nor its employees may establish any commercial activity or issue concessions or permits of any kind to third parties for establishing activities at the Airport. 1.11 RECORDS AND AUDIT Contractor and its subcontractors shall maintain records and accounts in connection with 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 10 of 55 all aspects in the performance of this Contract, including those, which will accurately document incurred costs, both direct and indirect, of whatever nature, during and for a period of three (3) years from the expiration or other termination of this Contract, unless otherwise specified by applicable law. The City may examine and copy, at all reasonable times, with advance notification, those records and accounts. Contractor shall maintain all records in a central location in Augusta, Georgia. 1.12 CONTINGENT FEES Contractor warrants that it has not employed or retained any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working for Contractor, to solicit or secure this Contract; and that Contractor has not paid or agreed to pay any company, association, corporation, firm or person, other than a bona fide employee working for Contractor, any fee, commission, percentage, gift or any other consideration contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this Contract. For the breach or violation of this warranty and upon a finding after notice and hearing, The City may terminate the Contract and, at its discretion, may deduct from the Contract sum, or otherwise recover the full amount of any such fee, commission, percentage, gift or consideration. 1.13 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES The rights and remedies of the City provided in this paragraph are not exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract. 1.14 NON-APPROPRIATIONS Notwithstanding anything contained in this Contract, if sufficient funds have not been appropriated to support continuation of this Contract for an additional calendar year or an additional term of the Contract, this Contract shall terminate absolutely and without further obligation on the part of the City at the close of the calendar year of its execution or if the City suspends performance pending the appropriation of funds. 1.15 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES In order to induce the City to enter into this Contract, Contractor hereby represents and warrants that as of the date above written that: 1.15.1 Contractor is duly organized and validly existing in good standing under the laws 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 11 of 55 of the state of Georgia, in which it is organized, is qualified to do business in all jurisdictions in which it is operating, and has the power and authority to execute and deliver and to perform its obligations under this Contract and the documents to which it is signatory; and 1.15.2 The execution, delivery and performance by Contractor and its undersigned representative(s) of this Contract and other documents to which Contractor is a signatory do not require the approval or consent of any other person, entity or government agency and do not result in any breach of any agreement to which Contractor is a party or by which it is bound; and 1.15.3 The execution, delivery and performance by Contractor of this Contract and other documents to which it is a signatory have been duly authorized by all necessary action, and constitute legal, valid and binding obligations of Contractor, enforceable against Contractor in accordance with its terms; and 1.15.4 No action, suit or proceeding to which Contractor is a party is pending or threatened that may restrain or question this Contract, or any other document to which it is a signatory, or the enjoyment of rights or benefits contemplated herein; and 1.15.5 Contractor has all State of Georgia Licenses and permits required for the performance of Landscaping and Grounds Maintenance services and shall only use properly licensed and trained persons to perform such services. 1.16 ASSIGNMENT Without the prior written consent of the City, Contractor may not assign, transfer or convey any of its interests under this Contract, nor delegate any of its obligations or duties under this Contract except as provided herein. 1.16.1 Consent of the City Required. Any assignment of this Contract or rights under this Contract, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of the City will be void, except that, upon ten (10) calendar days prior written notice to the City, Contractor may assign monies due or to become due under this Contract. Any assignment of monies will be subject to proper setoffs in favor of the City and to 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 12 of 55 any deductions provided for in this Contract. 1.16.2 No Relief of Responsibilities. No assignment will be approved which would relieve Contractor of its responsibilities under this Contract. 1.16.3 Parties Bound. This Contract will be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the City and Contractor and their respective successors and assigns. 1.17 NOTICES 1.17.1 Delivery. All notices given by either party to the other under this Contract must be in writing and delivered by: (i) regular mail, postage prepaid; (ii) certified or registered mail; (iii) facsimile; or (iv) hand - delivery, to the parties at the addresses and facsimile numbers set forth in the Clause titled “Addresses”. 1.17.2 Receipt. Notices sent by mail will be deemed to be received upon deposit in the mail, properly addressed. Notices sent by certified or registered mail will be deemed to be received upon the date of the acknowledgment. Notices sent by facsimile will be deemed to be received upon successful transmission to the proper facsimile number. Notices delivered by hand- delivery will be deemed to be received upon acceptance by the respective party or its agent. 1.17.3 Change of Address or Facsimile Number. Either party may, at any time, change its respective address or facsimile number by sending written notice to the other party of the change. 1.17.4 Addresses. To AUGUSTA, GEORGIA: To CONTRACTOR: Augusta Regional Airport Piedmont Landscape Management Attn: Executive Director Attn: Patrick Wells 1501 Aviation Way 1048 Franke Industrial Drive Augusta, Georgia 30906 Augusta, Georgia 30909 Telephone: (706) 7898-3236 Telephone: (706) 631-1683 Fax: (706) 798-1551 Fax: (706) 860-8260 With a copy to: Augusta General Counsel Augusta Richmond County Department of Law 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 13 of 55 535 Telfair St. Building 3000 Augusta, GA 30901 Fax: (706) 842-5556 1.18 WAIVER The failure of the City to seek redress for any violation of or to insist upon the strict performance of, any term of this Contract will not prevent a subsequent violation of this Contract from being actionable by the City. The provision in this Contract of any particular remedy will not preclude the City from any other remedy. 1.19 COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor covenants and agrees that it, its agents and employees shall comply with all Georgia, county, state, and federal laws, Airport Rules and Regulations, and City ordinances applicable to the work to be performed under this Contract, and that it shall obtain all necessary permits, pay all license fees and taxes to comply therewith. Further, Contractor agrees that it, its agents, and employees will abide by all rules, regulations, and policies of Airport during the term of this Contract, including any renewal periods. 1.20 INSURANCE 1.20.1 During the term of this Contract, Contractor shall provide, pay for, and maintain with companies reasonably satisfactory to the City and the Aviation Commission, the types of insurance as set forth in the City Code, and Georgia law as the same may be amended from time to time, and as described herein. All insurance shall be issued by insurance companies eligible to do business in the State of Georgia and Best Rated A- or equivalent. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of the City Code and this Contract, the more stringent requirement shall govern. In no event shall Contractor maintain any insurance less than the requirements set forth in the City Code, as amended. 1.20.2 All liability policies of Contractor and its subcontractors shall provide coverage that includes, or has the same substantive effect as the following: 1.20.2.1 The City, the Aviation Commission, and each of its Commissioners, officers, agents, elected representatives, volunteers, and employees, 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 14 of 55 in their respective capacities as such, shall be additional insured hereunder with respect to the products, premises, and operations of the named insured. 1.20.2.2 This insurance policy shall apply as primary, and any insurance and/or self-insurance as may be maintained by the City, the Aviation Commission, or its Commissioners, officers, agents, elected representatives, volunteers, and employees shall apply in excess of, and shall not contribute with insurance provided by this policy.” 1.20.2.3 This insurance shall not be materially changed, altered, canceled, or non-renewed until after thirty-(30) days advanced written notice has been given to Augusta, Georgia except that only ten-(10) days notice shall be required in the event of cancellation due to non- payment of premium.” 1.20.3 All such evidence of insurance shall be in the form of certificates of insurance satisfactory to the City and its Risk Manager, accompanied by a certified true copy of an endorsement to each policy containing the above language. Properly executed certificates of insurance shall evidence the insurance coverage and limits required. The authorized representative of the insurance company shown on the certificate shall sign these certificates. The required policies of insurance shall comply with the laws of the State of Georgia. 1.20.4 If at any time the Executive Director requests a written statement from the insurance company as to any impairment to the aggregate limit, Contractor shall promptly authorize and have delivered such statement to the Aviation Commission. Contractor authorizes the Aviation Commission and/or the City’s Risk Manager to confirm with Contractor’s insurance agents, brokers, and insurance companies all information furnished. 1.20.5 The acceptance of delivery to the City and the Aviation Commission of any certificate of insurance evidencing the insurance coverage and limits required under this Contract does not constitute approval or acceptance by the City or 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 15 of 55 the Aviation Commission that the insurance requirements in this Contract have been met. No operations shall commence at the Airport unless and until the required certificates of insurance are in effect and approved by the City’s Risk Manager. 1.20.6 The Contractor and the City understand, and agree that the minimum limits of the insurance herein required may, from time to time, become inadequate, and Contractor agrees that it will increase such minimum limits upon receipt of written notice defining the basis of the increase. The Contractor shall furnish the City, within sixty-(60) days of the effective date thereof, a certificate of insurance evidencing that such insurance is in force. 1.20.7 Contractor’s insurance companies or its authorized representative shall give the City and the Aviation Commission thirty (30) days prior written notice of any cancellation, intent not to renew, or material reduction in any policy’s coverage, except in the application of the Aggregate Limit Provisions. In the event of a reduction to the Aggregate Limit, it is agreed that immediate steps will be taken to have the prior Aggregate Limit reinstated. 1.20.8 If at any time, the Airport Executive Director requests a written statement from the insurance companies as to any impairment(s) to the Aggregate Limit, prompt authorization and delivery of all requested information will be given to the Aviation Commission. Renewal Certificates of Insurance must be provided to the City and Aviation Commission as soon as practical but in every instance prior to expiration of current coverage. 1.20.9 The amounts and types of insurance shall conform to the following minimum requirements with the use of Insurance Service Office policies, forms, and endorsements or broader, where applicable. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the wording of all policies, forms, and endorsements must be reasonably acceptable to the City and Aviation Commission. 1.20.10 Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance shall be maintained in force by Contractor during the term of this Contract for all employees engaged in the operations under this Contract. The limits of 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 16 of 55 coverage shall not be less than: Workers’ Compensation Georgia Statutory Employer’s Liability $1,000,000 Limit Each Accident 1,000,000, Limit Disease Aggregate $1,000,000, Limit Disease Each Employee 1.20.11 Property Damage. Property damage liability insurance including coverage of motor vehicle, business auto liability insurance, including Hired and Non- Owned Automobile Liability with limits not less than five million dollars ($5,000,000), naming Augusta, Georgia and the Aviation Commission as an additional insured. 1.20.12 Contractor shall maintain in force throughout the term of this Contract, One million dollars ($1,000,000) in Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability insurance. 1.20.13 Automobile Liability Insurance. Covering all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles, used in connection with the work as set forth above. These policies must be endorsed to indicate that any premium, whether deposit or final, will be the sole obligation of the Contractor. 1.20.14 Contractual Liability Insurance. Covering all liability arising out of the terms of the Contract Documents, in amount as indicated above. 1.20.15 The Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage as required in the paragraph above shall include those classifications, as listed in Standard Liability Insurance Manuals, which are applicable to the operations of the Contractor in the performance of this Contract. 1.20.16 Herbicide and pesticide environmental liability coverage with limits no less than five million dollars ($5,000,000). 1.20.17 Within sixty (60) days of the effective date thereof or any subsequent term, Contractor shall provide Airport with certificate(s) of insurance evidencing that such insurance as described herein be in force. Insurance binder letter(s) or a Certificate(s) of Insurance as described above must be sent to the address 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 17 of 55 below with a copy to the City address in paragraph 1.17.4 above: Augusta, Georgia Risk Management 535 Telfair St. Suite 920 Augusta, GA 30901 Ph: (706) 821-2301 Fax: (706) 821-2502 1.21 PATENT INDEMNITY Except as otherwise provided, the Contractor shall indemnify the City and its Board of Commissioners, officers, agents and employees against liability, including costs and expenses for infringement upon any letters or patent of the United States arising out of the performance of this Contract or out of the use or disposal by or for the account of the City of supplies furnished or services performed hereunder. 1.22 INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS Except where, and to the extent caused by the gross negligence of Augusta- Richmond County, the Aviation Commission, their agents, employees, contractors, officers or, Contractor shall protect, defend, reimburse, indemnify, and hold Augusta, Georgia, the Aviation Commission, its members, agents, employees, and elected officers and each of them, free and harmless at all times as set forth in Augusta, Georgia Code, and particularly Article 1, Chapter 3, Division 1, Section 1-3-8.5, Indemnity and Insurance, as the same may be amended from time to time, and described herein. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of Augusta- Richmond County Code and this Contract, the broader requirement shall govern. 1.23 PERMITS Contractor shall obtain and maintain at all times all necessary licenses, permits and certifications to perform the work described in the Contract. Contractor shall furnish copies of all licenses, permits, and certifications to the Administrator. 1.24 WORK PERMITS REQUIRED Contractor agrees and acknowledges that its employees and agent’s employees, as well 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 18 of 55 as any subcontractors or subcontractors’ personnel, working on the Contract must be United States citizens, or must be lawfully admitted for residence and be permitted to work in the United States under the Immigration and Naturalization Act, 8 U.S.C. 1101, et seq. 1.25 NON-DISCRIMINATION The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee, or applicant for employment, because of age, race, creed, religion, color, sex or national origin, marital status, physical handicap or sexual orientation. Further, Contractor agrees, for itself, its personal representatives, successors in interest, and assigns, as a part of the consideration hereof, that (1) no person on the grounds of age, race, color, or national origin shall be excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, or be otherwise subjected to discrimination in the use Airport, (2) in the furnishing of services at Airport, no person on the grounds of race, color, or national origin shall be excluded from participation in, denied the benefits of, or be otherwise subjected to discrimination, and (3) Contractor shall use Airport facilities in compliance with all other requirements imposed by or pursuant to 14 C.F.R Part 152 and Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 and 49 C.F.R, Subtitle A, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally Assisted Programs of the Department of Transportation, and as such Title and Regulations may be amended. 1.26 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Contractor shall not cause or permit any Hazardous Material to be brought, kept or used in or about the Airport by Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors, or invitees. Without limiting the foregoing, if the presence of any Hazardous Material in the Airport caused or permitted by Contractor results in any contamination of the Airport, Contractor shall promptly take all actions at its sole expense as are necessary to return the Airport to the conditions existing prior to the introduction of such Hazardous Material to the Airport; provided that Airport ‘s approval of such actions, and the corrective actions to be used by Contractor in connection therewith, shall first be obtained. 1.26.1 Contractor shall use only pesticides that are in compliance with 7 U.S.C. §136 et seq. The Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (FIFRA) provides for federal regulation of pesticide distribution, sale, and use. All pesticides 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 19 of 55 distributed or sold in the United States must be registered (licensed) by EPA. Before EPA may register a pesticide under FIFRA, the applicant must show, among other things, that using the pesticide according to specifications “will not generally cause unreasonable adverse effects on the environment.’’ FIFRA defines the term ‘‘unreasonable adverse effects on the environment’’ to mean: ‘‘(1) any unreasonable risk to man or the environment, taking into account the economic, social, and environmental costs and benefits of the use of any pesticide, or (2) a human dietary risk from residues that result from a use of a pesticide in or on any food inconsistent with the standard under section 408 of the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act.’’ Contractor shall comply with the Georgia Pesticide and Use Application Act. 1.26.2 All solid waste and yard trimmings shall be disposed of in accordance with Georgia law. SECTION 2 CONTRACTOR’S SERVICES 2.1 PERFORMANCE WORK STATEMENT The Contractor shall provide comprehensive maintenance and upkeep of the grounds and landscaping on the Airport’s service areas as described herein. This shall include, but not be limited to, the operation and maintenance of irrigation systems, fencing, sidewalks, parking lots, driveways, patios, plazas, benches, lawns, ground covers, steps, plantings, beds, shrubs, flowers, trees, signage, preparation for special events, policing, litter removal, emptying and maintenance of exterior trash containers, leaf collection and removal, turf management and related activities. 2.2 SCOPE OF SERVICES The Contractor shall provide all necessary management, supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials, vehicles, plants, mulch and any other such items required to complete any or all of the following service task(s) at any or all of the designated Airport service areas as set forth on Exhibit A, Scope of Work. Frequency of service will not be less than specified herein. 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 20 of 55 SECTION 3 AIRPORT’S ADMINISTRATOR DUTIES 3.1 The Airport Administrator is the person responsible for the performance of this Contract on behalf of the Airport. The Contractor will strictly and promptly follow the Administrator’s instructions in every case. The Administrator shall have free access to the materials and the work at all times for measuring and inspecting the work. The Contractor is to afford the Administrator all necessary facilities and assistance for so doing. 3.2 The Administrator will decide all questions that may arise as to the quality and acceptability of work performed, and as to the manner of performance and rate of progress of the work. The Administrator will decide all questions that may arise as to the interpretation of the Performance Work Statement, and plans relating to the work and to the fulfillment of the Contract on part of the Contractor. The Administrator will determine the amount and quality of the various kinds of work performed and materials furnished which are to be paid for under the Contract. However, such instructions shall not change the status of the Contractor from Independent Contractor to that of an employee or agent of the City. The Administrator or designee’s decisions upon all claims, questions, and disputes will be final and conclusive upon the parties to this Contract. 3.3 The Administrator or his designee may make temporary changes in the routine tasks or task frequencies if such changes do not increase or decrease the Contractor’s costs. Such changes shall not be considered modifications of the Contract and shall not affect the amount or method of payment to the Contractor. 3.4 The Administrator and Contractor’s Representative shall before the start of work, to review tasked the Contractor is to perform. SECTION 4 CONTRACTOR’S EMPLOYEES 4.1 Contractor shall provide trained, qualified personnel to perform the duties required in accordance with the Performance Work Statement. Any Contractor employee assigned to work in the gardens located in Airport’s secure areas shall undergo a background check to receive the clearance necessary for the employee to work in “Secure Areas” without an escort. The Contractor will bear the cost for any background checks. 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 21 of 55 4. 2 Subject to controlling law, the Administrator will refuse to permit the Contractor to use any employee on this job if the Administrator reasonably deems that individual unfit to work at the Airport’s facilities in any respect. 4.3 Contractor shall instruct its employees that no gratuities shall be solicited for any reason whatsoever from occupants or other persons using the Airport facilities or any other person. 4.4 All Contractor employees shall strictly adhere to Airport regulations while on the Airport premises, including but not limited to Augusta, Georgia, County, and TSA and FAA regulations governing access to buildings, personal conduct, and possession of prescribed substances, parking, and traffic. The Airport reserves the right to require the removal of Contractor employees from assignment to its site. SECTION 5 CONTRACTOR’S COMPENSATION 5.1 Contractor’s annual bid amount for completion of the work as defined in the Performance Work Statement and Scope of Services, and performed in accordance with Service Performance Standards and Service Performance Methods is $ 48,969.13. Contractor shall be compensated on a monthly basis for the completion of services performed in each service area. 5.2 Contractor shall submit a monthly invoice to Administrator for service performed under contact. Invoice shall be itemized by service area. 5.3 The Parties acknowledge that there may be additional need to perform additional grounds work in preparation for the special events, such as the Masters® Golf Tournament, and other special circumstances. When approved by the Aviation Commission, Contractor shall submit an invoice itemizing approved work. 5.4 Payment Term. The Airport will make every effort to insure the Contractor’s invoice is paid within thirty (30) working days after receipt of the invoice. 5.5 Contractor shall submit invoices to: Augusta Regional Airport Finance Department 1501 Aviation Way 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 22 of 55 Augusta, Georgia 30906 SECTION 6 NON-PERFORMANCE 6.1 ROUTINE WORK THAT IS NOT PERFORMED AND/OR IS PERFORMED IN AN UNACCEPTABLE MANNER Administrator will designate routine work as non-performance or unacceptable when any one of the following conditions exists: 6.1.1 When the Administrator determines that the Contractor has not performed the work as described in the Performance Work Statement and/or Scope of Services in any service area, and/or that work has not been performed in accordance with Service Performance Standards. 6.1.2 Work was not completed in a manner acceptable to the Administrator. 6.1.3 Work has not been completed in a timely manner. 6.1.4 The appearance of the service area does not meet standards as described in Performance Work Statement and Scope of Services in any service area, and/or that work has not been performed in accordance with Service Performance Standards. SECTION 7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 ENTIRE AGREEMENT This Contract, together with all of the attachments shall constitute the entire agreement between the parties and any prior understanding or representation of any kind preceding the date of this Contract shall not be binding upon either party except to the extent incorporated in this Contract. The Contractor’s bid is incorporated by reference into this Contract as if fully set forth herein. 7.2 GOVERNING LAW This Contract will be construed under Georgia law, including the Georgia Uniform Commercial Code; all remedies available under that code are applicable to this Contract. Contractor and the City fix jurisdiction and venue for any action brought with respect to this Contract in Augusta, Georgia. 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 23 of 55 7.3 LEGAL CONSTRUCTION If any provision contained in this Contract is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that invalidity, illegality or unenforceability will not affect any other provision of this Contract and this Contract will be construed as if the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision had never been contained in this Contract. 7.4 PRIOR CONTRACTS SUPERSEDED This Contract and the attachments constitute the sole and only agreement between Contractor and the City with respect to the subject matter of this Contract and supersede any prior understandings or written or oral contracts respecting the subject matter of this Contract. 7.5 COUNTERPARTS This Contract may be executed concurrently in one or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but all of which will together constitute one Contract. 7.6 FURTHER ACTS City and Contractor each agrees to perform any additional acts and execute and deliver any additional documents as may reasonably be necessary in order to carry out the provisions and affect the intent of this Contract. 7.7 INSPECTION The City may, at reasonable times, inspect the part of the plant, place of business, or work site of a Contractor or subcontractor or subunit thereof which is pertinent to the performance of any contract awarded or to be awarded by Augusta, Georgia. 7.8 AMENDMENTS Contractor acknowledges that this Contract and any changes to it by amendment, modification, change order or other similar document may have required or may require the legislative authorization of the Board of Commissioners and approval of the Mayor and/or Aviation Commission. Under Georgia law, Contractor is deemed to possess knowledge concerning the City’s ability to assume contractual obligations and the consequences of Contractor’s provision of goods or services to the City under an 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 24 of 55 unauthorized contract, amendment, modification, change order or other similar document, including the possibility that the Contractor may be precluded from recovering payment for such unauthorized goods or services. Accordingly, Contractor agrees that if it provides goods or services to the City under a contract that has not received proper legislative authorization or if the Contractor provides goods or services to Augusta, Georgia in excess of the any contractually authorized goods or services, as required by the City’s Charter and Code, the City may withhold payment for any unauthorized goods or services provided by Contractor. Contractor assumes all risk of non-payment for the provision of any unauthorized goods or services to the City, and waives all claims to payment or to other remedies for the provision of any unauthorized goods or services to the City, however characterized, including, without limitation, all remedies at law or equity.” 7.9 TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OR DELAY OF PERFORMANCE OF CONTRACT To the extent that it does not alter the scope of this Contract the City may unilaterally order a temporary stopping of the work, or delaying of the work to be performed by the Contractor under this Contact. 7.10 USE OF AUGUSTA, GEORGIA LANDFILL Contractor shall dispose of all debris, trash, trimmings and limbs from the Airport will be transported to and disposed of at the Augusta, Georgia Solid Waste Landfill in accordance with local and state regulations. The Contractor shall provide evidence of proper disposal through manifests, which shall include the types of material disposed of, the name and location of the disposal facility, date of disposal and all related fees. SIGNATURES ON NEXT PAGE 2018 Airport Landscaping Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Page 25 of 55 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed by their appropriate officials, to be effective January 1, 2019. BRIARWOOD GROUP DBA PIEDMONT LANDSCAPE MANAGEMENT AUGUSTA AVIATION COMMISSION BY: ______________________________ George R. Sasser, Chairman APPROVED AS TO FORM: ___________________________________ County Attorney Hardie Davis, Jr., Mayor Attest: _________________________ Lena Bonner, Clerk Clerk: __________________________ Crystal Johnson EXHIBITS EXHIBIT A SCOPE OF WORK EXHIBIT B REQUIRED SUBMITTALS EXHIBIT C INSURANCE EXHIBIT D BID SHEET Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Piedmont Landscaping Management Department:Augusta Regional Airport Presenter:Herbert Judon Caption:Motion to approve the Contract with Piedmont Landscaping Management. Background:Aviation Commission approved the new annual 2019 grounds bid award and contract which also allows for two additional (1) yr. extensions from Piedmont Landscape Management. Total cost $48,969.18. This is bid #19-206 dated October 24, 2018 for grounds and landscaping services throughout the airport facility. This is to replace the existing contract, which will expire on December 31, 2018 from the previous contractor. This is a reduction from the previously held contract valued at $67,992 saving $19,022.82 annually. Analysis:This grounds contract will provide professional services to selected areas of the main terminal and the FBO. The make-up of the contract provides similar services as in previous years. Financial Impact:$48,969.18 Alternatives:To Deny Recommendation:Aviation Commission approved on November 01, 2018 and is requesting the County Commission approval at this time. Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: 551081113-5212999 REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Facility Comparisons Name Lake Olmstead Stadium White Oak Amphitheatre Evans Towne Center Park Columbia County Amphitheatre Grayson Stadium Fluor Field Spirit Communications Park Address 3 Milledge Road, Augusta, GA 30904 1921 W. Gate City Blvd. Greensboro, North Carolina 27403 7016 Evans Town Center Blvd, Evans, GA 30809 7022 Evans Town Cengter Blvd. Evans, GA 30809 Savannah Greenville, SC 1640 Freed Street, Columbia, SC Acreage 14.4 This is part of the Greensboro Coliseum Complex 3.21 acre lawn and 2,900 sq ft stage within the Lady Antebellum Pavilion 0.44 181 Seats 4805 7,061 15,000 2,300 4000 6700 9000/15000 Parking Approx 900 cars 6,000+ parking areas as part of the Greensboro Coliseum Complex $5 to $20 charge. The park is flanked by various parking areas and flows easily into the Plaza development and government complex to either side, each containing free parking. Located in Memorial Gardens Park, the amphitheater is adjacent to several large government complex parking areas, offering free parking. Parking at Grayson Stadium is free . No. of parking:1000.The adjacent Daffin Park allows people to park their cars there as well. FREE Parking is available at County Square, approximately a 10 minute walk from the stadium. For the convenience of the fans, a complimentary shuttle service runs from County Square to the Field Street Gate. Numerous parking options available. There are more than a dozen different access points to parking lots reachable via seven different streets around the in and around the development. Rental Fee 2500 7500/10000 2500 4000 5000 3000/5000 Alcohol Yes Yes Yes No Operator Augusta, GA City of Greensboro Columbia County Columbia County City of Savannah Greenville Drive, LLC Hardball Capital Owner Augusta, GA City of Greensboro NC Columbia County Columbia County Savannah Banana Craig Brown City of Columbia, Link to location www.augustaga.gov www.greensborocoliseum.com www.evanstownecenterpark.com www.columbiacountyga.gov/Home/C omponents/FacilityDirectory/FacilityDi rectory/28/4828 https://thesavannahba nanas.com/grayson- stadium/ https://www.eventective .com/greenville-sc/fluor- field-at-the-west-end- 614026.html https://www.spiritcomm unicationspark.com/ Alcohol Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Animals Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Bag inspections / Searches Yes No No Yes Yes Signs and Banners Yes No Yes Yes Bikes No No No Box Office Yes Yes Yes Yes Camera Use Yes No No Camping No Yes Yes Cancellation Yes Yes Yes Yes Cell Phone use / Taping No Yes Yes Weapons Yes No No No Concessions Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Drinking Water Yes Yes Yes No No Drop-Offs & Pick-Ups Yes Yes Yes Emergency and Security Services Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Gate Times No Yes Yes Yes ADA Features Yes Yes Yes Allowed Items Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Banned Items Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Lawn Seating Yes Yes Yes No Lawn Chairs Yes No No Lost & Stolen Tickets Yes No No Yes Scalping Tickets No No No Re-Entry No No No Smoking Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Strollers/Umbrellas Yes No No No Yes Food & Beverages Yes Yes No No No No Coolers / Picnic Baskets Yes No No Media Access No No No Refunds Yes Yes Yes Yes Tailgating No No No No Designated Driver No No No Topics covered in the Policies Lake Olmstead Stadium Rental Information Augusta Recreation & Parks Department - 2027 Lumpkin Road - Augusta, GA 30906 Lake Olmstead Stadium - Recommended Rental Fees Stadium Rental $2,500.00 Includes field, seating area and parking lot. Additional charges may apply (i.e. trade shows, company picnics, concerts, large events) Seating Bowl and Concourse Rental Only $2,000.00 No field access, does not include Deck Deck Rental $1,000.00 No field access, does not include Seating Bowl Field Rental $2,000.00 Does not include Seating Bowl or Deck The fee for each additional day is $1,500.00. Parking Lot Rental No stadium access First Day $1,500.00 Additional Day (each) $1,000.00 Local Non-Profit Rate (per day) $1,000.00 Additional fees and charges Deposit $500.00 A $500.00 non-refundable deposit must accompany a signed contract to confirm the reservation date. Stadium Cleaning Fee Attendance Fee 0-199 No charge if event does not include concessions 0-199 $500.00 if event includes any concessions / catering 200+ $1,000.00 Additional Services Field lights $300.00 / hour Box Office $100.00 / day Security* $22.00 / hour Staff* $20.00 / hour *Staff and Security are required as defined in the ARPD rental guidelines. Unless noted otherwise, all fees are per day of the rental. Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Rental Fee Recommendation for Lake Olmstead Stadium Department:Recreation and Parks Department Presenter:H. Glenn Parker Caption:A motion to approve the Lake Olmstead Stadium Fee Recommendation. Background:On September 11, 2018, Augusta has assumed full responsibility for stadium operations. In order to promote rental opportunities at Lake Olmstead Stadium, the Recreation and Parks Department has developed a fee recommendation for the Stadium. Analysis:With Augusta moving towards usage of the Lake Olmstead Stadium as an amphitheater and concert venue, Recreation and Parks has begun soliciting potential renters / event organizations. The recommended fees are based on several factors, such as • the existing fees for the Jessye Norman Amphitheater, the Augusta Common and other city-operated rental facilities, • market research and facility comparisons of event venues of similar size in Georgia, North Carolina and South Carolina, • and peer reviews by potential renters. In addition, the goal is to plan on the safe side, as the operational expenses, costs for utilities and maintenance, are not determined yet. The Recreation and Parks Department believes that the recommended rental fees are competitive, flexible and appropriate. Financial Impact:This would be an additional revenue stream for Lake Olmstead Stadium. Alternatives:1. To approve the Lake Olmstead Stadium Fee Recommendation 2. To amend the Lake Olmstead Stadium Fee Recommendation 3. To deny the Lake Olmstead Stadium Fee Recommendation Recommendation:1. To approve the Lake Olmstead Stadium Fee Recommendation Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: No funds are needed as this would be an additional revenue source. REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission CONTRACT FOR NEW ELECTRICAL BUILDING AIP NO. 3-13-0011-041-2017 AUGUSTA AVIATION COMMISSION AUGUSTA REGIONAL AIRPORT AUGUSTA, GA New Electrical Building Page 2 of 497 THIS CONTRACT made and entered into to be effective _____________________________, 2018 by and between, AUGUSTA GEORGIA, (the City) a political subdivision of the State of Georgia, acting through the AUGUSTA AVIATION COMMISSION, whose address is 1501 Aviation Way, Augusta Regional Airport at Bush Field, Augusta, Georgia 30906-9600, hereinafter called “Airport”, and Southeast Site Services, LLC, hereinafter called “Contractor”, a Georgia limited liability company, whose address is 117 Industrial Blvd., Suite G, Gray, GA 31032. WITNESSETH: WHEREAS, the City is the owner and operator of a full-service commercial airport known as the Augusta Regional Airport; WHEREAS, the City has solicited a bid to construct a New Electrical Building for the Airport; WHEREAS, the Contractor submitted a bid for said services; and WHEREAS, the City, on behalf of the Airport, accepted the Contractor’s Bid for said services; NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants, promises, and agreements herein contained, the City and the Contractor hereby agree as follows: The Contractor’s Services shall be in accordance with the scope of services and all provisions provided herein. ARTICLE 1 SCOPE OF THE WORK 1.1 The Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all of the materials and all of the equipment and labor necessary, and to perform all of the work shown on the Plans and described in the specifications for the Project entitled: NEW ELECTRICAL BUILDING AIP No. 3-13-0011-041-2017 and in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the Contract Documents as defined in the Provisions hereto attached which are hereby incorporated and made a part of this Contract. 1.2 Definitions The following terms have the following meanings whenever used in the Contract Documents (defined below), or in related documents, the terms or pronouns used in place of them shall be defined as follows: 1.2.1 Airport Executive Director. The person tasked with the day-to-day operations of the Airport. 1.2.2 Augusta Aviation Commission. The Augusta Regional Airport Aviation Commission tasked with the overall administration of the Airport. 1.2.3 Augusta, Georgia or City. Augusta, Georgia’s Commission. New Electrical Building Page 3 of 497 1.2.4 Engineer. The Work has been designed by Mead & Hunt, Inc., whose corporate headquarters is located at 6501 Watts Road, Madison, WI 53719, who is hereinafter called Engineer and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to Engineer in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2.5 Project. New Electrical Building: Including but not limited to: Construction of a new 800 SF Airfield Electrical Building on 500 CY building pad embankment; Installation of new Airport Electrical Building Equipment; Install 9 new Constant Current Regulators, ALCMS & Standby Engine Generator; Install new Duct Bank, Airfield Electrical Cable, Airfield Fiber Optic Communications cable, and 20 new Electrical Manholes; Construct new Recycled Asphalt Millings access road. 1.2.6 Airport’s Administrator. Airport’s Representative shall be the Airport’s Executive Director or his designee. 1.2.7 Contractor’s Representative(s). The Contractor’s representative (“Contractor’s Representative”) for all dealings with Airport shall be Matt Bragg, Operations Manager. Contractor’s Representative may be changed upon prior written notice delivered to Owner. 1.3 Subject to controlling law, the Owner will refuse to permit the Contractor to use any employee on this job if the Owner reasonably deems that individual unfit to work at the Airport facilities in any respect. 1.4 All Contractor employees shall strictly adhere to Airport regulations while on the Airport premises, including but not limited to Augusta, Georgia, County, and Transportation Security Authority (TSA) and Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations governing access to buildings, personal conduct, and possession of prescribed substances, parking, and traffic. The Owner reserves the right to require the removal of Contractor employees from the Project. 1.5 Design, Standards and Practices. The design, strength, quality of materials and workmanship must conform to the highest standards of construction practices and/or services. ARTICLE 2 TERM 2.1 The Contractor must begin work within ten (10) days of receiving the Notice to Proceed (NTP) from the Owner. The Contractor will mobilize with sufficient forces such that all work is completed within two-hundred (200) calendar days after the issuance of the NTP. Contract time charges will begin as set forth in Section 80 of the General Provisions 2.2 Contractor working times shall be as designated on the Construction Safety & Phasing Plan sheets in the Construction Drawings. At the Owner’s discretion, work times may be further restricted. New Electrical Building Page 4 of 497 2.3 For additional details please review Section 80 of the attached Specifications. 2.4 It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning, rate of progress and the time for completion of the work to be done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this Contract. Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein is a reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and construction conditions prevailing in this locality. 2.5 It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this Contract and the specifications wherein a definite portion and certain length of time is fixed for the performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the Contract an additional time is allowed for the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by extension shall be the essence of the Contract. ARTICLE 3 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3.1 The Contractor acknowledges that time is of the essence with respect to the Work governed by the Contract. The Contractor acknowledges and recognizes that if it fails to achieve Substantial Completion of any portion of the Work within the Contract Time as may be extended in accordance with the terms of this Contract, the Owner will sustain substantial losses as a result of such failure. The Contractor further acknowledges that the Owner will suffer damages that are difficult, if not impossible, to accurately estimate. The Contractor shall be assessed liquidated damages as set forth in Section 80, Execution and Progress, subsection 80-08. ARTICLE 4 PAYMENT 4.1 The Contract Sum The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, and in accordance with the unit bid prices with a Contract price of One Million Six Hundred Forty Thousand Eight Hundred twenty five dollars and zero cents ($1,640,825.00). 4.2 Progress Payments 4.2.1 Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 90 of the General Provisions but in no case shall submit Applications for Payment more than once per month. Application for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided in the General Provisions. New Electrical Building Page 5 of 497 4.2.2 Progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage indicated below, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as Engineer shall determine, or Owner may withhold, in accordance with Section 90 of the General Provisions. 1) 90% of Work completed as determined by Engineer. 2) 90% of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work (but delivered, suitably stored and accompanied by documentation satisfactory to Owner as provided in paragraph 90-07 of the General Provisions. 4.2.3 Within ten (10) days of receiving each Application for Payment, the Engineer shall either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment and present the application to the Owner or return the Application to the Contractor indicating in writing necessary corrections. In the latter case, the Contractor shall make the corrections and resubmit the application. 4.3 Invoices. Contractor shall submit invoices to: Mead & Hunt, Inc. Attn: Chris Birkmeyer 333 Wellness Drive Myrtle Beach, SC 29579 4.4 Retainage and Partial Payments. If payment request is approved by the Owner, the approved payment request shall be submitted to the Owner’s Finance Department for processing on or before the fifth day of the following month, and payment (less retainage) shall be made to the Contractor thirty (30) days after the date the approved payment request is received by the Owner’s finance department. If a payment request is not approved by the Owner, then no payment shall be made to the Contractor until such time as the Owner approves the payment request. The amount of retainage shall be as follows: 4.4.1 Ten percent (10%) of each partial payment shall be withheld as retainage until the value of fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price, including Change Orders and other authorized additions provided in the Contract, is due; 4.4.2 When fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price, as described above, becomes due and the manner of completion of the Work and its progress, quality, schedule are reasonably satisfactory to the Owner, and there are no outstanding claims by the Contractor, Subcontractors or material suppliers, the withholding of retainage shall be discontinued. New Electrical Building Page 6 of 497 4.4.3 If after discontinuing retainage, the Owner determines that the Work is unsatisfactory or has fallen behind schedule, withholding of ten percent (10%) of each request for payment may be resumed. When the Work has reached Substantial Completion and the Owner determines the Work to be reasonably acceptable, the Contractor shall submit an invoice or other documents as may be required and receive payment thereof within thirty (30) days. If there are any remaining incomplete minor items, an amount equal to two hundred percent (200%) of the value of each item, as determined by the Owner, shall be withheld until such items are completed; 4.4.4 The Contractor shall within ten (10) days from its receipt of retainage from the Owner pass through payments to Subcontractors and shall reduce each Subcontractor’s retainage in the same manner as the Contractor’s retainage is reduced by the Owner. The Subcontractor shall within ten (10) days from the Subcontractor’s receipt of retainage pass through payments to lower tier Subcontractor’s and shall reduce each lower tier Subcontractor’s retainage in the same manner as the Subcontractor’s retainage is reduced. 4.4.5 The Contractor and Owner agree to abide by all applicable provisions of Georgia state law concerning retainage, including but not limited to O.C.G.A. §13-10-80. If the terms of this Contract concerning retainage conflict with state law, state law shall govern. ARTICLE 5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon notice from the Contractor that the Work is completed, the Owner shall make a Contractor during the course of final inspection of the Work and shall notify the Contractor of all instances where the Work fails to comply with the Drawings and Specifications, as well as any defects the Owner may discover. At no cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately make such alterations as are necessary to bring the Work into compliance with the Contract, the Drawings, and Specifications. ARTICLE 6 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT 6.1 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with Section 50 of the General Provisions, Owner shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by Engineer as provided in said paragraph 90-09. 6.2 Before final payment is due the Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Engineer that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been paid, except that in case of disputed indebtedness or liens the Contractor may submit in lieu of evidence of payment a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner guaranteeing payment of all such disputed New Electrical Building Page 7 of 497 amounts when adjudicated in cases where such payment has not already been guaranteed by surety bond. 6.3 The making and acceptance of the final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Owner other than those arising from unsettled liens, from faulty work appearing within 12 months after final payment, from requirements of the specifications, or from manufacturers' guarantees. It shall also constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those previously made and still unsettled. 6.4 If after the Work has been substantially completed, full completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, and the Engineer, so certifies, the Owner shall upon certificate of the Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES 7.1 The Owner may, during the Contract period, make changes to the Scope of Work, which may result in changes to the general scope of the Contract and its provisions. 7.2 Written/verbal agreements, changes, or amendments to this Contract shall not be binding upon the Owner unless approved and signed by the in advance of performing work. 7.3 Contractor acknowledges that this Contract and any changes to it by amendment, modification, change order or other similar document may have required or may require the legislative authorization of the Aviation Commission or Board of Commissioners and approval of the Mayor. Under Georgia law, Contractor is deemed to possess knowledge concerning Augusta, Georgia's ability to assume Contractual obligations and the consequences of Contractor's provision of goods or services to Augusta, Georgia under an unauthorized Contract, amendment, modification, change order or other similar document, including the possibility that the Contractor may be precluded from recovering payment for such unauthorized goods or services. Accordingly, Contractor agrees that if it provides goods or services to Augusta, Georgia under a Contract that has not received proper legislative authorization or if the Contractor provides goods or services to Augusta, Georgia in excess of the any Contractually authorized goods or services, as required by Augusta, Georgia's Charter and Code, Augusta, Georgia may withhold payment for any unauthorized goods or services provided by Contractor. Contractor assumes all risk of non- payment for the provision of any unauthorized goods or services to Augusta, Georgia, and it waives all claims to payment or to other remedies for the provision of any unauthorized goods or services to Augusta, Georgia, however characterized, including, without limitation, all remedies at law or equity. New Electrical Building Page 8 of 497 ARTICLE 8 INSURANCE 8.1 During the term of this Contract, Contractor shall provide, pay for, and maintain with companies reasonably satisfactory to the Owner the types of insurance as set forth in the City Code, and Georgia law as the same may be amended from time to time, and as described herein. All insurance shall be issued by insurance companies eligible to do business in the State of Georgia and Best Rated A- or equivalent. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of the City Code and this Contract, the more stringent requirement shall govern. In no event shall Contractor maintain any insurance less than the requirements set forth in the City Code, as amended. 8.2 All liability policies of Contractor and its Subcontractors shall provide coverage that includes, or has the same substantive effect as the following: 8.2.1 The City, the Aviation Commission, and each of its Commissioners, officers, agents, elected representatives, volunteers, and employees, in their respective capacities as such, shall be additional insured hereunder with respect to the products, premises, and operations of the named insured. 8.2.2 This insurance policy shall apply as primary, and any insurance and/or self-insurance as may be maintained by the City, the Aviation Commission, or its Commissioners, officers, agents, elected representatives, volunteers, and employees shall apply in excess of, and shall not contribute with insurance provided by this policy.” 8.2.3 This insurance shall not be materially changed, altered, canceled, or non-renewed until after thirty-(30) days advanced written notice has been given to Augusta, Georgia except that only ten-(10) days notice shall be required in the event of cancellation due to non-payment of premium.” 8.3 All such evidence of insurance shall be in the form of certificates of insurance satisfactory to the City and its Risk Manager, accompanied by a certified true copy of an endorsement to each policy containing the above language. Properly executed certificates of insurance shall evidence the insurance coverage and limits required. The authorized representative of the insurance company shown on the certificate shall sign these certificates. The required policies of insurance shall comply with the laws of the State of Georgia. 8.4 If at any time the Executive Director requests a written statement from the insurance company as to any impairment to the aggregate limit, Contractor shall promptly authorize and have delivered such statement to the Aviation Commission. Contractor authorizes the Aviation Commission and/or the City’s Risk Manager to confirm with Contractor’s insurance agents, brokers, and insurance companies all information furnished. New Electrical Building Page 9 of 497 8.5 The acceptance of delivery to the Owner of any certificate of insurance evidencing the insurance coverage and limits required under this Contract does not constitute approval or acceptance by the Owner that the insurance requirements in this Contract have been met. No operations shall commence at the Airport unless and until the required certificates of insurance are in effect and approved by the City’s Risk Manager. 8.6 The Contractor and the Owner understand, and agree that the minimum limits of the insurance herein required may, from time to time, become inadequate, and Contractor agrees that it will increase such minimum limits upon receipt of written notice defining the basis of the increase. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner, within sixty-(60) days of the effective date thereof, a certificate of insurance evidencing that such insurance is in force. 8.7 Contractor’s insurance companies or its authorized representative shall give the Owner thirty (30) days prior written notice of any cancellation, intent not to renew, or material reduction in any policy’s coverage, except in the application of the Aggregate Limit Provisions. In the event of a reduction to the Aggregate Limit, it is agreed that immediate steps will be taken to have the prior Aggregate Limit reinstated. 8.8 If at any time, the Airport Executive Director requests a written statement from the insurance companies as to any impairment(s) to the Aggregate Limit, prompt authorization and delivery of all requested information will be given to the Aviation Commission. Renewal Certificates of Insurance must be provided to the Owner as soon as practical but in every instance prior to expiration of current coverage. 8.9 The amounts and types of insurance shall conform to the following minimum requirements with the use of Insurance Service Office policies, forms, and endorsements or broader, where applicable. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the wording of all policies, forms, and endorsements must be reasonably acceptable to the Owner. 8.10 Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurance shall be maintained in force by Contractor during the term of this Contract for all employees engaged in the operations under this Contract. The limits of coverage shall not be less than: Workers’ Compensation Georgia Statutory Employer’s Liability $1,000,000 Limit Each Accident $1,000,000, Limit Disease Aggregate $1,000,000, Limit Disease Each Employee 8.11 Commercial General Liability – Occurrence Form. Policy shall include bodily injury, property damage, personal injury and broad form Contractual liability coverage with limits no less than five million dollars ($5,000,000) in Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability insurance. New Electrical Building Page 10 of 497 8.12 Automobile Liability Insurance. For any vehicles authorized in writing by the Executive Director to operate on the Aircraft Operating Area (AOA) of the Airport, Automobile Insurance in the minimum amount of Five Million Dollars ($5,000,000.00) combined single limit coverage. If the Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability coverage includes vehicular operations on the Airport, separate automobile insurance shall not be required. The foregoing insurance shall be endorsed to state that it will be primary to the Augusta GA and the Aviation Commission's insurance and that the carrier waives its right of subrogation against Augusta, GA, the Aviation Commission, and their officers, agents, elected and appointed officials, representatives, volunteers, and employees. Augusta, GA, the Aviation Commission, and their officers, agents, employees, elected and appointed officials shall be added as additional insureds on said policies. Said policy shall contain Severability of Interest Clause and shall include Contractual liability coverage at least as broad as that given in the most current CA 00 01 ISO form. 8.13 Excess Liability: $2,000,000 Policy must follow form of General Liability Policy and all insurance together for general liability must total at least a minimum of two million dollars ($2,000,000). Any form of underlying and excess policies may satisfy such requirement. 8.14 The Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage as required in the paragraph above shall include those classifications, as listed in Standard Liability Insurance Manuals, which are applicable to the operations of the Contractor in the performance of this Contract. 8.15 Within sixty (60) days of the effective date thereof or any subsequent term, Contractor shall provide Owner with certificate(s) of insurance evidencing that such insurance as described herein be in force. Insurance binder letter(s) or a Certificate(s) of Insurance as described above must be sent to the address below with a copy to the Owner: Augusta, Georgia Risk Management 530 Greene Street Room 217 Augusta, GA 30901 (706) 821-2502 (Fax) 8.16 Subcontractors. It is the sole responsibility of the general Contractor to ensure that all Subcontractors working under it have separately procured any and all types and limits of insurance that are required under any and all pertinent local, state, or federal ordinances or resolutions that are suitable for the particular trade that the Subcontractor is performing. It is also the sole responsibility of the general and/or prime Contractor to ensure that any and all Subcontractors or vendors carry types and limits of insurance not less than those listed herein and that the Subcontractors and/or vendors carry and/or procure endorsements to waive all subrogation rights against and name “Augusta GA, its appointed and elected Officials, New Electrical Building Page 11 of 497 departments, agencies, boards, commissions, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers” as additional insureds. ARTICLE 9 AIRPORT SECURITY REQUIREMENTS 9.1 Contractor’s employees shall be required to operate in Airport’s secure areas. Contractor shall be required to obtain the Airport’s Security Identification Display Area (SIDA) badges for any employee working in the secured area. Contractor shall comply, at its own expense, with the Transportation Security Administration (TSA) and the Owner’s security requirements for the Airport including, but not limited to employee training and badges. Contractor shall cooperate with the TSA and the Owner on all security matters and shall promptly comply with any project security arrangements established by the Owner. Compliance with such security requirements shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibility for maintaining proper security for the above-noted items, nor shall it be construed as limiting in any manner Contractor’s obligation with respect to all applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations and its duty to undertake reasonable action to establish and maintain secure conditions at and around the Project and throughout the Airport. All employees shall be properly badged and comply with all Owner’s safety and security rules. 9.2 Any Contractor employees assigned to work in a secured area are required to be “badged” or a “badged” Contractor employee must escort them the entire time they are in these secured areas. 9.3 To qualify for the badge, individual must be fingerprinted and have a background investigation completed. In addition, the Owner will conduct a background inquiry and require finger printing of all individuals who will be working on the secured side of the Airport screening point. This may also include collection of appropriate criminal history information, Contractual and business associations and practices, employment histories, reputation in the business community and credit reports for the Contractor, as well as, its employees. 9.4 Contractor consents to such an inquiry and agrees to make available to the Owner such books and records the Owner deems necessary to conduct the review. 9.5 Contractor shall pay all costs associated with providing SIDA badges. 9.6 Contractor shall be responsible for any fines assessed by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) or TSA as a result of the actions of its employees or Subcontractors. ARTICLE 10 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES In order to induce the Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor hereby represents and warrants that as of the date above written that: New Electrical Building Page 12 of 497 10.1 Contractor is duly organized and validly existing in good standing under the laws of the state of Georgia in which it is organized, is qualified to do business in all jurisdictions in which it is operating, and has the power and authority to execute and deliver and to perform its obligations under this Contract and the documents to which it is signatory; and 10.2 The execution, delivery and performance by Contractor and its undersigned representative(s) of this Contract and other documents to which Contractor is a signatory do not require the approval or consent of any other person, entity or government agency and do not result in any breach of any agreement to which Contractor is a party or by which it is bound; and 10.3 The execution, delivery and performance by Contractor of this Contract and other documents to which it is a signatory have been duly authorized by all necessary action, and constitute legal, valid and binding obligations of Contractor, enforceable against Contractor in accordance with its terms; and 10.4 No action, suit or proceeding to which Contractor is a party is pending or threatened that may restrain or question this Contract, or any other document to which it is a signatory, or the enjoyment of rights or benefits contemplated herein; and 10.5 Contractor has all State of Georgia Licenses and permits required for the performance of the Work and shall only use properly licensed and trained persons to perform such services. ARTICLE 11 NOTICES 11.1 Delivery. All notices given by either party to the other under this Contract must be in writing and delivered by: (i) regular mail, postage prepaid; (ii) certified or registered mail; (iii) facsimile; or (iv) hand - delivery, to the parties at the addresses and facsimile numbers set forth in the Clause titled “Addresses”. 11.2 Receipt. Notices sent by mail will be deemed to be received upon deposit in the mail, properly addressed. Notices sent by certified or registered mail will be deemed to be received upon the date of the acknowledgment. Notices sent by facsimile will be deemed to be received upon successful transmission to the proper facsimile number. Notices delivered by hand- delivery will be deemed to be received upon acceptance by the respective party or its agent. 11.3 Change of Address or Facsimile Number. Either party may, at any time, change its respective address or facsimile number by sending written notice to the other party of the change. New Electrical Building Page 13 of 497 11.4 Addresses: To OWNER: To CONTRACTOR: Augusta Regional Airport Southeast Site Services, LLC Attn: Executive Director Attn: Matt Bragg 1501 Aviation Way 117 Industrial Blvd.,, Ste. G Augusta, Georgia 30906 Gray, GA 31032 Telephone: (706) 7898-3236 Telephone: (478) 986-9989 Fax: (706) 798-1551 With a copy to: Augusta General Counsel Augusta Richmond County Department of Law 535 Telfair St. Building 3000 Augusta, GA 30901 Fax: (706) 842-5556 ARTICLE 12 INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS Except where, and to the extent caused by the gross negligence of the City, the Aviation Commission, their agents, employees, Contractors, officers or, Contractor shall protect, defend, reimburse, indemnify, and hold Augusta, Georgia, the Aviation Commission, its members, agents, employees, and elected officers and each of them, free and harmless at all times as set forth in Augusta, Georgia Code, and particularly Article 1, Chapter 3, Division 1, Section 1-3-8.5, Indemnity and Insurance, as the same may be amended from time to time, and described herein. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of Augusta- Richmond County Code and this Contract, the broader requirement shall govern. ARTICLE 13 PERMITS Contractor shall obtain and maintain at all times all necessary licenses, permits and certifications to perform the work described in the Contract. Contractor shall furnish copies of all licenses, permits, and certifications to the Administrator. ARTICLE 14 WORK PERMITS REQUIRED Contractor agrees and acknowledges that its employees and agent’s employees, as well as any Subcontractors or Subcontractors’ personnel, working on the Contract must be United States citizens, or must be lawfully admitted for residence and be permitted to work in the United States under the Immigration and Naturalization Act, 8 U.S.C. 1101, et. seq. New Electrical Building Page 14 of 497 ARTICLE 15 FEDERAL WORK AUTHORIZATION 15.1 Pursuant to O.C.G.A. §13-10-91 and Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-1-.02, the Owner cannot enter a Contract for the physical performance of services unless the Contractor and its Subcontractors register and participate in the Federal Work Authorization Program to verify specific information on all new employees. 15.2 The Contractor certifies that it has complied and will continue to comply with O.C.G.A. §13-10-91 and Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-1-.02. 15.3 The Contractor agrees to sign an affidavit evidencing its compliance with O.C.G.A. §13- 10-91 and Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-1-.02. The signed affidavit is attached to this Contract as an exhibit 15.4 The Contractor agrees that in the event that it employs or Contracts with any Subcontractor(s) in connection with this Contract, the Contractor will secure from each Subcontractor an affidavit that indicates the employee-number category applicable to that Subcontractor and certifies the Subcontractor’s current and continuing compliance with O.C.G.A. §13-10-91 and Georgia Department of Labor Rule 300-10-1-.02. Any signed Subcontractor affidavit(s) obtained in connection with this Contract shall be attached hereto as an exhibit. ARTICLE 16 MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACT PROVISIONS 16.1 Independent Contractor/Subcontractor Contractor is acting, in performance of this Contract, as an independent Contractor. Personnel supplied by the Contractor or its agents or Subcontractors hereunder are not the Owner’s employees or agents and Contractor assumes full responsibility for their acts. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the payment of compensation to Contractor’s employees. The Owner shall not be responsible for payment of Worker’s Compensation, disability benefits, and unemployment insurance or for withholding and paying employment taxes for any Contractor employee, or Contractor’s Subcontractors or its agent’s employees, but such responsibility shall be solely that of Contractor. This clause of the Contract does not prevent the Airport from requiring Contractor to have its employees follow normal rules and guidelines for work performance, redirecting the efforts of the employees to meet the needs of the facilities, performing safety or from requiring Contractor to perform the requirements of this Contract satisfactorily, according to the General Conditions, Scope of Services, Performance Work Statement, Service Performance Standards and Methods described herein. New Electrical Building Page 15 of 497 16.2 Force Majeure 16.2.1 Neither party hereto shall be considered in default in the performance of its obligations hereunder to the extent that the performance of any such obligation, except the payment of money, is prevented or delayed by any cause, existing or future, which is beyond the reasonable control of the affected party, or by a strike, lockout or other labor difficulty, the settlement of which shall be within the sole discretion of the party involved. 16.2.2 Each party hereto shall give notice promptly to the other of the nature and extent of any Force Majeure claimed to delay, hinder or prevent performance of the services under this Contract. In the event either party is prevented or delayed in the performance of this obligation because of such Force Majeure, there shall be an equitable adjustment of the schedule. 16.2.3 Contractor will not be liable for failure to perform or for delay in performance because of Force Majeure, including the following: 16.2.3.1 any cause beyond its reasonable control; 16.2.3.2 any act of God; 16.2.3.3 inclement weather; 16.2.3.4 earthquake; 16.2.3.5 fire; 16.2.3.6 explosion; 16.2.3.7 flood; 16.2.3.8 strike or other labor dispute; 16.2.3.9 any shortage or disruption of or inability to obtain labor, material, manufacturing facilities, power, fuel or transportation from unusual sources, or any other; 16.2.3.10 delay or failure to act of any governmental or military authority; 16.2.3.11 any war, hostility or invasion; 16.2.3.12 any embargo, sabotage, civil disturbance, riot or insurrection; 16.2.3.13 any legal proceedings; or 16.2.3.14 failure to act by Contractor’s suppliers due to any cause which Contractor is not responsible, in whole or in part. New Electrical Building Page 16 of 497 16.3 Commercial Activities Neither Contractor nor its employees may establish any commercial activity or issue concessions or permits of any kind to third parties for establishing activities at the Airport. 16.4 Records and Audit Contractor and its Subcontractors shall maintain records and accounts in connection with all aspects in the performance of this Contract, including those, which will accurately document incurred costs, both direct and indirect, of whatever nature, during and for a period of three (3) years from the expiration or other termination of this Contract, unless otherwise specified by applicable law. The Owner may examine and copy, at all reasonable times, with advance notification, those records and accounts. Contractor shall maintain all records in a central location in Augusta, Georgia. 16.5 Contingent Fees Contractor warrants that it has not employed or retained any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working for Contractor, to solicit or secure this Contract; and that Contractor has not paid or agreed to pay any company, association, corporation, firm or person, other than a bona fide employee working for Contractor, any fee, commission, percentage, gift or any other consideration contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this Contract. For the breach or violation of this warranty and upon a finding after notice and hearing, the Owner may terminate the Contract and, at its discretion, may deduct from the Contract sum, or otherwise recover the full amount of any such fee, commission, percentage, gift or consideration. 16.6 Rights and Remedies The rights and remedies of the Owner provided in this paragraph are not exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract. 16.7 Non-Appropriations Notwithstanding anything contained in this Contract, if sufficient funds have not been appropriated to support continuation of this Contract for an additional calendar year or an additional term of the Contract, this Contract shall terminate absolutely and without further obligation on the part of the Owner at the close of the calendar year of its execution or if the Owner suspends performance pending the appropriation of funds. 16.8 Assignment Without the prior written consent of the Owner, Contractor may not assign, transfer or convey any of its interests under this Contract, nor delegate any of its obligations or duties under this Contract except as provided herein. New Electrical Building Page 17 of 497 16.8.1 Consent of the Owner Required. Any assignment of this Contract or rights under this Contract, in whole or part, without the prior written consent of the Owner will be void, except that, upon ten-(10) calendar days prior written notice to the Owner, Contractor may assign monies due or to become due under this Contract. Any assignment of monies will be subject to proper setoffs in favor of the Owner and to any deductions provided for in this Contract. 16.8.2 No Relief of Responsibilities. No assignment will be approved which would relieve Contractor of its responsibilities under this Contract. 16.9 Parties Bound. This Contract will be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the Owner and Contractor and their respective successors and assigns. 16.10 No Partnership or Joint Venture. Nothing contained in this Contract will be deemed to create a partnership or joint venture between the Owner and Contractor or cause the Owner to be responsible for the debts or obligations of Contractor or any other party. Contractor must not represent to anyone that its relationship to the Owner is other than as the Owner’s Contractor. Contractor must act as an independent agent and not as the agent of the Owner in performing this Contract and shall maintain complete control over its employees and all of its lower-tier suppliers and Subcontractors. Nothing contained in this Contract or any lower tier purchase order or subcontract awarded by Contractor will create any Contractual relationship between any lower- tier supplier or Subcontractor and the Owner. No act or direction of the Owner shall be deemed to be the exercise of supervision or control of the Contractor’s performance hereunder. 16.11 Waiver The failure of the Owner to seek redress for any violation of or to insist upon the strict performance of, any term of this Contract will not prevent a subsequent violation of this Contract from being actionable by the Owner. The provision in this Contract of any particular remedy will not preclude the Owner from any other remedy. 16.12 Compliance with Applicable Laws and Regulations Contractor covenants and agrees that it, its agents and employees shall comply with all Georgia, county, state, and federal laws, Airport Rules and Regulations, and City ordinances applicable to the work to be performed under this Contract, and that it shall obtain all necessary permits, pay all license fees and taxes to comply therewith. Further, Contractor agrees that it, its agents, and employees will abide by all rules, regulations, and policies of Airport during the term of this Contract, including any renewal periods. 16.13 Patent Indemnity Except as otherwise provided, the Contractor shall indemnify the City and its Board of Commissioners, officers, agents and employees against liability, including costs and expenses for New Electrical Building Page 18 of 497 infringement upon any letters or patent of the United States arising out of the performance of this Contract or out of the use or disposal by or for the account of the Owner of supplies furnished or construction work performed hereunder. 16.14 Use of Augusta, Georgia Landfill Contractor shall dispose of all debris and trash from the Airport will be transported to and disposed of at the Augusta, Georgia Solid Waste Landfill in accordance with local and state regulations. The Contractor shall provide evidence of proper disposal through manifests, which shall include the types of material disposed of, the name and location of the disposal facility, date of disposal and all related fees. 16.15 Inspection The Owner may, at reasonable times, inspect the part of the plant, place of business, or work site of a Contractor or Subcontractor or subunit thereof which is pertinent to the performance of the Contract. 16.16 Temporary Suspension or Delay of Performance of Contract To the extent that it does not alter the scope of this Contract the Owner may unilaterally order a temporary stopping of the work, or delaying of the work to be performed by the Contractor under this Contact. 16.17 Entire Agreement This Contract, together with all of the attachments shall constitute the entire agreement between the parties and any prior understanding or representation of any kind preceding the date of this Contract shall not be binding upon either party except to the extent incorporated in this Contract. 16.18 Governing Law This Contract will be construed under Georgia law, including the Georgia Uniform Commercial Code; all remedies available under that code are applicable to this Contract. Contractor and the Owner fix jurisdiction and venue for any action brought with respect to this Contract in Augusta, Georgia. 16.19 Legal Construction If any provision contained in this Contract is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, that invalidity, illegality or unenforceability will not affect any other provision of this Contract and this Contract will be construed as if the invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision had never been contained in this Contract. New Electrical Building Page 19 of 497 16.20 Prior Contracts Superseded This Contract and the attachments constitute the sole and only agreement between Contractor and the City with respect to the subject matter of this Contract and supersede any prior understandings or written or oral Contracts respecting the subject matter of this Contract. 16.21 Counterparts This Contract may be executed concurrently in one or more counterparts, each of which will be deemed an original, but all of which will together constitute one Contract. 16.22 Further Acts Owner and Contractor each agrees to perform any additional acts and execute and deliver any additional documents as may reasonably be necessary in order to carry out the provisions and affect the intent of this Contract. BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 20 of 497 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Contract to be executed by their appropriate officials, as of the date first written above. AUGUSTA AVIATION COMMISSION AUGUSTA, GEORGIA _____________________________________ _____________________________ George R. Sasser, Aviation Commission Chair Hardie Davis, Jr., Mayor Attest: Attest: _____________________________________ _________________________________ Crystal Johnson, Sec. Lena Bonner, Clerk of Commission SOUTHEAST SITE SERVICES, LLC ____________________________________ Sworn to and subscribed before me this ____ day of ___________, 201_. ____________________________________ Notary Public My commission expires: ________________ (NOTARIAL SEAL) New Electrical Building Page 21 of 497 CONTRACT EXHIBITS New Electrical Building Page 22 of 497 Federal Contract Provisions Certificate of Buy American Compliance for Manufactured Products .................... FP-1 – FP-2 Access to Records and Report ............................................................................................................. FP-3 Notice of Requirement for Affirmative Action ............................................................................... FP-3 General Civil Rights Provisions ............................................................................................................. FP-4 Title VI Solicitation Notice ..................................................................................................................... FP-4 Title VI Compliance with Nondiscrimination Requirements ....................................... FP-4 – FP-6 DBE Statements ........................................................................................................................... FP-6 – FP-7 Energy Conservation Requirements ................................................................................................... FP-7 Federal Fair Labor Standards Act (Federal Minimum Wage) .................................................... FP-7 Lobbying and Influencing Federal Employees ................................................................. FP-7 – FP-8 Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 ................................................................................. FP-8 Rights to Inventions ................................................................................................................................. FP-8 Trade Restriction Clause ........................................................................................................... FP-8 – FP-9 Veteran’s Preference ................................................................................................................................ FP-9 Copeland “Anti-Kickback” Act .............................................................................................................. FP-9 Davis Bacon Requirements ................................................................................................. FP-10 – FP-15 Equal Employment Opportunity ....................................................................................... FP-15 – FP-16 Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications ............................................................................................................ FP-16 – FP–20 Prohibition of Segregated Facilities ................................................................................................. FP-20 Termination for Convenience ............................................................................................ FP-20 – FP-21 Termination for Default (Construction) .......................................................................................... FP-21 Certificate Regarding Debarment and Suspension (Contractor) .......................................... FP-21 Certificate Regarding Debarment and Suspension (Contractor Regarding Lower Tier Participants) ......................................................................................................... FP-21 Breach of Contract Terms .................................................................................................................... FP-21 Clean Air and Water Pollution Control ........................................................................................... FP-22 New Electrical Building Page 23 of 497 Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act Requirements ............................. FP-22 -FP-23 Texting When Driving ............................................................................................................................ FP-23 Procurement of Recovered Materials .............................................................................................. FP-23 Wage Rate Determination .................................................................................................. FP-23 – FP-28 General Provisions Section 10 - Definition of Terms ......................................................................................... GP-1 – GP-5 Section 20 – Bid Requirements and Conditions .......................................................... GP-6 – GP-10 Section 30 – Awards and Execution of Contract ...................................................... GP-11 – GP-13 Section 40 - Scope of Work ............................................................................................. GP-14 – GP-17 Section 50 - Control of Work........................................................................................... GP-18 – GP-25 Section 60 - Control of Materials ................................................................................... GP-26 – GP-30 Section 70 - Legal Regulations and Responsibility to Public .............................. GP-31 – GP-38 Section 80 - Execution and Progress ............................................................................ GP-39 – GP-46 Section 90 - Measurement and Payment ................................................................... GP-47 – GP-56 Section 100 - Contractor Quality Control Program ................................................ GP-57 – GP-58 Supplemental Provisions SP-10 Airport Safety and Security Requirements ........................................................ SP-1 – SP-16 FAA Standard Technical Specifications P-100 Mobilization ...................................................................................................... P-100-1 – P-100-3 D-701 Pipe for Storm Drains and Culverts ........................................................ D-701-1 – D-701-6 X-101 Locate & Protect Existing Circuits ............................................................ X-101-1 – X-101-2 X-105 Site Demolition ................................................................................................ X-105-1 – X-105-3 X-110 Directional Boring ........................................................................................... X-110-1 – X-110-2 X-115 Polymer Concrete Handholes .................................................................... X-115-1 – X-115-2 X-150 Constant Current Regulators ....................................................................... X-150-1 – X-150-4 X-152 Fiber Optic Cable ......................................................................................... X-152-1 – X-152-11 New Electrical Building Page 24 of 497 X-220 Recycled Base Haul Road ............................................................................ X-220-1 – X-220-2 P-152 Excavation and Embankment ..................................................................... P-152-1 – P-152-6 P-156 Temp Air & Water Pollution, Soil Erosion & Siltation Controls ..... P-156-1 – P-156-5 T-901 Seeding ................................................................................................................T-901-1 – T-901-5 T-905 Topsoiling ...........................................................................................................T-905-1 – T-905-3 L-100 Airport Lighting General Provisions ........................................................L-100-1 – L-100-30 L-108 Underground Power Cable for Airports ..................................................L-108-1 – L-108-13 L-109 Airport Transformer Vault & Vault Equipment ..................................... L-109-1 – L-109-9 L-110 Airport Underground Electrical Duct Banks and Conduits ................ L-110-1 – L-110-8 L-115 Electrical Manholes and Junction Structures .......................................... L-115-1 – L-115-8 L-890 New ALCMS System .......................................................................................L-890-1 – L-890-19 AIA Standard Technical Specifications 033000 Cast-in-place Concrete ....................................................................... 033000-1 – 033000-18 042000 Unit Masonry .......................................................................................... 042000-1 – 042000-15 051200 Structural Steel Framing ....................................................................... 051200-1 – 051200-7 053100 Steel Decking ............................................................................................ 053100-1 – 053100-4 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing .............................................................. 054000-1 – 054000-8 054400 Cold-Formed Metal Trusses ................................................................ 054400-1 – 054400-6 055000 Metal Fabrications .................................................................................. 055000-1 – 055000-8 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ....................................................... 061053-1 – 061053-3 072100 Thermal Insulation .................................................................................. 072100-1 – 072100-4 074115 Standing Seam Metal Roof System ................................................ 074115-1 – 074115-13 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ............................................................ 081113-1 – 081113-5 085113 Aluminum Windows .................................................................................. 085113-1 – 085113-7 088100 Glass and Glazing ....................................................................................... 088100-1 – 088100-10 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ................................................................... 092216-1 – 092216-2 092900 Gypsum Board ................................................................................... 092900-1 – 092900-4 099000 Painting ........................................................................................................... 099000-1 – 099000-9 New Electrical Building Page 25 of 497 263213 Engine Generators .............................................................................. 263213-1 – 263213-18 263600 Transfer Switches .................................................................................. 263600-1 – 263600-10 Geotechnical Report ..............................................................................................................GR-1 – GR-90 New Electrical Building Page 26 of 497 FEDERAL CONTRACT PROVISIONS BUY AMERICAN PREFERENCE The Contractor agrees to comply with 49 USC § 50101, which provides that Federal funds may not be obligated unless all steel and manufactured goods used in AIP funded projects are produced in the United States, unless the FAA has issued a waiver for the product; the product is listed as an Excepted Article, Material Or Supply in Federal Acquisition Regulation subpart 25.108; or is included in the FAA Nationwide Buy American Waivers Issued list. Contractor must complete and submit the Buy America certification included herein with its bid or offer. The Owner will reject as nonresponsive any bid or offer that does not include a completed Certificate of Buy American Compliance. CERTIFICATE OF BUY AMERICAN COMPLIANCE FOR MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS As a matter of bid responsiveness, the Contractor must complete, sign, date, and submit this certification statement with their bid. The Contractor must indicate how it intends to comply with 49 USC § 50101 by selecting one on the following certification statements. These statements are mutually exclusive. Contractor must select one or the other (not both) by inserting a checkmark (✓) or the letter “X”.  Contractor hereby certifies that it will comply with 49 USC § 50101 by: a) Only installing steel and manufactured products produced in the United States, or; b) Installing manufactured products for which the FAA has issued a waiver as indicated by inclusion on the current FAA Nationwide Buy American Waivers Issued listing, or; c) Installing products listed as an Excepted Article, Material or Supply in Federal Acquisition Regulation Subpart 25.108. By selecting this certification statement, the Contractor agrees: 1. To provide to the Owner evidence that documents the source and origin of the steel and manufactured product. 2. To faithfully comply with providing US domestic product. 3. To furnish US domestic product for any waiver request that the FAA rejects. 4. To refrain from seeking a waiver request after establishment of the Contract, unless extenuating circumstances emerge that the FAA determines justified.  The Contractor hereby certifies it cannot comply with the 100% Buy American Preferences of 49 USC § 50101(a) but may qualify for either a Type 3 or Type 4 waiver under 49 USC § 50101(b). By selecting this certification statement, the Contractor with the apparent low bid agrees: 1. To the submit to the Owner within 15 calendar days of the bid opening, a formal waiver request and required documentation that support the type of waiver being requested. 2. That failure to submit the required documentation within the specified timeframe is cause for a non-responsive determination may result in rejection of the bid. 3. To faithfully comply with providing US domestic products at or above the approved US domestic content percentage as approved by the FAA. New Electrical Building Page 27 of 497 4. To refrain from seeking a waiver request after establishment of the Contract, unless extenuating circumstances emerge that the FAA determines justified. 1. Required Documentation Type 3 Waiver - The cost of the item components and subcomponents produced in the United States is more that 60% of the cost of all components and subcomponents of the “item”. The required documentation for a type 3 waiver is: a) Listing of all product components and subcomponents that are not comprised of 100% US domestic content (Excludes products listed on the FAA Nationwide Buy American Waivers Issued listing and products excluded by Federal Acquisition Regulation Subpart 25.108; products of unknown origin must be considered as non-domestic products in their entirety) b) Cost of non-domestic components and subcomponents, excluding labor costs associated with final assembly at place of manufacture. c) Percentage of non-domestic component and subcomponent cost as compared to total “item” component and subcomponent costs, excluding labor costs associated with final assembly at place of manufacture. Type 4 Waiver – Total cost of project using US domestic source product exceeds the total project cost using non-domestic product by 25%. The required documentation for a type 4 of waiver is: a) Detailed cost information for total project using US domestic product. b) Detailed cost information for total project using non-domestic product. False Statements: Per 49 USC § 47126, this certification concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of the Federal Aviation Administration and the making of a false, fictitious or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, United States Code. Date: ____________________ Signature ________________________________________ Company Name Title New Electrical Building Page 28 of 497 ACCESS TO RECORDS AND REPORTS The Contractor must maintain an acceptable cost accounting system. The Contractor agrees to provide the Owner, the Federal Aviation Administration, and the Comptroller General of the United States or any of their duly authorized representatives access to any books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to the specific Contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts and transcriptions. The Contractor shall maintain all books, records and reports required under this Contract for a period of not less than three (3) years after final payment is made and all pending matters are closed. NOTICE OF REQUIREMENT FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION 1. The Contractor’s attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications" set forth herein. 2. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor 's aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows: Timetables Goals for minority participation for each trade 27.2% Goals for female participation in each trade 6.9% These goals are applicable to all of the Contractor 's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally-assisted) performed in the covered area. If the Contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually performed. With regard to this second area, the Contractor also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved and non-federally involved construction. The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training shall be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract, and in each trade, and the Contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project, for the sole of meeting the Contractor 's goals, shall be a violation of the Contract, the Executive Order, and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. 3. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director, OFCCP, within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the Contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address, and telephone number of the Subcontractor; employer identification number of the Subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated starting and completion dates of subcontract; and the geographical area in which the subcontract is to be performed. 4. As used in this notice and in the Contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" is the City of Augusta, Richmond County, Georgia. New Electrical Building Page 29 of 497 GENERAL CIVIL RIGHTS PROVISIONS The Contractor agrees to comply with pertinent statues, Executive Orders and such rules as are promulgated to ensure that no person shall, on the grounds od race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability be excluded from participating in any activity conducted with or benefiting from Federal Assistance. This provision binds the Contractor and Subcontractors from the bid solicitation period through the completion of the Contract. This provision is in addition to that required by Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. TITLE VI SOLICITATION NOTICE The Augusta Airport Commission, in accordance with the provisions of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. §§ 2000d to 2000d-4) and the Regulations, hereby notifies all Contractors that it will affirmatively ensure that will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, or handicap. TITLE VI COMPLIANCE WITH NONDISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor, for itself, its assignees, and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor”) agrees as follows: 1. Compliance with Regulations: The Contractor (hereinafter includes consultants or Subcontractors) will comply with the Title VI List of Pertinent Nondiscrimination Statutes and Authorities, as they may be amended from time to time, which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this Contract. 1. Non-discrimination: The Contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the Contract, will not discriminate on the grounds of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, or handicap in the selection and retention of Subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The Contractor will not participate directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by the Acts and the Regulations, including employment practices when the Contract covers any activity, project, or program set forth in Appendix B of 49 CFR part 21. 2. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations, either by competitive bidding, or negotiation made by the Contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials, or leases of equipment, each potential Subcontractor or supplier will be notified by the Contractor of the Contractor ’s obligations under this Contract and the Acts and the Regulations relative to Non-discrimination on the grounds of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, or handicap. 3. Information and Reports: The Contractor will provide all information and reports required by the Acts, the Regulations, and directives issued pursuant thereto and will permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Owner or the Federal Aviation Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Acts, Regulations, and instructions. Where any information required of a Contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish the information, the Contractor will so certify to the Owner or the Federal Aviation Administration, as appropriate, and will set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. New Electrical Building Page 30 of 497 4. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of a Contractor ’s noncompliance with the Non-discrimination provisions of this Contract, the Owner will impose such Contract sanctions as it or the Federal Aviation Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: a. Withholding payments to the Contractor under the Contract until the Contractor complies; and/or b. Cancelling, terminating, or suspending a Contract, in whole or in part. 5. Incorporation of Provisions: The Contractor will include the provisions of paragraphs one through six in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Acts, the Regulations and directives issued pursuant thereto. The Contractor will take action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Owner or the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance. Provided, that if the Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with litigation by a Subcontractor, or supplier because of such direction, the Contractor may request the Owner to enter into any litigation to protect the interests of the sponsor. In addition, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into the litigation to protect the interests of the United States. TITLE VI LIST OF PERTINENT NONDISCRIMINATION ACTS AND AUTHORITIES During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor , for itself, its assignees, and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor ”) agrees to comply with the following non-discrimination statutes and authorities; including but not limited to: • Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. § 2000d et seq., 78 stat. 252), (prohibits discrimination on the basis of race, color, national origin); • 49 CFR part 21 (Non-discrimination In Federally-Assisted Programs of The Department of Transportation—Effectuation of Title VI of The Civil Rights Act of 1964); • The Uniform Relocation Assistance and Real Property Acquisition Policies Act of 1970, (42 U.S.C. § 4601), (prohibits unfair treatment of persons displaced or whose property has been acquired because of Federal or Federal-aid programs and projects); • Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, (29 U.S.C. § 794 et seq.), as amended, (prohibits discrimination on the basis of disability); and 49 CFR part 27; • The Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended, (42 U.S.C. § 6101 et seq.), (prohibits discrimination on the basis of age); • Airport and Airway Improvement Act of 1982, (49 USC § 471, Section 47123), as amended, (prohibits discrimination based on race, creed, color, national origin, or sex); • The Civil Rights Restoration Act of 1987, (PL 100-209), (Broadened the scope, coverage and applicability of Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, The Age Discrimination Act of 1975 and Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, by expanding the definition of the terms “programs or activities” to include all of the programs or activities of the Federal-aid recipients, sub-recipients and Contractor s, whether such programs or activities are Federally funded or not); • Titles II and III of the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, which prohibit discrimination on the basis of disability in the operation of public entities, public and private transportation systems, places of public accommodation, and certain testing entities (42 U.S.C. §§ 12131 – 12189) as implemented by Department of Transportation regulations at 49 CFR parts 37 and 38; New Electrical Building Page 31 of 497 • The Federal Aviation Administration’s Non-discrimination statute (49 U.S.C. § 47123) (prohibits discrimination on the basis of race, color, national origin, and sex); • Executive Order 12898, Federal Actions to Address Environmental Justice in Minority Populations and Low-Income Populations, which ensures non-discrimination against minority populations by discouraging programs, policies, and activities with disproportionately high and adverse human health or environmental effects on minority and low-income populations; • Executive Order 13166, Improving Access to Services for Persons with Limited English Proficiency, and resulting agency guidance, national origin discrimination includes discrimination because of limited English proficiency (LEP). To ensure compliance with Title VI, you must take reasonable steps to ensure that LEP persons have meaningful access to your programs (70 Fed. Reg. at 74087 to 74100); • Title IX of the Education Amendments of 1972, as amended, which prohibits you from discriminating because of sex in education programs or activities (20 U.S.C. 1681 et seq). REQUIRED STATEMENTS Information Submitted as a Matter of Contractor Responsiveness: The Owner’s award of this Contract is conditioned upon Contractor satisfying the good faith effort requirements of 49 CFR 26.53. As a condition of bid responsiveness, the Contractor must submit the following information with its proposal on the forms provided herein: 1) The names and address of Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) firms that will participate in the Contract; 2) A description of the work that each DBE firm will perform; 3) The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE firm listed under (1) 4) Written statement from Contractor that attests their commitment to use the DBE firm(s) listed under (1) to meet the Owner’s project goal; and 5) If Contractor cannot meet the advertised project DBE goal, evidence of good faith efforts undertaken by the Contractor as described in appendix A to 49 CFR part 26. Information Submitted as a Matter of Contractor Responsibility The Owner’s award of this Contract is conditioned upon Contractor satisfying the good faith effort requirements of 49 CFR 26.53. The Contractor must provide written confirmation of participation from each of the DBE firms the Contractor lists in its commitment within five days after bid opening. 1) The names and addresses of Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) firms that will participate in the Contract; 2) A description of the work that each DBE firm will perform; 3) The dollar amount of the participation of each DBE firm listed under (1) 4) Written statement from Contractor that attests their commitment to use the DBE firm(s) listed under (1) to meet the Owner’s project goal; and New Electrical Building Page 32 of 497 5) If Contractor cannot meet the advertised project DBE goal, evidence of good faith efforts undertaken by the Contractor as described in appendix A to 49 CFR part 26. ENERGY CONSERVATION REQUIREMENTS The Contractor agrees to comply with mandatory standards and policies relating to energy efficiency that are contained in the state energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (42 U.S.C. 6201et seq). FEDERAL FAIR LABOR STANDARDS ACT (FEDERAL MINIMUM WAGE) All Contracts and subcontracts that result from this solicitation shall incorporate the following provisions by reference, with the same force and effect as if given in full text. The Contractor has full responsibility to monitor compliance to the referenced statute or regulation. The Contractor must address any claims or disputes that pertain to a referenced requirement directly with the Federal Agency with enforcement responsibilities. Requirement Federal Agency with Enforcement Responsibilities Federal Fair Labor Standards Act (29 USC 201) U.S. Department of Labor – Wage and Hour Division LOBBYING AND INFLUENCING FEDERAL EMPLOYEES The Contractor certifies by signing and submitting this bid, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: 1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the Contractor , to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of an agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal Contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal Contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. 2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal Contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form-LLL, “Disclosure Form to Report Lobbying,” in accordance with its instructions. 3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all sub-awards at all tiers (including subcontracts, sub-grants, and Contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all sub-recipients shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this New Electrical Building Page 33 of 497 transaction imposed by section 1352, title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $10,000 and not more than $100,000 for each such failure. OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ACT OF 1970 All Contracts and subcontracts that result from this solicitation incorporate the following provisions by reference, with the same force and effect as if given in full text. Contractor must provide a work environment that is free from recognized hazards that may cause death or serious physical harm to the employee. The Contractor retains full responsibility to monitor its compliance and their Subcontractor ’s compliance with the applicable requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (20 CFR Part 1910). Contractor must address any claims or disputes that pertain to a referenced requirement directly with the U.S. Department of Labor – Occupational Safety and Health Administration. RIGHTS TO INVENTIONS Contracts or agreements that include the performance of experimental, developmental, or research work must provide for the rights of the Federal Government and the Owner in any resulting invention as established by 37 CFR part 401, Rights to Inventions Made by Non-profit Organizations and Small Business Firms under Government Grants, Contracts, and Cooperative Agreements. This Contract incorporates by reference the patent and inventions rights as specified within in the 37 CFR §401.14. Contractor must include this requirement in all sub-tier Contracts involving experimental, developmental or research work. TRADE RESTRICTION CLAUSE By submission of an offer, the Contractor certifies that with respect to this Contract, it: a. is not owned or controlled by one or more citizens of a foreign country included in the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by the Office of the United States Trade Representative (U.S.T.R.); b. has not knowingly entered into any Contract or subcontract for this project with a person that is a citizen or national of a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by the U.S.T.R; and c. has not entered into any subcontract for any product to be used on the Federal on the project that is produced in a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by the U.S.T.R. This certification concerns a matter within the jurisdiction of an agency of the United States of America and the making of a false, fictitious, or fraudulent certification may render the maker subject to prosecution under Title 18, United States Code, Section 1001. The Contractor must provide immediate written notice to the Owner if the Contractor learns that its certification or that of a Subcontractor was erroneous when submitted or has become erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. The Contractor must require Subcontractor s provide immediate written notice to the Contractor if at any time it learns that its certification was erroneous by reason of changed circumstances. Unless the restrictions of this clause are waived by the Secretary of Transportation in accordance with 49 CFR 30.17, no Contract shall be awarded to an Contractor or Subcontractor : New Electrical Building Page 34 of 497 (1) who is owned or controlled by one or more citizens or nationals of a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms published by the U.S.T.R. or (2) whose Subcontractor s are owned or controlled by one or more citizens or nationals of a foreign country on such U.S.T.R. list or (3) who incorporates in the public works project any product of a foreign country on such U.S.T.R. list; Nothing contained in the foregoing shall be construed to require establishment of a system of records in order to render, in good faith, the certification required by this provision. The knowledge and information of a Contractor is not required to exceed that which is normally possessed by a prudent person in the ordinary course of business dealings. The Contractor agrees that it will incorporate this provision for certification without modification in in all lower tier subcontracts. The Contractor may rely on the certification of a prospective Subcontractor that it is not a firm from a foreign country included on the list of countries that discriminate against U.S. firms as published by U.S.T.R, unless the Contractor has knowledge that the certification is erroneous. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when making an award. If it is later determined that the Contractor or Subcontractor knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, the Federal Aviation Administration may direct through the Owner cancellation of the Contract or subcontract for default at no cost to the Owner or the FAA. VETERAN’S PREFERENCE In the employment of labor (excluding executive, administrative, and supervisory positions), the Contractor and all sub-tier Contractor s must give preference to covered veterans as defined within Title 49 United States Code Section 47112. Covered veterans include Vietnam-era veterans, Persian Gulf veterans, Afghanistan-Iraq war veterans, disabled veterans, and small business concerns (as defined by 15 U.S.C. 632) owned and controlled by disabled veterans. This preference only applies when there are covered veterans readily available and qualified to perform the work to which the employment relates. COPELAND “ANTI-KICKBACK” ACT Contractor must comply with the requirements of the Copeland “Anti-Kickback” Act (18 U.S.C. 874 and 40 U.S.C. 3145), as supplemented by Department of Labor regulation 29 CFR part 3. Contractor and Subcontractor s are prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed on the project to give up any part of the compensation to which the employee is entitled. The Contractor and each Subcontractor must submit to the Owner, a weekly statement on the wages paid to each employee performing on covered work during the prior week. Owner must report any violations of the Act to the Federal Aviation Administration. DAVIS BACON REQUIREMENTS 1. Minimum Wages (i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalent thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto New Electrical Building Page 35 of 497 and made a part hereof, regardless of any Contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under (1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the Contractor and its Subcontractor s at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can easily be seen by the workers. (ii)(A) The Contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the Contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The Contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (ii)(B) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the Contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the Contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the Contracting officer or will notify the Contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (ii)(C) In the event the Contractor , the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the Contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), the Contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the Contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the Contracting officer or will notify the Contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. New Electrical Building Page 36 of 497 (ii)(D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this Contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the Contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the Contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor , that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. 2 Withholding. The Federal Aviation Administration or the Owner shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under this Contract or any other Federal Contract with the same prime Contractor , or any other Federally- assisted Contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime Contractor , so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the Contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of work, all or part of the wages required by the Contract, the FAA may, after written notice to the Contractor , Owner, or applicant, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. 3. Payrolls and basic records. (i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the Contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual costs incurred in providing such benefits. Contractor s employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee New Electrical Building Page 37 of 497 programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (ii)(A) The Contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any Contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the FAA if the agency is a party to the Contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the Contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant or Owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the FAA. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g. , the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH–347 is available for this purpose from the Wage and Hour Division Web site at http://www.dol.gov/esa/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm or its successor site. The prime Contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all Subcontractor s. Contractor s and Subcontractor s shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the FAA if the agency is a party to the Contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the Contractor will submit them to the applicant or Owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the FAA, the Contractor , or the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime Contractor to require a Subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime Contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the sponsoring government agency (or the applicant, or Owner). (ii)(B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance," signed by the Contractor or Subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the Contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under § 5.5(a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under § 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer and mechanic (including each helper, apprentice and trainee) employed on the Contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations 29 CFR Part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the Contract. (ii)(C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the "Statement of Compliance" required by paragraph (3)(ii)(B) of this section. New Electrical Building Page 38 of 497 (ii)(D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the Contractor or Subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The Contractor or Subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying or transcription by authorized representatives of the Owner, the FAA or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the Contractor or Subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the Contractor , applicant, or Owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. 4. Apprentices and Trainees. (i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a Contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the Contractor 's or Subcontractor 's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and New Electrical Building Page 39 of 497 individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. 5. Compliance with the Copeland Act Requirements. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this Contract. 6. Subcontracts. The Contractor or Subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the FAA may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the Subcontractor s to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any Subcontractor or lower tier Subcontractor with all the Contract clauses in 29 CFR Part 5.5. 7. Contract Termination: Debarment. A breach of the Contract clauses in paragraph 1 through 10 of this section may be grounds for termination of the Contract, and for debarment as a Contractor and a Subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. 8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this Contract. New Electrical Building Page 40 of 497 9. Disputes Concerning Labor Standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this Contract shall not be subject to the general dispute’s clause of this Contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6 and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the Contractor (or any of its Subcontractor s) and the Contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. 10. Certification of Eligibility. (i) By entering into this Contract, the Contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the Contractor 's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government Contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (ii) No part of this Contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government Contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. 2. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor , state that all qualified applicants will receive considerations for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. 3. The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other Contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or workers' representatives of the Contractor 's commitments under this section, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. 4. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, as amended, and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. 5. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. New Electrical Building Page 41 of 497 6. In the event of the Contractor 's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this Contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this Contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government Contracts or federally assisted construction Contracts in accordance with procedure authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. 7. The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph (1) and the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (7) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each Subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provision, including sanctions for noncompliance: Provided, however, that in the event a Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a Subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the administering agency the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. STANDARD FEDERAL EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS 1. As used in these specifications: a. "Covered area" means the geographical area described in the solicitation from which this Contract resulted; b. "Director" means Director, Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs (OFCCP), U.S. Department of Labor, or any person to whom the Director delegates authority; c. "Employer identification number" means the Federal social security number used on the Employer's Quarterly Federal Tax Return, U.S. Treasury Department Form 941; d. "Minority" includes: (1) Black (all) persons having origins in any of the Black African racial groups not of Hispanic origin); (2) Hispanic (all persons of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American, or other Spanish culture or origin regardless of race); (3) Asian and Pacific Islander (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian Subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands); and (4) American Indian or Alaskan native (all persons having origins in any of the original peoples of North America and maintaining identifiable tribal affiliations through membership and participation or community identification). 2. Whenever the Contractor , or any Subcontractor at any tier, subcontracts a portion of the work involving any construction trade, it shall physically include in each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provisions of these specifications and the Notice which contains the applicable goals for minority and female participation and which is set forth in the solicitations from which this Contract resulted. 3. If the Contractor is participating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) in a Hometown Plan approved by the U.S. Department of Labor in the covered area either individually or through an association, its affirmative action obligations on all work in the Plan area (including goals and timetables) shall be in accordance with that Plan for those trades which have unions participating in the Plan. Contractor s shall New Electrical Building Page 42 of 497 be able to demonstrate their participation in and compliance with the provisions of any such Hometown Plan. Each Contractor or Subcontractor participating in an approved plan is individually required to comply with its obligations under the EEO clause and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the Plan in each trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith performance by other Contractor s or Subcontractor s toward a goal in an approved Plan does not excuse any covered Contractor 's or Subcontractor 's failure to take good faith efforts to achieve the Plan goals and timetables. 4. The Contractor shall implement the specific affirmative action standards provided in paragraphs 18.7a through 18.7p of these specifications. The goals set forth in the solicitation from which this Contract resulted are expressed as percentages of the total hours of employment and training of minority and female utilization the Contractor should reasonably be able to achieve in each construction trade in which it has employees in the covered area. Covered construction Contractor s performing construction work in a geographical area where they do not have a Federal or federally assisted construction Contract shall apply the minority and female goals established for the geographical area where the work is being performed. Goals are published periodically in the Federal Register in notice form, and such notices may be obtained from any Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs office or from Federal procurement Contracting officers. The Contractor is expected to make substantially uniform progress in meeting its goals in each craft during the period specified. 5. Neither the provisions of any collective bargaining agreement nor the failure by a union with whom the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement to refer either minorities or women shall excuse the Contractor 's obligations under these specifications, Executive Order 11246 or the regulations promulgated pursuant thereto. 6. In order for the non-working training hours of apprentices and trainees to be counted in meeting the goals, such apprentices and trainees shall be employed by the Contractor during the training period and the Contractor shall have made a commitment to employ the apprentices and trainees at the completion of their training, subject to the availability of employment opportunities. Trainees shall be trained pursuant to training programs approved by the U.S. Department of Labor. 7. The Contractor shall take specific affirmative actions to ensure equal employment opportunity. The evaluation of the Contractor 's compliance with these specifications shall be based upon its effort to achieve maximum results from its actions. The Contractor shall document these efforts fully and shall implement affirmative action steps at least as extensive as the following: a. Ensure and maintain a working environment free of harassment, intimidation, and coercion at all sites, and in all facilities at which the Contractor 's employees are assigned to work. The Contractor , where possible, will assign two or more women to each construction project. The Contractor shall specifically ensure that all foremen, superintendents, and other onsite supervisory personnel are aware of and carry out the Contractor 's obligation to maintain such a working environment, with specific attention to minority or female individuals working at such sites or in such facilities. b. Establish and maintain a current list of minority and female recruitment sources, provide written notification to minority and female recruitment sources and to community organizations when the Contractor or its unions have employment opportunities available, and maintain a record of the organizations' responses. c. Maintain a current file of the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of each minority and female off-the-street applicant and minority or female referral from a union, a recruitment source, or community organization and of what action was taken with respect to each such individual. If such individual was sent to the union hiring hall for referral and was not referred back to the Contractor by the union or, if referred, not employed by the Contractor , this shall New Electrical Building Page 43 of 497 be documented in the file with the reason therefore along with whatever additional actions the Contractor may have taken. d. Provide immediate written notification to the Director when the union or unions with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has not referred to the Contractor a minority person or female sent by the Contractor , or when the Contractor has other information that the union referral process has impeded the Contractor 's efforts to meet its obligations. e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training programs for the area which expressly include minorities and women, including upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee programs relevant to the Contractor 's employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the Department of Labor. The Contractor shall provide notice of these programs to the sources compiled under 7b above. f. Disseminate the Contractor 's EEO policy by providing notice of the policy to unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in assisting the Contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing it in the company newspaper, annual report, etc.; by specific review of the policy with all management personnel and with all minority and female employees at least once a year; and by posting the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at each location where construction work is performed. g. Review, at least annually, the Contractor ’s EEO policy and affirmative action obligations under these specifications with all employees having any responsibility for hiring, assignment, layoff, termination, or other employment decisions including specific review of these items with onsite supervisory personnel such a superintendents, general foremen, etc., prior to the initiation of construction work at any job site. A written record shall be made and maintained identifying the time and place of these meetings, persons attending, subject matter discussed, and disposition of the subject matter. h. Disseminate the Contractor 's EEO policy externally by including it in any advertising in the news media, specifically including minority and female news media, and providing written notification to and discussing the Contractor 's EEO policy with other Contractor s and Subcontractor s with whom the Contractor does or anticipates doing business. i. Direct its recruitment efforts, both oral and written, to minority, female, and community organizations, to schools with minority and female students; and to minority and female recruitment and training organizations serving the Contractor 's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month prior to the date for the acceptance of applications for apprenticeship or other training by any recruitment source, the Contractor shall send written notification to organizations, such as the above, describing the openings, screening procedures, and tests to be used in the selection process. j. Encourage present minority and female employees to recruit other minority persons and women and, where reasonable provide after school, summer, and vacation employment to minority and female youth both on the site and in other areas of a Contractor 's workforce. k. Validate all tests and other selection requirements where there is an obligation to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3. l. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation at least of all minority and female personnel, for promotional opportunities and encourage these employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training, etc., such opportunities. m. Ensure that seniority practices, job classifications, work assignments, and other personnel practices do not have a discriminatory effect by continually monitoring all personnel and employment related activities to ensure that the EEO policy and the Contractor 's obligations under these specifications are being carried out. n. Ensure that all facilities and company activities are non-segregated except that separate or single user toilet and necessary changing facilities shall be provided to assure privacy between the sexes. New Electrical Building Page 44 of 497 o. Document and maintain a record of all solicitations of offers for subcontracts from minority and female construction Contractor s and suppliers, including circulation of solicitations to minority and female Contractor associations and other business associations. p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisor's adherence to and performance under the Contractor 's EEO policies and affirmative action obligations. 8. Contractor s are encouraged to participate in voluntary associations, which assist in fulfilling one or more of their affirmative action obligations (7a through 7p). The efforts of a Contractor association, joint Contractor union, Contractor community, or other similar groups of which the Contractor is a member and participant, may be asserted as fulfilling any one or more of its obligations under 7a through 7p of these specifications provided that the Contractor actively participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a positive impact on the employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures that the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the Contractor 's minority and female workforce participation, makes a good faith effort to meet its individual goals and timetables, and can provide access to documentation which demonstrates the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the Contractor . The obligation to comply, however, is the Contractor 's and failure of such a group to fulfill an obligation shall not be a defense for the Contractor 's noncompliance. 9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been established. The Contractor , however, is required to provide equal employment opportunity and to take affirmative action for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women, both minority and non-minority. Consequently, if the particular group is employed in a substantially disparate manner (for example, even though the Contractor has achieved its goals for women generally,) the Contractor may be in violation of the Executive Order if a specific minority group of women is underutilized. 10. The Contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action standards to discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. 11. The Contractor shall not enter into any subcontract with any person or firm debarred from Government Contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246. 12. The Contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of these specifications and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspension, termination, and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations, by the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs. Any Contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties shall be in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as amended. 13. The Contractor , in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications, shall implement specific affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those standards prescribed in paragraph 18.7 of these specifications, so as to achieve maximum results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the Executive Order, the implementing regulations, or these specifications, the Director shall proceed in accordance with 41 CFR 60-4.8. 14. The Contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all employment related activity to ensure that the company’s EEO policy is being carried out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by the Government, and to keep records. Records shall at least include for each employee, the name, address, telephone number, construction trade, union affiliation if any, employee identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex, status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes in status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations at which the work was performed. Records shall be maintained in an easily New Electrical Building Page 45 of 497 understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records satisfy this requirement, Contractor shall not be required to maintain separate records. 15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the application of other laws which establish different standards of compliance or upon the application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g., those under the Public Works Employment Act of 1977 and the Community Development Block Grant Program). PROHIBITION OF SEGREGATED FACILITIES (a) The Contractor agrees that it does not and will not maintain or provide for its employees any segregated facilities at any of its establishments, and that it does not and will not permit its employees to perform their services at any location under its control where segregated facilities are maintained. The Contractor agrees that a breach of this clause is a violation of the Equal Opportunity clause in this Contract. (b) “Segregated facilities,” as used in this clause, means any waiting rooms, work areas, rest rooms and wash rooms, restaurants and other eating areas, time clocks, locker rooms and other storage or dressing areas, parking lots, drinking fountains, recreation or entertainment areas, transportation, and housing facilities provided for employees, that are segregated by explicit directive or are in fact segregated on the basis of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin because of written or oral policies or employee custom. The term does not include separate or single-user rest rooms or necessary dressing or sleeping areas provided to assure privacy between the sexes. (c) The Contractor shall include this clause in every subcontract and purchase order that is subject to the Equal Opportunity clause of this Contract. TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE The Owner may terminate this Contract in whole or in part at any time by providing written notice to the Contractor . Such action may be without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner. Upon receipt of a written notice of termination, except as explicitly directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately proceed with the following obligations regardless of any delay in determining or adjusting amounts due under this clause: 1. Contractor must immediately discontinue work as specified in the written notice. 2. Terminate all subcontracts to the extent they relate to the work terminated under the notice. 3. Discontinue orders for materials and services except as directed by the written notice. 4. Deliver to the owner all fabricated and partially fabricated parts, completed and partially completed work, supplies, equipment and materials acquired prior to termination of the work and as directed in the written notice. 5. Complete performance of the work not terminated by the notice. 6. Take action as directed by the owner to protect and preserve property and work related to this Contract that Owner will take possession. Owner agrees to pay Contractor for: a) completed and acceptable work executed in accordance with the Contract documents prior to the effective date of termination; b) documented expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing work and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract documents in connection with uncompleted work; New Electrical Building Page 46 of 497 c) reasonable and substantiated claims, costs and damages incurred in settlement of terminated Contracts with Subcontractor s and Suppliers; d) and reasonable and substantiated expenses to the Contractor directly attributable to Owner’s termination action. Owner will not pay Contractor for loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from the Owner’s termination action. The rights and remedies this clause provide are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract. TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT (CONSTRUCTION) Section 80-09 of FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-10 establishes conditions, rights and remedies associated with Owner termination of this Contract due default of the Contractor. CERTIFICATE REGARDING DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (CONTRACTOR ) Contractor certifies that at the time it submitted its bid that neither it nor its principals are presently debarred or suspended by any Federal department or agency from participation in this transaction. CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (CONTRACTOR REGARDING LOWER TIER PARTICIPANTS) The Contractor, by administering each lower tier subcontract that exceeds $25,000 as a “covered transaction”, must verify each lower tier participant of a “covered transaction” under the project is not presently debarred or otherwise disqualified from participation in this federally assisted project. The Contractor will accomplish this by: 1. Checking the System for Award Management at website: http://www.sam.gov 2. Collecting a certification statement similar to the Certificate Regarding Debarment and Suspension (Contractor ), above. 3. Inserting a clause or condition in the covered transaction with the lower tier Contract If the FAA later determines that a lower tier participant failed to tell a higher tier that it was excluded or disqualified at the time it entered the covered transaction, the FAA may pursue any available remedy, including suspension and debarment of the non-compliant participant. BREACH OF CONTRACT TERMS Any violation or breach of the terms of this Contract on the part of the Contractor or Subcontractor may result in the suspension or termination of this Contract or such other action which may be necessary to enforce the rights of the parties under this Contract. Owner will provide Contractor written notice that describes the nature of the breach and corrective actions the Contractor must undertake in order to avoid termination of the Contract. Owner reserves the right to withhold payments to Contractor until such time the Contractor corrects the breach or the Owner elects to terminate the Contract. The Owner’s notice will identify a specific date by which the Contractor must correct the breach. Owner may proceed with termination of the Contract if the Contractor fails to correct the breach by deadline indicated in the Owner’s notice. New Electrical Building Page 47 of 497 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder are in addition to, and not a limitation of, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. CLEAN AIR AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders, and regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act (42 U.S.C. § 740-7671q) and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended (33 U.S.C. § 1251-1387). The Contractor agrees to report any violation to the Owner immediately upon discovery. The Owner assumes responsibility for notifying the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and the Federal Aviation Administration. Contractor must include this requirement in all subcontracts that exceeds $150,000. CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT REQUIREMENTS 1. Overtime Requirements. No Contractor or Subcontractor Contracting for any part of the Contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. 2. Violation; Liability for Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this clause, the Contractor and any Subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and Subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under Contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this clause, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this clause. 3. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages. The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) or the Owner shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor under any such Contract or any other Federal Contract with the same prime Contractor , or any other Federally-assisted Contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime Contractor , such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or Subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph 2 of this clause. New Electrical Building Page 48 of 497 4. Subcontractors. The Contractor or Subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) and also a clause requiring the Subcontractor to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any Subcontractor or lower tier Subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this clause. TEXTING WHEN DRIVING In accordance with Executive Order 13513, "Federal Leadership on Reducing Text Messaging While Driving" (10/1/2009) and DOT Order 3902.10 “Text Messaging While Driving” (12/30/2009), FAA encourages recipients of Federal grant funds to adopt and enforce safety policies that decrease crashes by distracted drivers, including policies to ban text messaging while driving when performing work related to a grant or sub-grant. In support of this initiative, the Owner encourages the Contractor to promote policies and initiatives for its employees and other work personnel that decrease crashes by distracted drivers, including policies that ban text messaging while driving motor vehicles while performing work activities associated with the project. The Contractor must include the substance of this clause in all sub-tier Contracts exceeding $3,500 and involve driving a motor vehicle in performance of work activities associated with the project. PROCUREMENT OF RECOVERED MATERIALS Contractor and Subcontractor agree to comply with Section 6002 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act, as amended by the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, and the regulatory provisions of 40 CFR Part 247. In the performance of this Contract and to the extent practicable, the Contractor and Subcontractors are to use of products containing the highest percentage of recovered materials for items designated by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under 40 CFR Part 247 whenever: a) The Contract requires procurement of $10,000 or more of a designated item during the fiscal year; or, b) The Contractor has procured $10,000 or more of a designated item using Federal funding during the previous fiscal year. The list of EPA-designated items is available at www.epa.gov/epawaste/conserve/tools/cpg/products/. Section 6002(c) establishes exceptions to the preference for recovery of EPA-designated products if the Contractor can demonstrate the item is: a) Not reasonably available within a timeframe providing for compliance with the Contract performance schedule; b) Fails to meet reasonable Contract performance requirements; or c) Is only available at an unreasonable price. New Electrical Building Page 49 of 497 DAVIS BACON WAGES New Electrical Building Page 50 of 497 WAGE RATE DETERMINATION General Decision Number: GA180165 01/12/2018 GA165 Superseded General Decision Number: GA20170165 State: Georgia Construction Type: Building County: Richmond County in Georgia. Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.35 for calendar year 2018 applies to all Contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the Contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this Contract is covered by the EO, the Contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.35 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the Contract in calendar year 2018. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of Contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to Contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on Contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govContracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/05/2018 1 01/12/2018 BOIL0026-001 01/01/2013 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 24.91 19.69 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * ELEV0032-001 01/01/2018 Rates Fringes ELEVATOR MECHANIC................$ 40.08 32.645 New Electrical Building Page 51 of 497 PAID HOLIDAYS: a. New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran’s Day, Thanksgiving Day, the Friday after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. b. Employer contributes 8% of regular hourly rate to vacation pay credit for employee who has worked in business more than 5 years; 6% for less than 5 years' service. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENGI0474-003 07/01/2017 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator, Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader, Bulldozer, Forklift (under 15 tons), and Loader..................$ 25.02 13.83 Crane (over 10 tons) and Forklift (15 tons and over).$ 26.85 13.83 Crane (over 120 tons).......$ 27.85 13.83 Crane (over 250 tons).......$ 28.85 13.83 Oiler.......................$ 22.68 13.83 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0150-006 10/01/2017 Rates Fringes PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER...............$ 24.88 14.36 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0085-013 07/01/2017 Rates Fringes SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only)...............$ 29.78 12.31 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SUGA2012-072 08/11/2012 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 16.00 0.00 CARPENTER, Includes Drywall New Electrical Building Page 52 of 497 Hanging and Metal Stud Installation......................$ 15.29 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 16.58 0.00 DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER...........$ 17.00 0.00 ELECTRICIAN......................$ 19.72 3.79 HVAC MECHANIC (Installation of HVAC Unit Only, Excludes Installation of HVAC Pipe and Duct)............................$ 18.00 3.89 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 17.94 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 20.00 0.35 LABORER: Common or General......$ 10.18 0.32 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick...$ 9.00 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer..............$ 12.00 0.23 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade..........$ 17.52 0.00 PAINTER: Brush, Roller and Spray............................$ 16.00 1.62 ROOFER, Excludes Installation of Metal Roofs...................$ 10.27 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (Metal Roofs Installation)..............$ 22.40 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER, Excludes HVAC Duct and Metal Roof Installation.....................$ 22.40 0.00 TILE FINISHER....................$ 10.31 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 19.50 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck........$ 12.70 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: Lowboy Truck......$ 17.41 0.00 ---------------------------------------------------------------- New Electrical Building Page 53 of 497 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractor s applies to all Contracts subject to the Davis- Bacon Act for which the Contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this Contract is covered by the EO, the Contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health- related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on Contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govContracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards Contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four-letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 New Electrical Building Page 54 of 497 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current New Electrical Building Page 55 of 497 negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 New Electrical Building Page 56 of 497 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 57 of 497 GENERAL PROVISIONS SECTION 10 DEFINITION OF TERMS Whenever the following terms are used in these specifications, in the Contract, or in any documents or other instruments pertaining to construction where these specifications govern, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as follows: 10-01 AASHTO. The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials, the successor association to AASHO. 10-02 Access road. The right-of-way, the roadway and all improvements constructed thereon connecting the airport to a public highway. 10-03 Advertisement. A public announcement, as required by local law, inviting bids for work to be performed and materials to be furnished. 10-04 Airport Improvement Program (AIP). A grant-in-aid program administered by the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). 10-05 Air operations area (AOA). For the purpose of these specifications, the term air operations area (AOA) shall mean any area of the airport used or intended to be used for the landing, takeoff, or surface maneuvering of aircraft. An air operation area shall include such paved or unpaved areas that are used or intended to be used for the unobstructed movement of aircraft in addition to its associated runway, taxiway, or apron. 10-06 Airport. Airport means an area of land or water which is used or intended to be used for the landing and takeoff of aircraft; an appurtenant area used or intended to be used for airport buildings or other airport facilities or rights of way; and airport buildings and facilities located in any of these areas and includes a heliport. 10-07 ASTM International (ASTM). Formerly known as the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 10-08 Award. The Owner’s notice to the successful Contractor of the acceptance of the submitted bid. 10-09 Contractor. Any individual, partnership, firm, or corporation, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative, who submits a proposal for the work contemplated. New Electrical Building Page 58 of 497 10-10 Bid. The written offer of the Contractor (when submitted on the approved bid form) to perform the contemplated work and furnish the necessary materials in accordance with the provisions of the plans and specifications. 10-11 Bid guaranty. The security furnished with a bid to guarantee that the Contractor will enter into a Contract if his or her bid is accepted by the owner. 10-12 Building area. An area on the airport to be used, considered, or intended to be used for airport buildings or other airport facilities or rights-of-way together with all airport buildings and facilities located thereon. 10-13 Calendar day. Every day shown on the calendar. 10-14 Change order. A written order to the Contractor covering changes in the plans, specifications, or proposal quantities and establishing the basis of payment and Contract time adjustment, if any, for the work affected by such changes. The work, covered by a change order, must be within the scope of the Contract. 10-15 Contract. The written agreement covering the work to be performed. The awarded Contract shall include, but is not limited to: Advertisement, Contract Form, Proposal, Performance Bond, Payment Bond, any required insurance certificates, Specifications, Plans, and any addenda issued to Contractors. 10-16 Contract item (pay item). A specific unit of work for which a price is provided in the Contract. 10-17 Contract time. The number of calendar days or working days, stated in the proposal, allowed for completion of the Contract, including authorized time extensions. If a calendar date of completion is stated in the proposal, in lieu of a number of calendar or working days, the Contract shall be completed by that date. 10-18 Contractor. The individual, partnership, firm, or corporation primarily liable for the acceptable performance of the work contracted and for the payment of all legal debts pertaining to the work who acts directly or through lawful agents or employees to complete the Contract work. 10-19 Contractor’s laboratory. The Contractor’s quality control organization in accordance with the Contractor Quality Control Program. 10-20 Construction Safety and Phasing Plan (CSPP). The overall plan for safety and phasing of a construction project developed by the airport operator or developed by the airport operator’s New Electrical Building Page 59 of 497 consultant and approved by the airport operator. It is included and becomes part of the project specifications. 10-21 Drainage system. The system of pipes, ditches, and structures by which surface or subsurface waters are collected and conducted from the airport area. 10-22 Engineer. The individual, partnership, firm, or corporation duly authorized by the Owner to be responsible for engineering inspection of the Contract work and acting directly or through an authorized representative. 10-23 Equipment. All machinery, together with the necessary supplies for upkeep and maintenance, and also all tools and apparatus necessary for the proper construction and acceptable completion of the work. 10-24 Extra work. An item of work not provided for in the awarded Contract as previously modified by change order or supplemental agreement, but which is found by the Engineer to be necessary to complete the work within the intended scope of the Contract. 10-25 FAA. The Federal Aviation Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. When used to designate a person, FAA shall mean the Administrator or his or her duly authorized representative. 10-26 Federal specifications. The Federal Specifications and Standards, Commercial Item Descriptions, and supplements, amendments, and indices thereto are prepared and issued by the General Services Administration of the Federal Government. 10-27 Force account. Force account work is planning, engineering, or construction work done by the Sponsor’s employees. 10-28 Inspector. An authorized representative of the Engineer assigned to make all necessary inspections and tests of the work performed or being performed, or of the materials furnished or being furnished by the Contractor. 10-29 Intention of terms. Whenever, in these specifications or on the plans, the words “directed,” “required,” “permitted,” “ordered,” “designated,” “prescribed,” or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation, or prescription of the Engineer is intended; and similarly, the words “approved,” “acceptable,” “satisfactory,” or words of like import, shall mean approved by, or acceptable to, or satisfactory to the Engineer, subject in each case to the final determination of the Owner. New Electrical Building Page 60 of 497 Any reference to a specific requirement of a numbered paragraph of the Contract specifications or a cited standard shall be interpreted to include all general requirements of the entire section, specification item, or cited standard that may be pertinent to such specific reference. 10-30 Laboratory. The official testing laboratories of the Owner or such other laboratories as may be designated by the Engineer. Also referred to as “Engineer’s Laboratory” or “quality assurance laboratory.” 10-31 Lighting. A system of fixtures providing or controlling the light sources used on or near the airport or within the airport buildings. The field lighting includes all luminous signals, markers, floodlights, and illuminating devices used on or near the airport or to aid in the operation of aircraft landing at, taking off from, or taxiing on the airport surface. 10-32 Major and minor Contract items. A major Contract item shall be any item that is listed in the proposal, the total cost of which is equal to or greater than 20% of the total amount of the award Contract. All other items shall be considered minor Contract items. 10-33 Materials. Any substance specified for use in the construction of the Contract work. 10-34 Notice to Proceed (NTP). A written notice to the Contractor to begin the actual Contract work on a previously agreed to date. If applicable, the Notice to Proceed shall state the date on which the Contract time begins. 10-35 Owner. The term “Owner” shall mean the party of the first part or the contracting agency signatory to the Contract. Where the term “Owner” is capitalized in this document, it shall mean airport Sponsor only. 10-36 Passenger Facility Charge (PFC). Per 14 CFR Part 158 and 49 USC § 40117, a PFC is a charge imposed by a public agency on passengers enplaned at a commercial service airport it controls.” 10-37 Pavement. The combined surface course, base course, and subbase course, if any, considered as a single unit. 10-38 Payment bond. The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his or her surety as a guaranty that the Contractor will pay in full all bills and accounts for materials and labor used in the construction of the work. 10-39 Performance bond. The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and his or her surety as a guaranty that the Contractor will complete the work in accordance with the terms of the Contract. New Electrical Building Page 61 of 497 10-40 Plans. The official drawings or exact reproductions which show the location, character, dimensions and details of the airport and the work to be done and which are to be considered as a part of the Contract, supplementary to the specifications. 10-41 Project. The agreed scope of work for accomplishing the work in this Contract. 10-42 Proposal. Where the term “proposal” is used in the Federal or FAA technical specifications, it shall be interpreted to mean “bid” for this Project. 10-43 Runway. The area on the airport prepared for the landing and takeoff of aircraft. 10-44 Specifications. A part of the Contract containing the written directions and requirements for completing the Contract work. Standards for specifying materials or testing which are cited in the Contract specifications by reference shall have the same force and effect as if included in the Contract physically. 10-45 Sponsor. A Sponsor is defined in 49 USC § 47102(24) as a public agency that submits to the FAA for an AIP grant; or a private Owner of a public-use airport that submits to the FAA an application for an AIP grant for the airport. 10-46 Structures. Airport facilities such as bridges; culverts; catch basins, inlets, retaining walls, cribbing; storm and sanitary sewer lines; water lines; underdrains; electrical ducts, manholes, handholes, lighting fixtures and bases; transformers; flexible and rigid pavements; navigational aids; buildings; vaults; and, other manmade features of the airport that may be encountered in the work and not otherwise classified herein. 10-47 Subgrade. The soil that forms the pavement foundation. 10-48 Superintendent. The Contractor’s executive representative who is present on the work during progress, authorized to receive and fulfill instructions from the Engineer, and who shall supervise and direct the construction. 10-49 Supplemental agreement. A written agreement between the Contractor and the Owner covering (1) work that would increase or decrease the total amount of the awarded Contract, or any major Contract item, by more than 25%, such increased or decreased work being within the scope of the originally awarded Contract; or (2) work that is not within the scope of the originally awarded Contract. 10-50 Surety. The corporation, partnership, or individual, other than the Contractor, executing payment or performance bonds that are furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. New Electrical Building Page 62 of 497 10-51 Taxiway. For the purpose of this document, the term taxiway means the portion of the air operations area of an airport that has been designated by competent airport authority for movement of aircraft to and from the airport’s runways, aircraft parking areas, and terminal areas. 10-52 Work. The furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary or convenient to the Contractor’s performance of all duties and obligations imposed by the Contract, plans, and specifications. 10-53 Working day. A working day shall be any day other than a legal holiday, Saturday, or Sunday on which the normal working forces of the Contractor may proceed with regular work for at least six (6) hours toward completion of the Contract. When work is suspended for causes beyond the Contractor’s control, it will not be counted as a working day. Saturdays, Sundays and holidays on which the Contractor’s forces engage in regular work will be considered as working days. END OF SECTION 10 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 63 of 497 SECTION 20 CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS Scope of Work Including but not limited to: Construction of a new 800 SF Airfield Electrical Building on 500 CY building pad embankment; Installation of new Airport Electrical Building Equipment; Install 9 new Constant Current Regulators, ALCMS & Standby Engine Generator; Install new Duct Bank, Airfield Electrical Cable, Airfield Fiber Optic Communications cable, and 20 new Electrical Manholes; Construct new Recycled Asphalt Millings access road. Federal Requirements This project is funded under provision of the Airport Improvement Program (AIP) established by the Airport and Airway Improvement Act of 1982 (Public Law 97-248). Certain mandatory federal requirements apply to this solicitation and are included in the Federal Provisions section of this document. To be eligible for consideration Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local laws pertaining to the required services including, but not limited to, equal employment opportunity provisions, the Augusta Procurement Policies, Davis Bacon wage provisions, Buy American requirements, disadvantaged business enterprise opportunity provisions, and all conditions of the Contract documents, plans and specifications. The Augusta Aviation Commission (SPONSOR), in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 STAT. 252, 42 Code of Federal Regulations, Department of transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally Assisted Programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies Contractor that it will affirmatively ensure that, in any Contract entered into pursuant to this notice, Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE’s) will be afforded full opportunity submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, religion, sex or national origin in consideration for an award. Contractors shall make good faith efforts as defined in Appendix A of 49 CFR Part 26 Regulations of the Office of the Secretary of Transportation, to subcontract 13.3% or more of the dollar value of the prime Contract to small business concerns owned and controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals (DBE’s). In the event that the Contractor qualifies as a DBE, the Contract goal shall be deemed to have been met. The Contractor will be required to submit information, as described in the bid documents, concerning the DBE’s that will participate in the Contract. If the Contractor fails to achieve the Contract goal stated herein, it will be required to provide documentation demonstrating that it made good faith efforts in attempting to do so at the time of bid opening. New Electrical Building Page 64 of 497 Bonding Requirements If Contractor fails to provide the required materials and/or execute the Contract within fifteen (15) days after being furnished with the necessary Contract and bond forms, the bid guaranty will be forfeited to the Sponsor (in accordance with Section 30-07 of the General Provisions). The Contractor will be required to furnish satisfactory 100 percent performance bond as well as labor and material bond. The plans, specifications, and other documents designated in the bid form shall be considered a part of the bid whether attached or not. 20-05 Interpretation of estimated proposal quantities. An estimate of quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under these specifications. It is the result of careful calculations and is believed to be correct. The Owner does not expressly, or by implication, agree that the actual quantities involved will correspond exactly therewith; nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstanding or deception because of such estimates of quantities, or of the character, location, or other conditions pertaining to the work. Payment to the Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of work performed or materials furnished in accordance with the plans and specifications. It is understood that the quantities may be increased or decreased as hereinafter provided in the subsection 40-02 titled ALTERATION OF WORK AND QUANTITIES of Section 40 without in any way invalidating the unit bid prices. 20-06 Examination of plans, specifications, and site. The Contractor is expected to carefully examine the site of the proposed work, the bid, plans, specifications, and Contract forms. Contractors shall satisfy themselves as to the character, quality, and quantities of work to be performed, materials to be furnished, and as to the requirements of the proposed Contract. The submission of a bid shall be prima facie evidence that the Contractor has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the work and as to the requirements of the proposed Contract, plans, and specifications. Boring logs and other records of subsurface investigations and tests are available for inspection of Contractors. It is understood and agreed that such subsurface information, whether included in the plans, specifications, or otherwise made available to the Contractor, was obtained and is intended for the Owner’s design and estimating purposes only. Such information has been made available for the convenience of all Contractors. It is further understood and agreed that each Contractor is solely responsible for all assumptions, deductions, or conclusions which the Contractor may make or obtain from his or her examination of the boring logs and other records of subsurface investigations and tests that are furnished by the Owner. END OF SECTION 20 New Electrical Building Page 65 of 497 SECTION 40 SCOPE OF WORK 40-01 Intent of Contract. The intent of the Contract is to provide for construction and completion, in every detail, of the work described. It is further intended that the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, and supplies required to complete the work in accordance with the plans, specifications, and terms of the Contract. 40-02 Alteration of work and quantities. The Owner reserves and shall have the right to make such alterations in the work as may be necessary or desirable to complete the work originally intended in an acceptable manner. Unless otherwise specified herein, the Engineer shall be and is hereby authorized to make such alterations in the work as may increase or decrease the originally awarded Contract quantities, provided that the aggregate of such alterations does not change the total Contract cost or the total cost of any major Contract item by more than 25% (total cost being based on the unit prices and estimated quantities in the awarded Contract). Alterations that do not exceed the 25% limitation shall not invalidate the Contract nor release the surety, and the Contractor agrees to accept payment for such alterations as if the altered work had been a part of the original Contract. These alterations that are for work within the general scope of the Contract shall be covered by “Change Orders” issued by the Engineer. Change orders for altered work shall include extensions of Contract time where, in the Engineer’s opinion, such extensions are commensurate with the amount and difficulty of added work. Should the aggregate amount of altered work exceed the 25% limitation hereinbefore specified, such excess altered work shall be covered by supplemental agreement. If the Owner and the Contractor are unable to agree on a unit adjustment for any Contract item that requires a supplemental agreement, the Owner reserves the right to terminate the Contract with respect to the item and make other arrangements for its completion. Supplemental agreements shall be approved by the FAA and shall include all applicable Federal Contract provisions for procurement and contracting required under AIP. Supplemental agreements shall also require consent of the Contractor’s surety and separate performance and payment bonds. 40-03 Omitted items. The Engineer may, in the Owner’s best interest, omit from the work any Contract item, except major Contract items. Major Contract items may be omitted by a supplemental agreement. Such omission of Contract items shall not invalidate any other Contract provision or requirement. Should a Contract item be omitted or otherwise ordered to be non-performed, the Contractor shall be paid for all work performed toward completion of such item prior to the date of the order New Electrical Building Page 66 of 497 to omit such item. Payment for work performed shall be in accordance with the subsection 90-04 titled PAYMENT FOR OMITTED ITEMS of Section 90. 40-04 Extra work. Should acceptable completion of the Contract require the Contractor to perform an item of work for which no basis of payment has been provided in the original Contract or previously issued change orders or supplemental agreements, the same shall be called “Extra Work.” Extra Work that is within the general scope of the Contract shall be covered by written change order. Change orders for such Extra Work shall contain agreed unit prices for performing the change order work in accordance with the requirements specified in the order, and shall contain any adjustment to the Contract time that, in the Engineer’s opinion, is necessary for completion of such Extra Work. When determined by the Engineer to be in the Owner’s best interest, the Engineer may order the Contractor to proceed with Extra Work as provided in the subsection 90-05 titled PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK of Section 90. Extra Work that is necessary for acceptable completion of the project, but is not within the general scope of the work covered by the original Contract shall be covered by a Supplemental Agreement as defined in the subsection 10-48 titled SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENT of Section 10. Any claim for payment of Extra Work that is not covered by written agreement (change order or supplemental agreement) shall be rejected by the Owner. 40-05 Maintenance of traffic. It is the explicit intention of the Contract that the safety of aircraft, as well as the Contractor’s equipment and personnel, is the most important consideration. a. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall provide for the free and unobstructed movement of aircraft in the air operations areas (AOAs) of the airport with respect to his or her own operations and the operations of all subcontractors as specified in the subsection 80-04 titled LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS of Section 80. It is further understood and agreed that the Contractor shall provide for the uninterrupted operation of visual and electronic signals (including power supplies thereto) used in the guidance of aircraft while operating to, from, and upon the airport as specified in the subsection 70-15 titled CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY SERVICE AND FACILITIES OF OTHERS in Section 70. b. With respect to his or her own operations and the operations of all subcontractors, the Contractor shall provide marking, lighting, and other acceptable means of identifying personnel, equipment, vehicles, storage areas, and any work area or condition that may be hazardous to the operation of aircraft, fire-rescue equipment, or maintenance vehicles at the Airport. New Electrical Building Page 67 of 497 c. When the Contract requires the maintenance of vehicular traffic on an existing road, street, or highway during the Contractor’s performance of work that is otherwise provided for in the Contract, plans, and specifications, the Contractor shall keep such road, street, or highway open to all traffic and shall provide such maintenance as may be required to accommodate traffic. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage caused by the Contractor’s equipment and personnel. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain barricades, warning signs, flag person, and other traffic control devices in reasonable conformity with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/), unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall also construct and maintain in a safe condition any temporary connections necessary for ingress to and egress from abutting property or intersecting roads, streets or highways. 40-06 Removal of existing structures. All existing structures encountered within the established lines, grades, or grading sections shall be removed by the Contractor, unless such existing structures are otherwise specified to be relocated, adjusted up or down, salvaged, abandoned in place, reused in the work or to remain in place. The cost of removing such existing structures shall not be measured or paid for directly, but shall be included in the various Contract items. Should the Contractor encounter an existing structure (above or below ground) in the work for which the disposition is not indicated on the plans, the Engineer shall be notified prior to disturbing such structure. The disposition of existing structures so encountered shall be immediately determined by the Engineer in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. Except as provided in the subsection 40-07 titled RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FOUND IN THE WORK of this section, it is intended that all existing materials or structures that may be encountered (within the lines, grades, or grading sections established for completion of the work) shall be used in the work as otherwise provided for in the Contract and shall remain the property of the Owner when so used in the work. 40-07 Rights in and use of materials found in the work. Should the Contractor encounter any material such as (but not restricted to) sand, stone, gravel, slag, or concrete slabs within the established lines, grades, or grading sections, the use of which is intended by the terms of the Contract to be either embankment or waste, the Contractor may at his or her option either: 1. a. Use such material in another Contract item, providing such use is approved by the Engineer and is in conformance with the Contract specifications applicable to such use; or, 2. b. Remove such material from the site, upon written approval of the Engineer; or 3. c. Use such material for the Contractor’s own temporary construction on site; or, New Electrical Building Page 68 of 497 4. d. Use such material as intended by the terms of the Contract. Should the Contractor wish to exercise option a., b., or c., the Contractor shall request the Engineer’s approval in advance of such use. Should the Engineer approve the Contractor’s request to exercise option a., b., or c., the Contractor shall be paid for the excavation or removal of such material at the applicable Contract price. The Contractor shall replace, at his or her own expense, such removed or excavated material with an agreed equal volume of material that is acceptable for use in constructing embankment, backfills, or otherwise to the extent that such replacement material is needed to complete the Contract work. The Contractor shall not be charged for use of such material used in the work or removed from the site. Should the Engineer approve the Contractor’s exercise of option a., the Contractor shall be paid, at the applicable Contract price, for furnishing and installing such material in accordance with requirements of the Contract item in which the material is used. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall make no claim for delays by reason of his or her exercise of option a., b., or c. The Contractor shall not excavate, remove, or otherwise disturb any material, structure, or part of a structure which is located outside the lines, grades, or grading sections established for the work, except where such excavation or removal is provided for in the Contract, plans, or specifications. 40-08 Final cleanup. Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment will be made, the Contractor shall remove from the site all machinery, equipment, surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, temporary structures, and stumps or portions of trees. The Contractor shall cut all brush and woods within the limits indicated and shall leave the site in a neat and presentable condition. Material cleared from the site and deposited on adjacent property will not be considered as having been disposed of satisfactorily, unless the Contractor has obtained the written permission of such property Owner. END OF SECTION 40 New Electrical Building Page 69 of 497 SECTION 50 CONTROL OF WORK 50-01 Authority of the Engineer. The Engineer shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, and as to the manner of performance and rate of progress of the work. The Engineer shall decide all questions that may arise as to the interpretation of the specifications or plans relating to the work. The Engineer shall determine the amount and quality of the several kinds of work performed and materials furnished which are to be paid for the under Contract. The Engineer does not have the authority to accept pavements that do not conform to FAA specification requirements. 50-02 Conformity with plans and specifications. All work and all materials furnished shall be in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, grading sections, cross-sections, dimensions, material requirements, and testing requirements that are specified (including specified tolerances) in the Contract, plans or specifications. If the Engineer finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished product not within reasonably close conformity with the plans and specifications but that the portion of the work affected will, in his or her opinion, result in a finished product having a level of safety, economy, durability, and workmanship acceptable to the Owner, the Engineer will advise the Owner of his or her determination that the affected work be accepted and remain in place. In this event, the Engineer will document the determination and recommend to the Owner a basis of acceptance that will provide for an adjustment in the Contract price for the affected portion of the work. The Engineer’s determination and recommended Contract price adjustments will be based on sound engineering judgment and such tests or retests of the affected work as are, in the Engineer’s opinion, needed. Changes in the Contract price shall be covered by Contract change order or supplemental agreement as applicable. If the Engineer finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished product are not in reasonably close conformity with the plans and specifications and have resulted in an unacceptable finished product, the affected work or materials shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the expense of the Contractor in accordance with the Engineer’s written orders. For the purpose of this subsection, the term “reasonably close conformity” shall not be construed as waiving the Contractor’s responsibility to complete the work in accordance with the Contract, plans, and specifications. The term shall not be construed as waiving the Engineer’s responsibility to insist on strict compliance with the requirements of the Contract, plans, and specifications New Electrical Building Page 70 of 497 during the Contractor’s execution of the work, when, in the Engineer’s opinion, such compliance is essential to provide an acceptable finished portion of the work. For the purpose of this subsection, the term “reasonably close conformity” is also intended to provide the Engineer with the authority, after consultation with the FAA, to use sound engineering judgment in his or her determinations as to acceptance of work that is not in strict conformity, but will provide a finished product equal to or better than that intended by the requirements of the Contract, plans and specifications. The Engineer will not be responsible for the Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction or the safety precautions incident thereto. 50-03 Coordination of Contract, plans, and specifications. The Contract, plans, specifications, and all referenced standards cited are essential parts of the Contract requirements. A requirement occurring in one is as binding as though occurring in all. They are intended to be complementary and to describe and provide for a complete work. In case of discrepancy, calculated dimensions will govern over scaled dimensions; Contract Technical Specifications shall govern over Contract General Provisions, Plans, cited standards for materials or testing, and cited Advisory Circulars (ACs); Contract General Provisions shall govern over Plans, cited standards for materials or testing, and cited ACs; plans shall govern over cited standards for materials or testing and cited ACs. If any paragraphs contained in the Special Provisions conflict with General Provisions or Technical Specifications, the Special Provisions shall govern. From time to time, discrepancies within cited testing standards occur due to the timing of the change, edits, and/or replacement of the standards. If the Contractor discovers any apparent discrepancy within standard test methods, the Contractor shall immediately ask the Engineer for an interpretation and decision, and such decision shall be final. 50-04 Cooperation of Contractor. The Contractor will be supplied with five copies each of the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall have available on the work at all times one copy each of the Plans and Specifications. Additional copies of Plans and Specifications may be obtained by the Contractor for the cost of reproduction. The Contractor shall give constant attention to the work to facilitate the progress thereof, and shall cooperate with the Engineer and his or her inspectors and with other contractors in every way possible. The Contractor shall have a competent superintendent on the work at all times who is fully authorized as his or her agent on the work. The superintendent shall be capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the plans and specifications and shall receive and fulfill instructions from the Engineer or his or her authorized representative. New Electrical Building Page 71 of 497 50-05 Cooperation between contractors. The Owner reserves the right to Contract for and perform other or additional work on or near the work covered by this Contract. When separate contracts are let within the limits of any one project, each Contractor shall conduct the work so as not to interfere with or hinder the progress of completion of the work being performed by other Contractors. Contractors working on the same project shall cooperate with each other as directed. Each Contractor involved shall assume all liability, financial or otherwise, in connection with his or her Contract and shall protect and save harmless the Owner from any and all damages or claims that may arise because of inconvenience, delays, or loss experienced because of the presence and operations of other Contractors working within the limits of the same project. The Contractor shall arrange his or her work and shall place and dispose of the materials being used so as not to interfere with the operations of the other Contractors within the limits of the same project. The Contractor shall join his or her work with that of the others in an acceptable manner and shall perform it in proper sequence to that of the others. 50-06 Construction layout and stakes. The Engineer shall establish horizontal and vertical control only. The Contractor must establish all layout required for the construction of the work. Such stakes and markings as the Engineer may set for either their own or the Contractor’s guidance shall be preserved by the Contractor. In case of negligence on the part of the Contractor, or their employees, resulting in the destruction of such stakes or markings, an amount equal to the cost of replacing the same may be deducted from subsequent estimates due the Contractor at the discretion of the Engineer. The Contractor will be required to furnish all lines, grades and measurements from the control points necessary for the proper execution and control of the work contracted for under these specifications. The Contractor must give copies of survey notes to the Engineer for each area of construction and for each placement of material as specified to allow the Engineer to make periodic checks for conformance with plan grades, alignments and grade tolerances required by the applicable material specifications. All surveys must be provided to the Engineer prior to commencing work items that will cover or disturb the survey staking as set by the Contractor’s surveyor. Survey(s) and notes shall be provided in the following format(s): AutoCAD Release 2016. In the case of error, on the part of the Contractor, their surveyor, employees or subcontractors, resulting in established grades, alignment or grade tolerances that do not concur with those specified or shown on the plans, the Contractor is solely responsible for correction, removal, replacement and all associated costs at no additional cost to the Owner. New Electrical Building Page 72 of 497 No direct payment will be made, unless otherwise specified in Contract documents, for this labor, materials, or other expenses. The cost shall be included in the price of the bid for the various items of the Contract. Construction Staking and Layout includes but is not limited to: 5. a. Clearing and Grubbing perimeter staking 6. b. Rough Grade slope stakes at 100-foot (30-m) stations 7. c. Drainage Swales slope stakes and flow line blue tops at 50-foot (15-m) stations Subgrade blue tops at 25-foot (7.5-m) stations and 25-foot (7.5-m) offset distance (maximum) for the following section locations: 8. a. Runway – minimum five (5) per station 9. b. Taxiways – minimum three (3) per station 10. c. Holding apron areas – minimum three (3) per station 11. d. Roadways – minimum three (3) per station Base Course blue tops at 25-foot (7.5-m) stations and 25-foot (7.5-m) offset distance (maximum) for the following section locations: 12. a. Runway – minimum five (5) per station 13. b. Taxiways – minimum three (3) per station 14. c. Holding apron areas – minimum three (3) per station Pavement areas: 15. a. Edge of Pavement hubs and tacks (for stringline by Contractor) at 100-foot (30-m) stations. 16. b. Between Lifts at 25-foot (7.5-m) stations for the following section locations: 17. (1) Runways – each paving lane width 18. (2) Taxiways – each paving lane width 19. (3) Holding areas – each paving lane width 20. c. After finish paving operations at 50-foot (15-m) stations: 21. (1) All paved areas – Edge of each paving lane prior to next paving lot 22. d. Shoulder and safety area blue tops at 50-foot (15-m) stations and at all break points with maximum of 50-foot (15-m) offsets. New Electrical Building Page 73 of 497 23. e. Fence lines at 100-foot (30-m) stations minimum. 24. f. Electrical and Communications System locations, lines and grades including but not limited to duct runs, connections, fixtures, signs, lights, Visual Approach Slope Indicators (VASIs), Precision Approach Path Indicators (PAPIs), Runway End Identifier Lighting (REIL), Wind Cones, Distance Markers (signs), pull boxes and manholes. 25. g. Drain lines, cut stakes and alignment on 25-foot (7.5-m) stations, inlet and manholes. 26. h. Painting and Striping layout (pinned with 1.5 inch PK nails) marked for paint Contractor. (All nails shall be removed after painting). 27. i. Laser, or other automatic control devices, shall be checked with temporary control point or grade hub at a minimum of once per 400 feet (120 m) per pass (that is, paving lane). The establishment of Survey Control and/or reestablishment of survey control shall be by a State Licensed Land Surveyor. Controls and stakes disturbed or suspect of having been disturbed shall be checked and/or reset as directed by the Engineer without additional cost to the Owner. 50-07 Automatically controlled equipment. Whenever batching or mixing plant equipment is required to be operated automatically under the Contract and a breakdown or malfunction of the automatic controls occurs, the equipment may be operated manually or by other methods for a period of 48 hours following the breakdown or malfunction, provided this method of operations will produce results which conform to all other requirements of the Contract. 50-08 Authority and duties of inspectors. Inspectors shall be authorized to inspect all work done and all material furnished. Such inspection may extend to all or any part of the work and to the preparation, fabrication, or manufacture of the materials to be used. Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, or waive any provision of the Contract. Inspectors are not authorized to issue instructions contrary to the plans and specifications or to act as foreman for the Contractor. Inspectors are authorized to notify the Contractor or his or her representatives of any failure of the work or materials to conform to the requirements of the Contract, plans, or specifications and to reject such nonconforming materials in question until such issues can be referred to the Engineer for a decision. 50-09 Inspection of the work. All materials and each part or detail of the work shall be subject to inspection. The Engineer shall be allowed access to all parts of the work and shall be furnished with such information and assistance by the Contractor as is required to make a complete and detailed inspection. New Electrical Building Page 74 of 497 If the Engineer requests it, the Contractor, at any time before acceptance of the work, shall remove or uncover such portions of the finished work as may be directed. After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the work to the standard required by the specifications. Should the work thus exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering, or removing, and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed will be paid for as extra work; but should the work so exposed or examined prove unacceptable, the uncovering, or removing, and the replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed will be at the Contractor’s expense. Any work done, or materials used without supervision or inspection by an authorized representative of the Owner may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense unless the Owner’s representative failed to inspect after having been given reasonable notice in writing that the work was to be performed. Should the Contract work include relocation, adjustment, or any other modification to existing facilities, not the property of the (Contract) Owner, authorized representatives of the Owners of such facilities shall have the right to inspect such work. Such inspection shall in no sense make any facility owner a party to the Contract, and shall in no way interfere with the rights of the parties to this Contract. 50-10 Removal of unacceptable and unauthorized work. All work that does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, plans, and specifications will be considered unacceptable, unless otherwise determined acceptable by the Engineer as provided in the subsection 50-02 titled CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS of this section. Unacceptable work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective materials, damage through carelessness, or any other cause found to exist prior to the final acceptance of the work, shall be removed immediately and replaced in an acceptable manner in accordance with the provisions of the subsection 70-14 titled CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK of Section 70. No removal work made under provision of this subsection shall be done without lines and grades having been established by the Engineer. Work done contrary to the instructions of the Engineer, work done beyond the lines shown on the plans or as established by the Engineer, except as herein specified, or any extra work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed or replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with any order of the Engineer made under the provisions of this subsection, the Engineer will have authority to cause unacceptable work to New Electrical Building Page 75 of 497 be remedied or removed and replaced and unauthorized work to be removed and to deduct the costs incurred by the Owner from any monies due or to become due the Contractor. 50-11 Load restrictions. The Contractor shall comply with all legal load restrictions in the hauling of materials on public roads beyond the limits of the work. A special permit will not relieve the Contractor of liability for damage that may result from the moving of material or equipment. The operation of equipment of such weight or so loaded as to cause damage to structures or to any other type of construction will not be permitted. Hauling of materials over the base course or surface course under construction shall be limited as directed. No loads will be permitted on a concrete pavement, base, or structure before the expiration of the curing period. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage done by his or her hauling equipment and shall correct such damage at his or her own expense. 50-12 Maintenance during construction. The Contractor shall maintain the work during construction and until the work is accepted. Maintenance shall constitute continuous and effective work prosecuted day by day, with adequate equipment and forces so that the work is maintained in satisfactory condition at all times. In the case of a Contract for the placing of a course upon a course or subgrade previously constructed, the Contractor shall maintain the previous course or subgrade during all construction operations. All costs of maintenance work during construction and before the project is accepted shall be included in the unit prices bid on the various Contract items, and the Contractor will not be paid an additional amount for such work. 50-13 Failure to maintain the work. Should the Contractor at any time fail to maintain the work as provided in the subsection 50-12 titled MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION of this section, the Engineer shall immediately notify the Contractor of such noncompliance. Such notification shall specify a reasonable time within which the Contractor shall be required to remedy such unsatisfactory maintenance condition. The time specified will give due consideration to the exigency that exists. Should the Contractor fail to respond to the Engineer’s notification, the Owner may suspend any work necessary for the Owner to correct such unsatisfactory maintenance condition, depending on the exigency that exists. Any maintenance cost incurred by the Owner, shall be deducted from monies due or to become due the Contractor. 50-14 Partial acceptance. If at any time during the execution of the project the Contractor substantially completes a usable unit or portion of the work, the occupancy of which will benefit New Electrical Building Page 76 of 497 the Owner, the Contractor may request the Engineer to make final inspection of that unit. If the Engineer finds upon inspection that the unit has been satisfactorily completed in compliance with the Contract, the Engineer may accept it as being complete, and the Contractor may be relieved of further responsibility for that unit. Such partial acceptance and beneficial occupancy by the Owner shall not void or alter any provision of the Contract. 50-15 Final acceptance. Upon due notice from the Contractor of presumptive completion of the entire project, the Engineer and Owner will make an inspection. If all construction provided for and contemplated by the Contract is found to be complete in accordance with the Contract, plans, and specifications, such inspection shall constitute the final inspection. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing of final acceptance as of the date of the final inspection. If, however, the inspection discloses any work, in whole or in part, as being unsatisfactory, the Engineer will give the Contractor the necessary instructions for correction of same and the Contractor shall immediately comply with and execute such instructions. Upon correction of the work, another inspection will be made which shall constitute the final inspection, provided the work has been satisfactorily completed. In such event, the Engineer will make the final acceptance and notify the Contractor in writing of this acceptance as of the date of final inspection. 50-16 Claims for adjustment and disputes. If for any reason the Contractor deems that additional compensation is due for work or materials not clearly provided for in the Contract, plans, or specifications or previously authorized as extra work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of his or her intention to claim such additional compensation before the Contractor begins the work on which the Contractor bases the claim. If such notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper opportunity by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as required, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive any claim for such additional compensation. Such notice by the Contractor and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of the cost of the work shall not in any way be construed as proving or substantiating the validity of the claim. When the work on which the claim for additional compensation is based has been completed, the Contractor shall, within 10 calendar days, submit a written claim to the Engineer who will present it to the Owner for consideration in accordance with local laws or ordinances. Nothing in this subsection shall be construed as a waiver of the Contractor’s right to dispute final payment based on differences in measurements or computations. END OF SECTION 50 New Electrical Building Page 77 of 497 SECTION 60 CONTROL OF MATERIALS 60-01 Source of supply and quality requirements. The materials used in the work shall conform to the requirements of the Contract, plans, and specifications. Unless otherwise specified, such materials that are manufactured or processed shall be new (as compared to used or reprocessed). In order to expedite the inspection and testing of materials, the Contractor shall furnish complete statements to the Engineer as to the origin, composition, and manufacture of all materials to be used in the work. Such statements shall be furnished promptly after execution of the Contract but, in all cases, prior to delivery of such materials. At the Engineer’s option, materials may be approved at the source of supply before delivery is stated. If it is found after trial that sources of supply for previously approved materials do not produce specified products, the Contractor shall furnish materials from other sources. The Contractor shall furnish airport lighting equipment that conforms to the requirements of cited materials specifications. In addition, where an FAA specification for airport lighting equipment is cited in the plans or specifications, the Contractor shall furnish such equipment that is: 28. a. Listed in advisory circular (AC) 150/5345-53, Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program, and Addendum that is in effect on the date of advertisement; and, 29. b. Produced by the manufacturer as listed in the Addendum cited above for the certified equipment part number. 60-02 Samples, tests, and cited specifications. Unless otherwise designated, all materials used in the work shall be inspected, tested, and approved by the Engineer before incorporation in the work. Any work in which untested materials are used without approval or written permission of the Engineer shall be performed at the Contractor’s risk. Materials found to be unacceptable and unauthorized will not be paid for and, if directed by the Engineer, shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense. Unless otherwise designated, quality assurance tests in accordance with the cited standard methods of ASTM, American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), Federal Specifications, Commercial Item Descriptions, and all other cited methods, which are current on the date of advertisement for bids, will be made by and at the expense of the Engineer. The testing organizations performing on-site quality assurance field tests shall have copies of all referenced standards on the construction site for use by all technicians and other personnel, including the Contractor’s representative at his or her request. Unless otherwise designated, samples for quality assurance will be taken by a qualified representative of the Engineer. All New Electrical Building Page 78 of 497 materials being used are subject to inspection, test, or rejection at any time prior to or during incorporation into the work. Copies of all tests will be furnished to the Contractor’s representative at their request after review and approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall employ a testing organization to perform all Contractor required Quality Control tests. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer resumes on all testing organizations and individual persons who will be performing the tests. The Engineer will determine if such persons are qualified. All the test data shall be reported to the Engineer after the results are known. A legible, handwritten copy of all test data shall be given to the Engineer daily, along with printed reports and electronic copies, in an approved format, on a weekly basis. After completion of the project, and prior to final payment, the Contractor shall submit a final report to the Engineer showing all test data reports, plus an analysis of all results showing ranges, averages, and corrective action taken on all failing tests. 60-03 Certification of compliance. The Engineer may permit the use, prior to sampling and testing, of certain materials or assemblies when accompanied by manufacturer’s certificates of compliance stating that such materials or assemblies fully comply with the requirements of the Contract. The certificate shall be signed by the manufacturer. Each lot of such materials or assemblies delivered to the work must be accompanied by a certificate of compliance in which the lot is clearly identified. Materials or assemblies used on the basis of certificates of compliance may be sampled and tested at any time and if found not to be in conformity with Contract requirements will be subject to rejection whether in place or not. The form and distribution of certificates of compliance shall be as approved by the Engineer. When a material or assembly is specified by “brand name or equal” and the Contractor elects to furnish the specified “brand name,” the Contractor shall be required to furnish the manufacturer’s certificate of compliance for each lot of such material or assembly delivered to the work. Such certificate of compliance shall clearly identify each lot delivered and shall certify as to: 30. a. Conformance to the specified performance, testing, quality or dimensional requirements; and, 31. b. Suitability of the material or assembly for the use intended in the Contract work. Should the Contractor propose to furnish an “or equal” material or assembly, the Contractor shall furnish the manufacturer’s certificates of compliance as hereinbefore described for the specified brand name material or assembly. However, the Engineer shall be the sole judge as to whether the proposed “or equal” is suitable for use in the work. New Electrical Building Page 79 of 497 The Engineer reserves the right to refuse permission for use of materials or assemblies on the basis of certificates of compliance. 60-04 Plant inspection. The Engineer or his or her authorized representative may inspect, at its source, any specified material or assembly to be used in the work. Manufacturing plants may be inspected from time to time for the purpose of determining compliance with specified manufacturing methods or materials to be used in the work and to obtain samples required for acceptance of the material or assembly. Should the Engineer conduct plant inspections, the following conditions shall exist: 32. a. The Engineer shall have the cooperation and assistance of the Contractor and the producer with whom the Engineer has contracted for materials. 33. b. The Engineer shall have full entry at all reasonable times to such parts of the plant that concern the manufacture or production of the materials being furnished. 34. c. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for adequate office or working space that may be reasonably needed for conducting plant inspections. Office or working space should be conveniently located with respect to the plant. It is understood and agreed that the Owner shall have the right to retest any material that has been tested and approved at the source of supply after it has been delivered to the site. The Engineer shall have the right to reject only material which, when retested, does not meet the requirements of the Contract, plans, or specifications. 60-05 Engineer’s field office. The contractor shall furnish for the duration of the Project one building for the use of the field engineers and inspectors, as a field office. This facility shall be an approved weatherproof building meting the current State Highway Specifications (for example, Class I Field Office or Type C Structure). This building shall be located conveniently near to the construction and shall be separate from any building used by the Contractor. The Contractor will provide high speed internet access and shall be responsible for payment of the basic monthly charge for internet service. The Contractor shall furnish a photocopy, scanner, and printer capable of producing 11” x 17” prints, water, sanitary facilities, heat, air conditioning, and electricity. No direct payment will be made for the Engineer’s field office building or labor, materials, ground rental, or other expense in connection therewith. The Contractor and his/her superintendent shall provide all reasonable facilities to enable to the Engineer to inspect the workmanship and materials entering into the work. 60-06 Storage of materials. Materials shall be so stored as to assure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the work. Stored materials, even though approved before storage, may New Electrical Building Page 80 of 497 again be inspected prior to their use in the work. Stored materials shall be located to facilitate their prompt inspection. The Contractor shall coordinate the storage of all materials with the Engineer. Materials to be stored on airport property shall not create an obstruction to air navigation nor shall they interfere with the free and unobstructed movement of aircraft. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the storage of materials and the location of the Contractor’s plant and parked equipment or vehicles shall be as directed by the Engineer. Private property shall not be used for storage purposes without written permission of the Owner or lessee of such property. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and bear all expenses for the storage of materials on private property. Upon request, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a copy of the property Owner’s permission. All storage sites on private or airport property shall be restored to their original condition by the Contractor at his or her entire expense, except as otherwise agreed to (in writing) by the Owner or lessee of the property. 60-07 Unacceptable materials. Any material or assembly that does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, plans, or specifications shall be considered unacceptable and shall be rejected. The Contractor shall remove any rejected material or assembly from the site of the work, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer. Rejected material or assembly, the defects of which have been corrected by the Contractor, shall not be returned to the site of the work until such time as the Engineer has approved its use in the work. 60-08 Owner furnished materials. The Contractor shall furnish all materials required to complete the work, except those specified, if any, to be furnished by the Owner. Owner-furnished materials shall be made available to the Contractor at the location specified. All costs of handling, transportation from the specified location to the site of work, storage, and installing Owner-furnished materials shall be included in the unit price bid for the Contract item in which such Owner-furnished material is used. After any Owner-furnished material has been delivered to the location specified, the Contractor shall be responsible for any demurrage, damage, loss, or other deficiencies that may occur during the Contractor’s handling, storage, or use of such Owner-furnished material. The Owner will deduct from any monies due or to become due the Contractor any cost incurred by the Owner in making good such loss due to the Contractor’s handling, storage, or use of Owner-furnished materials. END OF SECTION 60 New Electrical Building Page 81 of 497 SECTION 70 LEGAL REGULATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITY TO PUBLIC 70-01 Laws to be observed. The Contractor shall keep fully informed of all Federal and state laws, all local laws, ordinances, and regulations and all orders and decrees of bodies or tribunals having any jurisdiction or authority, which in any manner affect those engaged or employed on the work, or which in any way affect the conduct of the work. The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all such laws, ordinances, regulations, orders, and decrees; and shall protect and indemnify the Owner and all his or her officers, agents, or servants against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such law, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, whether by the Contractor or the Contractor’s employees. 70-02 Permits, licenses, and taxes. The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges, fees, and taxes, and give all notices necessary and incidental to the due and lawful execution of the work. 70-03 Patented devices, materials, and processes. If the Contractor is required or desires to use any design, device, material, or process covered by letters of patent or copyright, the Contractor shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner. The Contractor and the surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, any third party, or political subdivision from any and all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such patented design, device, material or process, or any trademark or copyright, and shall indemnify the Owner for any costs, expenses, and damages which it may be obliged to pay by reason of an infringement, at any time during the execution or after the completion of the work. 70-04 Restoration of surfaces disturbed by others. The Owner reserves the right to authorize the construction, reconstruction, or maintenance of any public or private utility service, FAA or National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) facility, or a utility service of another government agency at any time during the progress of the work. Except as shown on the construction plans, the Contractor shall not permit any individual, firm, or corporation to excavate or otherwise disturb such utility services or facilities located within the limits of the work without the written permission of the Engineer. Should the Owner of public or private utility service, FAA, or NOAA facility, or a utility service of another government agency be authorized to construct, reconstruct, or maintain such utility service or facility during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall cooperate with such Owners by arranging and performing the work in this Contract to facilitate such construction, reconstruction or maintenance by others whether or not such work by others is listed above. When ordered as extra work by the Engineer, the Contractor shall make all necessary repairs to the work New Electrical Building Page 82 of 497 which are due to such authorized work by others, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract, plans, or specifications. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall not be entitled to make any claim for damages due to such authorized work by others or for any delay to the work resulting from such authorized work. 70-05 Federal aid participation. This Contract utilizes funding from the Airport Improvement Program (AIP). The United States Government has agreed to reimburse the Owner for some portion of the Contract costs. Such reimbursement is made from time to time upon the Owner’s request to the FAA. In consideration of the United States Government’s (FAA’s) agreement with the Owner, the Owner has included provisions in this Contract pursuant to the requirements of Title 49 of the USC and the Rules and Regulations of the FAA that pertain to the work which shall be complied with by the Contractor. As required by the USC, the Contract work is subject to the inspection and approval of duly authorized representatives of the FAA Administrator, and is further subject to those provisions of the rules and regulations that are cited in the Contract, Plans, or Specifications. No requirement of the USC, the rules and regulations implementing the USC, or this Contract shall be construed as making the Federal Government a party to the Contract nor will any such requirement interfere, in any way, with the rights of either party to the Contract. 70-06 Sanitary, health, and safety provisions. The Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat, sanitary condition such accommodations for the use of his or her employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of the state and local Board of Health, or of other bodies or tribunals having jurisdiction. Attention is directed to Federal, state, and local laws, rules and regulations concerning construction safety and health standards. The Contractor shall not require any worker to work in surroundings or under conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his or her health or safety. 70-07 Public convenience and safety. The Contractor shall control his or her operations and those of his or her subcontractors and all suppliers, to assure the least inconvenience to the traveling public. Under all circumstances, safety shall be the most important consideration. The Contractor shall maintain the free and unobstructed movement of aircraft and vehicular traffic with respect to his or her own operations and those of his or her subcontractors and all suppliers in accordance with the subsection 40-05 titled MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC of Section 40 hereinbefore specified and shall limit such operations for the convenience and safety of the New Electrical Building Page 83 of 497 traveling public as specified in the subsection 80-04 titled LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS of Section 80 hereinafter. 70-08 Barricades, warning signs, and hazard markings. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain all barricades, warning signs, and markings for hazards necessary to protect the public and the work. When used during periods of darkness, such barricades, warning signs, and hazard markings shall be suitably illuminated. Unless otherwise specified, barricades, warning signs, and markings for hazards that are in the air operations area (AOAs) shall be a maximum of 18 inches (0.5 m) high. Unless otherwise specified, barricades shall be spaced not more than 4 feet (1.2 m) apart. Barricades, warning signs, and markings shall be paid for under subsection 40-05. For vehicular and pedestrian traffic, the Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain barricades, warning signs, lights and other traffic control devices in reasonable conformity with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. When the work requires closing an air operations area of the airport or portion of such area, the Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain temporary markings and associated lighting conforming to the requirements of advisory circular (AC) 150/5340-1L, Standards for Airport Markings. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain markings and associated lighting of open trenches, excavations, temporary stock piles, and the Contractor’s parked construction equipment that may be hazardous to the operation of emergency fire-rescue or maintenance vehicles on the airport in reasonable conformance to AC 150/5370-2G, Operational Safety on Airports During Construction. The Contractor shall identify each motorized vehicle or piece of construction equipment in reasonable conformance to AC 150/5370-2G. The Contractor shall furnish and erect all barricades, warning signs, and markings for hazards prior to commencing work that requires such erection and shall maintain the barricades, warning signs, and markings for hazards until their removal is directed by the Engineer. Open-flame type lights shall not be permitted. 70-09 Use of explosives. When the use of explosives is necessary for the execution of the work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to endanger life or property, including new work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from the use of explosives. All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner in compliance with all laws and ordinances, and all such storage places shall be clearly marked. Where no local laws or ordinances apply, storage New Electrical Building Page 84 of 497 shall be provided satisfactory to the Engineer and, in general, not closer than 1,000 feet (300 m) from the work or from any building, road, or other place of human occupancy. The Contractor shall notify each property Owner and public utility company having structures or facilities in proximity to the site of the work of his or her intention to use explosives. Such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable them to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. The use of electrical blasting caps shall not be permitted on or within 1,000 feet (300 m) of the airport property. 70-10 Protection and restoration of property and landscape. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property, and shall protect carefully from disturbance or damage all land monuments and property markers until the Engineer has witnessed or otherwise referenced their location and shall not move them until directed. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character, during the execution of the work, resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in manner or method of executing the work, or at any time due to defective work or materials, and said responsibility shall not be released until the project has been completed and accepted. When or where any direct or indirect damage or injury is done to public or private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution of the work, or in consequence of the non-execution thereof by the Contractor, the Contractor shall restore, at his or her own expense, such property to a condition similar or equal to that existing before such damage or injury was done, by repairing, or otherwise restoring as may be directed, or the Contractor shall make good such damage or injury in an acceptable manner. 70-11 Responsibility for damage claims. The Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Engineer and the Owner and their officers, and employees from all suits, actions, or claims, of any character, brought because of any injuries or damage received or sustained by any person, persons, or property on account of the operations of the Contractor; or on account of or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the work; or through use of unacceptable materials in constructing the work; or because of any act or omission, neglect, or misconduct of said Contractor; or because of any claims or amounts recovered from any infringements of patent, trademark, or copyright; or from any claims or amounts arising or recovered under the “Workmen’s Compensation Act,” or any other law, ordinance, order, or decree. 70-12 Third party beneficiary clause. It is specifically agreed between the parties executing the Contract that it is not intended by any of the provisions of any part of the Contract to create for New Electrical Building Page 85 of 497 the public or any member thereof, a third party beneficiary or to authorize anyone not a party to the Contract to maintain a suit for personal injuries or property damage pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract. 70-13 Opening sections of the work to traffic. Should it be necessary for the Contractor to complete portions of the Contract work for the beneficial occupancy of the Owner prior to completion of the entire Contract, such “phasing” of the work shall be specified herein and indicated on the plans. When so specified, the Contractor shall complete such portions of the work on or before the date specified or as otherwise specified. The Contractor shall make his or her own estimate of the difficulties involved in arranging the work to permit such beneficial occupancy by the Owner as described on sheets G-081 through G-085 of the construction plans. Upon completion of any portion of the work listed above, such portion shall be accepted by the Owner in accordance with the subsection 50-14 titled PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE of Section 50. No portion of the work may be opened by the Contractor for public use until ordered by the Engineer in writing. Should it become necessary to open a portion of the work to public traffic on a temporary or intermittent basis, such openings shall be made when, in the opinion of the Engineer, such portion of the work is in an acceptable condition to support the intended traffic. Temporary or intermittent openings are considered to be inherent in the work and shall not constitute either acceptance of the portion of the work so opened or a waiver of any provision of the Contract. Any damage to the portion of the work so opened that is not attributable to traffic which is permitted by the Owner shall be repaired by the Contractor at his or her expense. The Contractor shall make his or her own estimate of the inherent difficulties involved in completing the work under the conditions herein described and shall not claim any added compensation by reason of delay or increased cost due to opening a portion of the Contract work. Contractor shall be required to conform to safety standards contained AC 150/5370-2G (see Special Provisions). Contractor shall refer to the approved Construction Safety Phasing Plan (CSPP) to identify barricade requirements and other safety requirements prior to opening up sections of work to traffic. 70-14 Contractor’s responsibility for work. Until the Engineer’s final written acceptance of the entire completed work, excepting only those portions of the work accepted in accordance with the subsection 50-14 titled PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE of Section 50, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall take every precaution against injury or damage to any part due to the action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from the execution or from New Electrical Building Page 86 of 497 the non-execution of the work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injuries or damages to any portion of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before final acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof except damage to the work due to unforeseeable causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, including but not restricted to acts of God such as earthquake, tidal wave, tornado, hurricane or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature, or acts of the public enemy or of government authorities. If the work is suspended for any cause whatever, the Contractor shall be responsible for the work and shall take such precautions necessary to prevent damage to the work. The Contractor shall provide for normal drainage and shall erect necessary temporary structures, signs, or other facilities at his or her expense. During such period of suspension of work, the Contractor shall properly and continuously maintain in an acceptable growing condition all living material in newly established planting, seeding, and sodding furnished under the Contract, and shall take adequate precautions to protect new tree growth and other important vegetative growth against injury. 70-15 Contractor’s responsibility for utility service and facilities of others. As provided in the subsection 70-04 titled RESTORATION OF SURFACES DISTURBED BY OTHERS of this section, the Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner of any public or private utility service, FAA or NOAA, or a utility service of another government agency that may be authorized by the Owner to construct, reconstruct or maintain such utility services or facilities during the progress of the work. In addition, the Contractor shall control their operations to prevent the unscheduled interruption of such utility services and facilities. To the extent that such public or private utility services, FAA, or NOAA facilities, or utility services of another governmental agency are known to exist within the limits of the Contract work, the approximate locations have been indicated on the plans and the Owners are indicated as follows: FAA Technical Operations: Holly Holcomb (803) 822-4420 Augusta Regional Airport: Adrienne Ayers-Allen Director of Engineering (706) 796-4010 New Electrical Building Page 87 of 497 It is further understood and agreed that the Owner does not guarantee the accuracy or the completeness of the location information relating to existing utility services, facilities, or structures that may be shown on the plans or encountered in the work. Any inaccuracy or omission in such information shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to protect such existing features from damage or unscheduled interruption of service. It is further understood and agreed that the Contractor shall, upon execution of the Contract, notify the Owners of all utility services or other facilities of his or her plan of operations. Such notification shall be in writing addressed to THE PERSON TO CONTACT as provided in this subsection and subsection 70-04 titled RESTORATION OF SURFACES DISTURBED BY OTHERS of this section. A copy of each notification shall be given to the Engineer. In addition to the general written notification provided, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep such individual Owners advised of changes in their plan of operations that would affect such Owners. Prior to beginning the work in the general vicinity of an existing utility service or facility, the Contractor shall again notify each such Owner of their plan of operation. If, in the Contractor’s opinion, the Owner’s assistance is needed to locate the utility service or facility or the presence of a representative of the Owner is desirable to observe the work, such advice should be included in the notification. Such notification shall be given by the most expeditious means to reach the utility owner’s PERSON TO CONTACT no later than two normal business days prior to the Contractor’s commencement of operations in such general vicinity. The Contractor shall furnish a written summary of the notification to the Engineer. The Contractor’s failure to give the two days’ notice shall be cause for the Owner to suspend the Contractor’s operations in the general vicinity of a utility service or facility. Where the outside limits of an underground utility service have been located and staked on the ground, the Contractor shall be required to use hand excavation methods within 3 feet (1 m) of such outside limits at such points as may be required to ensure protection from damage due to the Contractor’s operations. Should the Contractor damage or interrupt the operation of a utility service or facility by accident or otherwise, the Contractor shall immediately notify the proper authority and the Engineer and shall take all reasonable measures to prevent further damage or interruption of service. The Contractor, in such events, shall cooperate with the utility service or facility owner and the Engineer continuously until such damage has been repaired and service restored to the satisfaction of the utility or facility owner. New Electrical Building Page 88 of 497 The Contractor shall bear all costs of damage and restoration of service to any utility service or facility due to their operations whether due to negligence or accident. The Owner reserves the right to deduct such costs from any monies due or which may become due the Contractor, or his or her surety. 70-15.1 FAA facilities and cable runs. The Contractor is hereby advised that the construction limits of the project include existing facilities and buried cable runs that are owned, operated and maintained by the FAA. The Contractor, during the execution of the project work, shall comply with the following: 35. a. The Contractor shall permit FAA maintenance personnel the right of access to the project work site for purposes of inspecting and maintaining all existing FAA owned facilities. 36. b. The Contractor shall provide notice to the FAA Air Traffic Organization (ATO)/Technical Operations/System Support Center (SSC) Point-of-Contact through the airport Owner a minimum of seven (7) calendar days prior to commencement of construction activities in order to permit sufficient time to locate and mark existing buried cables and to schedule any required facility outages. 37. c. If execution of the project work requires a facility outage, the Contractor shall contact the FAA Point-of-Contact a minimum of 72 hours prior to the time of the required outage. 38. d. Any damage to FAA cables, access roads, or FAA facilities during construction caused by the Contractor’s equipment or personnel whether by negligence or accident will require the Contractor to repair or replace the damaged cables, access road, or FAA facilities to FAA requirements. The Contractor shall not bear the cost to repair damage to underground facilities or utilities improperly located by the FAA. 39. e. If the project work requires the cutting or splicing of FAA owned cables, the FAA Point- of-Contact shall be contacted a minimum of 72 hours prior to the time the cable work commences. The FAA reserves the right to have a FAA representative on site to observe the splicing of the cables as a condition of acceptance. All cable splices are to be accomplished in accordance with FAA specifications and require approval by the FAA Point-of-Contact as a condition of acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor is hereby advised that FAA restricts the location of where splices may be installed. If a cable splice is required in a location that is not permitted by FAA, the Contractor shall furnish and install a sufficient length of new cable that eliminates the need for any splice. 70-16 Furnishing rights-of-way. The Owner will be responsible for furnishing all rights-of-way upon which the work is to be constructed in advance of the Contractor’s operations. New Electrical Building Page 89 of 497 70-17 Personal liability of public officials. In carrying out any of the Contract provisions or in exercising any power or authority granted by this Contract, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer, his or her authorized representatives, or any officials of the Owner either personally or as an official of the Owner. It is understood that in such matters they act solely as agents and representatives of the Owner. 70-18 No waiver of legal rights. Upon completion of the work, the Owner will expeditiously make final inspection and notify the Contractor of final acceptance. Such final acceptance, however, shall not preclude or stop the Owner from correcting any measurement, estimate, or certificate made before or after completion of the work, nor shall the Owner be precluded or stopped from recovering from the Contractor or his or her surety, or both, such overpayment as may be sustained, or by failure on the part of the Contractor to fulfill his or her obligations under the Contract. A waiver on the part of the Owner of any breach of any part of the Contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. The Contractor, without prejudice to the terms of the Contract, shall be liable to the Owner for latent defects, fraud, or such gross mistakes as may amount to fraud, or as regards the Owner’s rights under any warranty or guaranty. 70-19 Environmental protection. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, state, and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment. The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter. 70-20 Archaeological and historical findings. Unless otherwise specified in this subsection, the Contractor is advised that the site of the work is not within any property, district, or site, and does not contain any building, structure, or object listed in the current National Register of Historic Places published by the United States Department of Interior. Should the Contractor encounter, during his or her operations, any building, part of a building, structure, or object that is incongruous with its surroundings, the Contractor shall immediately cease operations in that location and notify the Engineer. The Engineer will immediately investigate the Contractor’s finding and the Owner will direct the Contractor to either resume operations or to suspend operations as directed. Should the Owner order suspension of the Contractor’s operations in order to protect an archaeological or historical finding, or order the Contractor to perform extra work, such shall be covered by an appropriate Contract change order or supplemental agreement as provided in the subsection 40-04 titled EXTRA WORK of Section 40 and the subsection 90-05 titled PAYMENT FOR New Electrical Building Page 90 of 497 EXTRA WORK of Section 90. If appropriate, the Contract change order or supplemental agreement shall include an extension of Contract time in accordance with the subsection 80-07 titled DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME of Section 80. END OF SECTION 70 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 91 of 497 SECTION 80 EXECUTION AND PROGRESS 80-01 Subletting of Contract. The Owner will not recognize any subcontractor on the work. The Contractor shall at all times when work is in progress be represented either in person, by a qualified superintendent, or by other designated, qualified representative who is duly authorized to receive and execute orders of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide copies of all subcontracts to the Engineer. The Contractor shall perform, with his organization, an amount of work equal to at least 25 percent of the total Contract cost. Should the Contractor elect to assign his or her Contract, said assignment shall be concurred in by the surety, shall be presented for the consideration and approval of the Owner, and shall be consummated only on the written approval of the Owner. 80-02 Notice to proceed. The notice to proceed (NTP) shall state the date on which it is expected the Contractor will begin the construction and from which date Contract time will be charged. The Contractor shall begin the work to be performed under the Contract within 10 days of the date set by the Engineer in the written notice to proceed, but in any event, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of the time actual construction operations will begin. The Contractor shall not commence any actual construction prior to the date on which the notice to proceed is issued by the Owner. 80-03 Execution and progress. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit their progress schedule for the Engineer’s approval within 10 days after the effective date of the notice to proceed. The Contractor’s progress schedule, when approved by the Engineer, may be used to establish major construction operations and to check on the progress of the work. The Contractor shall provide sufficient materials, equipment, and labor to guarantee the completion of the project in accordance with the plans and specifications within the time set forth in the proposal. If the Contractor falls significantly behind the submitted schedule, the Contractor shall, upon the Engineer’s request, submit a revised schedule for completion of the work within the Contract time and modify their operations to provide such additional materials, equipment, and labor necessary to meet the revised schedule. Should the execution of the work be discontinued for any reason, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of resuming operations. The Contractor shall not commence any actual construction prior to the date on which the notice to proceed is issued by the Owner. New Electrical Building Page 92 of 497 80-04 Limitation of operations. The Contractor shall control his or her operations and the operations of his or her subcontractors and all suppliers to provide for the free and unobstructed movement of aircraft in the air operations areas (AOA) of the airport. When the work requires the Contractor to conduct his or her operations within an AOA of the airport, the work shall be coordinated with airport operations (through the Engineer) at least 48 hours prior to commencement of such work. The Contractor shall not close an AOA until so authorized by the Engineer and until the necessary temporary marking and associated lighting is in place as provided in the subsection 70-08 titled BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS, AND HAZARD MARKINGS of Section 70. When the Contract work requires the Contractor to work within an AOA of the airport on an intermittent basis (intermittent opening and closing of the AOA), the Contractor shall maintain constant communications as specified; immediately obey all instructions to vacate the AOA; immediately obey all instructions to resume work in such AOA. Failure to maintain the specified communications or to obey instructions shall be cause for suspension of the Contractor’s operations in the AOA until the satisfactory conditions are provided. Refer to the Construction Safety and Phasing Plans or restrictions. Contractor shall be required to conform to safety standards contained in AC 150/5370-2G, Operational Safety on Airports During Construction (see Special Provisions). 80-04.1 Operational safety on airport during construction. All Contractors’ operations shall be conducted in accordance with the project Construction Safety and Phasing Plan (CSPP) and the provisions set forth within the current version of AC 150/5370-2. The CSPP included within the Contract documents conveys minimum requirements for operational safety on the airport during construction activities. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Safety Plan Compliance Document that details how it proposes to comply with the requirements presented within the CSPP. The Contractor shall implement all necessary safety plan measures prior to commencement of any work activity. The Contractor shall conduct routine checks to assure compliance with the safety plan measures. The Contractor is responsible to the Owner for the conduct of all subcontractors it employs on the project. The Contractor shall assure that all subcontractors are made aware of the requirements of the CSPP and that they implement and maintain all necessary measures. No deviation or modifications may be made to the approved CSPP unless approved in writing by the Owner or Engineer. New Electrical Building Page 93 of 497 80-05 Character of workers, methods, and equipment. The Contractor shall, at all times, employ sufficient labor and equipment for prosecuting the work to full completion in the manner and time required by the Contract, plans, and specifications. All workers shall have sufficient skill and experience to perform properly the work assigned to them. Workers engaged in special work or skilled work shall have sufficient experience in such work and in the operation of the equipment required to perform the work satisfactorily. Any person employed by the Contractor or by any subcontractor who violates any operational regulations or operational safety requirements and, in the opinion of the Engineer, does not perform his work in a proper and skillful manner or is intemperate or disorderly shall, at the written request of the Engineer, be removed forthwith by the Contractor or subcontractor employing such person, and shall not be employed again in any portion of the work without approval of the Engineer. Should the Contractor fail to remove such persons or person, or fail to furnish suitable and sufficient personnel for the proper execution of the work, the Engineer may suspend the work by written notice until compliance with such orders. All equipment that is proposed to be used on the work shall be of sufficient size and in such mechanical condition as to meet requirements of the work and to produce a satisfactory quality of work. Equipment used on any portion of the work shall be such that no injury to previously completed work, adjacent property, or existing airport facilities will result from its use. When the methods and equipment to be used by the Contractor in accomplishing the work are not prescribed in the Contract, the Contractor is free to use any methods or equipment that will accomplish the work in conformity with the requirements of the Contract, plans, and specifications. When the Contract specifies the use of certain methods and equipment, such methods and equipment shall be used unless others are authorized by the Engineer. If the Contractor desires to use a method or type of equipment other than specified in the Contract, the Contractor may request authority from the Engineer to do so. The request shall be in writing and shall include a full description of the methods and equipment proposed and of the reasons for desiring to make the change. If approval is given, it will be on the condition that the Contractor will be fully responsible for producing work in conformity with Contract requirements. If, after trial use of the substituted methods or equipment, the Engineer determines that the work produced does not meet Contract requirements, the Contractor shall discontinue the use of the substitute method or equipment and shall complete the remaining work with the specified methods and equipment. The Contractor shall remove any deficient work and replace it with work of specified quality, or New Electrical Building Page 94 of 497 take such other corrective action as the Engineer may direct. No change will be made in basis of payment for the Contract items involved nor in Contract time as a result of authorizing a change in methods or equipment under this subsection. 80-06 Temporary suspension of the work. The Owner shall have the authority to suspend the work wholly, or in part, for such period or periods as the Owner may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather, or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the execution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders given or perform any or all provisions of the Contract. In the event that the Contractor is ordered by the Owner, in writing, to suspend work for some unforeseen cause not otherwise provided for in the Contract and over which the Contractor has no control, the Contractor may be reimbursed for actual money expended on the work during the period of shutdown. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits. The period of shutdown shall be computed from the effective date of the Engineer’s order to suspend work to the effective date of the Engineer’s order to resume the work. Claims for such compensation shall be filed with the Engineer within the time period stated in the Engineer’s order to resume work. The Contractor shall submit with his or her claim information substantiating the amount shown on the claim. The Engineer will forward the Contractor’s claim to the Owner for consideration in accordance with local laws or ordinances. No provision of this article shall be construed as entitling the Contractor to compensation for delays due to inclement weather, for suspensions made at the request of the Owner, or for any other delay provided for in the Contract, plans, or specifications. If it should become necessary to suspend work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not become an obstruction nor become damaged in any way. The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed and provide for normal drainage of the work. The Contractor shall erect temporary structures where necessary to provide for traffic on, to, or from the Airport. 80-07 Determination and extension of Contract time. The number of calendar or working days allowed for completion of the work shall be stated in the bid and Contract and shall be known as the CONTRACT TIME. Should the Contract time require extension for reasons beyond the Contractor’s control, it shall be adjusted as follows: 40. a. CONTRACT TIME based on WORKING DAYS shall be calculated weekly by the Engineer. The Engineer will furnish the Contractor a copy of his or her weekly statement of the number of working days charged against the Contract time during the week and the number of working days currently specified for completion of the Contract (the original Contract time plus the number of New Electrical Building Page 95 of 497 working days, if any, that have been included in approved CHANGE ORDERS or SUPPLEMENTAL AGREEMENTS covering EXTRA WORK). 41. The Engineer shall base his or her weekly statement of Contract time charged on the following considerations: 42. (1) No time shall be charged for days on which the Contractor is unable to proceed with the principal item of work under construction at the time for at least six (6) hours with the normal work force employed on such principal item. Should the normal work force be on a double-shift, 12 hours shall be used. Should the normal work force be on a triple-shift, 18 hours shall apply. Conditions beyond the Contractor’s control such as strikes, lockouts, unusual delays in transportation, temporary suspension of the principal item of work under construction or temporary suspension of the entire work which have been ordered by the Owner for reasons not the fault of the Contractor, shall not be charged against the Contract time. 43. (2) The Engineer will not make charges against the Contract time prior to the effective date of the notice to proceed. 44. (3) The Engineer will begin charges against the Contract time on the first working day after the effective date of the notice to proceed. 45. (4) The Engineer will not make charges against the Contract time after the date of final acceptance as defined in the subsection 50-15 titled FINAL ACCEPTANCE of Section 50. 46. (5) The Contractor will be allowed one (1) week in which to file a written protest setting forth his or her objections to the Engineer’s weekly statement. If no objection is filed within such specified time, the weekly statement shall be considered as acceptable to the Contractor. The Contract time (stated in the bid and resulting Contract) is based on the originally estimated quantities as described in the subsection 20-05 titled INTERPRETATION OF ESTIMATED BID QUANTITIES of Section 20. Should the satisfactory completion of the Contract require performance of work in greater quantities than those estimated in the proposal, the Contract time shall be increased in the same proportion as the cost of the actually completed quantities bears to the cost of the originally estimated quantities in the bid. Such increase in Contract time shall not consider either the cost of work or the extension of Contract time that has been covered by change order or supplemental agreement and shall be made at the time of final payment. 47. b. Contract Time based on calendar days shall consist of the number of calendar days stated in the Contract counting from the effective date of the notice to proceed and including all Saturdays, Sundays, holidays, and non-work days. All calendar days elapsing between the effective dates of the Owner’s orders to suspend and resume all work, due to causes not the fault of the Contractor, shall be excluded. New Electrical Building Page 96 of 497 48. At the time of final payment, the Contract time shall be increased in the same proportion as the cost of the actually completed quantities bears to the cost of the originally estimated quantities in the bid. Such increase in the Contract time shall not consider either cost of work or the extension of Contract time that has been covered by a change order or supplemental agreement. Charges against the Contract time will cease as of the date of final acceptance. 49. c. When the Contract time is a specified completion date, it shall be the date on which all Contract work shall be substantially complete. If the Contractor finds it impossible for reasons beyond his or her control to complete the work within the Contract time as specified, or as extended in accordance with the provisions of this subsection, the Contractor may, at any time prior to the expiration of the Contract time as extended, make a written request to the Owner for an extension of time setting forth the reasons which the Contractor believes will justify the granting of his or her request. Requests for extension of time on calendar day projects, caused by inclement weather, shall be supported with National Weather Bureau data showing the actual amount of inclement weather exceeded what could normally be expected during the Contract period. The Contractor’s plea that insufficient time was specified is not a valid reason for extension of time. If the supporting documentation justify the work was delayed because of conditions beyond the control and without the fault of the Contractor, the Owner may extend the time for completion by a change order that adjusts the Contract time or completion date. The extended time for completion shall then be in full force and effect, the same as though it were the original time for completion. 80-08 Failure to complete on time. For each calendar day or working day, as specified in the Contract, that any work remains uncompleted after the Contract time (including all extensions and adjustments as provided in the subsection 80-07 titled DETERMINATION AND EXTENSION OF CONTRACT TIME of this Section) the sum specified in the Contract and bid as liquidated damages will be deducted from any money due or to become due the Contractor or his or her surety. Such deducted sums shall not be deducted as a penalty but shall be considered as liquidation of a reasonable portion of damages including but not limited to additional engineering services that will be incurred by the Owner should the Contractor fail to complete the work in the time provided in their Contract. Work Area Liquidated Damages Cost Allowed Construction Time (Calendar Days) 1A $1,500 per day 90 1B $1,500 per day 30 New Electrical Building Page 97 of 497 Work Area Liquidated Damages Cost Allowed Construction Time (Calendar Days) 2A $1,500 per day 30 2B $1,500 per day 15 2C $1,500 per day 15 2D $1,500 per day 30 2E $1,500 per day 30 3 $1,500 per day 20 The maximum construction time allowed for Work Area 1A shall be 90 calendar days. The maximum construction time allowed for Work Area 1B shall be 30 calendar days. The maximum construction time allowed for Work Area 2A shall be 30 calendar days. The maximum construction time allowed for Work Area 2B shall be 15 calendar days. The maximum construction time allowed for Work Area 2C shall be 15 calendar days. The maximum construction time allowed for Work Area 2D shall be 30 calendar days. The maximum construction time allowed for Work Area 2E shall be 30 calendar days. The maximum construction time allowed for Work Area 3 shall be 20 calendar days. The maximum construction time allowed for will be 200 calendar days. Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the work or any part of it after the time fixed for its completion, or after the date to which the time for completion may have been extended, will in no way operate as a wavier on the part of the Owner of any of its rights under the Contract. 80-09 Default and termination of Contract. The Contractor shall be considered in default of his or her Contract and such default will be considered as cause for the Owner to terminate the Contract for any of the following reasons if the Contractor: 50. a. Fails to begin the work under the Contract within the time specified in the Notice to Proceed, or 51. b. Fails to perform the work or fails to provide sufficient workers, equipment and/or materials to assure completion of work in accordance with the terms of the Contract, or 52. c. Performs the work unsuitably or neglects or refuses to remove materials or to perform anew such work as may be rejected as unacceptable and unsuitable, or New Electrical Building Page 98 of 497 53. d. Discontinues the execution of the work, or 54. e. Fails to resume work which has been discontinued within a reasonable time after notice to do so, or 55. f. Becomes insolvent or is declared bankrupt, or commits any act of bankruptcy or insolvency, or 56. g. Allows any final judgment to stand against the Contractor unsatisfied for a period of 10 days, or 57. h. Makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or 58. i. For any other cause whatsoever, fails to carry on the work in an acceptable manner. Should the Engineer consider the Contractor in default of the Contract for any reason above, the Engineer shall immediately give written notice to the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety as to the reasons for considering the Contractor in default and the Owner’s intentions to terminate the Contract. If the Contractor or surety, within a period of 10 days after such notice, does not proceed in accordance therewith, then the Owner will, upon written notification from the Engineer of the facts of such delay, neglect, or default and the Contractor’s failure to comply with such notice, have full power and authority without violating the Contract, to take the execution of the work out of the hands of the Contractor. The Owner may appropriate or use any or all materials and equipment that have been mobilized for use in the work and are acceptable and may enter into an agreement for the completion of said Contract according to the terms and provisions thereof, or use such other methods as in the opinion of the Engineer will be required for the completion of said Contract in an acceptable manner. All costs and charges incurred by the Owner, together with the cost of completing the work under Contract, will be deducted from any monies due or which may become due the Contractor. If such expense exceeds the sum which would have been payable under the Contract, then the Contractor and the surety shall be liable and shall pay to the Owner the amount of such excess. 80-10 Termination for national emergencies. The Owner shall terminate the Contract or portion thereof by written notice when the Contractor is prevented from proceeding with the construction Contract as a direct result of an Executive Order of the President with respect to the execution of war or in the interest of national defense. When the Contract, or any portion thereof, is terminated before completion of all items of work in the Contract, payment will be made for the actual number of units or items of work completed New Electrical Building Page 99 of 497 at the Contract price or as mutually agreed for items of work partially completed or not started. No claims or loss of anticipated profits shall be considered. Reimbursement for organization of the work, and other overhead expenses, (when not otherwise included in the Contract) and moving equipment and materials to and from the job will be considered, the intent being that an equitable settlement will be made with the Contractor. Acceptable materials, obtained or ordered by the Contractor for the work and that are not incorporated in the work shall, at the option of the Contractor, be purchased from the Contractor at actual cost as shown by receipted bills and actual cost records at such points of delivery as may be designated by the Engineer. Termination of the Contract or a portion thereof shall neither relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibilities for the completed work nor shall it relieve his or her surety of its obligation for and concerning any just claim arising out of the work performed. 80-11 Work area, storage area and sequence of operations. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer prior to beginning any work in all areas of the airport. No operating runway, taxiway, or air operations area (AOA) shall be crossed, entered, or obstructed while it is operational. The Contractor shall plan and coordinate his or her work in such a manner as to ensure safety and a minimum of hindrance to flight operations. All Contractor equipment and material stockpiles shall be stored a minimum or 400 feet from the centerline of an active runway. No equipment will be allowed to park within the approach area of an active runway at any time. No equipment shall be within 250 feet of an active runway at any time. END OF SECTION 80 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 100 of 497 SECTION 90 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 90-01 Measurement of quantities. All work completed under the Contract will be measured by the Engineer, or his or her authorized representatives, using United States Customary Units of Measurement or the International System of Units. The method of measurement and computations to be used in determination of quantities of material furnished and of work performed under the Contract will be those methods generally recognized as conforming to good engineering practice. Unless otherwise specified, longitudinal measurements for area computations will be made horizontally, and no deductions will be made for individual fixtures (or leave-outs) having an area of 9 square feet (0.8 square meters) or less. Unless otherwise specified, transverse measurements for area computations will be the neat dimensions shown on the plans or ordered in writing by the Engineer. Structures will be measured according to neat lines shown on the plans or as altered to fit field conditions. Unless otherwise specified, all Contract items which are measured by the linear foot such as electrical ducts, conduits, pipe culverts, underdrains, and similar items shall be measured parallel to the base or foundation upon which such items are placed. In computing volumes of excavation, the average end area method or other acceptable methods will be used. The thickness of plates and galvanized sheet used in the manufacture of corrugated metal pipe, metal plate pipe culverts and arches, and metal cribbing will be specified and measured in decimal fraction of inch. The term “ton” will mean the short ton consisting of 2,000 lb. (907 km) avoirdupois. All materials that are measured or proportioned by weights shall be weighed on accurate, approved scales by competent, qualified personnel at locations designed by the Engineer. If material is shipped by rail, the car weight may be accepted provided that only the actual weight of material is paid for. However, car weights will not be acceptable for material to be passed through mixing plants. Trucks used to haul material being paid for by weight shall be weighed empty daily at such times as the Engineer directs, and each truck shall bear a plainly legible identification mark. Materials to be measured by volume in the hauling vehicle shall be hauled in approved vehicles and measured therein at the point of delivery. Vehicles for this purpose may be of any size or type acceptable for the materials hauled, provided that the body is of such shape that the actual New Electrical Building Page 101 of 497 contents may be readily and accurately determined. All vehicles shall be loaded to at least their water level capacity, and all loads shall be leveled when the vehicles arrive at the point of delivery. When requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer in writing, material specified to be measured by the cubic yard (cubic meter) may be weighed, and such weights will be converted to cubic yards (cubic meters) for payment purposes. Factors for conversion from weight measurement to volume measurement will be determined by the Engineer and shall be agreed to by the Contractor before such method of measurement of pay quantities is used. Bituminous materials will be measured by the gallon (liter) or ton (kg). When measured by volume, such volumes will be measured at 60°F (16°C) or will be corrected to the volume at 60°F (16°C) using ASTM D1250 for asphalts or ASTM D633 for tars. Net certified scale weights or weights based on certified volumes in the case of rail shipments will be used as a basis of measurement, subject to correction when bituminous material has been lost from the car or the distributor, wasted, or otherwise not incorporated in the work. When bituminous materials are shipped by truck or transport, net certified weights by volume, subject to correction for loss or foaming, may be used for computing quantities. Cement will be measured by the ton (kg) or hundredweight (km). Timber will be measured by the thousand feet board measure (MFBM) actually incorporated in the structure. Measurement will be based on nominal widths and thicknesses and the extreme length of each piece. The term “lump sum” when used as an item of payment will mean complete payment for the work described in the Contract. When a complete structure or structural unit (in effect, “lump sum” work) is specified as the unit of measurement, the unit will be construed to include all necessary fittings and accessories. Rental of equipment will be measured by time in hours of actual working time and necessary traveling time of the equipment within the limits of the work. Special equipment ordered by the Engineer in connection with force account work will be measured as agreed in the change order or supplemental agreement authorizing such force account work as provided in the subsection 90-05 titled PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK of this section. When standard manufactured items are specified such as fence, wire, plates, rolled shapes, pipe conduit, etc., and these items are identified by gauge, unit weight, section dimensions, etc., such identification will be considered to be nominal weights or dimensions. Unless more stringently New Electrical Building Page 102 of 497 controlled by tolerances in cited specifications, manufacturing tolerances established by the industries involved will be accepted. Scales for weighing materials which are required to be proportioned or measured and paid for by weight shall be furnished, erected, and maintained by the Contractor, or be certified permanently installed commercial scales. Scales shall be accurate within 1/2% of the correct weight throughout the range of use. The Contractor shall have the scales checked under the observation of the inspector before beginning work and at such other times as requested. The intervals shall be uniform in spacing throughout the graduated or marked length of the beam or dial and shall not exceed one-tenth of 1% of the nominal rated capacity of the scale, but not less than 1 pound (454 grams). The use of spring balances will not be permitted. Beams, dials, platforms, and other scale equipment shall be so arranged that the operator and the inspector can safely and conveniently view them. Scale installations shall have available ten standard 50-pound (2.3 km) weights for testing the weighing equipment or suitable weights and devices for other approved equipment. Scales must be tested for accuracy and serviced before use at a new site. Platform scales shall be installed and maintained with the platform level and rigid bulkheads at each end. Scales “overweighing” (indicating more than correct weight) will not be permitted to operate, and all materials received subsequent to the last previous correct weighting-accuracy test will be reduced by the percentage of error in excess of one-half of 1%. In the event inspection reveals the scales have been underweighing (indicating less than correct weight), they shall be adjusted, and no additional payment to the Contractor will be allowed for materials previously weighed and recorded. All costs in connection with furnishing, installing, certifying, testing, and maintaining scales; for furnishing check weights and scale house; and for all other items specified in this subsection, for the weighing of materials for proportioning or payment, shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various items of the project. When the estimated quantities for a specific portion of the work are designated as the pay quantities in the Contract, they shall be the final quantities for which payment for such specific portion of the work will be made, unless the dimensions of said portions of the work shown on the plans are revised by the Engineer. If revised dimensions result in an increase or decrease in New Electrical Building Page 103 of 497 the quantities of such work, the final quantities for payment will be revised in the amount represented by the authorized changes in the dimensions. 90-02 Scope of payment. The Contractor shall receive and accept compensation provided for in the Contract as full payment for furnishing all materials, for performing all work under the Contract in a complete and acceptable manner, and for all risk, loss, damage, or expense of whatever character arising out of the nature of the work or the execution thereof, subject to the provisions of the subsection 70-18 titled NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS of Section 70. When the “basis of payment” subsection of a technical specification requires that the Contract price (price bid) include compensation for certain work or material essential to the item, this same work or material will not also be measured for payment under any other Contract item which may appear elsewhere in the Contract, plans, or specifications. 90-03 Compensation for altered quantities. When the accepted quantities of work vary from the quantities in the proposal, the Contractor shall accept as payment in full, so far as Contract items are concerned, payment at the original Contract price for the accepted quantities of work actually completed and accepted. No allowance, except as provided for in the subsection 40-02 titled ALTERATION OF WORK AND QUANTITIES of Section 40 will be made for any increased expense, loss of expected reimbursement, or loss of anticipated profits suffered or claimed by the Contractor which results directly from such alterations or indirectly from his or her unbalanced allocation of overhead and profit among the Contract items, or from any other cause. 90-04 Payment for omitted items. As specified in the subsection 40-03 titled OMITTED ITEMS of Section 40, the Engineer shall have the right to omit from the work (order nonperformance) any Contract item, except major Contract items, in the best interest of the Owner. Should the Engineer omit or order nonperformance of a Contract item or portion of such item from the work, the Contractor shall accept payment in full at the Contract prices for any work actually completed and acceptable prior to the Engineer’s order to omit or non-perform such Contract item. Acceptable materials ordered by the Contractor or delivered on the work prior to the date of the Engineer’s order will be paid for at the actual cost to the Contractor and shall thereupon become the property of the Owner. In addition to the reimbursement hereinbefore provided, the Contractor shall be reimbursed for all actual costs incurred for the purpose of performing the omitted Contract item prior to the date of the Engineer’s order. Such additional costs incurred by the Contractor must be directly related New Electrical Building Page 104 of 497 to the deleted Contract item and shall be supported by certified statements by the Contractor as to the nature the amount of such costs. 90-05 Payment for extra work. Extra work, performed in accordance with the subsection 40-04 titled EXTRA WORK of Section 40, will be paid for at the Contract prices or agreed prices specified in the change order or supplemental agreement authorizing the extra work. 90-06 Partial payments. Partial payments will be made to the Contractor at least once each month as the work progresses. Said payments will be based upon estimates, prepared by the Engineer, of the value of the work performed and materials complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract, Plans, and Specifications. Such partial payments may also include the delivered actual cost of those materials stockpiled and stored in accordance with the subsection 90-07 titled PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND of this section. No partial payment will be made when the amount due to the Contractor since the last estimate amounts to less than five hundred dollars. The Contractor is required to pay all subcontractors for satisfactory performance of their contracts no later than 30 days after the Contractor has received a partial payment. The Owner must ensure prompt and full payment of retainage from the prime Contractor to the subcontractor within 30 days after the subcontractor’s work is satisfactorily completed. A subcontractor’s work is satisfactorily completed when all the tasks called for in the subcontract have been accomplished and documented as required by the Owner. When the Owner has made an incremental acceptance of a portion of a prime Contract, the work of a subcontractor covered by that acceptance is deemed to be satisfactorily completed. From the total of the amount determined to be payable on a partial payment, 10 percent of such total amount will be deducted and retained by the Owner until the final payment is made, except as may be provided (at the Contractor’s option) in the subsection 90-08 titled PAYMENT OF WITHHELD FUNDS of this section. The balance 90% of the amount payable, less all previous payments, shall be certified for payment. Should the Contractor exercise his or her option, as provided in the subsection 90-08 titled PAYMENT OF WITHHELD FUNDS of this section, no such percent retainage shall be deducted. When at least 95% of the work has been completed, the Engineer shall, at the Owner’s discretion and with the consent of the surety, prepare estimates of both the Contract value and the cost of the remaining work to be done. The Owner may retain an amount not less than twice the Contract value or estimated cost, whichever is greater, of the work remaining to be done. The remainder, less all previous payments and deductions, will then be certified for payment to the Contractor. New Electrical Building Page 105 of 497 It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall not be entitled to demand or receive partial payment based on quantities of work in excess of those provided in the bid or covered by approved change orders or supplemental agreements, except when such excess quantities have been determined by the Engineer to be a part of the final quantity for the item of work in question. No partial payment shall bind the Owner to the acceptance of any materials or work in place as to quality or quantity. All partial payments are subject to correction at the time of final payment as provided in the subsection 90-09 titled ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT of this section. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a complete release of all claims for labor and material arising out of this Contract before the final payment is made. If any subcontractor or supplier fails to furnish such a release in full, the Contractor may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any potential lien or other such claim. The bond or collateral shall include all costs, expenses, and attorney fees the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging any such lien or claim. 90-07 Payment for materials on hand. Partial payments may be made to the extent of the delivered cost of materials to be incorporated in the work, provided that such materials meet the requirements of the Contract, Plans, and Specifications and are delivered to acceptable sites on the airport property or at other sites in the vicinity that are acceptable to the Owner. Such delivered costs of stored or stockpiled materials may be included in the next partial payment after the following conditions are met: 59. a. The material has been stored or stockpiled in a manner acceptable to the Engineer at or on an approved site. 60. b. The Contractor has furnished the Engineer with acceptable evidence of the quantity and quality of such stored or stockpiled materials. 61. c. The Contractor has furnished the Engineer with satisfactory evidence that the material and transportation costs have been paid. 62. d. The Contractor has furnished the Owner legal title (free of liens or encumbrances of any kind) to the material so stored or stockpiled. 63. e. The Contractor has furnished the Owner evidence that the material so stored or stockpiled is insured against loss by damage to or disappearance of such materials at any time prior to use in the work. It is understood and agreed that the transfer of title and the Owner’s payment for such stored or stockpiled materials shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibility for furnishing New Electrical Building Page 106 of 497 and placing such materials in accordance with the requirements of the Contract, plans, and specifications. In no case will the amount of partial payments for materials on hand exceed the Contract price for such materials or the Contract price for the Contract item in which the material is intended to be used. No partial payment will be made for stored or stockpiled living or perishable plant materials. The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with the partial payment of stored or stockpiled materials in accordance with the provisions of this subsection. 90-08 Payment of withheld funds. At the Contractor’s option, if an Owner withholds retainage in accordance with the methods described in subsection 90-06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS, the Contractor may request that the Owner deposit the retainage into an escrow account. The Owner’s deposit of retainage into an escrow account is subject to the following conditions: 64. a. The Contractor shall bear all expenses of establishing and maintaining an escrow account and escrow agreement acceptable to the Owner. 65. b. The Contractor shall deposit to and maintain in such escrow only those securities or bank certificates of deposit as are acceptable to the Owner and having a value not less than the retainage that would otherwise be withheld from partial payment. 66. c. The Contractor shall enter into an escrow agreement satisfactory to the Owner. 67. d. The Contractor shall obtain the written consent of the surety to such agreement. 90-09 Acceptance and final payment. When the Contract work has been accepted in accordance with the requirements of the subsection 50-15 titled FINAL ACCEPTANCE of Section 50, the Engineer will prepare the final estimate of the items of work actually performed. The Contractor shall approve the Engineer’s final estimate or advise the Engineer of the Contractor’s objections to the final estimate which are based on disputes in measurements or computations of the final quantities to be paid under the Contract as amended by change order or supplemental agreement. The Contractor and the Engineer shall resolve all disputes (if any) in the measurement and computation of final quantities to be paid within 30 calendar days of the Contractor’s receipt of the Engineer’s final estimate. If, after such 30-day period, a dispute still exists, the Contractor may approve the Engineer’s estimate under protest of the quantities in dispute, and such disputed quantities shall be considered by the Owner as a claim in accordance with the subsection 50-16 titled CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENT AND DISPUTES of Section 50. After the Contractor has approved, or approved under protest, the Engineer’s final estimate, and after the Engineer’s receipt of the project closeout documentation required in subsection 90-11 New Electrical Building Page 107 of 497 Project Closeout, final payment will be processed based on the entire sum, or the undisputed sum in case of approval under protest, determined to be due the Contractor less all previous payments and all amounts to be deducted under the provisions of the Contract. All prior partial estimates and payments shall be subject to correction in the final estimate and payment. If the Contractor has filed a claim for additional compensation under the provisions of the subsection 50-16 titled CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENTS AND DISPUTES of Section 50 or under the provisions of this subsection, such claims will be considered by the Owner in accordance with local laws or ordinances. Upon final adjudication of such claims, any additional payment determined to be due the Contractor will be paid pursuant to a supplemental final estimate. 90-10 Construction warranty. 68. a. In addition to any other warranties in this Contract, the Contractor warrants that work performed under this Contract conforms to the Contract requirements and is free of any defect in equipment, material, workmanship, or design furnished, or performed by the Contractor or any subcontractor or supplier at any tier. 69. b. This warranty shall continue for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work. If the Owner takes possession of any part of the work before final acceptance, this warranty shall continue for a period of one year from the date the Owner takes possession. However, this will not relieve the Contractor from corrective items required by the final acceptance of the project work. 70. c. The Contractor shall remedy at the Contractor’s expense any failure to conform, or any defect. In addition, the Contractor shall remedy at the Contractor’s expense any damage to Owner real or personal property, when that damage is the result of: 71. (1) The Contractor’s failure to conform to Contract requirements; or 72. (2) Any defect of equipment, material, workmanship, or design furnished by the Contractor. 73. d. The Contractor shall restore any work damaged in fulfilling the terms and conditions of this clause. The Contractor’s warranty with respect to work repaired or replaced will run for one year from the date of repair or replacement. 74. e. The Owner will notify the Contractor, in writing, within (7) days after the discovery of any failure, defect, or damage. 75. f. If the Contractor fails to remedy any failure, defect, or damage within 14 days after receipt of notice, the Owner shall have the right to replace, repair, or otherwise remedy the failure, defect, or damage at the Contractor’s expense. New Electrical Building Page 108 of 497 76. g. With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers for work performed and materials furnished under this Contract, the Contractor shall: (1) Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice; (2) Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of the Owner, as directed by the Owner, and (3) Enforce all warranties for the benefit of the Owner. 77. h. This warranty shall not limit the Owner’s rights with respect to latent defects, gross mistakes, or fraud. 90-11 Project closeout. Approval of final payment to the Contractor is contingent upon completion and submittal of the items listed below. The final payment will not be approved until the Engineer approves the Contractor’s final submittal. The Contractor shall: a. Provide two (2) copies of all manufacturer’s warranties specified for materials, equipment, and installations. b. Provide weekly payroll records (not previously received) from the general Contractor and all subcontractors. c. Complete final cleanup in accordance with subsection 40-08, FINAL CLEANUP. d. Complete all punch list items identified during the Final Inspection. e. Provide complete release of all claims for labor and material arising out of the Contract. f. Provide a certified statement signed by the subcontractors, indicating actual amounts paid to the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) subcontractors and/or suppliers associated with the project. g. When applicable per state requirements, return copies of sales tax completion forms. h. Manufacturer's certifications for all items incorporated in the work. i. All required record drawings, as-built drawings or as-constructed drawings. j. Project Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. k. Security for Construction Warranty. l. Equipment commissioning documentation submitted, if required. END OF SECTION 90 New Electrical Building Page 109 of 497 SECTION 100 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM 100-01 General. When the specification requires a Contractor Quality Control Program, the Contractor shall establish, provide, and maintain an effective Quality Control Program that details the methods and procedures that will be taken to assure that all materials and completed construction required by this contract conform to contract Plans, Technical Specifications and other requirements, whether manufactured by the Contractor, or procured from subcontractors or vendors. Although guidelines are established, and certain minimum requirements are specified here and elsewhere in the contract technical specifications, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for accomplishing the stated purpose. The intent of this section is to enable the Contractor to establish a necessary level of control that will: a. Adequately provide for the production of acceptable quality materials. b. Provide sufficient information to assure both the Contractor and the Engineer that the specification requirements can be met. c. Allow the Contractor as much latitude as possible to develop his or her own standard of control. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss and present, at the preconstruction conference, their understanding of the quality control requirements. The Contractor shall not begin any construction or production of materials to be incorporated into the completed work until the Quality Control Program has been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. No partial payment will be made for materials subject to specific quality control requirements until the Quality Control Program has been reviewed. The quality control requirements contained in this section and elsewhere in the contract technical specifications are in addition to and separate from the acceptance testing requirements. Acceptance testing requirements are the responsibility of the Engineer. Paving projects over $500,000 shall have a Quality Control (QC)/Quality Assurance (QA) workshop with the Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors, testing laboratories, and Owner’s representative and the FAA prior to or at start of construction. The workshop shall address QC and QA requirements of the project specifications. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Airport and the Engineer on time and location of the QC/QA workshop. 100-02 Description of program. a. General description. The Contractor shall establish a Quality Control Program to perform quality control inspection and testing of all items of work required by the technical specifications, including those performed by subcontractors. This Quality Control Program shall ensure conformance to applicable specifications and plans with respect to materials, workmanship, construction, finish, and functional performance. The Quality Control Program shall be effective for control of all construction work performed under this Contract and shall specifically include surveillance and tests required by the technical specifications, in addition to other requirements of this section and any other activities deemed necessary by the Contractor to establish an effective level of quality control. New Electrical Building Page 110 of 497 b. Quality Control Program. The Contractor shall describe the Quality Control Program in a written document that shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to the start of any production, construction, or off-site fabrication. The written Quality Control Program shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval at least 14 calendar days before the preconstruction meeting. The Contractor’s Quality Control Plan and Quality Control testing laboratory must be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to the Notice to Proceed (NTP). The Quality Control Program shall be organized to address, as a minimum, the following items: a. Quality control organization b. Project progress schedule c. Submittals schedule d. Inspection requirements e. Quality control testing plan f. Documentation of quality control activities g. Requirements for corrective action when quality control and/or acceptance criteria are not met The Contractor is encouraged to add any additional elements to the Quality Control Program that is deemed necessary to adequately control all production and/or construction processes required by this contract. 100-03 Quality control organization. The Contractor Quality Control Program shall be implemented by the establishment of a separate quality control organization. An organizational chart shall be developed to show all quality control personnel and how these personnel integrate with other management/production and construction functions and personnel. The organizational chart shall identify all quality control staff by name and function, and shall indicate the total staff required to implement all elements of the Quality Control Program, including inspection and testing for each item of work. If necessary, different technicians can be used for specific inspection and testing functions for different items of work. If an outside organization or independent testing laboratory is used for implementation of all or part of the Quality Control Program, the personnel assigned shall be subject to the qualification requirements of paragraph 100-03a and 100-03b. The organizational chart shall indicate which personnel are Contractor employees and which are provided by an outside organization. The quality control organization shall, as a minimum, consist of the following personnel: a. Program Administrator. The Program Administrator shall be a full-time employee of the Contractor, or a consultant engaged by the Contractor. The Program Administrator shall have a minimum of five (5) years of experience in airport and/or highway construction and shall have had prior quality control experience on a project of comparable size and scope as the contract. Additional qualifications for the Program Administrator shall include at least one of the following requirements: New Electrical Building Page 111 of 497 (1) Professional Engineer with one (1) year of airport paving experience. (2) Engineer-in-training with two (2) years of airport paving experience. (3) An individual with three (3) years of highway and/or airport paving experience, with a Bachelor of Science Degree in Civil Engineering, Civil Engineering Technology or Construction. (4) Construction materials technician certified at Level III by the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). (5) Highway materials technician certified at Level III by NICET. (6) Highway construction technician certified at Level III by NICET. (7) A NICET certified engineering technician in Civil Engineering Technology with five (5) years of highway and/or airport paving experience. The Program Administrator shall have full authority to institute any and all actions necessary for the successful implementation of the Quality Control Program to ensure compliance with the contract plans and technical specifications. The Program Administrator shall report directly to a responsible officer of the construction firm. The Program Administrator may supervise the Quality Control Program on more than one project provided that person can be at the job site within two (2) hours after being notified of a problem. b. Quality control technicians. A sufficient number of quality control technicians necessary to adequately implement the Quality Control Program shall be provided. These personnel shall be either Engineers, engineering technicians, or experienced craftsman with qualifications in the appropriate field equivalent to NICET Level II or higher construction materials technician or highway construction technician and shall have a minimum of two (2) years of experience in their area of expertise. The quality control technicians shall report directly to the Program Administrator and shall perform the following functions: (1) Inspection of all materials, construction, plant, and equipment for conformance to the technical specifications, and as required by subsection 100-06. (2) Performance of all quality control tests as required by the technical specifications and subsection 100-07. (3) Performance of density tests for the Engineer when required by the technical specifications. Certification at an equivalent level, by a state or nationally recognized organization will be acceptable in lieu of NICET certification. c. Staffing levels. The Contractor shall provide sufficient qualified quality control personnel to monitor each work activity at all times. Where material is being produced in a plant for incorporation into the work, separate plant and field technicians shall be provided at each plant and field placement location. The scheduling and coordinating of all inspection and testing must match the type and pace of work activity. The Quality Control Program shall state where different technicians will be required for different work elements. New Electrical Building Page 112 of 497 100-04 Project progress schedule. The Contractor shall submit a coordinated construction schedule for all work activities. The schedule shall be prepared as a network diagram in Critical Path Method (CPM), Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT), or other format, or as otherwise specified in the contract. As a minimum, it shall provide information on the sequence of work activities, milestone dates, and activity duration. The Contractor shall maintain the work schedule and provide an update and analysis of the progress schedule on a twice monthly basis, or as otherwise specified in the contract. Submission of the work schedule shall not relieve the Contractor of overall responsibility for scheduling, sequencing, and coordinating all work to comply with the requirements of the contract. 100-05 Submittals schedule. The Contractor shall submit a detailed listing of all submittals (for example, mix designs, material certifications) and shop drawings required by the technical specifications. The listing can be developed in a spreadsheet format and shall include: a. Specification item number b. Item description c. Description of submittal d. Specification paragraph requiring submittal e. Scheduled date of submittal 100-06 Inspection requirements. Quality control inspection functions shall be organized to provide inspections for all definable features of work, as detailed below. All inspections shall be documented by the Contractor as specified by subsection 100-07. Inspections shall be performed daily to ensure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of the particular feature of work. These shall include the following minimum requirements: a. During plant operation for material production, quality control test results and periodic inspections shall be used to ensure the quality of aggregates and other mix components, and to adjust and control mix proportioning to meet the approved mix design and other requirements of the technical specifications. All equipment used in proportioning and mixing shall be inspected to ensure its proper operating condition. The Quality Control Program shall detail how these, and other quality control functions will be accomplished and used. b. During field operations, quality control test results and periodic inspections shall be used to ensure the quality of all materials and workmanship. All equipment used in placing, finishing, and compacting shall be inspected to ensure its proper operating condition and to ensure that all such operations are in conformance to the technical specifications and are within the plan dimensions, lines, grades, and tolerances specified. The Program shall document how these, and other quality control functions will be accomplished and used. 100-07 Quality control testing plan. As a part of the overall Quality Control Program, the Contractor shall implement a quality control testing plan, as required by the technical specifications. The testing plan shall include the minimum tests and test frequencies required by New Electrical Building Page 113 of 497 each technical specification Item, as well as any additional quality control tests that the Contractor deems necessary to adequately control production and/or construction processes. The testing plan can be developed in a spreadsheet fashion and shall, as a minimum, include the following: a. Specification item number (for example, P-401) b. Item description (for example, Plant Mix Bituminous Pavements) c. Test type (for example, gradation, grade, asphalt content) d. Test standard (for example, ASTM or American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) test number, as applicable) e. Test frequency (for example, as required by technical specifications or minimum frequency when requirements are not stated) f. Responsibility (for example, plant technician) g. Control requirements (for example, target, permissible deviations) The testing plan shall contain a statistically-based procedure of random sampling for acquiring test samples in accordance with ASTM D3665. The Engineer shall be provided the opportunity to witness quality control sampling and testing. All quality control test results shall be documented by the Contractor as required by subsection 100-08. 100-08 Documentation. The Contractor shall maintain current quality control records of all inspections and tests performed. These records shall include factual evidence that the required inspections or tests have been performed, including type and number of inspections or tests involved; results of inspections or tests; nature of defects, deviations, causes for rejection, etc.; proposed remedial action; and corrective actions taken. These records must cover both conforming and defective or deficient features, and must include a statement that all supplies and materials incorporated in the work are in full compliance with the terms of the contract. Legible copies of these records shall be furnished to the Engineer daily. The records shall cover all work placed subsequent to the previously furnished records and shall be verified and signed by the Contractor’s Program Administrator. Specific Contractor quality control records required for the contract shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following records: a. Daily inspection reports. Each Contractor quality control technician shall maintain a daily log of all inspections performed for both Contractor and subcontractor operations. These technician’s daily reports shall provide factual evidence that continuous quality control inspections have been performed and shall, as a minimum, include the following: (1) Technical specification item number and description (2) Compliance with approved submittals (3) Proper storage of materials and equipment (4) Proper operation of all equipment (5) Adherence to plans and technical specifications New Electrical Building Page 114 of 497 (6) Review of quality control tests (7) Safety inspection. The daily inspection reports shall identify inspections conducted, results of inspections, location and nature of defects found, causes for rejection, and remedial or corrective actions taken or proposed. The daily inspection reports shall be signed by the responsible quality control technician and the Program Administrator. The Engineer shall be provided at least one copy of each daily inspection report on the work day following the day of record. b. Daily test reports. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system that will record all quality control test results. Daily test reports shall document the following information: (1) Technical specification item number and description (2) Test designation (3) Location (4) Date of test (5) Control requirements (6) Test results (7) Causes for rejection (8) Recommended remedial actions (9) Retests Test results from each day’s work period shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the start of the next day’s work period. When required by the technical specifications, the Contractor shall maintain statistical quality control charts. The daily test reports shall be signed by the responsible quality control technician and the Program Administrator. 100-09 Corrective action requirements. The Quality Control Program shall indicate the appropriate action to be taken when a process is deemed, or believed, to be out of control (out of tolerance) and detail what action will be taken to bring the process into control. The requirements for corrective action shall include both general requirements for operation of the Quality Control Program as a whole, and for individual items of work contained in the technical specifications. The Quality Control Program shall detail how the results of quality control inspections and tests will be used for determining the need for corrective action and shall contain clear sets of rules to gauge when a process is out of control and the type of correction to be taken to regain process control. When applicable or required by the technical specifications, the Contractor shall establish and use statistical quality control charts for individual quality control tests. The requirements for corrective action shall be linked to the control charts. 100-10 Surveillance by the Engineer. All items of material and equipment shall be subject to surveillance by the Engineer at the point of production, manufacture or shipment to determine if the Contractor, producer, manufacturer or shipper maintains an adequate quality control system New Electrical Building Page 115 of 497 in conformance with the requirements detailed here and the applicable technical specifications and plans. In addition, all items of materials, equipment and work in place shall be subject to surveillance by the Engineer at the site for the same purpose. Surveillance by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of performing quality control inspections of either on-site or off-site Contractor’s or subcontractor’s work. 100-11 Noncompliance. a. The Engineer will notify the Contractor of any noncompliance with any of the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall, after receipt of such notice, immediately take corrective action. Any notice, when delivered by the Engineer or his or her authorized representative to the Contractor or his or her authorized representative at the site of the work, shall be considered sufficient notice. b. In cases where quality control activities do not comply with either the Contractor Quality Control Program or the contract provisions, or where the Contractor fails to properly operate and maintain an effective Quality Control Program, as determined by the Engineer, the Engineer may: (1) Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified quality control personnel or subcontractors. (2) Order the Contractor to stop operations until appropriate corrective actions are taken. END OF SECTION 100 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 116 of 497 SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS AIRPORT SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL SUMMARY The Contractor shall carry out its operations in a manner that will cause a minimum of interference with air traffic, and shall be required to cooperate with the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), the Airport, Airport tenants and users, and other contractors working in the area. All work shall be completed in accordance with the Contract Documents including FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-2G, Operational Safety on Airports During Construction or current edition as of bid date. The Contractor shall supply, place, maintain, move and store the items listed herein, as appropriate, to facilitate construction and protect air traffic. The Contractor shall maintain an adequate extra supply of these items on site. These provisions are to enhance the existing language listed in the General Terms & Conditions. All or parts of the contents will apply to the Contractor’s Contract depending upon the sequence in which the phases are conducted. The Airport has the right to monitor the Contractors’ operations for safety performance, workmanship, protection of operations, work progress, housekeeping, and compliance to design specifications (Contractor shall still be responsible for assuring safe work practices). It is a general practice that the Airport will work through the Contractor’s supervision and not directly with the employee. The Airport has the right to participate with and investigate any accident or incident. Contractor shall develop and implement a system for assessing appropriate requirements applicable to its employees, including removal from Airport property, for violation of safety laws statutes, codes, ordinances and regulations, safety requirements specified by the Contract, including, without limitation, any other condition that presents a safety hazard to the employee or others. Contractor shall prepare and maintain a detailed written report of each instance where it has assessed discipline for a safety related infraction including identification of the employee, the nature of the infraction and the discipline assessed. Contractor shall be required to develop, at a minimum, a comprehensive post accident drug and alcohol testing program that includes post accident and random testing in accordance with Department of Transportation (DOT) Drug and Alcohol Testing - 49 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Part 40. DEFINITIONS Safety Program – The Contractor shall submit its Safety Program to the Airport and obtain approval prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Safety Program shall be prepared in accordance with the FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-2G (Operational Safety on Airports During Construction), or current edition as of bid date. The Safety Program includes, but is not limited to the following: New Electrical Building Page 117 of 497 Contractor’s Corporate Safety Policy Contractor’s Site-Specific Safety Plan Construction Safety and Phasing Plan (CSPP) – The Contractor shall abide by the CSPP, approved by the FAA and provided by the Airport. Safety Plan Compliance Document (SPCD) – The SPCD details how the Contractor will comply with the CSPP. The Contractor shall prepare the SPCD and obtain approval by the Airport prior to issuance of the Notice to Proceed PRODUCTS WARNING LIGHTS. Warning lights shall meet the requirements of FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-2G (Operational Safety on Airport During Construction), or current edition as of bid date or as amended during the term of the Contract. The Contractor’s vehicles shall meet the requirements of FAA Advisory Circular 150/5210-5D (Painting, Marking, and Lighting of Vehicles Used on an Airport), or current edition as of bid date or as amended during the term of the Contract. LOW PROFILE BARRICADES. Low profile barricades shall be in accordance with the details in the Contract Documents and meet the requirements of FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-2G, or current edition as of bid date or as amended during the term of the Contract. The barricades shall be furnished, maintained and relocated during each phase by the Contractor. Barricades shall be as detailed and installed per the drawings along the affected pavement edge or access to a closed runway, taxiway or apron. SAFETY BARRICADES. Safety barricades shall be furnished and installed at the locations as indicated on the Contract Documents and/or directed by the Engineer. Safety barricades shall be 32” – 36” tall and 6’ long. Safety barricades shall be water fillable with a maximum empty weight of 85 pounds and a minimum filled weight of 700 pounds. There shall be an equal number of orange and white to allow for the colors to be staggered upon assembly. They shall be interlockable and marked with alternating orange and white reflective tape on each side. The Contractor shall supply two (2) solar powered red flashing lights per barricade that can be attached to the top of the barricades. VACUUM SWEEPER. The power vacuum sweepers shall be Tymco, Model HSP-600 or Elgin Model Crosswind or an approved equal. A broom type sweeper may be allowed by the Engineer depending upon construction activity on aircraft operations area. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one sweeper at all times. PART 2 - EXECUTION General Information A. All Contractors shall comply with the following: 1. All applicable Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Federal Aviation Administration (FAA), Federal Aviation Regulations (FAR), Transportation Security Administration (TSA) Part 1542, Department of Transportation (DOT), Federal, State, and Local safety standards. 2. Other reasonable safety rules and practices as may be established from time to time by the Airport. New Electrical Building Page 118 of 497 In compliance with FAA AC 150/5370-2G, or current edition as of bid date or as amended during the term of the Contract date, the Contractor shall prepare a Safety Plan Compliance Document (SPCD). This document shall include a general statement by the Contractor that it has read and shall adhere to the CSPP. Any details not identifiable for the CSPP should be included within the SPCD. The SPCD is similar to the CSPP but shall not contain duplicate information. The Contractor shall submit the SPCD to the Airport for approval prior to the issuance of the NTP. The SPCD shall include but not be limited to the following checklist as applicable to the scope of the project: Coordination. Discuss details of proposed safety meetings with the Airport operator and with Contractor’s employees and subcontractors. Phasing. Discuss proposed construction schedule elements, including: i. Duration of each phase. ii. Daily start and finish of construction, including “night only” construction. iii. Duration of construction activities during: 1. Normal runway operations. 2. Closed runway operations. 3. Modified runway “Aircraft Reference Code” usage. Areas and operations affected by the construction activity. These areas and operations should be identified in the CSPP and should not require an entry in the SPCD. Protection of NAVAIDS. Discuss specific methods proposed to protect operating NAVAIDS. Contractor access. Provide the following: i. Details on how the Contractor will maintain the integrity of the Airport security fence (Contract security officers, daily log of construction personnel, and other). ii. Listing of individual requiring driver training (for certificated airports and as requested). iii. Radio communications. 1. Types of radios and backup capabilities. 2. Who will be monitoring radios. 3. Who to contact if the Air Traffic Control Tower (ATCT) cannot reach the Contractor’s designated person by radio. 4. Details on how the Contractor will escort material delivery vehicles. Wildlife management. Discuss the following: i. Methods and procedures to prevent wildlife attraction. ii. Wildlife reporting procedures. Foreign Object Debris (FOD) management. Discuss equipment and methods for control of FOD, including construction debris and dust. New Electrical Building Page 119 of 497 Hazardous material (HAZMAT) management. Discuss equipment and methods for responding to hazardous spills. Notification of construction activities. Provide the following: i. Contractor points of contact. ii. Contractor emergency contact. iii. Listing of all equipment greater than 10 feet in height or other requested equipment proposed for use on the Airport and the time frame for submitting 7460-1 forms not previously submitted by the Airport operator. iv. Batch plant details, including 7460-1 submittal. Inspection requirements. Discuss daily (or more frequent) inspections and special inspection procedures. Underground utilities. Discuss proposed methods of identifying and protecting underground utilities. Penalties. Penalties should be identified in the CSPP and should not require an entry in the SPCD. Special conditions. Discuss proposed actions for each special condition identified in the CSPP. Runway and taxiway visual aids. Including marking, lighting, signs and visual NAVAIDs. Discuss proposed visual aids including the following: i. Equipment and methods for covering signage and airfield lights. ii. Equipment and methods for temporary closure markings (paint, fabric, other). iii. Types of temporary Visual Guidance Slope Indicators (VGSI). Markings and signs for access routes. Discuss proposed methods of demarcating access routes for vehicle drivers. Hazard marking and lighting. Discuss proposed equipment and methods for identifying excavation areas. Protection of runway and taxiway safety areas. Including object free areas, obstacle free zones, and approach/departure surfaces. Discuss proposed methods of identifying, demarcating, and protecting airport surfaces including: i. Equipment and methods for maintaining Taxiway Safety Area standards. ii. Equipment and methods for separation of construction operations from aircraft operations, including details of barricades. Other limitations on construction should be identified in the CSPP and should not require an entry in the SPCD. Regular progress meetings will be conducted during construction. Part of the meeting will be dedicated to safety. During these meetings, the Contractor shall submit to the Airport the following safety information: New Electrical Building Page 120 of 497 Estimated man-hours worked from the previous period; Number of accidents from the previous periods; Number of recordable injuries from the previous period; and Summarization of any accident that took place from the previous period. In estimating the work involved in the Contract, the Contractor shall be familiar with all existing and limiting conditions that will or may have a bearing on the performance of the Contract with regard to safety. Any limiting conditions shall be identified in writing. All costs related to the required Safety Program shall be included in the Contractor's bid. Costs provided to administer and maintain the Safety Program shall be complete and shall include costs for all required personnel, activities, facilities, media, tools, drug testing, and any specialty equipment required to insure a comprehensive, qualified Safety Program to suit a per week/per shift basis. Throughout the duration of the Contract, any practice or situation that the Engineer determines to be unsafe or a hindrance to regular Airport operations shall be immediately rectified. The following publications contain definitions/descriptions of critical Airport operating areas. The areas defined below pertain to airfield safety requirements and are referenced throughout the Contract Documents. Copies of these publications are available from the FAA at www.faa.gov. Advisory Circular 150/5370-2G, or current edition as of bid date, "Operational Safety on Airports During Construction": Sets forth guidelines to assist Airport operators in complying with FAR Part 139, "Certification and Operation/Land Airports Serving Certain Air Carriers" and with the requirements of federally funded construction projects. FAR Part 77, "Objects Affecting Navigable Airspace," Current Edition: Establishes standards for determining obstructions to navigable airspace. Civil Airport imaginary surfaces are defined in the publication. It also sets forth requirements for notice of certain proposed construction or alteration. Notice of construction provides a basis for recommendations for identifying the construction or alteration in accordance with AC 70/7460-1, "Obstruction Marking and Lighting," or current edition as of bid date. AC 150/5300-13A, "Airport Design" or current edition as of bid date: Establishes design, operational and maintenance standards for airports. Standard terms used in the Contract Documents are defined below: Runway Safety Area (RSA) - The defined surface surrounding the runway over which aircraft should, in dry weather, be able to cross at normal operating speeds without incurring significant damage. A safety area is graded, drained and compacted. It is free of any holes, trenches, humps or other significant surface variations or objects, other than those which must be there because of their essential aeronautical function. The safety area requires the capability of supporting maintenance, firefighting, and rescue vehicles under normal (dry) conditions. Object Free Area (OFA) – An area on the ground centered on a runway, taxiway, or taxilane centerline provided to enhance the safety of aircraft operations by having the area free of objects, except for objects that need New Electrical Building Page 121 of 497 to be located in the OFA for air navigations or aircraft ground maneuvering purposes. Obstacle Free Zone (OFZ) – The OFZ is the airspace below 150 feet above the established Airport elevation and along the runway and extended runway centerline that is required to be clear of all objects, except for frangible visual NAVAIDs that need to be located in the OFZ because of their function, in order to provide clearance protection for aircraft landing or taking off from the runway, and for missed approaches. The OFZ is subdivided as follows: 1) Runway OFZ. The airspace above a surface centered on the runway centerline. 2) Inner-approach OFZ. The airspace above a surface centered on the extended runway centerline. It applies to runways with an approach lighting system. 3) Outer-approach OFZ. The airspace above the surfaces located on the outer edges of the runway OFZ and the inner-approach OFZ. It applies to runways with approach visibility minimums lower than ¾-statute mile. Taxiway Safety Area (TSA) – A defined surface alongside the taxiway prepared or suitable for reducing the risk of damage to an airplane unintentionally departing the taxiway. The work shall proceed in such a manner as to provide safe conditions for all workers and personnel. The sequence of operations shall be such that maximum protection is afforded to ensure that personnel and workers in the work area are not subject to any dangerous conditions. Prior to commencement of construction activity, the Contractor shall notify in writing, at least 72 hours in advance, Airport Operations and the Engineer of its intentions to begin construction, stating the proposed time, date, and area of which construction is to occur in order for the appropriate Notice-to-Airmen (NOTAM) to be issued. During the performance of this Contract, the Airport facility shall remain in use to the maximum extent possible. The Contractor shall not allow employees, subcontractors, suppliers, or any other unauthorized persons to enter in any Airport area which may be open for aircraft use. Should any of the following problems or hazards arise during construction, the Contractor shall immediately rectify/correct the problem or hazard to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Airport: Trenches, holes, or excavations at or adjacent to any active runway or in safety areas. Unmarked/unlighted holes or excavation at any active apron, taxiway, taxilane, or related safety area. Mounds or piles of earth, construction materials, temporary structures, or other objects in the vicinity of any active taxiway, taxilane, or in a related safety, approach, or departure area. Vehicles or equipment (whether operating or idle) on any active runway, taxiway, taxilane, or in any related safety, approach, or departure area. New Electrical Building Page 122 of 497 Vehicles, equipment, excavations, stockpiles, or other materials which could degrade or otherwise interfere with electronic signals from radios or navigational aids (NAVAIDS). Runway surfacing projects resulting in excessive lips greater than 1 inch for runways and exceeding 3 inches for edges between the old shoulder and new surfaces at runway edges and ends. Unmarked utility, NAVAID, weather service, runway lighting, or other power or signal cables that could be damaged during construction. Objects (whether or not marked or flagged) or activities anywhere on or in the vicinity of the Airport which could be distracting, confusing, or alarming to pilots during aircraft operations. Unflagged/unlighted low visibility items (such as tall cranes, drills, and the like) anywhere in the vicinity of active runways, or in any approach or departure area. Misleading or malfunctioning obstruction lights or unlighted/unmarked obstructions in an approach to any active runway. Inadequate approach/departure surfaces needed to assure adequate landing/takeoff clearance over obstructions or work or storage areas. Inadequate, confusing or misleading (to user pilots) marking/lighting of runways, taxiways, or taxilanes, including displaced or relocated thresholds. Water, dirt, debris, or other transient accumulation which temporarily obscures pavement marking, pavement edges, or derogates visibility of runway/taxiway marking or lighting. Inadequate or improper methods of marking, barricading, and lighting of temporarily closed portions of Airport operations areas. Trash or other materials with foreign object damage (FOD) potential, whether on runways, taxiways, or aprons, or in related safety areas. Inadequate barricading or other marking which is placed to separate construction or maintenance areas from active aircraft operating areas. Failure to control vehicle and human access to active aircraft operating areas. Construction/maintenance activities or materials which could hamper the response of aircraft rescue and firefighting (ARFF) equipment from reaching all aircraft or any part of the runway/taxiway system, runway approach and departure areas, and aircraft parking locations. Bird attractants on Airport, such as edibles (food scraps, etc.), miscellaneous trash, or ponded water. Contractor Requirements A. All persons entering the project area designated as the construction site shall strictly follow Georgia, OSHA, FAA, DOT, and Transportation Safety Administration regulations. B. The Contractor shall provide physical barriers along the perimeter of its work site and place signs identifying the area as a construction site. The contractor will install signs along on- site haul roads indicating that speed limit for construction vehicles is 25 mph or 15 mph if on airfield pavements including taxiways and aprons. In some cases where the general public or open airfield is to be protected, additional and/or specialty barriers might be required and will need to be determined by Airport. C. The Contractor shall submit an FAA Form 7460-1 at least 60 days prior to any crane erections. All construction involving cranes shall further be coordinated at least 72 hours New Electrical Building Page 123 of 497 in advance, excluding weekends, with the Airport Operations. This does not include the time required for airspace review. The following information and actions are required: 1. Location of the Crane. 2. Maximum extendable height. 3. Hours of operation. 4. The top of each crane boom shall be marked by a 3' x 3' orange and white checkered flag — each box being 1' square. 5. Each crane shall be lowered at night and during periods of poor visibility as directed by Airport Operations. In the event the crane is approved to remain extended during the hours from sunset to sunrise, the highest point of the crane boom will be lit with a red obstruction light in accordance with AC 70/7460-1. D. These established safety requirements shall govern Contractors and all persons within the designated construction site and are outlined to avoid infractions of common accepted safety practices. E. These safety requirements shall not be construed as complete and any requirements of the guidelines in conflict with Georgia, OSHA and FAA shall be superseded by Georgia, OSHA or FAA regulations. F. Any individual failing to follow these safety requirements shall be directed by the Contractor to immediately abate the unsafe act, behavior, or equipment. G. All Contractor equipment brought onsite for use on or during the construction project shall be kept in a safe operating condition. Worn or damaged equipment shall be repaired, replaced or taken out of service (locked out) and removed from the job site. H. Contractor shall keep its work area in a clean and safe condition. I. The use of makeshift, defective or inadequate scaffolding, rigging, or staging is prohibited. J. The Contractor shall provide barriers, railings or coverings for all areas including, but not limited to, elevated work platforms, holes, excavations, roof openings, along roof edges, manholes, and/or unfinished work causing floor obstructions. Outside excavations, barriers, and safety signs shall be adequately illuminated during darkness. K. No Contractor is permitted to use any powered industrial moving equipment, trucks, tools, or ladders owned or rented by, the Airport. L. Contractors shall not perform work overhead of any member of the general public. The Contractor shall use physical barriers to prevent access by non-construction personnel to areas with overhead construction work. If the Contractor cannot restrict access to the overhead work area, work will cease until a method of restricting access is developed and implemented. M. Welding screens and/or curtains will be used in areas where cutting or welding operations are being performed where non-construction personnel may be exposed to weld flash or sparks. Refer to Airport Hot Work permit requirements. N. Tools, equipment or materials shall not be left or placed on beams, overhead walkways, or places where they may fall, causing injury. New Electrical Building Page 124 of 497 1. To prevent possible explosive or incendiary devices from being hidden in areas close to Airport facilities, equipment, aircraft, or vehicles, no containers (tool boxes, storage containers, materials trailers) shall be left unsecured or unattended in public areas. 2. The Contractor shall not bring any tool through passenger screening. No tools shall be left unsecured in public areas. Any temporary doors that lead to construction areas that are accessible by the public shall be equipped with a push button cipher lock (installed at the Contractor’s expense). The access number to the door shall be provided to Airport designees. 3. The Contractor is not permitted to carry liquids, gels, or aerosols into sterile areas except for those liquids, gels, or aerosol necessary for operational or medical needs, all of which shall be subject to inspection. O. Contractor shall verify and assure that every employee who operates any mobile equipment on Airport properties shall have a current valid driver’s license. P. The Contractor shall comply with the National Electric Code (NEC) requirements regarding ground fault circuit interrupters for construction field tools and equipment. Q. In matters concerning interpretation of the foregoing requirements, the decision of the Airport will be final and binding. R. The Contractor shall maintain a Safety Program, for the purpose of safety, security, orientation, education, training, enforcement, and distribution. S. If a security system (cameras, gates, lifts, doors, etc.) is going to be taken out of service, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Airport Operations at least three (3) days in advance. Pending certain security threat levels, permission may not be granted to take down a security system. T. Potable water line installation will require coordination with the Airport management. U. When working on the airfield pavement lighting cans, the Contractor shall assure the electrical systems are locked out, tagged out, and verified there is no hazardous energy. V. The Contractor shall not pull any associated airfield lighting electrical cables through manholes, junction cans, pavement cans or through those devices if there are other cables present. All electrical cables shall be locked-out, tagged-out, and de-energized prior to work activities. W. Contractor will provide all lighted, low profile, water or sand filled, taxiway/runway barricading. X. If working on the Airport Operations Area (AOA), the Contractor will be required to prepare an FAA Safety Plan Compliance Document (SPCD) that is a part of the Safety Program. Y. Airfield Rescue and Firefighter (ARFF) roads cannot be taken out of service. Z. Equipment that is used for material handling on the airfield shall have working headlights and brake lights. Any equipment that exits the AOA onto public roadways is subject to GA DOT regulations. New Electrical Building Page 125 of 497 Fall Hazard Protection Control Fall Hazard Control requires that Contractors comply with fall prevention and protection procedures in accordance with Occupational Safety and health Administration (OSHA) requirements. Fire Prevention The Contractor shall provide appropriate fire extinguishers for its employees. No burning, cutting, welding, or heat generating operation shall be allowed in any area on Airport property without first obtaining permission from Airport Operations. Oxygen and acetylene cylinders not in use, shall be properly stored and capped, and secured by a chain or rope. All flammable liquids shall be stored in approved safety containers. Oily rags and/or rags soaked with flammable liquids shall be stored in approved safety containers only. Paint and painter’s equipment, drop sheets, cleaning materials, shall be stored in a clear area away from any heat generating operation. Lids shall be replaced on all opened paint and/or solvent containers. All solvents shall be stored in approved safety containers Lock Outs Examples of energy sources that are required to be locked out and tagged regardless of who has custody are: Any time repairs or modifications are made to electrical systems, either temporary or permanent, they shall be locked out. Locks shall be applied to the main disconnect switch whenever possible. A tag shall accompany all locks. Electrical systems that provide electrical power to equipment, such as pumps and electrical motors, shall be locked out by the Contractor until such time that system is released. Electrical systems that provide electrical power to the airfield signage and lighting. Lines, valves and similar systems that are being tested pneumatically or with Inert gases, such as oxygen, shall be tagged and locked out to prevent an accidental discharge of the pressure within the line. In addition, areas affected by the pneumatic test shall be barricaded against entry and inspected by the Contractor prior to commencement of the test. Air lines, hydraulic lines, gas lines, blanking, pressure storage units, valves, capacitors and other such sources that could be inadvertently activated or discharged causing a hazardous condition, shall be locked out, blanked or otherwise neutralized to prevent accidental activation. Any steam, natural gas, refrigeration, chemical feed, glycol, water, fuel oil, diesel, and jet fuel lines that could be inadvertently activated or discharged causing a hazardous condition, shall be locked out, blanked or otherwise neutralized to prevent accidental activation and or a hazardous condition. In some cases, double block and bleed maybe required. Access to all electrical systems for both shutdown and reenergizing will be coordinated with Airport maintenance. This includes access to all panels, breakers, switches, relays, substations, and all relevant switch gear. New Electrical Building Page 126 of 497 If more than one employee is required to lockout and tag a circuit or piece of equipment, a multiple padlock device (hasp) shall be used. This procedure establishes a lockout practice for securing machinery and equipment during periods of construction and maintenance. It is essential that Contractor complies with its lockout procedure to ensure the safety of all employees. A lockout procedure is to render inoperative electrical systems, air lines, hydraulic lines, mechanical devices, pumps, conveyors, fuel, glycol, water, gasoline, jet fuel, pipelines, valves and all other such energy and stored energy systems that may accidentally be energized or discharged while employees are working on them before they are ready and released for service. Contractor shall administer its own lockout program where not identified by this document. The Contractor shall issue all locks and applicable tags to their foreman, general foreman, superintendents and employees as necessary. The Contractor shall maintain a lock and tag log. Tags are required to have the Contractor’s name, phone number, employee name, and supervisor name easily identified on each tag. After locking out and tagging a circuit, an attempt to energize the equipment shall be made by depressing or turning “on” all starting stations before work begins. In no case shall work begin before circuits and equipment are tested to ensure that they are, in fact, de-energized. Any employee who removes a tag or lock belonging to another employee or person, or overrides a tag or lock in any way, may be removed from the Airport property. Written authorization has to be obtained from the foreman, general foreman, superintendent and Project Manager of the responsible Contractor when a lock has been left on a piece of equipment and the originator is not available for removal. When locks and tags are required, Contractors employees working on that system shall notify their appropriate supervisor. The supervisor, or his designee, shall see that appropriate locks and tags are provided. When work is completed, the appropriate supervisor is also to be notified when locks and tags are removed. After equipment or systems are turned over to the Airport, no work or Airport modifications will be performed without compliance to Airport’s Lockout/Tagout Program. There may be some equipment that cannot be physically locked out using any type of device. If a situation exists where equipment cannot be locked out the Contractor shall notify the Airport. Cranes/Derricks/Lifting Equipment/Rigging All crane operators shall be thoroughly knowledgeable in the operations of the crane, rigging equipment, and other OSHA requirements relating to lifting. NOTAMS may be required depending upon the location and height of the lift. Contractor shall contact Airport management prior to any crane activity. Lifting shall not be done over any employees. Tag lines shall be used for all lifts greater than 20 feet. No lifts shall be made when winds are sustained over 25 mph. New Electrical Building Page 127 of 497 Outrigger shall be shored so they do not damage property. Contractor will be responsible for any property damage to paved or concrete surfaces. A prelift review shall be performed by the Contractor for every critical lift. A Critical lift shall be defined as a lift with a hoisted load that is within 15% of the maximum load limits (normal) of the equipment that is being used. Before a critical lift is performed the Contractor shall submit a Critical Lift Plan that is prepared and approved by a Professional Engineer that is registered with the State of Georgia. The Critical Lift Plan will include the following: Description of the lift Crane Position Lift Height Load Radius Boom and angle Size and weight of load Percent of cranes capacity Personnel involved Rigging plan Communications methods Ground Conditions Inspection Procedures Procedures for hosting (if applicable) The critical lift plan will also document the source (i.e. weight, crane and rigging capacities, inspections, and wind speeds). Vehicle Operation on the Airport Operations Area (AOA) All vehicles that enter the AOA shall comply with the following: All vehicles accessing the AOA shall be placarded with a company name and logo or some other form of identification. All lettering shall be a minimum of 4” high. All construction vehicles/mechanized equipment authorized within the Movement Area or related safety areas shall be marked with a flag on a staff attached to the uppermost portion of the vehicle/motorized equipment so that the flag will be readily visible. The flag shall be at least a 3' x 3' square having a checkered pattern of international orange and white squares at least 1’ on each side in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular 150/5210-5D, or current edition as of bid date. During nighttime hours, all equipment operating on the Airport exceeding 15 feet in height shall be lit with a red obstruction light in accordance with FAA Advisory Circular 70/7460-1, or current edition as of bid date. This light is to be located on the uppermost portion of the equipment. All construction equipment that exceeds 20 feet in height are required to be “airspaced” as determined by the FAA Form 7460-1. Vehicle(s)/equipment shall be operated in a manner that does not interfere with aircraft operations. All vehicle(s)/equipment shall yield right of way to all aircraft and emergency vehicles. New Electrical Building Page 128 of 497 Vehicles/mechanized equipment operators shall obey all traffic signs and markings. Vehicles/equipment shall not stop or be parked so as to block a driveway, AOA access gate, fire lane or aircraft Vehicles/equipment shall not stop or be parked in areas other than those prearranged and approved by the Airport management. No equipment or vehicles may be parked within six feet of an AOA fence. The established speed limit on the AOA is 15 mph. Vehicle(s)/equipment shall not be operated by individuals under the influence of any substance which impairs the ability to do so in a safe manner If an incident occurs on the AOA, the incident shall be reported immediately to Airport Operations by contacting (706) 799-5372. Airport management and Airport Operations have the right to investigative all incidents and issue citations. The Contractor is still obligated to produce its own incident report to be submitted to Airport management. The Contractor shall submit an incident report no later than 24 hours after the incident. Vehicle/mechanized equipment operators are not permitted to move about the Airport outside the designated construction area, at night unless the vehicle has operating head lights, tail lights and brake lights, or is under the escort of a properly lighted vehicle. Head lights shall not be set on high beam when moving about the Airport at night. Vehicles/mechanized equipment authorized on the Movement Area (runways, taxiways, and ramps) and/or associated safety areas shall be equipped with an electrically powered, amber color, 360-degree omni-direction light, mounted on the vehicle such that it is conspicuous from any direction. At no time shall a vehicle enter the Movement Area and/or associated safety areas unless it is authorized by the Airfield Operations and is in continuous radio communication with the Control Tower. If a vehicle is not radio equipped to communicate with the Control Tower, an escort vehicle equipped with such a radio shall lead or direct the movement of this vehicle while operating on the Movement Area unless the construction area is completely closed to Airport movement and cordoned off. Coordination of escorts shall be prearranged with the Airport Operation. Any individual authorized unescorted access to the Movement Area or associated safety areas shall have completed the driver training program administered by the Airport Operations department. Seat belts shall be utilized on equipment/vehicles that are designed for usage. All vehicles/equipment shall be appropriately secured such that neither aircraft blast nor wind will result in their movement. Special Construction Rules on the AOA When airfield construction is being performed on the AOA the following rules will apply unless modified in writing by Airfield Operations. All construction activities on the AOA shall include a specific Construction Safety Phasing Plan (CSPP) and a Safety Plan Compliance Document (SPCD) as required by the FAA. New Electrical Building Page 129 of 497 The SPCD will address compliance to and details required by the CSPP and include any other topics of discussion that might be mentioned during the safety phase planning meeting. The safety phase planning meeting shall be held prior to mobilization to the AOA. Any Airport construction and/or alteration requires the completion and submittal of FAA Form 7460-1 Notice of Proposed Construction or Alteration (available from the FAA Air Traffic Division Regional Office), and www.FAA.gov at least 60 days prior to the start of the project. The Engineer will submit this form in advance of the start of construction. If the Contractor requires any modifications to FAA Form 7460-1 (from the advance submittal) the Contractor shall complete and submit an amended FAA Form 7460-1 reflecting the requested changes. A copy of all completed FAA Form 7460-1's and the FAA’s determination(s) shall be on file with the Airport prior to commencing the erection or construction of the item(s) proposed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall erect and maintain fencing, barricades, signs and warning devices used to delineate the perimeter of all construction areas, as shown on the plans and/or as approved by the Airport Operations. All points of entry into the AOA, which are under the Contractor’s control, shall be secured and/or guarded and should be coordinated with the Airport Operations. Deliveries are to be strictly controlled (by the Contractor) using personnel specifically acquainted with these rules. The Contractor shall provide properly manned escort vehicles as required to guide and escort all deliveries to the work area(s). All barricades, lighting and warning devices used to delineate any construction or hazardous area(s) are to be provided by the Contractor except for lighted runway closure crosses which will be provided by the Airport. At no time shall personnel, vehicles or equipment be located or enter any of the following areas unless authorized on the plans or by Airport Operations. Within 250 feet parallel to an active runway centerline (to be indicated on the CSPP and/or SPCD). No Stockpiles will be placed within 400 feet parallel to an active runway centerline nor will equipment be left unattended. Within 1,000 feet of the end of active runways (each end to be indicated in the CSPP and/or SPCD) Within 93 feet parallel to an active taxiway centerline operating with Group III aircraft without proper approval. Active NAVAID Critical Areas. Trenches and/or Excavations: Trenches and/or excavations shall not be allowed in the following areas without closure or restriction of the adjacent Movement Area: Within 250 feet parallel to a runway centerline. Within 160 feet parallel to a taxiway centerline operating with Group V aircraft without proper approval. New Electrical Building Page 130 of 497 Within 1,000 feet of the end of a runway. Active NAVAID Critical Areas. No trenching is allowed under Airport fences without prior approval and coordination with the Airport Operations. All stockpiled material(s)/supplies shall be constrained in a manner to prevent movement resulting from aircraft blast or wind conditions. Material(s)/supplies shall not be stored within 500 feet of aircraft turning areas or movement areas. Stockpiled material(s)/supplies shall not exceed 15 feet in height unless the Contractor has complied with all requirements for airspace review. All material(s)/supplies shall be positioned so it will not obstruct the line of sight from the Control Tower to the Movement Area. Stockpiled material shall not be within 6 feet of an Airport perimeter fence. Nighttime work, not covered by the Contract Documents, requires 72 hours advanced approval, excluding weekends, by the Airport Operations. Lighting for nighttime work shall be shielded and positioned downward so as not to hinder the vision of the air traffic controllers in the control Tower or the pilots of moving aircraft. Debris, waste, and loose materials shall not be allowed on the Movement Area. If debris and/or loose materials are observed to be on active portions of the Movement Area, the Contractor shall be responsible for correcting the discrepancy immediately. The Contractor shall be responsible for controlling dust problems resulting from construction and clean-up processes. The Contractor will be working in an air operations area in which a high degree of care is necessary to control debris and dust. Spilled material on active roadways, runways, taxiways and aprons shall be swept up immediately. The Contractor will be aware that the construction area may be subject to jet blast and significant wind velocities. Dust control measures shall be required to prevent loose material from blowing within or outside the air operations area. If the Contractor uses, or if a haul road crosses any area used by aircraft, service or emergency vehicles, a vacuum power broom and/or hand sweeping will be used to keep this area clean of debris which could damage aircraft engines or propellers. The Contractor will be liable for any damages that occur. Power brooms and sweepers shall be vacuum capable. Prior to opening any Runway, Taxiway, Ramp, Apron or Associated Safety Area, that has been closed for construction; the Contractor shall arrange for an inspection by the Airport Operations. All barricades used by the Contractor to designate an unusable or hazardous area on the AOA, shall be secured in place against movement or jet blast. The Contractor shall ensure that all barricades and hazard lighting are operational prior to departing the construction area at the end of each workday. In accordance with FAR Part 139, Airport Operations shall, prior to the release of work crews, inspect all areas to ensure that: Paved areas are free of surface variations in accordance with FAR Part 139. New Electrical Building Page 131 of 497 All unpaved active safety areas are cleared and graded and have no potentially hazardous ruts, humps, depressions or other surface variations. All trenches or excavations within active Runway and/or Taxiway safety areas are backfilled to support the weight of an aircraft or Aircraft Rescue and Fire Fighting (ARFF) equipment. If the trenches, excavations or hazardous areas have been authorized to remain in place, they are to be adequately plated and marked and lighted. Location of haul routes on the Airport site shall be as shown on the CSPP or as approved by Airport Operations. All haul routes on the Airport shall be marked, when necessary, and maintained by the Contractor. These routes shall be restored to their original condition upon completion of the construction project. Construction equipment shall not be permitted to operate upon paved areas unless the equipment has pneumatic tires or special means, approved by the Engineer, provided to protect the pavement. All construction involving cranes shall be coordinated at least 72 hours in advance, excluding weekends, with the Airport Operations. This does not include the time required for airspace review. The following information is required: Location of the Crane. Maximum extendable height. Hours of operation. The top of each crane boom shall be marked by a 3' x 3' orange and white checkered flag — each box being 1' square. Each crane shall be lowered at night and during periods of poor visibility as directed by Airport Operations. In the event the crane is approved to remain extended during the hours from sunset to sunrise, the highest point of the crane boom will be lit with a red obstruction light in accordance with AC 70/7460-1 Construction Site Access and Haul Roads. The Contractor will not be permitted to use any access or haul roads other than those designated on the Contract drawings. Aircraft Rescue and Fire Fighting (ARFF) right-of-way on access roads, haul roads, taxiways, and runways shall not be impeded at any time. Foreign Object Debris (FOD) Management. Waste and loose materials capable of causing damage to aircraft landing gears or propellers or capable of being ingested in jet engines, shall not be left or placed on or near active aircraft movement areas. Materials tracked onto these areas shall be continuously removed during the construction project. All waste or loose materials which could attract wildlife shall be carefully controlled and removed on a continuous basis. The Contractor shall have adequate sweeping equipment and adequate dust control equipment on site at all times while the Contractor is working. END OF ITEM SP-10 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 132 of 497 FAA STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ITEM P-100 MOBILIZATION DESCRIPTION 100-1.1 This item shall include preparatory work, continuing work, and close out operations which are necessary direct costs to the Contractor but are of a general nature and not directly attributable to, or specified as incidental to, other pay items. This item shall include, but is not limited to, mobilization of equipment, facilities, personnel, equipment, supplies and incidentals to the project site, except as provided in the Contract as included under separate pay items. Equipment shall consist of machinery needed to accomplish the activities required to construct items described under the various bid items, including any batch plants that may be used. Facilities shall consist of mobile shelters used to perform administrative functions, and trailers used to perform equipment maintenance functions, and fuel storage tanks. Expenditures required to connect facilities to various public utility services can be included. This item also includes preconstruction costs exclusive of bidding costs; continuing general conditions and general maintenance of the Contract; restoration and general clean-up of the Contract areas, maintenance and repair of haul roads during and at project closeout; permit application preparation and associated fees; and other similar costs. Not included in this item are expendable supplies such as fuel, lubricants, and spare parts. Also not included are the materials which become a part of permanent physical features constructed under the Contract. The total sum of all payments for this item shall not exceed the original Contract amount bid for mobilization, regardless of the fact that the Contractor may have for any reason, shut down his work on the project, moved equipment away from the project and then back again, for additional quantities or items of work added to the Contract. 101-1.2 POSTED NOTICES. Prior to commencement of construction activities, the Contractor must post the following documents in a prominent and accessible place where they may be easily viewed by all employees of the prime Contractor and by all employees of subcontractors engaged by the prime Contractor: Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) Poster “Equal Employment Opportunity is the Law” in accordance with the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs Executive Order 11246, as amended; Davis Bacon Wage Poster (WH 1321) - DOL “Notice to All Employees” Poster; and Applicable Davis- Bacon Wage Rate Determination. These notices must remain posted until final acceptance of the work by the Owner. New Electrical Building Page 133 of 497 101-1.3 SUBMITTALS. All materials and equipment used to construct this item shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering. Submittals consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be provided. Submittal data shall be presented in a clear, precise and thorough manner. Original catalog sheets are preferred. Photocopies are acceptable provided they are of good a quality and legible. Any deviations or substitutions from Specifications shall be identified, in writing, at the time the submittals are made. Clearly and boldly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models applicable to this project. Indicate all optional equipment and delete non-pertinent data. Submittals for components of electrical equipment and systems shall identify the equipment for which they apply on each submittal sheet. Markings shall be boldly and clearly made with arrows or circles (highlighting only is not acceptable). Contractor is solely responsible for delays in project accruing directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of submittals. Contractor shall identify each specification section or relevant bid item to which the submittal item is relevant. The data submitted shall be sufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, to determine compliance with the plans and specifications. The Contractor's submittals shall be neatly bound in a properly sized 3-ring binder, tabbed by specification section or other approved electronic method providing relevant document tracking. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all equipment, materials or procedures, which, in the Engineer’s opinion, does not meet the system design and the standards and codes, specified. 101-1.4 AIRFIELD SAFETY AND TRAFFIC CONTROL. Airfield Safety and Traffic Control shall include the special requirements with respect to safely conducting construction activities, coordinating construction with aircraft operations, and maintaining the construction site in a manner that is compatible with aircraft. All items required in Supplemental Provisions, Airport Safety and Security Requirements, shall be included in lump sum price for Airfield Safety and Traffic Control. 101-1.5 ENGINEER’S FIELD OFFICE. The Contractor shall furnish field office and equipment specified in Section 60-01 of the General Provisions for the exclusive use of the Engineer. The building shall be furnished and maintained by the Contractor and shall become the property of the Contractor when work is completed. Payment for this item shall be included in the lump sum price for mobilization. 101-1.6 UNDERGROUND UTILITY INVESTIGATION (POTHOLING). The plans depict underground utilities derived from record drawings and field investigations. Not all utilities locations or depths known. Contractor shall, no later than two months prior to New Electrical Building Page 134 of 497 completion of mobilization, coordinate for locate services, pothole utility locations and verify location and depth. All work shall be coordinated with and performed under the observation of the Engineer or their designated representative. Failure to locate identified utilities shall be cause to delay completion of mobilization phase. Payment for this item shall be included in the lump sum price for mobilization. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 101-2.1 Mobilization will be measured as a lump sum item. 101-2.2 Airfield Safety and Traffic Control will be measured as a lump sum item. BASIS OF PAYMENT 101-3.1 Payment of Mobilization. Based upon the Contract lump sum price for “Mobilization” partial payments will be allowed as follows: a. Upon acceptance of all submittals and establishment of the Engineer’s Field Office, 25%. b. When 25% or more of the original Contract is earned, an additional 25%. c. When 50% or more of the original Contract is earned, an additional 40%. d. After Final Inspection, Staging area clean-up and delivery of all Project Closeout materials as required by Section 90-11 of the General Provisions, the final 10%. The Contract lump sum price paid for Mobilization shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, field office, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in mobilization as specified herein. Payments made for Mobilization will be excluded from consideration in determining compensation under changed quantities. 101-3.2 Payment for Airfield Safety and Traffic Control will be made at the Contract lump sum price. This price shall include full compensation for all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to completing the work. Payment will be made under: Item P-100.1 Mobilization, Cleanup, and Demobilization – per Lump Sum Item P-100.2 Airfield Safety and Traffic Control – per Lump Sum END OF ITEM P-100 New Electrical Building Page 135 of 497 ITEM D-701 PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS DESCRIPTION 701-1.1 This item shall consist of the construction of pipe culverts and storm drains in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity with the lines and grades shown on the plans. MATERIALS 701-2.1 Materials shall meet the requirements shown on the plans and specified below. 701-2.2 Pipe. The pipe shall be of the type called for on the plans or in the proposal and shall be in accordance with the following appropriate requirements: AASHTO M252 Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe ASTM F667 Standard Specification for 3 through 24 in Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings 701-2.3 Concrete. Concrete for pipe cradles shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) at 28 days and conform to the requirements of ASTM C94. 701-2.4 Rubber gaskets. Rubber gaskets for rigid pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C443. Rubber gaskets for PVC pipe, polyethylene, and polypropylene pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477. Rubber gaskets for zinc-coated steel pipe and precoated galvanized pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1056, for the “RE” closed cell grades. Rubber gaskets for steel reinforced thermoplastic ribbed pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477. 701-2.5 Joint mortar. Pipe joint mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement and two parts sand. The Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C150, Type I. The sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C144. 701-2.6 Joint fillers. Poured filler for joints shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D6690. 701-2.7 Plastic gaskets. Plastic gaskets shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M198 (Type B). 701-2.8. Controlled low-strength material (CLSM). Controlled low-strength material shall conform to the requirements of Item P-153. When CLSM is used all joints shall have gaskets. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 701-3.1 Excavation. The width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactory jointing of the pipe and thorough tamping of the bedding material under and around the pipe, but it shall not be less than the external diameter of the pipe plus 6 inches (150 mm) on each side. The trench walls shall be approximately vertical. The Contractor shall comply with all current Federal, state and local rules and regulations governing the safety of men and materials during the excavation, installation and backfilling operations. Specifically, the Contractor shall observe that all requirements of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) relating to excavations, trenching and shoring are strictly adhered to. The width of the trench shall be sufficient to permit satisfactorily jointing of the pipe and thorough compaction of the bedding material under the pipe and backfill material around the pipe, but it shall not be greater than the widths shown on the plans trench detail. The trench bottom shall be shaped to fully and uniformly support the bottom quadrant of the pipe. New Electrical Building Page 136 of 497 Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, the Contractor shall remove it from below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 8 inch (200 mm) or 1/2 inch (12 mm) for each foot of fill over the top of the pipe (whichever is greater) but for no more than three-quarters of the nominal diameter of the pipe. The excavation below grade shall be backfilled with selected fine compressible material, such as silty clay or loam, and lightly compacted in layers not over 6 inches (150 mm) in uncompacted depth to form a uniform but yielding foundation. Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the grade established, due to soft, spongy, or other unstable soil, the unstable soil shall be removed and replaced with approved granular material for the full trench width. The Engineer shall determine the depth of removal necessary. The granular material shall be compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe. The Contractor shall be responsible for dewatering excavations as required. The methods used to control and remove water at excavations shall be at the option of the Contractor. Care shall be taken during excavation to prevent disturbing the pipe trench foundation. If ground water is encountered during excavation, dewatering shall be commenced and shall proceed in advance of or concurrently with further excavation. The trench shall be free of water at the time pipes are placed and backfilled. Water control shall continue as necessary to prevent damage to the work. If suitable trenches, pipe, bedding, and backfill material has been disturbed by the Contractor’s operations, has been damaged by water, or has been removed for the Contractor’s convenience in dewatering the trench, the bedding shall be restored by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Sponsor to a condition at least equal to the undisturbed bedding as determined by the Engineer. The excavation for pipes placed in embankment fill shall not be made until the embankment has been completed to a height above the top of the pipe as shown on the plans. 701-3.2 Bedding. The pipe bedding shall conform to the class specified on the plans. The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of the pipe. When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the plans, the requirements for Class C bedding shall apply. a. Rigid pipe. Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete cradle conforming to the plan details. Class B bedding shall consist of a bed of granular material having a thickness of at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the bottom of the pipe and extending up around the pipe for a depth of not less than 30% of the pipe’s vertical outside diameter. The layer of bedding material shall be shaped to fit the pipe for at least 10% of the pipe’s vertical diameter and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bell of bell and spigot pipe. The bedding material shall be sand or select sandy soil with 100% passing a 3/8 inch (9 mm) sieve and not more than 10% passing a No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve. Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the pipe in its natural foundation material to a depth of not less than 10% of the pipe’s vertical outside diameter. The bed shall be shaped to fit the pipe and shall have recesses shaped to receive the bell of bell and spigot pipe. New Electrical Building Page 137 of 497 b. Flexible pipe. For flexible pipe, the bed shall be roughly shaped to fit the pipe, and a bedding blanket of sand or fine granular material shall be provided as follows: Pipe Corrugation Depth Minimum Bedding Depth inch mm inch mm 1/2 12 1 25 1 25 2 50 2 50 3 75 2-1/2 60 3-1/2 90 c. PVC, polyethylene, and polypropylene pipe. For PVC, polyethylene, and polypropylene pipe, the bedding material shall consist of coarse sands and gravels with a maximum particle size of 3/4 inches (19 mm). For pipes installed under paved areas, no more than 12% of the material shall pass the No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve. For all other areas, no more than 50% of the material shall pass the No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve. The bedding shall have a thickness of at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the bottom of the pipe and extend up around the pipe for a depth of not less than 50% of the pipe’s vertical outside diameter. 701-3.3 Laying pipe. The pipe laying shall begin at the lowest point of the trench and proceed upgrade. The lower segment of the pipe shall be in contact with the bedding throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid pipes and outside circumferential laps of flexible pipes shall be placed facing upgrade. Paved or partially lined pipe shall be placed so that the longitudinal center line of the paved segment coincides with the flow line. Elliptical and elliptically reinforced concrete pipes shall be placed with the manufacturer’s reference lines designating the top of the pipe within five degrees of a vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. 701-3.4 Joining pipe. Joints shall be made with (1) Portland cement mortar, (2) Portland cement grout, (3) rubber gaskets, (4) plastic gaskets, or (5) coupling bands. Mortar joints shall be made with an excess of mortar to form a continuous bead around the outside of the pipe and shall be finished smooth on the inside. Molds or runners shall be used for grouted joints to retain the poured grout. Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed to form a flexible watertight seal. a. Concrete pipe. Concrete pipe may be either bell and spigot or tongue and groove. The method of joining pipe sections shall be so the ends are fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably flush and even. Joints shall be thoroughly wetted before applying mortar or grout. b. PVC, polyethylene and polypropylene pipe. Joints for PVC, Polyethylene, and Polypropylene pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D3212 when water tight joints are required. Joints for PVC and Polyethylene pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M304 when soil tight joints are required. Fittings for polyethylene pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M252 or ASTM M294. Fittings for polypropylene pipe shall conform to ASTM F2881, ASTM F2736, or ASTM F2764. 701-3.5 Backfilling. Pipes shall be inspected before any backfill is placed; any pipes found to be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be removed and relaid or replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Material for backfill shall be fine, readily compatible soil or granular material shall meet the requirements of Item P-153. It shall not contain frozen lumps, stones that would be retained on a 2-inch (50 mm) sieve, chunks of highly plastic clay, or other objectionable material. Granular backfill material shall have 95% or more passing the a 1/2 inch (12 mm) sieve, with 95% or more being retained on the No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve. New Electrical Building Page 138 of 497 When the top of the pipe is even with or below the top of the trench, the backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of the pipe and shall be brought up one foot (30 cm) above the top of the pipe or to natural ground level, whichever is greater. Thoroughly compact the backfill material under the haunches of the pipe without displacing the pipe. Material shall be brought up evenly on each side of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. When the top of the pipe is above the top of the trench, the backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) and shall be brought up evenly on each side of the pipe to one foot (30 cm) above the top of the pipe. The width of backfill on each side of the pipe for the portion above the top of the trench shall be equal to twice the pipe’s diameter or 12 feet (3.7 m), whichever is less. For PVC, polyethylene, and polypropylene pipe, the backfill shall be placed in two stages; first to the top of the pipe and then at least 12 inches (300 mm) over the top of the pipe. The backfill material shall meet the requirements of paragraph 701-3.2c. All backfill shall be compacted to the density required under Item P-152. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to protect installed pipes and culverts from damage due to construction equipment operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for installation of any extra strutting or backfill required to protect pipes from the construction equipment. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 701-4.1 The length of pipe shall be measured in linear feet (m) of pipe in place, completed, and approved. It shall be measured along the centerline of the pipe from end or inside face of structure to the end or inside face of structure, whichever is applicable. The several classes, types and size shall be measured separately. All fittings shall be included in the footage as typical pipe sections in the pipe being measured. BASIS OF PAYMENT 701-5.1 Payment will be made at the Contract unit price per linear foot (meter) for each kind of pipe of the type and size designated These prices shall fully compensate the Contractor for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, excavation, and installation of these materials; and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the item. Payment will be made under: Item D-701.1 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe, 8 inch, – per linear foot MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS AASHTO M167 Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Structural Plate, Zinc-Coated, for Field-Bolted Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches AASHTO M190 Standard Specification for Bituminous-Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches AASHTO M196 Standard Specification for Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for Sewers and Drains AASHTO M198 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants AASHTO M219 Standard Specification for Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Structural Plate for Field-Bolted Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches AASHTO M243 Standard Specification for Field Applied Coating of Corrugated Metal Structural Plate for Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches New Electrical Building Page 139 of 497 AASHTO M252 Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe AASHTO M294 Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-mm (12- to 60-in.) Diameter AASHTO M304 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Wall Drain Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter AASHTO MP20 Standard Specification for Steel Reinforced Polyethylene (PE) Ribbed Pipe, 300- to 900-mm (12- to 36-in.) Diameter ASTM A760 Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic Coated for Sewers and Drains ASTM A761 Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Structural Plate, Zinc Coated, for Field-Bolted Pipe, Pipe-Arches, and Arches ASTM A762 Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Polymer Precoated for Sewers and Drains ASTM A849 Standard Specification for Post-Applied Coatings, Pavings, and Linings for Corrugated Steel Sewer and Drainage Pipe ASTM B745 Standard Specification for Corrugated Aluminum Pipe for Sewers and Drains ASTM C14 Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe ASTM C76 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C443 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets ASTM C506 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe ASTM C507 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe ASTM C655 Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe ASTM C1433 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers ASTM D1056 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or Expanded Rubber ASTM D3034 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3212 Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals New Electrical Building Page 140 of 497 ASTM D6690 Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements ASTM F477 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ASTM F667 Standard Specification for 3 through 24 in. Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings ASTM F714 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR PR) Based on Outside Diameter ASTM F794 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe & Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ASTM F894 Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe ASTM F949 Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe With a Smooth Interior and Fittings ASTM F2435 Standard Specification for Steel Reinforced Polyethylene (PE) Corrugated Pipe ASTM F2562 Specification for Steel Reinforced Thermoplastic Ribbed Pipe and Fittings for Non-Pressure Drainage and Sewerage ASTM F2736 Standard Specification for 6 to 30 in. (152 to 762 mm) Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated Single Wall Pipe and Double Wall Pipe ASTM F2764 Standard Specification for 30 to 60 in. (750 to 1500 mm) Polypropylene (PP) Triple Wall Pipe and Fittings for Non-Pressure Sanitary Sewer Applications ASTM F2881 Standard Specification for 12 to 60 in. (300 to 1500 mm) Polypropylene (PP) Dual Wall Pipe and Fittings for Non-Pressure Storm Sewer Applications END ITEM D-701 ) New Electrical Building Page 141 of 497 X-101 Locate and Protect Existing Circuits A. Description This Work includes the testing and location of all power and control circuits that are located within the construction area or haul routes. This item also includes prompt repair or replacement of electrical cables or equipment damaged during construction operations; careful handling of any installed cables or equipment encountered during construction; and removal/reinstallation of existing cables. This includes all FAA, utility, Airport or other private cables, pipes, conduit or equipment. B. Construction Methods 1. Immediately prior to construction, locate and mark all existing circuits and utilities in the area of construction with paint or flagging throughout the area. The Contractor is entirely responsible for location and identifying existing underground cables and equipment. Items shown on the Plans are from site visits, as-builts and other means. Neither the Airport nor the Engineer are liable for items not shown on the Plans that the Contractor may encounter. Do not, under any circumstances, deliberately plow, trench or work across existing utilities for the sole purpose of locating cables. Cable, utilities and equipment that is cut or damaged, and is not designated for replacement shall be replaced at the Contractors expense in its entirety. 2. Obtain meggar test readings of all airport circuits that will be encountered during construction, including those crossed by haul routes or access roads, shall be taken in the presence of the Owner’s representative and the Engineer. If the Contractor notes problems in the existing circuits prior to starting Work, these circuits may be repaired by the owner or noted to the mutual satisfaction of the Contractor and the Owner as not being the responsibility of the Contractor. Re-test circuits repaired by the Owner again prior to construction. 3. Upon completion of construction, in the presence of the Owner’s representative and the Engineer, meggar test all airport circuits encountered during construction. Repair all portions of circuits that have been damaged during construction. Any circuits that have a post construction meggar reading lower than the pre-construction meggar reading will be considered damaged. 4. The excavation, cutting, removing, and reinstallation of existing cables as required in the Contract Documents due to damage, shall be incidental to this Pay Item. Provide temporary above-ground connections in protective conduit and clearly mark, as conditions and environment warrant to provide power quickly if the required repair work would cause loss of power for an extended period of time. The Contractor’s superintendent or on-site representative must remain in communication with the Engineer until such repairs are completed and the lighting or Navaid system has been checked for operation and accepted by the Owner. ) New Electrical Building Page 142 of 497 5. Contractor shall be responsible to notify all work forces of the location and function of these wires. Care shall be taken by the Contractor’s forces not to drive over these wires. C. Method of Measurement Locate and protect existing circuits will be measured for payment as a complete unit per Lump Sum. D. Basis of Payment Payment will be made at the Contract Lump Sum price for Locate and Protect Existing Circuits and will be full compensation for furnishing al materials for locating, protecting, and testing existing circuits and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this Pay Item as required. Standard Pay Items for Work covered by this Specification are as follows: Item X-101.1 Locate and Protect Existing Circuits -- per Lump Sum END OF ITEM X-101 New Electrical Building Page 143 of 497 ITEM X-105 SITE DEMOLITION DESCRIPTION 105-1.1 This item consists of demolition work including complete or partial removal of existing construction as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The work includes coordination and scheduling of demolition work by other contractors and utility companies. Any excavations and/or trenches which are created during the demolition process will be marked and shored in accordance with federal, state and local safety requirements. Do not begin demolition work until authorized by Engineer. 105-1.2 SCOPE. Types of demolition work include, but are not limited to: a. Removal and disposal of existing electrical vault equipment. b. Removal and disposal of any redundant conduits in the existing vault building. c. Removal and disposal of redundant electrical conductors. d. Sealing of any building openings left by removal of existing equipment. e. Decommission any surplus electrical panels 105-1.3 SUBMITTALS. Prior to the start of demolition work, submit a demolition plan indicating proposed methods, sequence of operations, and schedule for demolition and removal work to the Engineer for approval. Include coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility services; details for phasing; erosion control; removal methods; disposal of materials; salvage requirements; and coordination of other work in progress. 105-1.4 JOB CONDITIONS. a. Condition of Structures. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. b. Demolition and Salvage. Except where materials are designated to be incorporated into new work or retained by Owner, items indicated to be removed but of salvable value to Contractor may be removed as work progresses. Transport such salvaged items from the site as they are removed. c. Sales. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. d. Protection. Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection as required to protect workmen and the public from injury due to demolition work, to provide free and safe passage of Owner’s personnel and general public to and from occupied portions of site, and to protect from damage existing work that is to remain in place. Do not overload structural elements or pavements to remain. e. Damages. Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent or other facilities by demolition work at no cost to Owner. All such repairs must have Engineer’s approval. f. Traffic. Conduct demolition operations and debris removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with roads, Airport employees, general public, and aircraft operation areas. g. Explosives. Use of explosives will not be permitted. h. Environmental Controls. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, or pollution. New Electrical Building Page 144 of 497 105-1.5 REGULATORY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS. Comply with all federal, state, and local safety, security, hauling, disposal, and environmental protection regulations. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 105-2.1 INSPECTION. Prior to commencement of demolition work, inspect areas in which demolition will be performed. Photograph or video tape existing condition of structure surfaces, equipment or surrounding properties which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from demolition work. File photographs or tapes with Engineer prior to starting work. 105-2.2 PREPARATION. Provide shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures or elements to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. Cease operations and notify the Engineer immediately if safety of structure or surrounding area appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operation. 105-2.3 DEMOLITION. a. Perform demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on drawings or directed by Engineer in accordance with the demolition plan and governing regulations. b. Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting for approved soil, gravel or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6” diameter, roots or other organic matter. Place fill in accordance with Item P-152. c. Remove existing utilities and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility and approved by the Engineer. 105-2.4 STORM STRUCTURE REMOVAL. The catch basins / inlets / manholes / headwalls designated to be removed shall be broken, demolished and hauled off of Airport property except the frames and grates. The existing frames and grates on the existing catch basins / inlets designated to be removed shall be carefully removed and delivered to the Airport’s Maintenance storage area. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all site drainage and preventing erosion/siltation from occurring in the pipes to remain, while performing this demolition. Storm sewer shall be removed and disposed of off-site. 105-2.5 DUST AND DEBRIS CONTROL. Contractor shall prevent the spread of dust and debris and shall avoid creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Vacuum and sweep pavements as often as necessary to control the spread of debris. Contractor shall provide a commercial vacuum truck on the project at all times. 105-2.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS. a. Transport all demolished pavement materials off-site. b. Transport and legally dispose of all other debris, rubbish and other demolished materials, daily, off of Airport property. Do not allow accumulation on site. Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas designated by the Engineer. c. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling and protection against exposure or environmental pollutions. d. Burning will not be permitted on Airport property. 105-2.7 CLEAN-UP. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave areas clean and free from dust and debris. New Electrical Building Page 145 of 497 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 105-3.1 REMOVE STORM SEWER. The measurement for the quantity of storm sewer and PCC encased electrical trench removed to be paid shall be by lineal feet, regardless of depth, in accordance with the specifications and accepted by the Engineer. 105-3.2 REMOVE STORM STRUCTURE. The measurement for the quantity of catch basin / inlets / manholes / headwalls removed to be paid shall be the number of structures removed, regardless of depth, in accordance with the specifications and accepted by the Engineer. BASIS OF PAYMENT 105-4.1 REMOVE STORM SEWER. Payment will be made at the Contract unit price per lineal foot for removal of storm sewer. This price shall be full compensation for all materials, preparation, excavation and removal of these items. This price shall also be full compensation for any equipment, shoring, bracing, capping remaining pipe, dewatering, backfilling, compaction, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the item. 105-4.2 REMOVE CATCH BASIN / INLET. Payment will be made at the Contract unit price per each of the structures designated to be removed. This price shall be full compensation for finishing of all materials and for all preparation, excavation and installation or removal (including foundations as applicable) of these materials for all labor, equipment, shoring, bracing, capping remaining pipe, dewatering, backfilling, compaction, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the item. Payment will be made under: Item X-105.1 Remove ( E ) Electrical Vault Equipment and Related Utilities – per Lump Sum END OF ITEM X-105 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 146 of 497 X-110 Directional Boring A. Description 1. Work under this section shall require the Contractor to install pipeline by the directional boring method. 2. Directional boring shall be defined as the ability to steer and electronically monitor the location and depth of the cutting bit. 3. Boring accuracy shall be within six (6) inches. 4. Mechanical, pneumatic or water-jetting methods will not be considered or paid for as directional boring. B. Materials 1. Materials are defined as pipe or conduit that becomes the installed product 2. Use materials that are appropriate for the stresses generated by the selected equipment and field conditions. 3. Ensure that the appropriate material is used to retain compliance once it is installed. C. Construction Methods 1. The Contractor shall provide work reference for whom similar work has been conducted. A minimum of five year directional boring experience is required. A contact name and telephone number is required for each reference. 2. Boring shall be performed by a fluid-cutting process utilizing a liquid clay/Bentonite. 3. The liquid clay shall maintain boring stability and provide lubrication while the pipe is being installed. Liquid clay must be totally inert and contain no environmental risk. 4. After an initial bore hole is completed, a reamer shall be installed at the termination pit and the reamer with the pipe shall be pulled back to the starting pit. 5. The reamer shall be capable of discharging liquid clay to facilitate the installation of the pipe into a stabilized and lubricated boring. 6. The timing of all boring processes is critical. Install a product into a borehole within the same day that the pre-bore is completed to ensure necessary support exits. 7. Sump pits are required to contain drilling fluids if vacuum devices are not operated throughout the drilling operation, unless approved by the engineer. Upon completion of the boring and pipe installation, the Contractor shall remove all spoils from the boring pits and restore the pits and all areas disturbed by the boring operation to their original condition. 8. Ensure that entry and exit pits are of sufficient size to contain the expected return of drilling fluids and soil cuttings. Ensure that all drilling fluids are disposed of or recycled in a manner acceptable to the appropriate local, state or federal regulatory agencies. New Electrical Building Page 147 of 497 9. When drilling in suspected contaminated ground, test the drilling fluid for contamination and appropriately dispose of it. Remove any excess material upon completion of the bore. If in the drilling process it becomes evident that the soil is contaminated, contact the Engineer immediately. Do not continue drilling without the Engineer's approval. 10. Pipe tie-ins shall not be made for a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours after the pull to allow the pipe to recover from the pulling stress. 11. The contractor shall be responsible for repairing any damage resulting in heaving, settlement, separation of pavement, escaping drilling fluid (frac-out), or any other damage caused by the drilling operation, at no cost to the airport. 12. When required by the Engineer, provide detailed Plans which show how damage to any runway or taxiway pavement will be remedied. When remediation plans are required, they must be approved by the engineer before any work proceeds. 13. If an obstruction is encountered during boring which prevents completion of the installation in accordance with the design location and specification, the pipe may be taken out of service and left in place at the discretion of the Engineer. Immediately fill the product left in place with excavatable flowable fill. Submit a new installation procedure and revised Plans to the engineer for approval before resuming work at another location. If damage is observed to an existing airport facility, cease all work until resolution to minimize further damage and a plan of action for restoration is obtained and approved by the Engineer. D. Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment 1. Measurement for directional boring of a pipeline shall be made along the center of the pipeline after the boring is completed and the pipe is cut to its finished length. No allowances will be made for additional pipe needed to perform the boring operation. 2. The basis of payment shall be by the linear foot and shall include: a. Labor, material and equipment b. Boring pits c. Drilling fluid/pulling lubricant d. Removal and disposal of drilling spoils e. Backfilling and compacting boring pits f. Restoring and landscaping all areas disturbed by the boring operation 3. Payment shall be made under: Item No. X-110.1 Directional Bore 1W-2” SCH 80 PVC - per linear foot BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 148 of 497 X-115 Polymer Concrete Handholes Handholes shall be precast polymer concrete structures and shall be an approved standard design of the manufacturer. The structure shall be designed to withstand heavy duty or TIER 15 loading, unless otherwise showing on the Plans. The cover shall also be heavy duty or TIER 15 rated. Precast structures shall comply with the latest version of SCTE 77. If the Contractor chooses to propose a different structural design, signed and sealed shop drawings, design calculations, and other information requested by the Engineer shall be submitted by the Contractor to allow for a full evaluation by the Engineer. Any delay or complications associate with this review process shall not affect the construction schedule in any way. 1. The conduit shall be constructed from Polyethylene resin. The resin shall meet: a. PPI recommended designation of PE3408 and a cell classification of in accordance with ASTM D3350. b. The polyethylene compound shall be combined with carbon black to provide protection against degradation by ultraviolet light. Pipe shall be made from virgin material with no rework compound, except that obtained from the manufacturer’s own production of the same formulation. 2. The polyethylene piping shall be: a. High density polyethylene (HDPE) piping and shall meet the requirements of ASTM F2160, non- pressure rated conduit. b. Pipe shall be of diameter shown on the drawings, with dimension ratio (DR) of DR11, unless otherwise noted. c. Pipe, fittings, and joints shall meet or exceed the following physical properties: PROPERTY ASTM TEST METHOD VALUE Density, gm/cc D1505 0.955 Melt Index, gm/10 min D1238-E 0.15 Tensile Strength @ Yield, psi D638 >3,000 Elongation, % D638 >800 Flexural Modulus, psi D790 136,000 Brittleness Temperature, F D746 <-180 1. Precast handholes shall be installed plumb and true at locations shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 2. All castings, frames and fittings shall be placed in the positions indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer and shall be set true to line and to correct elevation. Erection equipment shall be suitable and safe for the workman. Errors in shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and/or transportation that prevent the proper assembly and fitting of parts shall be reported immediately to the Engineer and approval of the method of correction shall be obtained. Approved corrections shall be made at Contractor’s expense. 3. After the backfilling is completed, the Contractor shall dispose of all surplus material, dirt and rubbish from the site. The Contractor shall restore all disturbed areas equivalent to or better than its original condition. All sodding, grading, and restoration shall be considered incidental to the respective bid item. The Contractor shall grade around structures as required to provide positive drainage away from New Electrical Building Page 149 of 497 the structure. After all work is completed, the Contractor shall remove all tools and other equipment, leaving the entire site free, clear and in good condition. 4. Prior to final approval, the precast structures shall be thoroughly inspected for conformance with the Plans and this specification. Any indication of defects in materials or workmanship shall be further investigated and corrected. Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price for item installed. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, excavation, coring, backfilling, and placing of the materials, furnishing and installation of appurtenances and connections as may be required to complete the item as shown on the Plans and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the structure. Item X-115.1 Polymer Concrete Handhole - per Each BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 150 of 497 X-150 Constant Current Regulator A. Description 150-1.1 This item shall consist of furnishing and installing the X-150 constant current regulator (CCR) in accordance with these Specifications. This item shall also include all circuit breakers, wire and cable connections, the furnishing and installing of all necessary conduits, fittings, series cutouts and all necessary mounting structures. It shall also include removal of existing regulator equipment. It shall also include the testing of the installation and all incidentals necessary to place the CCR in operation as a completed unit to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Equipment And Materials 150-2.1 GENERAL. a. Airport lighting equipment and materials covered by Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) Specifications shall be certified and listed under Advisory Circular (AC) 150/5345-53, Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program. b. All other equipment and materials covered by other reference Specifications shall be subject to acceptance through manufacturer's certification of compliance with the applicable Specification when requested by the Engineer. c. Manufacturer's certifications shall not relieve the Contractor of the Contractor’s responsibility to provide materials in accordance with these Specifications and acceptable to the Engineer. Materials supplied and/or installed that do not materially comply with these Specifications shall be removed, when directed by the Engineer and replaced with materials, which do comply with these Specifications, at the sole cost of the Contractor. d. All materials and equipment used to construct this item shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering the equipment. Submittals consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be provided. Submittal data shall be presented in a clear, precise and thorough manner. Original catalog sheets are preferred. Photocopies are acceptable provided they are as good a quality as the original. Clearly and boldly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models applicable to this project. Indicate all optional equipment and delete non-pertinent data. Submittals for components of electrical equipment and systems shall identify the equipment for which they apply on each submittal sheet. Markings shall be boldly and clearly made with arrows or circles (highlighting is not acceptable). Contractor is solely responsible for delays in project accruing directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of submittals. e. The data submitted shall be sufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, to determine compliance with the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor's submittals shall be neatly bound in a properly sized 3-ring binder, tabbed by specification section. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all equipment, materials or procedures, which, in the Engineer’s opinion, does not meet the system design and the standards and codes, specified herein. f. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this section shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of at least twelve (12) months from final acceptance by the Owner. The defective materials and/or equipment shall be repaired or replaced, at the Owner's discretion, with no additional cost to the Owner. 150-2.2 CONSTANT CURRENT REGULATORS (CCR) X-150. The X-150 CCR shall be independently certified according to the requirements of the latest edition FAA Advisory Circular New Electrical Building Page 151 of 497 150/5345-10 “Specification for Constant Current Regulators and Regulator Monitors.” The X-150 shall be ferroresonant and shall have an output as noted on the drawings along with either three step or five step field selectable steps. All CCR’s shall have and output current of 6.6A and an input voltage of 480 VAC single phase The units shall have integral control power transformer to provide 120 VAC control power. The X-150 shall have internal S1 cutouts. The cutouts shall have a grounding function for troubleshooting. 150-2.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED. FAA X-150 CCR shall be supplied. The CCR shall include one Instruction Manual and one Operation and Maintenance Manual. X-150 CCR. The CCR shall supply three or five precision output levels to power the airfield lighting circuit. The CCR shall use a ferroresonant design that produces minimal EMI, high efficiency and near unity power factor for AC 150/5345-10E test conditions. The CCR shall exceed the EMI requirements for Conducted Emissions, power leads, 30Hz to 10kHz per MIL-STD-461E, section 5.4 CE 101 applicability, test limits set by Figure CE 101-4. The CE 101 limit for Navy ASW aircraft and Army aircraft (including flight line) applications shall apply. A single control board shall be used for all versions of the CCR to make troubleshooting easier and to minimize spare parts. The CCR shall have output current surge limitation and soft-start to provide maximum airfield lamp protection. The CCR shall include over current and open-circuit protection. To improve safety, no high voltage shall be present inside the front door area. Lightning protection on both the input and output of the CCR shall be provided. 150-2.4 MONITORING AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL. The CCR shall provide termination points to allow a method of remote control with 120V control interface from a Distributed Control and Monitoring Device (DCME) as part of the L-890 ALCMS. 150-2.5 Control functions shall include: a. CCR output steps and CCR on/off/remote control. b. Local Control Display c. Monitor output current. d. Provide soft start for output circuit. 150-2.6 REMOVAL OF EXISTING REGULATOR EQUIPMENT. The existing regulator equipment shown to be removed shall be removed and be disposed of offsite by the Contractor. Removal and/or salvage of the CCRs shall be coordinated with the Airport. Removal shall wait until the new vault is up and running to minimize disruptions and assure continuous airfield operations. Any salvaged CCR shall be handed over to the Airport, in a location as directed. C. Construction Methods 150-3.1 REMOVAL. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment as noted in section 150- 2.6. Removed CCRs and excess materials shall be disposed of offsite. The Salvaged CCR spares shall be relocated as directed by the Airport. Coordinate final spare locations with the Airport. 150-3.2 INSTALLATION. The Contractor shall furnish and install the X-150 CCR as specified in the proposal and shown in the Plans. The X-150 shall be mounted in the vault at the location shown on the Plans. New Electrical Building Page 152 of 497 150-3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION. Contractor shall furnish all conduit and wiring to connect input power source per manufacturer’s recommendations and NEC including branch circuit breaker, wiring and conduit. Contractor shall furnish control wiring and conduit from regulator to Lighting Control Unit located in same vault location. Contractor shall field verify wiring requirements for control The electrical installation shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of National Fire Protection Agency, NFPA-70, National Electric Code. Control wiring and conduit for the control wiring shall be paid for under the ALCMS bid item. Final connections to CCR shall be with metallic flexible conduit to prevent vibration propagation. 150-3.4 TESTS. The CCR shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's instructions using a True RMS meter. An open-circuit test, conducted according to the manufacturer's instructions, shall also be performed. The CCR shall then be fully tested by continuous operation for not less than 24 hours prior to acceptance. The test shall include operating the constant current regulator in each step (Local and Remote) not less than 10 times at the beginning and end of the 24-hour test. D. Method of Measurement 150-4.1 The quantity of equipment to be paid for under this item shall be for one L-829 CCR, and one Instruction Manual (per CCR) installed and accepted as a completed unit, in place, ready for operation. 150-4.2 The quantity of equipment to be paid for under this item shall be for one CCR, removed and disposed of offsite, per each. E. Basis of Payment 150-5.1 Payment will be made at the Contract unit price for the completed total quantity of X-150 CCR installed, in place by the Contractor, and accepted by the Engineer. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, assembly, and installation of these materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this item. 150-5.2 Payment will be made at the Contract unit price for the quantity of existing CCRs removed, and disposed of offsite by the Contractor. This price shall be full compensation for removing all materials and for all preparation, disassembly, and disconnection of these materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this item. 150-5.3 Payment will be made at the Contract unit price for the quantity of existing CCRs salvaged and relocated by the Contractor. This price shall be full compensation for removing all materials and for all preparation, disassembly, and disconnection of these materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this item and deliver to the proper location as directed by the Airport. F. Payment will be made under: Item X-150-1 CCR, 30 kW, 5 Step, per each Item X-150-2 CCR, 15 kW, 3 Step, per each Item X-150-3 CCR, 10 kW, 3 Step, per each Item X-150-4 CCR, 7.5 kW, 5 Step, per each Item X-150-5 Remove Existing CCR, per each New Electrical Building Page 153 of 497 G. Material Requirements AC 150/5345-7E Specification for X-150 Underground Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits AC 150/5345-10E Specification for Constant Current Regulators and Regulator Monitors Fed. Spec. J-C-30 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation) Underwriters Laboratories Rigid Metal Conduit Standard 6 Underwriters Laboratories Fittings For Conduit and Outlet Boxes Standard 514 Underwriters Laboratories Intermediate Metal Conduit Standard 1242 National Fire Protection Agency NFPA-70, National Electric Code END OF ITEM X-150 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 154 of 497 ITEM X-152 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 1. DESCRIPTION 1.1 Scope of Work. The work specified in this section shall include the installation of a 12 strand and 24 strand, single mode fiber optic cable run as shown on the Plans. This work includes patch panel, patch cords, installing fiber optic cable, terminations and testing. Conduit runs shall be paid for under other bid items. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Airport before work begins to coordinate the down time to existing systems. 2. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 2.1 General. All equipment and materials covered by referenced specifications shall be subject to the acceptance through manufacturer’s certification of compliance with the applicable specification when so requested by the Engineer. 2.2 Submittals. a. All equipment and materials covered by other referenced specifications shall be subject to acceptance through manufacturer’s certification of compliance with the applicable specification when requested by the Engineer. b. Manufacturer’s certifications shall not relieve the Contractor of the Contractor’s responsibility to provide materials in accordance with these specifications and acceptable to the Engineer. Materials supplied and/or installed that do not materially comply with these specifications shall be removed when directed by the Engineer and replaced with materials that do comply with these specifications at the sole cost of the Contractor. c. All materials and equipment used to construct this item shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering the equipment. Materials or equipment purchased prior to Engineer approval and are rejected for any reason, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense. No additional compensation will be provided. Submittals consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be provided. Submittal data shall be presented in a clear, precise and thorough manner. Original catalog sheets are preferred. Photocopies are acceptable provided they are as good a quality as the original. Clearly and boldly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models applicable to this project. Indicate all optional equipment or options and delete non-pertinent data. Submittals for components of electrical equipment and systems shall identify the equipment for which they apply on each submittal sheet. Markings shall be bold and clearly made with arrows or circles. Highlighting is not acceptable and is means for rejection. Contactor is solely responsible for delays in project accruing directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of submittals. New Electrical Building Page 155 of 497 d. The data submitted shall be sufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, to determine compliance with the plans and specifications. The Contractor’s submittals shall be neatly bound in a properly sized 3-ring binder, tabbed by specification section. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all equipment, materials or procedures, which in the Engineer’s opinion, does not meet the system design and the standards and codes specified herein. 2.3 Fiber Optic Cable. a. Performance Requirements. Backbone cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-C.1, when tested according to test procedures of this standard. Pathways and spaces shall comply with TIA/EIA-569-D. Grounding shall comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-B. All electrical components, devices, and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Cable support shall be NRTL labeled for support for fiber optic cable, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. Cable ties shall only be “Velcro” type. Lacing bars, spools, bridal rings, and D-rings. J-hooks shall not be used. b. Shop Drawings. Shop drawings shall include Manufacturer’s data covering all products proposed indicating construction, materials, ratings, and all other parameters identified below. c. Qualification Data. For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector. 1. Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 2. Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this bid item is performed at the Project site. 3. The Testing Supervisor shall be currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise onsite testing. d. Product. 1. General Requirements. a. Refer to drawings for cross-section fiber counts. b. All fiber strands within cable shall be individually color jacketed. c. All optical fibers shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of this specification. Factory optical fiber splices are not allowed. d. All fibers shall have been subjected to a minimum tensile proof test by the fiber manufacturer equivalent to 100-kpsi. New Electrical Building Page 156 of 497 e. All fibers in each cable shall be guaranteed to meet the stated specifications. 2. Single Mode FOC Requirements. a. Outdoor rated OS2 cable shall conform to the following standards: TIA-492CAAB for detailed specifications. TIA-586-C.3 for performance specifications. ICEA S-87-640 for mechanical properties. b. Fiber type: single mode, doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass cladding. c. Core Diameter: 8-9 microns. All fiber shall be of the same nominal core diameter and profile. d. Cladding diameter shall be 125 ±1.0 microns. e. Cladding non-circularity shall be ≤ 0.8 microns. f. Fiber coating diameter shall be 250 ±15 microns (primary coating) and 900 microns (secondary coating) nominal. All coatings shall be mechanically strippable without damaging the optical fiber. g. Cutoff wavelength shall be ≤ 1260 nm. h. Mode field diameter shall be 8.3-9.8 nm @ 1300 nm and 10.5 ±1.0 microns at 1550 nm. i. Zero dispersion wavelength shall be between 1301.5 nm and 1321.5 nm. j. Zero dispersion slope shall be ≤ 0.092 ps/nm2-km. k. Maximum attenuation @ 1300 nm and 1550 nm shall be 0.5 dB/km when tested in accordance with FOTP-3, “Procedure to Measure Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical cable, and Other Passive Fiber Optics Components”, the average change in attenuation over the rated temperature range of the cable shall not exceed 0.05 dB/km at 1550 nm for single mode fiber. The magnitude of the maximum attenuation change of each individual fiber shall not be greater than 0.15 dB/km at 1550 nm. l. Fiber dispersion (maximum) for 1285 – 1330 nm shall be 3.2 ps/nm-km and for 1550 nm, shall be 18 ps/nm-km. No single mode optical fiber shall show a point discontinuity greater than 0.1 dB at the specified wavelengths. Such a discontinuity or any discontinuity showing a reflection at that point shall be cause for rejection of that fiber by the Owner. New Electrical Building Page 157 of 497 m. Fiber optic cable shall comply with ITU-T G.652.D. 3. Outdoor Cable Requirements. a. Plenum rated fiber optic cable shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor applications, including installation in underground ducts, in building riser systems, in conduit, in cable tray, and in innerduct. Cable shall have the following features: 1. Cable shall carry an NFPA 70 OFNP rating (Optical Fiber Non- conductive Plenum). 2. Cable shall be tight bound, tight buffered design. 3. Indoor/Outdoor fiber shall be yellow in color. 4. Cable materials shall be all dielectric (no conductive materials). 5. Jacket for indoor/outdoor cable shall be high temperature plenum fluoropolymer. The outer sheath shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name, words identifying the cable type, year of manufacture, and sequential length markings. The marking shall be in a contrasting color to the cable jacket. 6. The cable jacket shall be listed for: duct installation, fungus resistant, UV resistant, water resistant, direct burial, high flex life, low friction, and petrochemical resistant. 7. Operating and storage temperature for indoor/outdoor cable shall be -40 deg. C to +85 deg. C. Installation temperature shall be -10 deg. C to +60 deg. C (actual cable temperature). 8. Minimum bend radius under installation tensile load and long-term tensile load shall be 15x outside diameter. 9. Crush resistance shall be maximum 1500N/cm. Impact resistance shall be maximum 1000 impacts. Flex resistance shall be a maximum 1000 cycles. 10. Maximum tensile strength during installation shall be 1400 N for 4- 8 strand fibers, 2700 N for 12-18 strand fibers, and 3000 for 24-36 strand fibers. 11. Maximum tensile strength long-term shall not exceed 890 N. New Electrical Building Page 158 of 497 4. Cable Connector/Terminations. a. The optical connector shall be as required to meet network system and fiber optic transceiver equipment requirements. b. The connector ferrule shall be ceramic or glass-in-ceramic, metallic, or equivalent. The optical fiber within the connector ferrule shall be secured with an adhesive or mechanical process to prevent pistoning and other movement of the fiber strand. c. The connectors shall be Type SC, duplex. d. The connector body shall be of metal or composite material. e. The attenuation per mated pair shall not exceed the following values: 0.5 dB (individual) and 0.3 dB (average). These values shall hold throughout the cable system. Connectors shall sustain a minimum of 200 mating cycles per EIA/TIA-455-21 without violating specifications. f. The connector shall meet the following performance criteria: 0.2 dB for cable retention (FOTP-6), mating durability (FOTP-21), impact (FOTP-2), thermal shock (FOTP-3), and humidity (FOTP-5). g. The connector end-face finish shall be a high performance, spherically ultra-polished design. h. Reflectance shall be -55 dB or better when mated with a patch-cord made up of connectors of comparable design. 5. Cable Straps. a. All fiber optic cables installed within racks or cabinets shall be fitted with multiuse cable straps for cable management within racks and cabinets. b. Velcro type wire and cable stapes to provide easy access for servicing of cable. 2.4 Patch Cord Factory-made, dual fiber cables in 36 inch lengths. 2.5 Patch Panel Comply with Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS) specifications of TIA-604 series and comply with TIA-586-C.3. Shall be modular panel housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors. New Electrical Building Page 159 of 497 3. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 3.1 General. The Contractor shall coordinate with Airport communications personal on fiber installation. Weatherproof and protect new and existing fiber at all times. No splicing between terminations shall be allowed without written permission from the Airport or as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall install the specified fiber optic cable in the conduit at the approximate locations indicated on the layout Plans. The Engineer shall indicate specific locations. Fiber optic cable connections, splices and terminations will be permitted only at locations called for on the Plans. Contractor shall be responsible for providing cable in continuous lengths for long runs without splices, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer or shown on the Plans. This item includes the installation of the cable in conduit or duct as described below. The maximum number of cables installed in each single conduit shall be in accordance with the latest National Electric Code, or the code of the local agency having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall make no splices of any kind in cables installed in conduits or ducts. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to survey the site and include all necessary costs to perform the installation as specified. This includes any modifications required to route and conceal horizontal distribution wiring. Beginning installation means the Contractor accepts existing conditions. The Contractor will be responsible for identifying and reporting to the Site Coordinator(s) any existing damage to walls, flooring, tiles and furnishings in the work area prior to start of work. All damage to interior spaces caused by the installation of cable, raceway or other hardware must be repaired by the Contractor. Repairs must match preexisting color and finish of walls, floors, and ceilings. Where unacceptable conditions are found, the Contractor shall bring this to the attention of the construction Supervisor immediately. A written resolution will follow to determine the appropriate action to be taken. Qualified personal utilizing state of the art equipment and techniques shall complete all installation work. During pulling operations, an adequate number of workers shall be present to allow cable observation at all points of duct entry and exit as well as the feed cable and operate pulling machinery. Should it be found by the Engineer that the materials or any portion thereof, furnished and installed under this Contract, fail to comply with the specifications and drawings, with the respect or regard to the quality, amount of value of materials, appliances or labor used in the work, it shall be rejected and replaced at sole expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall make sure that the entire conduit/duct is open, continuous, and clear of debris before installing cable. The cable shall be installed in a manner to prevent harmful stretching or kinking of the cable or damage to the outer protective covering. The ends of all cables shall be sealed with moisture-seal tape before pulling into the conduit and shall be left sealed until the connections are made. Where more than one cable is to be installed in a duct under the same Contract, all cables shall be pulled in the duct at the same time. The pulling of a cable through New Electrical Building Page 160 of 497 ducts or conduits may be accomplished by hand winch or power winch with the use of cable grips or pulling eyes. Pulling tensions should be governed by recommended standard practice for straight pulls or bends. A lubricant recommended for the type of cable being installed should be used were pulling lubricant is required. 3.2 Conduit. Conduit shall be installed in accordance with Item L-110, “Installation of Airport Underground Electrical Duct”. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long radius elbows whenever possible. 3.3 Handholes. Use existing handholes as shown on the Plans. 3.4 Directional Boring. Directional boring shall be completed in accordance with Item NS- 110 “Directional Boring”. 3.5 Splicing. Where shown on the Plans, the splicing of optical fibers shall use the fusion method with the individual splice loss not to exceed 0.1 dB. Secure cables in enclosure per manufacturer’s recommended procedures. A separate splice tray shall be used for each fiber bundle/cable. Splice enclosure shall be sealed as to be re-enterable. Do not encapsulate. Splices shall not be below final grade. 3.7 Fiber Optic Cable. General requirements for cable installation: a. Comply with TIA/EIA-586-C.1 and TIA/EIA-586-C.3. b. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Chap 6, “Cable Termination Practices”. c. Terminate all conductors. No cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects and patch panels. d. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, frames, and terminals. e. Install lacing bars to restrain cables to prevent straining connections and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. f. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace with new cable. g. For cold weather installation, bring cable to room temperature before de-reeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. h. Contractor shall furnish all required installation tools to facilitate cable pulling without damage to the cable jacket. Such equipment is to include but not limited to sheaves, winches, cable reels, cable reel jacks, duct entrance tunnels, pulling tension gauge New Electrical Building Page 161 of 497 and similar devices. All equipment shall be of substantial construction to allow steady progress once pulling has begun. Makeshift devices, which may move or wear in a manner to pose a hazard to the cable, shall not be used. i. All cable shall be pulled by hand unless installation conditions require mechanical assistance. Where mechanical assistance is used, care shall be taken to insure that the maximum tensile load for the cable as defined by the manufacturer is not exceeded. This may be in the form of continuous monitoring of pulling tension, use of a “break-away” or other approved method. j. Cable pulling shall be done in accordance with the cable manufacturer’s recommendations and ANSI/IEEE C2 standards. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall be a part of the cable submittal. Recommended pulling tensions and pulling bend radius shall not be exceeded. Any cable bent or kinked to radius less than recommended shall be replaced by the Contractor with no addition cost to the Project. k. Avoid abrasion and other damage to the cables during installation. l. The cable system shall be tested and documented upon completion of the installation as defined below. m. A pull cord (nylon 1/8” minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any indoor conduit. A pull cord (nylon ¼” minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any underground conduit. n. Install #10 XLP copper wire (tracer wire) through entire outdoor underground route. 3.7 Fiber Optic Cable Terminations. All fibers shall be terminated with duplex SC connectors. Fibers shall be positioned consecutively and mapped “position for position” between patch panels. There shall be no transpositions in the cabling. Connectors from two cables shall never share a common coupling panel. Multi-mode and single mode optical fibers shall be segregated on the panels as to clearly identify the distinction between the fiber types. All terminated fibers at the enclosures shall be mated to couplings mounted on patch panels. Couplings shall be mounted on a panel that, in turn, snaps into the housing assembly. Any unused panel positions shall be fitted with a blank panel inhibiting access to the fiber optic cable from the front of the housing. All couplings shall be fitted with a dust cap. Fibers from multiple locations may share a common enclosure, however, they must be segregated on the connector panels and clearly identified. Fibers from multiple destinations may be secured in a common enclosure provided they are clearly identified as such. Fibers from different locations shall not share a common connector panel (or insert). Slack in each fiber shall be provided as to allow future re-termination in the event of connector or fiber end-face damage. Adequate slack shall be retained to allow termination at a 30” high workbench positioned adjacent to the termination enclosure(s). A minimum of 3 foot of slack shall be retained regardless of panel position relative to the potential work area. New Electrical Building Page 162 of 497 3.8 Quality Control. The Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. The Contractor is responsible to perform acceptance tests as indicated below for each sub-system as it is completed. All tests shall be documented. The Contractor is responsible for supplying all equipment and personnel necessary to conduct the acceptance tests. Prior to testing, the Contractor shall provide a summary of the proposed test plan for each cable type including equipment to be used, set-up, test frequencies or wavelengths, results format, etc. The method of testing shall be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall visually inspect all cabling and termination points to insure that they are complete and conform to the wiring pattern defined herein. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a written certification that this inspection has been made. The Contractor shall conduct acceptance testing according to a schedule coordinated with the Owner. Representatives of the Owner may be in attendance to witness the test procedures. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one (1) week advance notice to the Engineer as to allow for such participation. The notification shall include a written description of the proposed conduct of the tests including copies of blank test result sheets to be used. IMPORTANT: Failure to provide the above information shall be grounds for the Owner/Engineer to reject any and all documentation of results on related testing and to require a repeat of the affected test. Tests related to connected equipment of others shall only be done with the permission and presence of Contractor involved. The Contractor shall ascertain that testing only as required to prove the wiring connections are correct. The Contractor shall provide test results and describe the conduct of the tests including the date of the tests, the equipment used, and the procedures followed. At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide copies of the original tests results. All cabling shall be 100% fault free unless noted otherwise. If any cable is found to be outside the specification defined herein, that cable and the associated termination(s) shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The applicable tests shall then be repeated. Should it be found by the Engineer that the materials or any portion thereof furnished and install under this Contract fail to comply with the specifications and drawings, with the respect or regard to the quality, amount of value of materials, appliances or labor used in the work, it shall be rejected and replaced by the Contractor and all work distributed by changes necessitated in consequence of said defects or imperfections shall be made good at the Contactor’s expense. 3.9 Tests and Inspections. Visually inspect optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communication equipment rooms for compliance with color coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. The fibers utilized in the installed cable shall be traceable to the manufacturer. Upon request by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide cable manufacturer’s test report for each reel of cable provided. These test reports shall include 1) manufacturer’s on the reel attenuation test results at the specified wavelengths for each optical fiber of each reel prior to shipment from the manufacturer and 2) on the reel bandwidth performance as tested at the factory. New Electrical Building Page 163 of 497 Upon completion of cable installation and termination, the fiber optic cabling shall be tested to include Optical Attenuation (“Insertion Loss” Method) and Verification of Link Integrity (OTDR). a. Optical Attenuation Testing. Optical Attenuation testing shall be measured on all terminated optical fibers in both directions of transmission using the “Insertion Loss” Method. Measurement shall be inclusive of the optical connectors and couplings installed at the system endpoints. 100 foot access jumpers shall be used at both the transmit and receive ends to insure that an accurate measurement of connector losses is made. Single mode fibers shall be tested in accordance with the EIA/TIA 526-7-1998 Method A.1. Testing shall be at 1300 ± 20 nm. Attenuation of optical fibers shall not exceed the values calculated as follows: Attenuation (max) = 2*C + L*F +S dB, where C is the maximum allowable connector loss (dB), L is the length of the run (km), F is the maximum allowable fiber loss (dB/km) and S is the total splice loss (# of splices * max attenuation per splice). b. OTDR Testing. All fibers, even those that are left un-terminated, shall be documented in one direction of transmission using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Single mode fibers shall be tested at 1300 nm (nominal). The OTDR(s) shall incorporate high-resolution optics optimized for viewing of the entire length of the cable, including the connectors at the launch and receive end, shall be used. OTDR traces revealing a point discontinuity greater than 0.1 dB in a single mode fiber at any of the tested wavelengths or any discontinuity showing a reflection at that point shall be a valid basis for rejection of the fiber by the Owner. The installation of that cable shall be reviewed in an effort to remove any external stress that may be causing the fault. If such efforts do not remove the fault, that cable and the associated terminations shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. Link End to End Attenuation tests: Horizontal backbone link measurements test at 1300 nm in one direction according to TIA/EIA-526-14-B, Method B, One Reference Jumper. Attenuation test results for backbone links shall be less than 2.0 dB. Attenuation test results shall be less that that calculated according to equation in TIA/EIA-568-C.1. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. End to end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. New Electrical Building Page 164 of 497 Contractor shall prepare test and inspection reports. 4. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 4.1 The quantity of single mode fiber optic cable (12 and 24 strand) relocated in conduit, duct, or cable tray to be paid for shall be the number of linear feet of cable relocated, measured in place, completed, ready for operation, and accepted as satisfactory. Measurement for the purpose of payment shall be the center to center distance from handhole to handhole or termination point. Additional cable slack at handholes and termination ends shall be incidental to the bid item. 5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 5.1 Payment for installing 12-strand and 24-strand single mode fiber optic cable, furnished, measured as provided above, shall be made at the Contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall be full compensation for all materials, equipment, tools, labor, and other incidentals necessary to complete the work including but not limited to terminations and testing, to provide an operational fiber network. Item X-152.1 12-Strand SM FOC, Installed - per linear foot Item X-152.2 24-Strand SM FOC, Installed - per linear foot END OF ITEM X-152 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 165 of 497 ITEM X-220 RECYCLED BASE HAUL ROAD DESCRIPTION 101-1.1 This item consists of the work required to place salvaged pulverized pavement and millings as recycled base. Hauling, placing, and compacting of this material are included in this item. EQUIPMENT 101-2.1 All equipment shall be specified hereinafter or as approved by the Engineer. The equipment shall not cause damage to the pavement to remain in place. CONSTRUCTION 101-3.8 PLACING MATERIALS ON HAUL ROUTES. The recycled base material shall be constructed to form a smooth, uniform surface true to line, grade, and cross-section, spread in layers of 12 inches ± of compacted thickness. No material shall be placed on a soft, muddy, or frozen underlying course. The Engineer or this authorized representative shall sample and perform laboratory tests on the material samples to determine maximum density and optimum moisture content of the recycled base material. This information will be made available to the Contractor. The material shall have satisfactory moisture content when rolling is started, and moisture content variations that may occur prior to or during rolling shall be corrected by adding water or aeration, as necessary. Oversized material shall not be placed as base. Any such material shall be removed. Material shall be obtained from the owner at a location on the airport property. No separate Payment for handling, grading, and compaction of recycled materials shall be provided. 101-3.9 COMPACTION. After spreading, the recycled base material shall be thoroughly compacted to a density of not less than 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557 or ASTM D6938. The rolling shall progress gradually from the sides to the center of the lane under construction, or from one side toward previously placed material by lapping uniformly each preceding pass. Rolling shall continue until the entire area of the course has been rolled and the stone is thoroughly set; the interstices of the material are reduced to a minimum; and until creeping of the stone ahead of the roller is no longer visible. Blading and rolling shall be done alternately, as required or directed, to obtain smooth, even, and uniformly compacted material. The number, type, and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the material to the required density. The course shall not be rolled when the underlying course is soft or yielding or when the rolling causes undulation in the underlying material. The watering during rolling shall be in the amount and by equipment necessary to achieve the required compaction without causing excessive moisture. 101-3.10 MAINTENANCE. The Contractor shall perform all maintenance work necessary to keep the completed recycled shoulder base in a satisfactory condition prior to placement of subsequent courses. The recycled shoulder base shall be properly drained at all times. If cleaning is necessary, any work or restitution necessary shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor. New Electrical Building Page 166 of 497 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 101-4.1 MEASUREMENT. f. Recycled Base Haul Route: The quantity of recycled base for haul routes shall be incidental to surface preparation. BASIS OF PAYMENT 101-5.1 PAYMENT. Payment shall be made at Contract unit price for the unit of measurement as specified hereinbefore and listed below. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, hauling, and placing of the material and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this item. Payments shall be made under: Item X-220.1 Recycled Base Haul Route – Per Square Yard END OF ITEM X-220 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 167 of 497 ITEM P-152 EXCAVATION, SUBGRADE, AND EMBANKMENT DESCRIPTION 152-1.1 This item covers excavation, disposal, placement, and compaction of all materials within the limits of the work required to construct safety areas, runways, taxiways, aprons, and intermediate areas as well as other areas for drainage, building construction, parking, or other purposes in accordance with these specifications and in conformity to the dimensions and typical sections shown on the plans. 152-1.2 Classification. All material excavated shall be classified as defined below: a. Unclassified excavation. Unclassified excavation shall consist of the excavation and disposal of all material, regardless of its nature which is not otherwise classified and paid for under one of the following items. b. Onsite Borrow. Onsite Borrow shall consist of approved material required for the construction of embankments or for other portions of the work in excess of the quantity of usable material available from required excavations. Borrow material shall be obtained from areas designated by the Engineer within the limits of the airport property but outside the normal limits of necessary grading, or from areas outside the airport boundaries. 152-1.3 Unsuitable excavation. Any material containing vegetable or organic matter, such as muck, peat, organic silt, or sod shall be considered unsuitable for use in embankment construction. Material, suitable for topsoil may be used on the embankment slope when approved by the Engineer. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 152-2.1 General. Before beginning excavation, grading, and embankment operations in any area, the area shall be completely cleared and grubbed in accordance with Item P-151. The suitability of material to be placed in embankments shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of in waste areas shown on the plans. All waste areas shall be graded to allow positive drainage of the area and of adjacent areas. The surface elevation of waste areas shall not extend above the surface elevation of adjacent usable areas of the airport, unless specified on the plans or approved by the Engineer. When the Contractor’s excavating operations encounter artifacts of historical or archaeological significance, the operations shall be temporarily discontinued and the Engineer notified per subsection 70- 20. At the direction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall excavate the site in such a manner as to preserve the artifacts encountered and allow for their removal. Such excavation will be paid for as extra work. Those areas outside of the limits of the pavement areas where the top layer of soil material has become compacted by hauling or other Contractor activities shall be scarified and disked to a depth of 4 inches (100 mm), to loosen and pulverize the soil. If it is necessary to interrupt existing surface drainage, sewers or under-drainage, conduits, utilities, or similar underground structures, the Contractor shall be responsible for and shall take all necessary precautions to preserve them or provide temporary services. When such facilities are encountered, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, who shall arrange for their removal if necessary. The Contractor, at his or her expense, shall satisfactorily repair or pay the cost of all damage to such facilities or structures that may result from any of the Contractor’s operations during the period of the Contract. 152-2.2 Excavation. No excavation shall be started until the work has been staked out by the Contractor and the Engineer has reviewed and approved obtained from the Contractor, the survey notes of the elevations and measurements of the ground surface. All areas to be excavated shall be stripped of vegetation and topsoil. Topsoil shall be stockpiled for future use in areas designated on the plans or by the Engineer. New Electrical Building Page 168 of 497 All suitable excavated material shall be used in the formation of embankment, subgrade, or other purposes shown on the plans. All unsuitable material shall be disposed of as shown on the plans. When the volume of the excavation exceeds that required to construct the embankments to the grades indicated, the excess shall be used to grade the areas of ultimate development or disposed as directed by the Engineer. When the volume of excavation is not sufficient for constructing the embankments to the grades indicated, the deficiency shall be obtained from borrow areas. The grade shall be maintained so that the surface is well drained at all times. When necessary, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert surface water that may affect the work. a. Selective grading. When selective grading is indicated on the plans, the more suitable material designated by the Engineer shall be used in constructing the embankment or in capping the pavement subgrade. If, at the time of excavation, it is not possible to place this material in its final location, it shall be stockpiled in approved areas so that it can be measured for payment as specified in paragraph 152-3.3. b. Undercutting. Rock, shale, hardpan, loose rock, boulders, or other material unsatisfactory for safety areas, subgrades, roads, shoulders, or any areas intended for turf shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 12 inches (300 mm) below the subgrade or to the depth specified by the Engineer. Muck, peat, matted roots, or other yielding material, unsatisfactory for subgrade foundation, shall be removed to the depth specified. Unsuitable materials shall be disposed off the airport. This excavated material shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per cubic yard (per cubic meter) for over-excavation. The excavated area shall be backfilled with suitable material obtained from the grading operations or borrow areas and compacted to specified densities. The necessary backfill will constitute a part of the embankment. Where rock cuts are made, backfill with select material. Any pockets created in the rock surface shall be drained in accordance with the details shown on the plans. c. Overbreak. Overbreak, including slides, is that portion of any material displaced or loosened beyond the finished work as planned or authorized by the Engineer. All overbreak shall be graded or removed by the Contractor and disposed of as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine if the displacement of such material was unavoidable and his or her decision shall be final. Payment will not be made for the removal and disposal of overbreak that the Engineer determines as avoidable. Unavoidable overbreak will be classified as “Unclassified Excavation.” d. Removal of utilities. The removal of existing structures and utilities required to permit the orderly progress of work will be accomplished by someone other than the Contractor; for example, the utility unless otherwise shown on the plans. All existing foundations shall be excavated at least 2 feet (60 cm) below the top of subgrade or as indicated on the plans, and the material disposed of as directed by the Engineer. All foundations thus excavated shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted as specified. e. Compaction requirements. The subgrade under areas to be paved shall be compacted to a depth of 9 inches and to a density of not less than 95% percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. The material to be compacted shall be within ±2% of optimum moisture content before being rolled to obtain the prescribed compaction (except for expansive soils). The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM D6938 using Procedure A, the direct transmission method, and ASTM D6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the material. The machine shall be calibrated in accordance with ASTM D6938. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 inches (100 mm) in their greatest dimension will not be permitted in the top 6 inches (150 mm) of the subgrade. The finished grading operations, conforming to the typical cross-section, shall be completed and maintained at least 1,000 feet (300 m) ahead of the paving operations or as directed by the Engineer. New Electrical Building Page 169 of 497 All loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes of cuts shall be pried loose or otherwise removed to the slope finished grade line. All cut-and-fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross-section, and alignment shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Blasting shall not be allowed. f. Proof rolling. After compaction is completed, the subgrade area shall be proof rolled with a heavy pneumatic-tired roller having four or more tires abreast, each tire loaded to a minimum of 30,000 pounds (13.6 metric tons) and inflated to a minimum of 125 psi (0.861 MPa) in the presence of the Engineer. Apply a minimum of two coverages, or as specified by the Engineer, to all paved areas. A coverage is defined as the application of one tire print over the designated area. Soft areas of subgrade that deflect more than 1 inch (25 mm) or show permanent deformation greater than 1 inch (25 mm) shall be removed and replaced with suitable material or reworked to conform to the moisture content and compaction requirements in accordance with these specifications. 152-2.3 Drainage excavation. Drainage excavation shall consist of excavating for drainage ditches such as intercepting; inlet or outlet ditches; for temporary levee construction; or for any other type as designed or as shown on the plans. The work shall be performed in sequence with the other construction. Intercepting ditches shall be constructed prior to starting adjacent excavation operations. All satisfactory material shall be placed in embankment fills; unsuitable material shall be placed in designated waste areas or as directed by the Engineer. All necessary work shall be performed true to final line, elevation, and cross-section. The Contractor shall maintain ditches constructed on the project to the required cross-section and shall keep them free of debris or obstructions until the project is accepted. 152-2.4 Preparation of embankment area. Where an embankment is to be constructed to a height of 4 feet (1.2 m) or less, all sod and vegetative matter shall be removed from the surface upon which the embankment is to be placed. The cleared surface shall be broken up by plowing or scarifying to a minimum depth of 6 inches (150 mm) and shall then be compacted as indicated in paragraph 152-2.6. When the height of fill is greater than 4 feet (1.2 m), sod not required to be removed shall be thoroughly disked and recompacted to the density of the surrounding ground before construction of embankment. Sloped surfaces steeper than one (1) vertical to four (4) horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches (300 mm) and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill. No direct payment shall be made for the work performed under this section. The necessary clearing and grubbing and the quantity of excavation removed will be paid for under the respective items of work. 152-2.6 Formation of embankments. Embankments shall be formed in successive horizontal layers of not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for the full width of the cross-section, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The layers shall be placed, to produce a soil structure as shown on the typical cross-section or as directed by the Engineer. Materials such as brush, hedge, roots, stumps, grass and other organic matter, shall not be incorporated or buried in the embankment. Earthwork operations shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory results cannot be obtained because of rain, freezing, or other unsatisfactory weather conditions in the field. Frozen material shall not be placed in the embankment nor shall embankment be placed upon frozen material. Material shall not be placed on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost. The Contractor shall drag, blade, or slope the embankment to provide surface drainage at all times. The material in each layer shall be within ±2% of optimum moisture content before rolling to obtain the prescribed compaction. To achieve a uniform moisture content throughout the layer, the material shall be moistened or aerated as necessary. Samples of all embankment materials for testing, both before and after New Electrical Building Page 170 of 497 placement and compaction, will be taken for each 1,000 cubic yards. Based on these tests, the Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and adjustments in methods, materials or moisture content to achieve the specified embankment density. Rolling operations shall be continued until the embankment is compacted to not less than 95% of maximum density for noncohesive soils, and 90% of maximum density for cohesive soils as determined by ASTM D1556. Under all areas to be paved, the embankments shall be compacted to a depth of 12 inches and to a density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. On all areas outside of the pavement areas, no compaction will be required on the top 4 inches (100 mm). The in-place field density shall be determined in accordance with ASTM 6938 using Procedure A, the direct transmission method, and ASTM D6938 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the material. The machine shall be calibrated in accordance with ASTM D6938. The Engineer shall perform all density tests. Compaction areas shall be kept separate, and no layer shall be covered by another layer until the proper density is obtained. During construction of the embankment, the Contractor shall route all construction equipment evenly over the entire width of the embankment as each layer is placed. Layer placement shall begin in the deepest portion of the embankment fill. As placement progresses, the layers shall be constructed approximately parallel to the finished pavement grade line. When rock and other embankment material are excavated at approximately the same time, the rock shall be incorporated into the outer portion of the embankment and the other material shall be incorporated under the future paved areas. Stones or fragmentary rock larger than 4 inches (100 mm) in their greatest dimensions will not be allowed in the top 6 inches (150 mm) of the subgrade. Rockfill shall be brought up in layers as specified or as directed by the Engineer and the finer material shall be used to fill the voids with forming a dense, compact mass. Rock or boulders shall not be disposed of outside the excavation or embankment areas, except at places and in the manner designated on the plans or by the Engineer. When the excavated material consists predominantly of rock fragments of such size that the material cannot be placed in layers of the prescribed thickness without crushing, pulverizing or further breaking down the pieces, such material may be placed in the embankment as directed in layers not exceeding 2 feet (60 cm) in thickness. Each layer shall be leveled and smoothed with suitable equipment by distribution of spalls and finer fragments of rock. The layer shall not be constructed above an elevation 4 feet (1.2 m) below the finished subgrade. There will be no separate measurement of payment for compacted embankment. All costs incidental to placing in layers, compacting, discing, watering, mixing, sloping, and other operations necessary for construction of embankments will be included in the Contract price for excavation, borrow, or other items. 152-2.7 Finishing and protection of subgrade. After the subgrade is substantially complete, the Contractor shall remove any soft or other unstable material over the full width of the subgrade that will not compact properly. All low areas, holes or depressions in the subgrade shall be brought to grade with suitable select material. Scarifying, blading, rolling and other methods shall be performed to provide a thoroughly compacted subgrade shaped to the lines and grades shown on the plans. Grading of the subgrade shall be performed so that it will drain readily. The Contractor shall protect the subgrade from damage and limit hauling over the finished subgrade to only traffic essential for construction purposes. All ruts or rough places that develop in the completed subgrade shall be graded and recompacted. No subbase, base, or surface course shall be placed on the subgrade until the subgrade has been approved by the Engineer. New Electrical Building Page 171 of 497 152-2.8 Haul. All hauling will be considered a necessary and incidental part of the work. The Contractor shall include the cost in the Contract unit price for the pay of items of work involved. No payment will be made separately or directly for hauling on any part of the work. 152-2.9 Tolerances. In those areas upon which a subbase or base course is to be placed, the top of the subgrade shall be of such smoothness that, when tested with a Contractor-furnished 12-foot (3.7-m) straightedge applied parallel and at right angles to the centerline, it shall not show any deviation in excess of 1/2 inch (12 mm), or shall not be more than 0.05 feet (15 mm) from true grade as established by grade hubs. Any deviation in excess of these amounts shall be corrected by loosening, adding, or removing materials; reshaping; and recompacting. On safety areas, intermediate and other designated areas, the surface shall be of such smoothness that it will not vary more than 0.10 feet (3 mm) from true grade as established by grade hubs. Any deviation in excess of this amount shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing materials, and reshaping. 152-2.10 Topsoil. When topsoil is specified or required as shown on the plans or under Item T-905, it shall be salvaged from stripping or other grading operations. The topsoil shall meet the requirements of Item T- 905. If, at the time of excavation or stripping, the topsoil cannot be placed in its final section of finished construction, the material shall be stockpiled at approved locations. Stockpiles shall not be placed within 400 feet of runway pavement or 100 feet of taxiway pavement and shall not be placed on areas that subsequently will require any excavation or embankment fill. If, in the judgment of the Engineer, it is practical to place the salvaged topsoil at the time of excavation or stripping, the material shall be placed in its final position without stockpiling or further rehandling. Upon completion of grading operations, stockpiled topsoil shall be handled and placed as directed, or as required in Item T-905. No direct payment will be made for topsoil under Item P-152. The quantity removed and placed directly or stockpiled shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per cubic yard for “Unclassified Excavation.” When stockpiling of topsoil and later rehandling of such material is directed by the Engineer, the material so rehandled shall be paid for at the Contract unit price per cubic yard for “topsoiling,” as provided in Item T-905. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 152-3.1 The quantity of excavation to be paid for shall be the number of cubic yards measured in its original position. Measurement shall not include the quantity of materials excavated without authorization beyond normal slope lines, or the quantity of material used for purposes other than those directed. 152-3.2 For payment specified by the cubic yard, measurement for all excavation shall be computed by the average end area method. The end area is that bound by the original ground line established by field cross-sections and the final theoretical pay line established by excavation cross-sections shown on the plans, subject to verification by the Engineer. After completion of all excavation operations and prior to the placing of base or subbase material, the final excavation shall be verified by the Engineer by means of field cross-sections taken randomly at intervals not exceeding 500 linear feet (150 m). BASIS OF PAYMENT 152-4.1For embankment in place, payment shall be made at the Contract unit price per cubic yard. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the item. New Electrical Building Page 172 of 497 Payment will be made under: Item P-152.1 Embankment in place (On Site Borrow) - per cubic yard TESTING REQUIREMENTS ASTM D698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) ASTM D1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand- Cone Method ASTM D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2700 kN-m/m3)) ASTM D2167 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method ASTM D6938 Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) END OF ITEM P-152 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 173 of 497 ITEM P-156 TEMPORARY AIR AND WATER POLLUTION, SOIL EROSION, AND SILTATION CONTROL DESCRIPTION 156-1.1 This item shall consist of temporary control measures as shown on the plans or as ordered by the Engineer during the life of a Contract to control water pollution, soil erosion, and siltation through the use of silt fences, berms, dikes, dams, sediment basins, fiber mats, gravel, mulches, grasses, slope drains, and other erosion control devices or methods. The temporary erosion control measures contained herein shall be coordinated with the permanent erosion control measures specified as part of this Contract to the extent practical to assure economical, effective, and continuous erosion control throughout the construction period. Temporary control may include work outside the construction limits such as borrow pit operations, equipment and material storage sites, waste areas, and temporary plant sites. Temporary control measures shall be design, installed and maintained to minimize the creation of wildlife attractants that have the potential to attract hazardous wildlife on or near public-use airports. MATERIALS 156-2.1 Grass. Grass that will not compete with the grasses sown later for permanent cover per Item T- 901shall be a quick-growing species (such as ryegrass, Italian ryegrass, or cereal grasses) suitable to the area providing a temporary cover. Selected grass species shall not create a wildlife attractant. 156-2.2 Mulches. Mulches may be hay, straw, fiber mats, netting, bark, wood chips, or other suitable material reasonably clean and free of noxious weeds and deleterious materials per ItemT-908. Mulches shall not create a wildlife attractant. 156-2.3 Fertilizer. Fertilizer shall be a standard commercial grade and shall conform to all Federal and state regulations and to the standards of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. 156-2.4 Slope drains. Slope drains may be constructed of pipe, fiber mats, rubble, Portland cement concrete, bituminous concrete, or other materials that will adequately control erosion. 156-2.5 Silt fence. The silt fence shall consist of polymeric filaments which are formed into a stable network such that filaments retain their relative positions. Synthetic filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of six months of expected usable construction life. Silt fence shall meet the requirements of ASTM D6461. 156-2.6 Catch basin insert inlet protection – silt sack. Catch basin insert shall be Ultra-Drain Guard®, Reusable Model or approved equal. The catch basin insert shall be installed, maintained and removed per manufacturer recommendations. Ultra-Drain Retainers® or approved equal may be required to hold the Ultra-Drain Guard®, Reusable Model or approved equal in-place if the grate cannot be installed to hold the inlet protection in place, or if the inlet protection is installed on a drainage manhole. 156-2.6 Other. All other materials shall meet commercial grade standards and shall be approved by the Engineer before being incorporated into the project. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 156-3.1 General. In the event of conflict between these requirements and pollution control laws, rules, or regulations of other Federal, state, or local agencies, the more restrictive laws, rules, or regulations shall apply. New Electrical Building Page 174 of 497 The Engineer shall be responsible for assuring compliance to the extent that construction practices, construction operations, and construction work are involved. 156-3.2 Schedule. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall submit schedules for accomplishment of temporary and permanent erosion control work for clearing and grubbing; grading; construction; paving; and structures at watercourses. The Contractor shall also submit a proposed method of erosion and dust control on haul roads and borrow pits and a plan for disposal of waste materials. Work shall not be started until the erosion control schedules and methods of operation for the applicable construction have been accepted by the Engineer. 156-3.3 Construction details. The Contractor will be required to incorporate all permanent erosion control features into the project at the earliest practicable time as outlined in the accepted schedule. Except where future construction operations will damage slopes, the Contractor shall perform the permanent seeding and mulching and other specified slope protection work in stages, as soon as substantial areas of exposed slopes can be made available. Temporary erosion and pollution control measures will be used to correct conditions that develop during construction that were not foreseen during the design stage; that are needed prior to installation of permanent control features; or that are needed temporarily to control erosion that develops during normal construction practices but are not associated with permanent control features on the project. Where erosion may be a problem, clearing and grubbing operations should be scheduled and performed so that grading operations and permanent erosion control features can follow immediately if project conditions permit; otherwise, temporary erosion control measures may be required. The Engineer shall limit the area of clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow, and embankment operations in progress, commensurate with the Contractor’s capability and progress in keeping the finish grading, mulching, seeding, and other such permanent control measures current with the accepted schedule. If seasonal limitations make such coordination unrealistic, temporary erosion control measures shall be taken immediately to the extent feasible and justified as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide immediate permanent or temporary pollution control measures to minimize contamination of adjacent streams or other watercourses, lakes, ponds, or other areas of water impoundment as directed by the Engineer. If temporary erosion and pollution control measures are required due to the Contractor’s negligence, carelessness, or failure to install permanent controls as a part of the work as scheduled or directed by the Engineer, the work shall be performed by the Contractor and the cost shall be incidental to this item. The Engineer may increase or decrease the area of erodible earth material that can be exposed at any time based on an analysis of project conditions. The erosion control features installed by the Contractor shall be acceptably maintained by the Contractor during the construction period. Whenever construction equipment must cross watercourses at frequent intervals, temporary structures should be provided. Pollutants such as fuels, lubricants, bitumen, raw sewage, wash water from concrete mixing operations, and other harmful materials shall not be discharged into any waterways, impoundments or into natural or manmade channels. 156-3.4 Installation, maintenance and removal of silt fences. Silt fences shall extend a minimum of 16 inches (41 cm) and a maximum of 34 inches (86 cm) above the ground surface. Posts shall be set no more than 10 feet (3 m) on center. Filter fabric shall be cut from a continuous roll to the length required minimizing joints where possible. When joints are necessary, the fabric shall be spliced at a support post with a minimum 12-inch (300-mm) overlap and securely sealed. A trench shall be excavated approximately 4 inches (100 mm) deep by 4 inches (100 mm) wide on the upslope side of the silt fence. The trench shall be backfilled and the soil compacted over the silt fence fabric. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of New Electrical Building Page 175 of 497 silt that accumulates during construction and prior to establishment of permanent erosion control. The fence shall be maintained in good working condition until permanent erosion control is established. Silt fence shall be removed upon approval of the Engineer. 156-3.5 Georgia sediment and erosion control requirements. In addition to the requirements above, the Contractor shall meet all requirements of the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Program and the Manual for Sediment and Eorsion Control in Georgia (latest edition). If the Contract Documents as provided do not provide for full coverage under the Permit or in accordance with the Manual, the Contractor shall be required to implement additional measures as required at no additional cost to the Project. 156-3.6 Erosion control mobilizations. This item of work will consist of preparation of an Erosion Control Compliance Plan and subsequent mobilizations to the construction site to install and/or remvove the erosion control measures. Prior to the preconstruction meeting the contractor will prepare an Erosion Control Compliance Plan. This plan will describe the erosion control measures that will be implemented during each phase of the project. One Erosion Control Mobilization event will be paid at submittal/approval of the Erosion Control Compliance Plan. Subsequent Erosion Contorl Mobilizations will consist of mobilizing to the construction site at the beginning of each construction phase with sufficient labor, equipment and materials to perform the erosion control measures detailed in the Erosion Control Compliance Plan The contractor will be paid one mobilization at the beginning of each construction phase after erosion control measures have been installed. The final Erosion Control Mobilization will consist of mobilizing to the site to remove any temporary erosion control measures, such as silt fence, which were installed over the various phases of the project. This final mobilization will be performed at the direction of the Engineer after grass has been established in accordance with Specification T-901. 156-3.7 Emergency erosion control mobilizations. An emergency will be considered to be a sudden occurrence of a serious and urgent nature which results in offsite deposition of sediments caused by erosion from the construction site. Emergency work requires immediate mobilization and movement of necessary labor, equipment, and materials to the emergency site, followed by the immediate installation of temporary erosion control measures. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 156-4.1 Temporary erosion and pollution control work required will be performed as scheduled or directed by the Engineer. Completed and accepted work will be measured as follows: a. Temporary seeding and mulching will not be measured for direct payment, but shall be considered inclusive of all activities necessary for the project duration. b. Temporary slope drains will not be measured for direct payment, but shall be considered incidental to other work items. c. Temporary sediment basins will not be measured for direct payment, but shall be considered incidental to other work items for the project duration d. All fertilizing will not be measured for direct payment, but shall be considered incidental to other work items. e. Installation and removal of silt fence will not be measured for direct payment, but shall be considered incidental to other work items for the project duration. f. Crushed stone construction outlets will not be measured for direct payment, but shall be considered incidental to other work items for the project duration. New Electrical Building Page 176 of 497 g. Inlet sediment traps, and silt sacks will not be measured for direct payment, but shall be considered incidental to other work items for the project duration. h. Erosion control mobilizations, and emergency erosion control mobilizations will be measured by the number of each completed. 156-4.2 Control work performed for protection of construction areas outside the construction limits, such as borrow and waste areas, haul roads, equipment and material storage sites, and temporary plant sites, will not be measured and paid for directly but shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor. 156-4.3 The Contractor is responsible for paying all fees to permit the Project in accordance with Local, State, and Federal requirements for NPDES, Land Disturbance, or any other requirements for constructing and permitting the Project. All fees association with land disturbance and permitting shall not be measured for payment but shall be included in the lump sum cost for Temporary Erosion Control. Any additional fees required for additional review, additional permit fees due to permit expiration, additional fees for disturbed areas outside the project limits shown on the approved NPDES palns, or any other fees required shall not be measured for payment and shall be incidental to the Project. 156-4.4 Any fines or other fees assessed by the City, County, or the EPD shall not be measured for payment and shall be at the Contract’s expense. Contract time shall continue during any Stop Work Order and any idle time for equipment or labor or remobilization shall not be measured for payment and shall be at the Contractor’s expense. BASIS OF PAYMENT 156-5.1 Accepted quantities of temporary water pollution, soil erosion, and siltation control work ordered by the Engineer and measured as provided in paragraph 156-4.1 will be paid for under: Item P-156.1 Erosion Control Mobilization – per lump sum Item P-156.2 Emergency Erosion Control Mobilization – per lump sum Where other directed work falls within the specifications for a work item that has a Contract price, the units of work shall be measured and paid for at the Contract unit price bid for the various items. Temporary control features not covered by Contract items that are ordered by the Engineer will be paid for in accordance with Section 90-05 Payment for Extra work. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS ASTM D6461 Standard Specification for Silt Fence Materials AC 150/5200-33 Hazardous Wildlife Attractants END OF ITEM P-156 New Electrical Building Page 177 of 497 ITEM T-901 SEEDING DESCRIPTION 901-1.1 This item shall consist of soil preparation, seeding, fertilizing and liming the areas shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer in accordance with these specifications. MATERIALS 901-2.1 Seed. The species and application rates of grass, legume, and cover-crop seed furnished shall be those stipulated herein. Seed shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification JJJ-S-181, Federal Specification, Seeds, Agricultural. Seed shall be furnished separately or in mixtures in standard containers labeled in conformance with the Agricultural Marketing Service (AMS) Seed Act and applicable state seed laws with the seed name, lot number, net weight, percentages of purity and of germination and hard seed, and percentage of maximum weed seed content clearly marked for each kind of seed. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer duplicate signed copies of a statement by the vendor certifying that each lot of seed has been tested by a recognized laboratory for seed testing within six (6) months of date of delivery. This statement shall include: name and address of laboratory, date of test, lot number for each kind of seed, and the results of tests as to name, percentages of purity and of germination, and percentage of weed content for each kind of seed furnished, and, in case of a mixture, the proportions of each kind of seed. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected. Seeds shall be applied as follows: Seed Minimum Seed Purity (Percent) Minimum Germination (Percent) Rate of Application lb/acre (or lb/1,000 S.F.) Bermuda 100 lb/acre Common Bermuda (Hulled) 50 lb/acre Common Bermuda (Unhulled) 50 lb/acre Tall Fescue 100 lb/acre Seeding shall be performed during the period between February 16th and November 15th inclusive, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 901-2.2 Lime. Lime shall be ground limestone containing not less than 85% of total carbonates, and shall be ground to such fineness that 90% will pass through a No. 20 mesh sieve and 50% will pass through a No. 100 mesh sieve. Coarser material will be acceptable, providing the rates of application are increased to provide not less than the minimum quantities and depth specified in the special provisions on the basis of the two sieve requirements above. Dolomitic lime or a high magnesium lime shall contain at least 10% of New Electrical Building Page 178 of 497 magnesium oxide. Lime shall be applied at the rate of 300 lb/acre. All liming materials shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C602. 901-2.3 Fertilizer. Fertilizer shall be standard commercial fertilizers supplied separately or in mixtures containing the percentages of total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid, and water-soluble potash. They shall be applied at the rate and to the depth specified and shall meet the requirements of applicable state laws. They shall be furnished in standard containers with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked thereon. No cyanamide compounds or hydrated lime shall be permitted in mixed fertilizers. The fertilizers may be supplied in one of the following forms: a. A dry, free-flowing fertilizer suitable for application by a common fertilizer spreader; b. A finely-ground fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by power sprayers; or c. A granular or pellet form suitable for application by blower equipment. Fertilizers shall be 10-10-10 commercial fertilizer and shall be spread at the rate of 1000 lb/acre. 901-2.4 Soil for repairs. The soil for fill and topsoiling of areas to be repaired shall be at least of equal quality to that which exists in areas adjacent to the area to be repaired. The soil shall be relatively free from large stones, roots, stumps, or other materials that will interfere with subsequent sowing of seed, compacting, and establishing turf, and shall be approved by the Engineer before being placed. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 901-3.1 Advance preparation and cleanup. After grading of areas has been completed and before applying fertilizer and ground limestone, areas to be seeded shall be raked or otherwise cleared of stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any diameter, sticks, stumps, and other debris that might interfere with sowing of seed, growth of grasses, or subsequent maintenance of grass-covered areas. If any damage by erosion or other causes has occurred after the completion of grading and before beginning the application of fertilizer and ground limestone, the Contractor shall repair such damage include filling gullies, smoothing irregularities, and repairing other incidental damage. An area to be seeded shall be considered a satisfactory seedbed without additional treatment if it has recently been thoroughly loosened and worked to a depth of not less than 5 inches (125 mm) as a result of grading operations and, if immediately prior to seeding, the top 3 inches (75 mm) of soil is loose, friable, reasonably free from large clods, rocks, large roots, or other undesirable matter, and if shaped to the required grade. When the area to be seeded is sparsely sodded, weedy, barren and unworked, or packed and hard, any grass and weeds shall first be cut or otherwise satisfactorily disposed of, and the soil then scarified or otherwise loosened to a depth not less than 5 inches (125 mm). Clods shall be broken and the top 3 inches (75 mm) of soil shall be worked into a satisfactory seedbed by discing, or by use of cultipackers, rollers, drags, harrows, or other appropriate means. 901-3.2 Dry application method. a. Liming. Lime shall be applied separately and prior to the application of any fertilizer or seed and only on seedbeds that have previously been prepared as described above. The lime shall then be worked into the top 3 inches (75 mm) of soil after which the seedbed shall again be properly graded and dressed to a smooth finish. b. Fertilizing. Following advance preparations and cleanup fertilizer shall be uniformly spread at the rate that will provide not less than the minimum quantity stated in paragraph 901-2.3. c. Seeding. Grass seed shall be sown at the rate specified in paragraph 901-2.1 immediately after fertilizing. The fertilizer and seed shall be raked within the depth range stated in the special provisions. Seeds of legumes, either alone or in mixtures, shall be inoculated before mixing or sowing, in accordance New Electrical Building Page 179 of 497 with the instructions of the manufacturer of the inoculant. When seeding is required at other than the seasons shown on the plans or in the special provisions, a cover crop shall be sown by the same methods required for grass and legume seeding. d. Rolling. After the seed has been properly covered, the seedbed shall be immediately compacted by means of an approved lawn roller, weighing 40 to 65 pounds per foot (60 to 97 kg per meter) of width for clay soil (or any soil having a tendency to pack), and weighing 150 to 200 pounds per foot (223 to 298 kg per meter) of width for sandy or light soils. 901-3.3 Wet application method. a. General. The Contractor may elect to apply seed and fertilizer (and lime, if required) by spraying them on the previously prepared seedbed in the form of an aqueous mixture and by using the methods and equipment described herein. The rates of application shall be as specified in the special provisions. b. Spraying equipment. The spraying equipment shall have a container or water tank equipped with a liquid level gauge calibrated to read in increments not larger than 50 gallons (190 liters) over the entire range of the tank capacity, mounted so as to be visible to the nozzle operator. The container or tank shall also be equipped with a mechanical power-driven agitator capable of keeping all the solids in the mixture in complete suspension at all times until used. The unit shall also be equipped with a pressure pump capable of delivering 100 gallons (380 liters) per minute at a pressure of 100 lb / sq inches (690 kPa). The pump shall be mounted in a line that will recirculate the mixture through the tank whenever it is not being sprayed from the nozzle. All pump passages and pipe lines shall be capable of providing clearance for 5/8 inch (16 mm) solids. The power unit for the pump and agitator shall have controls mounted so as to be accessible to the nozzle operator. There shall be an indicating pressure gauge connected and mounted immediately at the back of the nozzle. The nozzle pipe shall be mounted on an elevated supporting stand in such a manner that it can be rotated through 360 degrees horizontally and inclined vertically from at least 20 degrees below to at least 60 degrees above the horizontal. There shall be a quick-acting, three-way control valve connecting the recirculating line to the nozzle pipe and mounted so that the nozzle operator can control and regulate the amount of flow of mixture delivered to the nozzle. At least three different types of nozzles shall be supplied so that mixtures may be properly sprayed over distance varying from 20 to 100 feet (6 to 30 m). One shall be a close-range ribbon nozzle, one a medium-range ribbon nozzle, and one a long-range jet nozzle. For case of removal and cleaning, all nozzles shall be connected to the nozzle pipe by means of quick-release couplings. In order to reach areas inaccessible to the regular equipment, an extension hose at least 50 feet (15 m) in length shall be provided to which the nozzles may be connected. c. Mixtures. Lime, if required, shall be applied separately, in the quantity specified, prior to the fertilizing and seeding operations. Not more than 220 pounds (100 kg) of lime shall be added to and mixed with each 100 gallons (380 liters) of water. Seed and fertilizer shall be mixed together in the relative proportions specified, but not more than a total of 220 pounds (100 kg) of these combined solids shall be added to and mixed with each 100 gallons (380 liters) of water. All water used shall be obtained from fresh water sources and shall be free from injurious chemicals and other toxic substances harmful to plant life. Brackish water shall not be used at any time. The Contractor shall identify to the Engineer all sources of water at least two (2) weeks prior to use. The Engineer may take samples of the water at the source or from the tank at any time and have a laboratory test the samples for chemical and saline content. The Contractor shall not use any water from any source that is disapproved by the Engineer following such tests. All mixtures shall be constantly agitated from the time they are mixed until they are finally applied to the seedbed. All such mixtures shall be used within two (2) hours from the time they were mixed or they shall be wasted and disposed of at approved locations. New Electrical Building Page 180 of 497 d. Spraying. Lime, if required, shall be sprayed only upon previously prepared seedbeds. After the applied lime mixture has dried, the lime shall be worked into the top 3 inches (75 mm), after which the seedbed shall again be properly graded and dressed to a smooth finish. Mixtures of seed and fertilizer shall only be sprayed upon previously prepared seedbeds on which the lime, if required, shall already have been worked in. The mixtures shall be applied by means of a high- pressure spray that shall always be directed upward into the air so that the mixtures will fall to the ground like rain in a uniform spray. Nozzles or sprays shall never be directed toward the ground in such a manner as might produce erosion or runoff. Particular care shall be exercised to ensure that the application is made uniformly and at the prescribed rate and to guard against misses and overlapped areas. Proper predetermined quantities of the mixture in accordance with specifications shall be used to cover specified sections of known area. Checks on the rate and uniformity of application may be made by observing the degree of wetting of the ground or by distributing test sheets of paper or pans over the area at intervals and observing the quantity of material deposited thereon. On surfaces that are to be mulched as indicated by the plans or designated by the Engineer, seed and fertilizer applied by the spray method need not be raked into the soil or rolled. However, on surfaces on which mulch is not to be used, the raking and rolling operations will be required after the soil has dried. 901-3.4 Maintenance of seeded areas. The Contractor shall protect seeded areas against traffic or other use by warning signs or barricades, as approved by the Engineer. Surfaces gullied or otherwise damaged following seeding shall be repaired by regrading and reseeding as directed. The Contractor shall mow, water as directed, and otherwise maintain seeded areas in a satisfactory condition until final inspection and acceptance of the work. When either the dry or wet application method outlined above is used for work done out of season, it will be required that the Contractor establish a good stand of grass of uniform color and density to the satisfaction of the Engineer. A grass stand shall be considered adequate when bare spots are one square foot (0.01 sq m) or less, randomly dispersed, and do not exceed 3% of the area seeded. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 901-4.1 The quantity of seeding to be paid for shall be the number of acres measured on the ground surface, completed and accepted. BASIS OF PAYMENT 901-5.1 Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price per acre or fraction thereof, which price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all material and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this item. Payment will be made under: Item T-901.1 Seeding - per acre MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS ASTM C602 Standard Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials ASTM D977 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt FED SPEC JJJ-S-181, Federal Specification, Seeds, Agricultural END OF ITEM T-901 New Electrical Building Page 181 of 497 ITEM T-905 TOPSOILING DESCRIPTION 905-1.1 This item shall consist of preparing the ground surface for topsoil application, removing topsoil from designated stockpiles or areas to be stripped on the site or from approved sources off the site, and placing, spreading the topsoil on prepared areas in accordance with this specification at the locations shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. MATERIALS 905-2.1 Topsoil. Topsoil shall be the surface layer of soil with no admixture of refuse or any material toxic to plant growth, and it shall be reasonably free from subsoil and stumps, roots, brush, stones (2 inches (50 mm) or more in diameter), and clay lumps or similar objects. Brush and other vegetation that will not be incorporated with the soil during handling operations shall be cut and removed. Ordinary sod and herbaceous growth such as grass and weeds are not to be removed, but shall be thoroughly broken up and intermixed with the soil during handling operations. Heavy sod or other cover, which cannot be incorporated into the topsoil by discing or other means, shall be removed. The topsoil or soil mixture, unless otherwise specified or approved, shall have a pH range of approximately 5.5 pH to 7.6 pH, when tested in accordance with the methods of testing of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists in effect on the date of invitation of bids. The organic content shall be not less than 3% nor more than 20% as determined by the wet-combustion method (chromic acid reduction). There shall be not less than 20% nor more than 80% of the material passing the 200 mesh (0.075 mm) sieve as determined by the wash test in accordance with ASTM C117. Natural topsoil may be amended by the Contractor with approved materials and methods to meet the above specifications. 905-2.2 Inspection and tests. Within 10 days following acceptance of the bid, the Engineer shall be notified of the source of topsoil to be furnished by the Contractor. The topsoil shall be inspected to determine if the selected soil meets the requirements specified and to determine the depth to which stripping will be permitted. At this time, the Contractor may be required to take representative soil samples from several locations within the area under consideration and to the proposed stripping depths, for testing purposes as specified in paragraph 905-2.1. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 905-3.1 General. Areas to be topsoiled shall be shown on the plans. If topsoil is available on the site, the location of the stockpiles or areas to be stripped of topsoil and the stripping depths shall be shown on the plans. Suitable equipment necessary for proper preparation and treatment of the ground surface, stripping of topsoil, and for the handling and placing of all required materials shall be on hand, in good condition, and approved by the Engineer before the various operations are started. 905-3.2 Preparing the ground surface. Immediately prior to dumping and spreading the topsoil on any area, the surface shall be loosened by discs or spike-tooth harrows, or by other means approved by the Engineer, to a minimum depth of 2 inches (50 mm) to facilitate bonding of the topsoil to the covered subgrade soil. The surface of the area to be topsoiled shall be cleared of all stones larger than 2 inches (50 mm) in any diameter and all litter or other material which may be detrimental to proper bonding, the rise of capillary moisture, or the proper growth of the desired planting. Limited areas, as shown on the plans, which are too compact to respond to these operations shall receive special scarification. Grades on the area to be topsoiled, which have been established by others as shown on the plans, shall be maintained in a true and even condition. Where grades have not been established, the areas shall be smooth- New Electrical Building Page 182 of 497 graded and the surface left at the prescribed grades in an even and compacted condition to prevent the formation of low places or pockets where water will stand. 905-3.3 Obtaining topsoil. Prior to the stripping of topsoil from designated areas, any vegetation, briars, stumps and large roots, rubbish or stones found on such areas, which may interfere with subsequent operations, shall be removed using methods approved by the Engineer. Heavy sod or other cover, which cannot be incorporated into the topsoil by discing or other means shall be removed. When suitable topsoil is available on the site, the Contractor shall remove this material from the designated areas and to the depth as directed by the Engineer. The topsoil shall be spread on areas already tilled and smooth-graded or stockpiled in areas approved by the Engineer. Any topsoil stockpiled by the Contractor shall be rehandled and placed without additional compensation. Any topsoil that has been stockpiled on the site by others, and is required for topsoiling purposes, shall be removed and placed by the Contractor. The sites of all stockpiles and areas adjacent thereto which have been disturbed by the Contractor shall be graded if required and put into a condition acceptable for seeding. When suitable topsoil is secured off the airport site, the Contractor shall locate and obtain the supply, subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer sufficiently in advance of operations in order that necessary measurements and tests can be made. The Contractor shall remove the topsoil from approved areas and to the depth as directed. The topsoil shall be hauled to the site of the work and placed for spreading or spread as required. Any topsoil hauled to the site of the work and stockpiled shall be rehandled and placed without additional compensation. 905-3.4 Placing topsoil. The topsoil shall be evenly spread on the prepared areas to a uniform depth of 3 inches (50 mm) after compaction, unless otherwise shown on the plans or stated in the special provisions. Spreading shall not be done when the ground or topsoil is frozen, excessively wet, or otherwise in a condition detrimental to the work. Spreading shall be carried on so that turfing operations can proceed with a minimum of soil preparation or tilling. After spreading, any large, stiff clods and hard lumps shall be broken with a pulverizer or by other effective means, and all stones or rocks (2 inches (50 mm) or more in diameter), roots, litter, or any foreign matter shall be raked up and disposed of by the Contractor. after spreading is completed, the topsoil shall be satisfactorily compacted by rolling with a cultipacker or by other means approved by the Engineer. The compacted topsoil surface shall conform to the required lines, grades, and cross-sections. Any topsoil or other dirt falling upon pavements as a result of hauling or handling of topsoil shall be promptly removed. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 905-4.1 Topsoil obtained on the site shall be measured by the number of cubic yards (cubic meters) of topsoil measured in its original position and stripped or excavated. Topsoil stockpiled by others and removed for topsoiling by the Contractor shall be measured by the number of cubic yards (cubic meters) of topsoil measured in the stockpile. Topsoil shall be measured by volume in cubic yards (cubic meters) computed by the method of end areas. 905-4.2 Topsoil obtained off the site shall be measured by the number of cubic yards (cubic meters) of topsoil measured in its original position and stripped or excavated. Topsoil shall be measured by volume in cubic yards (meters) computed by the method of end areas. BASIS OF PAYMENT 905-5.1 Payment will be made at the Contract unit price per cubic yard for topsoiling (obtained on the site). This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, placing, and spreading of the materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the item. New Electrical Building Page 183 of 497 905-5.2 Payment will be made at the Contract unit price per cubic yard for topsoiling (obtained off the site). This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, placing, and spreading of the materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the item. Payment will be made under: Item T-905.1 Topsoiling (Obtained on Site) - per cubic yard Item T-905.2 Topsoiling (Furnished from Off the Site) - per cubic yard TESTING MATERIALS ASTM C117 Materials Finer than 75 m (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing END OF ITEM T-905 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 184 of 497 SPECIFICATION L-100 - AIRPORT LIGHTING GENERAL PROVISIONS 100.1 Description 100.1.1 General These Specifications cover requirements for all Airport lighting installations. 100.2 General Requirements 100.2.1 General The following General Requirements specifications govern all Contract Documents. All Work shall be performed in strict accordance with these Specifications. Installation details and material and equipment specifications shall be in conformity with the latest edition of the applicable FAA advisory circulars and revisions. Airport lighting equipment provided shall be from the FAA approved equipment list in the latest edition of AC 150/5345–53 Appendix 3. Contractor shall furnish all other basic wiring materials and products as listed by Underwriters Laboratories and as suitable for the purpose specified. All installation shall be in accordance with National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) "Standard of Installations". Contractor's workers shall be trained and experienced in installing, testing and repairing Airport lighting systems. Contractor shall possess a copy of FAA Advisory Circular (AC) 150/5340–26 (latest edition), and be familiar with its contents. Contractor shall maintain a copy of the AC on site and follow all pertinent aspects as it relates to the Work. 100.2.2 Codes and Regulatory Requirements Contractor shall comply with all ordinances, laws, regulations and codes applicable. This compliance does not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and installing Work shown or specified which exceeds the requirements of such ordinances, laws, regulations and codes. Inspections, approvals, and plan and specification reviews required by State Statutes, codes, rules, laws or ordinances shall be obtained by the Contractor. All costs and fees for inspections, approvals, and plan and specification reviews shall be paid by the Contractor. All electrical work completed under this Contract shall be done under the direct supervision of a Master Electrician certified by the State. If there are local regulations relating to licensing or certification, the more stringent requirements will governed. 100.2.3 Electrical Utility Service Point Electrical Utility Services required by the Contract Documents shall include all Work from the utility point of service to the service main disconnect switch. Where "construction limits" designations are indicated on Contract Documents, they shall not apply to Electric Utility Service work necessary to serve the project and occurring outside of the "construction limits" designations. Cost for all Work by the utility company shall be paid by the Contractor. New Electrical Building Page 185 of 497 Throughout the Specification, two terms are used to describe electrical systems that provide power for lighting and control equipment. The terms used are "Power Source" and "Utility Service". "Power Source" refers to products and materials necessary to connect, distribute, protect, and provide an electrical source for the circuits that feed lighting and control equipment. Under most circumstances, this includes circuit breakers, safety switches, boxes, building feeder circuits, branch circuits, raceways, splices, connections, and attachments. Depending on the circumstances, it may include outdoor direct burial feeders, control, and branch circuits. Although each project may vary, typically a Power Source is derived from an existing "Utility Service" and Distribution System, and all work to install a "Power Source" is incidental to some other work. "Electric Utility Service" refers to products and materials necessary to bring a Public Utility electrical source to the point where it connects to a "Power Source". Unless specified otherwise, this includes permits, fees, utility poles, transmission circuits, service laterals, utility transformers, or provisions for transformers, service metering equipment, main service disconnect switch, and any costs incurred by the Public Utility on and off the project site, inside and outside the construction limits, in order to bring electrical power to a service point. Although each project may vary, typically a "Utility Service" is a new electrical power system and is paid for independently of all other work as provided in the Contract Documents. 100.2.4 Excavation Contractor shall provide excavation for underground Work in accordance with the construction methods and requirements for excavation in the Specifications. Compact backfill for trenches to densities required for adjacent embankment and cut areas. 100.2.5 Concrete Concrete shall be in accordance with P-610. 100.2.6 Cutting and Patching Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching necessary in order to perform the Work. Special permission shall be obtained from the Engineer before cutting structural members of finished material. All patching shall be performed to return the facilities affected to the condition equal to or exceeding the undisturbed work. 100.2.7 Closing Openings 100.2.7.1 Firestopping All unused slots, sleeves and other penetrations in fire rated floors, walls or other general construction shall be closed and sealed with an approved firestopping material. Firestopping material shall be UL listed and tested silicone elastomer specifically formulated for use in horizontal and vertical applications. Material shall possess expansion characteristics and upon exposure to heat above 250 degrees Fahrenheit shall be UL listed and tested silicone elastomer specifically formulated for use in Firestopping material shall be UL listed for 3–hour protection, applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. Openings in floor slabs shall be closed with 16 gauge galvanized steel sheet, securely attached with power–driven studs into the building structure. Firestop with a layer of silicone elastomer not less than 1 inch thick New Electrical Building Page 186 of 497 which completely fills the opening. The sheet steel shall be located so that the top surface of the silicone elastomer shall be approximately 1 inch below the finished floor slab. Openings in walls shall be closed with 16-gauge galvanized steel sheet securely attached at the midpoint of the wall thickness and firestopped on both sides of the steel sheet with not less than 1/2–inch thick layer of non–sagging silicone elastomer to fully cover the opening. Single or multiple pipes passing through walls and floors shall have the annulus space between pipes or between pipes and structure filled with silicone elastomer to provide a 3–hour rated firestop for floors and walls. Patching Work shall be performed by experienced workers, skilled for the particular type of Work involved. Repair all cut surfaces and match adjacent surfaces. All holes in masonry shall be drilled with rotary drills. 100.2.8 Painting, Finishing, Damage and Touch–Up Repair all marred or damaged painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original finishes. 100 .2.9 Acceptance of Materials and Equipment Acceptance of equipment, where applicable, will be based on Section 100.2.10. Contractor shall be prepared to submit samples of equipment or material for review when requested by the Engineer. Contractor installed equipment (including FAA approved) shall not generate electromagnetic interference in the existing and/or new communications, weather, air navigation, and air traffic control equipment. Equipment generating such interference shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost, with equipment not generating interference and meeting the applicable specifications. Contractor shall ascertain that all lighting system components furnished by them (including FAA approved equipment) are compatible in all respects with each other, and the remainder of new or existing systems. Non–compatible components furnished by the contractor shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Manufactured items furnished shall be the current, cataloged product of the manufacturer. Replacement parts shall be available. There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer to provide repair and replacement services. Contractor shall follow the manufacture's installation instructions. Contractor accepts full responsibility for their equipment and product selection, cost for materials, effort of installation and the compatibility with airport lighting equipment specified for the project. Where installation procedures are required to be in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations, the Contractor shall have printed copies of the recommendations prior to installation. Installation of the item shall not proceed until recommendations are received. Failure to use recommendations shall be cause for rejection of the equipment or material. Damaged or broken materials or products shall be replaced. However, field repair may be authorized in writing by the Engineer instead of replacement on items with long delivery lead times. Repair authorization shall be in written form. New Electrical Building Page 187 of 497 100.2.10 Shop Drawings Shop drawings shall be submitted for all electrical equipment. The Contractor shall: a. Reference the Specification's article to which each shop drawings is applicable. b. Number every page in the submittal with a unique, consecutive number. c. Include complete catalog information such as product illustrations, ratings, and dimensions as applicable. d. Clearly mark all items to be used on the project when multiply items show on the same sheets. e. Submit shop drawings in complete groups of materials (i.e. cables, all lighting fixtures, etc.), and each item of material submitted shall be signed by the Contractor as verification that submittal has been reviewed in detail and is in fact, the Contractor's choice of materials. Bind catalog cuts, plate numbers, descriptive bulletins and drawings (11" x 17") in sets with covers showing titles. Contractor shall verify dimensions of equipment and be satisfied as to code compliance for fit prior to submitting shop drawings for approval. When vendor sheets include more than one product code or catalog data, the Contractor shall highlight the data pertinent to the specified material. f. Each shop drawing submitted shall include the following paragraph: “It is hereby certified that the (equipment) (material) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into the project, it is in compliance with the Contract Documents and Specifications, and can be installed in the allocated spaces." g. Failure to add the preceding statement or departures from the enclosed procedure may result in delay of review of submittal. h. Electrical equipment subject to shop drawing review shall be inspected by the Engineer before installation commences. Equipment that cannot be inspected in place, shall be exposed for inspection upon request of the Engineer. Non–conforming equipment shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. 100.2.11 Operating and Maintenance Manual Contractor shall prepare Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals for all electrical equipment furnished under the Contract. Provide two hard copies (binders) and one electronic copy (cd) to the Engineer. The information included must be the exact equipment installed, not the complete "line" of the manufacturer. Where sheets show the equipment other than the equipment actually installed, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. Parts listed shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and /or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier is not acceptable. Manuals shall contain shop drawings, wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions, replacement parts, lists, and equipment nameplate data for all control equipment and systems installed under the description information designed to acquaint Sponsor's maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation. In addition, each manual shall contain a set of the project record drawings reduced to 11" x 17". Wiring diagrams for each piece of control equipment and system shall be complete drawings for the specific product installed under the Contract. "Typical" line diagrams will not be acceptable. The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly arrangement by specification Table of Contents. The manuals shall have a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories with identifying tabs. The completed manuals shall be bound with hard board 3–ring binders. The covers shall be imprinted with the name of the job, Sponsor, Contractor and year of completion. The back edge shall be New Electrical Building Page 188 of 497 imprinted with the name of the job, Sponsor, Contractor, and year of completion. The electronic copy shall follow the same requirements. A preliminary copy shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to completion of the project for review. The three corrected copies shall be delivered to the Sponsor before final payment is approved. 100.2.12 Tests Acceptance Test for equipment shall be conducted in presence of Engineer, which includes demonstrations, instructions, and tests as outlined in the respective Shop Drawings, equipment and system specifications, and as required by the Special Provisions. a. Contractor shall make available at the site the following test equipment: • Voltmeter/OHM with proper scales. • Clamp–on ammeter with proper scales. • Meggar to measure conductor insulation resistance with 100V, 500V and 1000VDC outputs. • Grounding system resistance tester. • High voltage probe for measuring up to 5000 VAC. b. Test equipment shall remain the property of the Contractor. c. The Contractor shall have available a licensed electrician with necessary tools and materials to perform the following: • To open and close equipment enclosures, covers to junction boxes, terminal panels and wire ways when directed. • To open and reconnect splices other than the cast type when directed. • To make tests and demonstrate system performance. 100.2.13 Facility Starting and Commissioning Illuminated navigational aid equipment included in the Contract Documents shall not be energized for Sponsor’s use until the Engineer has inspected and the Owner has given written authorization for use to the Contractor. Prior to the written authorization, the Contractor may energize the equipment for short periods for testing purpose only and as approved by the Engineer. No equipment, illuminated navigational or otherwise, shall be operated unattended until it has been fully prepared, connected, tested, and made ready for normal operation. Damage to equipment occasioned by improper or ill–timed operation or testing shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. A written statement shall be provided by the Contractor stating the date and time when the navigational aid equipment will be available for testing and operation. Equipment warranties will be in effect on the date of the written authorization by the Owner. All equipment requiring operation during construction shall require operating instructions for systems and equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. The operating instructions shall include wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and operating and control sequence for each principal system and equipment. Post instructions where directed or attach the operating instructions adjacent to each principal system and equipment including start–up, operating, shutdown, safety precautions and procedures in the event of equipment failure. Provide weather–resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures where appropriate for operating instructions exposed to the weather. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal. Prior to project final acceptance and receipt of the O&M Manuals, the Contractor shall furnish full instructions for the care, adjustments, and operation and maintenance of all electrical equipment that functions by automation or manual control to the Sponsor's designated representative. New Electrical Building Page 189 of 497 100.2.14 Contract Drawing Before roughing–in facilities or installation of equipment, the Contractor shall consult all Drawings for obstructions that affect the installation. The Contractor shall also verify that field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings, and that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. The location of the circuits and conductors on the Drawings are diagrammatic, and subject to dimension provided in the details, and as determined by the actual field conditions. Space requirements and dimensions are nominal and based on typical manufacturer's data, with proper electrical clearances. The Contractor is totally responsible for selecting products that fit the available space, or expanding the given spaces to comply with their bid equipment, plus the necessary NEC code space. The Contractor will not be allowed extra compensation for their bid equipment that does not fit the available space. 100.2.15 Contract Drawing Symbols and Abbreviations Refer to Symbols and Abbreviations illustrated on Drawings. Other symbols are in common usage, but if uncertainty exists regarding Plan symbols or abbreviation, they shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for clarification. 100.2.16 Contract Drawing Records Engineer will furnish a newly printed set of Contract Drawings for the Contractor to mark where construction differed from the original Drawings. The set shall be kept on site at all times and this Work shall be completed and the Drawings given to the Engineer before final payment is approved. 100.2.17 Demolition Contractor shall review all the demolition required by the Contract Documents to be removed, relocated, terminated, or extended to accommodate the new construction. As a minimum, the following is required: a. Remove abandoned wiring to the source of supply. b. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit behind accessible finishes. Cut conduit so that it is recessed with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. c. Disconnect abandoned electrical outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank covers for abandoned outlets that cannot be removed. d. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment servicing abandoned outlets that have been removed. e. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition work. f. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access to splices as appropriate. g. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, or as specified. Demolition drawings are schematic and are based on existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Engineer before disturbing existing installations. Beginning of demolition signifies that the Contractor has investigated existing conditions and accepts the demolition requirement under these specifications. New Electrical Building Page 190 of 497 100.2.18 Warranty All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this section shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of at least twelve months from final acceptance by the Owner. The defective materials and/or equipment shall be repaired or replaced, at the Owner's discretion, with no additional cost to the Owner. 100.3 Wiring Methods and Materials 100.3.1 General The following Wiring Methods and Materials Specifications govern airside electrical installations that are not otherwise covered by Advisory Circulars or other Parts of the Standard Specifications, and are intended to supplement the Standard and Non-standard Electrical Specifications. These Specifications are not intended to govern FAA approved manufactured assemblies tested under ETL, airport landside installations, or Special Provisions, unless they are explicitly mentioned as being included by the Special Provisions. Definitions: a. Airside equipment refers to equipment installed as part of the airfield electrical systems governed or covered by FAA regulations, with restricted access to unauthorized personnel. b. Landside equipment is electrical equipment installed as part of public and passenger handling areas, unrestricted. 100.3.2 Raceways Contractor shall provide raceways at locations indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. Refer to L-110 for underground electrical duct bank installations. 100.3.2.1 General (1) Rigid Steel and Intermediate Conduit. (2) Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. (3) Electrical Metallic Tubing. (4) Flexible Metal Conduit. (5) Flexible Polyethylene Duct, Coupling and Connectors. (6) Liquid–tight Flexible Metal Conduit. (7) Wireway, Auxiliary Gutters. (8) Raceway Fittings, Couplings and Connectors. (9) Bituminous Fiber Duct. 100.3.2.2. References American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Comply with requirements of the following: a. ANSI C80.2 Rigid and Steel Conduit. b. ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), Zinc Coated. c. ANSI 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Comply with the requirements of the following: a. NEMA TC2Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC–40 and EPC–80). New Electrical Building Page 191 of 497 b. NEMA TC3Fittings for PVC Conduit. c. NEMA TC7Flexible Polyethylene Duct. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Comply with requirements of the following NFPA 70 National Electric Code: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Comply with the requirements of the following. a. UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit. b. UL 360 Liquid–Tight Flexible. c. UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes. d. UL 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. e. UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit. Steel Conduit. f. UL 543 Bituminous Fiber Duct. 100.3.2.3 Products Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) and Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). a. Use for stub–ups from direct burial and wherever susceptible to severe physical damage. b. Use in hazardous (classified) location and Class I, Division 2. c. Use for burial in concrete slabs or concrete encasement. d. Use for direct contact with earth. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. a. Schedule 40–Use for direct burial under driveways and parking lots only. Use under runways, taxiways, and aprons only when encased in concrete. b. Schedule 80 – Use for direct burial and stub–ups from direct burial for a distance of two feet maximum. Use as an alternate to Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit, for stub up work only. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). a. Use for branch circuits in dry locations. b. Do not bury in ground or in slabs. c. Do not use in concrete. d. Do not use for circuits operating over 600–volts. Flexible Metal Conduit. a. Use in dry locations. b. Do not use in corrosive atmosphere or concealed work exterior locations. c. Use wherever equipment must be isolated for vibration or shifted to its final position. Flexible Polyethylene Duct, Couplings, and Connectors. a. Use for conductors and cables below grade installed in trench or by plowing methods as an alternate to underground cable installed in trench with sand base and backfill. b. Do not use above grade. Liquid–Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. a. Use for exterior and damp locations. b. Sizes 1–1/4–inch and smaller, provide with a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between convolutions. c. Sizes 1–1/2–inch and larger, provide with an internal grounding conductor and grounding bushings. New Electrical Building Page 192 of 497 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters. a. May be used to facilitate installation and future changes in wiring between panelboards, safety switches in close proximity to each other on same or adjacent walls or in same electrical equipment room or area. b. Provide NEMA 4 stainless enclosure where outdoors or subject to moisture and similar elements. c. Do not use for constant voltage circuits operating over 100V, unless an equipment grounding conductor is used and bonded to each wireway joint, and bonded to the grounding electrode conductor. Raceway Fittings, Couplings and Connectors. a. Use fittings listed and approved for specific conduit or raceway system used. For threaded rigid steel conduit do not use threadless or compression type fittings. For EMT, provide steel or malleable iron "concrete–tight" or "rain–tight" couplings and connectors, compression type or stainless steel multiple locking type. Do not use indentation or set screw type fittings. b. Bushing and connectors shall be insulated type which maintain continuity of conduit grounding system. Insulating material shall be molded or locked into metallic body of the fitting. Bushing made entirely of nonmetallic material will not be allowed. c. Connectors and couplings body shall have wall thickness at least equal to wall thickness of conduit used. d. Provide flexible metal conduit fittings made of steel of malleable iron and one of the following types: a. Screw type having an angular wedge fitting between the convolutions of the conduit. b. Squeeze or clamp type having a bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit and clamped by one or more screws. c. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit convolutions. d. Liquid–tight flexible metal conduit shall incorporate a steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Fitting shall be steel, or malleable iron with insulated throat, with male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without "O" ring seal. e. Provide expansion fittings for all rigidly fastened conduits spanning a building expansion joint and if not otherwise mentioned, for all runs exceeding 150 feet in length. Fittings shall be hot–dipped galvanized malleable iron with a packing ring to prevent entrance of water, a pressure ring, a grounding ring and a separate external copper bonding jumper. f. Material such as "pot metal" shall not be used for any type of fitting. Rigid Galvanized Steel (RGS) 100.3.2.4 Installation Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires within raceways. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways; use temporary closure protection. During construction, protect stub–ups from damage. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab or grade. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offset parallel. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable for the use and location. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends. All bends shall have the longest possible radii. New Electrical Building Page 193 of 497 Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow the surface contours. Run exposed, parallel or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs where they can be installed parallel. Where the installation is such that joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway and coupling square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed. Running threads are not allowed. Install pull wires in empty raceway. Use No. 14 AWG zinc–coated steel or plastic having not less than 200 pounds tensile strength unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. In slabs and walls, locate raceways in middle third and leave at least 2 inches concrete cover. Lateral spacing of raceways shall be not less than three diameters of the raceway. Tie raceway to reinforcing rods or support to prevent sagging or disturbing when concrete is placed. At expansion joints, provide expansion fittings and cross at right angles to joint. Provide conduits stubbed up through or from concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside. Provide flexible conduits only for connections to electrical equipment when it is subject to movement, vibration, misalignment, or where noise transmission is to be eliminated or reduced. Install all bonding and grounding conductors for liquid–tight, flexible metallic conduit runs within the conduit. All PVC conduits directly buried shall be allowed to acclimate to the installed temperature before installation commences (one hour minimum). Flexible conduit shall be of the liquid–tight type when installed under any of the following conditions: a. Exterior locations (ultra violet light rated) b. Moisture or humidity laden atmospheres where it is possible for condensation to accumulate. Corrosive atmospheres. c. Wherever there is a possibility of seepage or dripping of oil, grease or water. d. Raceway Sealing Fittings shall be zinc coated, cast or malleable iron type. Fittings used to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type. • Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways at all outlet, junction and pull boxes, and remove burrs and obstructions. • Run a swab or mandrel to remove dirt and blockages. New raceways which are deformed and prevent the passage of a mandrel shall be replaced. Used raceways that are deformed and prevent the passage of a mandrel shall be replaced at the Engineer's discretion with payment in accordance with Extra Work Section 40–04. • Remove dirt and construction debris from outlet, junction and pull boxes. New Electrical Building Page 194 of 497 100.3.3 Feeder and Branch Circuit Wire and Cable 100.3.3.1 General Contractor shall provide feeder and branch circuit wire and cable at locations indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the following Specifications. Refer to Specification L-108 for underground cable installations. This Section Includes: a. Copper conductors. b. Tap type connectors. c. Split–bolt connectors. d. Wire nut connectors. 100.3.3.2. References American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Comply with requirements of the following: • ASTM B 1 Standard Specification for Hard Drawn Copper Wire • ASTM B 2 Standard Specification for Medium–Hard–Drawn Copper Wire • ASTM B 3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire • ASTM B 8 Standard Specification for Concentric–Lay–Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, medium–Hard, or Soft • ASTM D 753 Standard Specification for General Purpose Polychloroprene Jacket for • Wire and Cable. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Comply with the following standards which apply to wiring systems: • IEEE 82Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors • IEEE 241 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for construction, installation and color coding of electrical wire, cable and connections. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Comply with requirements of the following: • NEMA WC 3S–19–81 Rubber–Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. • NEMA WC 5S–61–402 Thermoplastic–Insulated Wire and Cable for the transmission and • Distribution of electrical Energy • NEMA WC 7/S–66–524 Cross–Linked–Thermosetting–Polyethylene–Insulated Wire and • Cable for the transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. • NEMA WC 8/S–68–516 Ethylene–Propylene–Rubber–Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. Underwriters Laboratory (UL). Provide Material conforming to the following standards • UL 44Rubber–insulated Wires and Cables • UL 83Thermoplastic–Insulated Wires and Cables • UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors • UL 854 Service–Entrance Cables New Electrical Building Page 195 of 497 100.3.3.3 Products Conductors. a. For all constant voltage circuits 600 volts or less, provide wire rated 600 V minimum of the single conductor annealed copper type. b. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller may be solid, and No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. c. Conductivity shall not be less than 98 percent at 20 degrees Centigrade (68 degrees Fahrenheit) or resistivity shall not be less than 1.7 microhms per centimeter. d. For dry and wet locations provide Type THHN/THWN, 75 degrees maximum. Cable. a. For all constant voltage circuits 600 volts or less, provide UL listed cables of sizes, ampacity, temperature ratings and insulating materials as indicated on the drawings. Where no sizes, ampacity, temperature or insulating materials are indicated, use NFPA 70. Connectors and Splices. a. Provide UL listed metal connectors of sizes ampacity temperature ratings, materials, and classes required by NFPA 70 and NEMA standards for applications and services indicated. b. For Branch Circuit wires No. 10 AWG and smaller, provide solderless, insulated pressure cable type connectors, 600 V, of the compression or indent type or wire nut connectors. c. Temperature rating of connectors shall be at least equal to that of the wire on which they are used. d. For Branch Circuit wires No. 8 AWG and larger wire, provide socket head cap, hex screw or bolt clamp type connectors, manufactured of high conductivity copper alloy or bronze castings. Select proper connector for each wire size. Cable sizes 250 MCM and larger shall be retained in the connector by twin clamping elements. Insulating Materials. a. Provide plastic electrical insulating tape which is flame retardant, cold and weather resistant. Tape for use in areas subjected to temperatures 40ıC, or where the tape will be subjected to an oil splash, tape shall have a minimum thickness of 8.5 mils, and shall consist of an oil–resistant vinyl backing with an oil–resistant acrylic adhesive. b. Provide all insulating materials for splices and connections such as glass and synthetic tapes, putties, resins, splice cases, or compositions of the type approved for the particular use, location, voltage and temperature, and apply and install in an approved manner, all in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Prohibited Products. a. The use of non–metallic sheathed cable Types NM to NMC, armored–bushed cable (BX) and armor–clad cable (AC) and service entrance cables (SE and USE) is prohibited. 100.3.3.4 Installation – General Deliver wire and cable packaged in factory–sealed containers. Store wire and cable in a clean dry space in original containers. Protect products form weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that the dielectric resistance integrity of wires and cables is maintained. New Electrical Building Page 196 of 497 Unless otherwise indicated in Contract Documents, all wiring shall be installed in conduit, in conformance with NFPA 70. Provide wire, cables and connectors necessary for a complete installation from point of service connection to all receptacles, lighting fixtures, devices, utilization equipment and outlets. Wire and cable manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be used. Neatly and securely bundle and tie all individual circuits located in branch circuit panelboards, signal cabinets, signal control boards, switchboards and motor control centers, switchboards, motor control centers and pull boxes. Bundle and tie with either marlin twine 2 or 3 ply lacing or nylon straps made of self– extinguishing nylon having a temperature range of –65°F to +350°F. Each strap shall be constructed with a locking hub of head on one end and a taper on the other. Securely fasten nonferrous identifying tags or pressure sensitive labels to all cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, manholes, and at termination of cables. Tags or labels shall be stamped or printed to correspond with markings on drawings or marked so that feeder or cable may be readily identified. If suspended type tags are provided, they shall be attached by approximately 55 pound test monofilament line or slip free plastic cable lacing units. 100.3.3.5. Installation – In Conduit Refer to L–100–3.2, RACEWAYS, for the preparation of raceways for wire and cables. Provide suitable installation equipment to prevent cutting and abrasion of conduits during the pulling of wires and cables, according to the following: a. Ropes used for pulling of conductors in raceways with existing circuits shall be made of polyethylene or other suitable nonmetallic material. b. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. c. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound shall not deteriorate conductor or insulation. d. Lubricants shall conform to UL requirement as applicable. e. Pulling lines shall be attached to conductor cables by means of either woven basket grips or pulling eyes attached directly to the conductors. Rope hitches shall not be used. f. Where polyethylene insulation is used, a pulling lubricant is required. The lubricant shall be non–injurious to such insulation. Install cable supports for all vertical feeders in accordance with the applicable sections of the NFPA 70. Provide cable supports of the wedge type which firmly clamp each individual cable and tighten due to the cable weight. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surfaces contours, where applicable. 100.3.3.6. Installation – Above Grade In making a splice, connectors shall be brought up securely upon the conductors such that all conductors are equally engaged, the insulation is not ruptured, no bare wires are exposed or have "backed off" due to the application of pressure and the connection will not loosen due to cycling or vibration, in order the insure an efficient splice. New Electrical Building Page 197 of 497 The number, size, and combinations of conductors permitted as listed on manufacturer's packaging connector shall be strictly followed. Connectors shall be fully insulated by a skirt, or taped to provide an insulation value at least equal to rating of wires being connected. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and 468B. Color code all secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows: Phase 208Y/120 Volts 240/120 Volts 480Y/277 Volts A Black Black Yellow B Red Red Brown C Blue –– Orange Neutral White White Gray Ground Green Green Green The colors shall be factory–applied entire length of the conductors by one of the following methods except as noted and limited in the following: a. Solid color compound b. Solid color coating c. Surface printing every 12 inches, maximum spacing of 18 inches. d. All grounding and phase conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid color compound or solid color coating. e. All grounding and phase conductors No. 8 AWG and larger color coded with pressure sensitive tape shall have a background color or shall have field applied color coding methods per UL and NFPA 70. f. Color pressure–sensitive plastic tape shall be applied in half overlapping turns for a distance of six inches or all terminal points and in all boxes in which splices or taps are made. The last two laps of tape shall be applied with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. g. Tape shall be 3/4–inch wide and colors shall be as specified. h. Cable identification markings shall not be obliterated by taping and tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent obliteration of cable markings. Cables and conductors entering from underground shall be sealed between cable and raceway or sleeve, with a waterproof non–hardening sealing compound. 100.3.3.7. Installation – Manholes Install and support cables in manholes on steel racks with porcelain or equal insulators. Train cable around manhole walls but do not bend cable to a radius less than the limits in NFPA 70. Constant voltage power cables located in manholes and handholes shall be covered with arcproof and flameproof tape. The tape shall be applied in a single layer, one–half lapped, or as recommended by the manufacturer. 100.3.3.8. Installation – Below Grade Refer to L-108 for underground cable installations. New Electrical Building Page 198 of 497 Tests conducted with a meggar on constant voltage circuits shall be performed so as not to harm the conductor insulation. Follow manufacturer’s instructions and 100.2.12. 100.3.4 Control and Signal Wire and Cable. 100.3.4.1 General The Contractor shall provide control wire, signal wire, and cable at locations indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. Refer to Specification L-108 for underground cable installations. Section Includes Class 2 and Class 3. 100.3.4.2. Reference Standards American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Comply with requirements of the following: • ASTM B 3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. • ASTM B 8 Standard Specification for Concentric–Lay–Stranded Copper conductors, Hard, Medium–Hard, or Soft. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Comply with the following IEEE Standards: • IEEE 82 Test Procedure for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors. • IEEE 241 Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings. • Vol. IGA–3 Reducing Electrical Noise in Instruments Circuits. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)/Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA): Comply with applicable requirements of the following: • NEMA WC 3/S–19–81 Rubber–Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. • NEMA WC 5/S–61–402 Thermoplastic–Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. • NEMA WC 7/S–66–524 Cross–linked–thermosetting–Polyethylene–Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. • NEMA WC 8/S–68–516 Ethylene–Propylene–Rubber–Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical energy National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for construction, installation and color coding of control and signal sire Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide material conforming to the following UL Standards: • UL 44 Rubber–Insulated Wires and Cables. • UL 83 Thermoplastic–insulated Wires and Cables. • UL Labeled: Provide control and signal wire UL listed and labeled. 100.3.4.3. Products Provide control and signal wires and cables single conductor and multiple conductors, shielded and unshielded, as indicated in the Contract Documents. New Electrical Building Page 199 of 497 Wires and cables shall have 75°C rating minimum, designed to provide a clean signal in a high noise level environment, and suitable to reject static magnetic, common mode and cross talk noise. Control and signal wire shall be coated copper solid or stranded Class B. Stranded conductors shall be constructed of short lay seven strand minimum concentric bare copper wires. The size of conductors shall be suitable for the current required for satisfactory operation of the apparatus controlled and with proper consideration of circuit's length, unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Provide conductors with a primary insulation material that is heat, moisture, flame, and chemical, resistant crosslinked polyethylene, or PVC high temperature insulation material. Cable shall have nonhydroscopic fillers and a high temperature nonhydroscopic tape shall be applied over the cable code. Multi–conductor cable shall have conductors color coded. Control cable for above grade dry locations shall have an outer covering, fabricated of thermoplastic with flame, heat and moisture resisting compounds. 100.3.4.4. Installation Deliver wire and cable packaged in factory–sealed containers, or wound on NEMA wire and cable reels. Cable ends shall be sealed with shrinkable self–sealing end caps or by other proper means which protects wires and cables against moisture and dust. Ensure that dielectric resistance integrity of wires and cables is maintained. Store wire and cable in a clean dry space in original containers. Protect products form weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that the dielectric integrity of wires and cables is maintained. Wire and cables shall be rated for 600 volts minimum. Where the operating voltage is less than 100 volts, the wire and cables may be insulated for 300 volts. Wire and cable manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be used. All conductors in signal cabinets and signal control panels shall be neatly and securely bundled. Bundling and cabling shall be done with nylon straps made of self–extinguishing nylon having a temperature range of minus 65 degrees Fahrenheit to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide pressure sensitive labels, securely fastened to each conductor at each termination of single conductor or multiconductor cables. Tags or labels shall be stamped or printed to correspond with markings on the Contract Documents. Conductors shall be marked so they can be readily identified. Splices in control wire are not permitted. All control wire shall be continuous from terminal block to terminal block. New Electrical Building Page 200 of 497 Pickup of magnetic and static noise shall be prevented by routing cables and wires away from noise sources such as power cables, generators, motors, and any arc producing equipment. Control wiring subject to noise shall be twisted and provided with a total coverage grounded shield. Cables and wires shall be prevented from picking up common mode noise by grounding the shield at one point. Location of the ground point shall be at the point where the instrument circuit is grounded and isolated form all other grounds. Pickup of cross talk noise on multiple pair cable shall be prevented by using cables with individually shielded, isolated pair shields. 100.3.5 Electrical Boxes and Fittings 100.3.5.1 General This Contractor shall provide electrical box and fittings on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. Section Includes: a. Outlet boxes b. Junction boxes c. Pull boxes d. Conduit bodies e. Bushings f. Locknuts g. Knockout closures 100.3.5.2. References National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Comply with applicable requirements of the following: • NEMA OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports • NEMA FB 1 Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, for construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Comply with applicable requirements of the following: • UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes • UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes • UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes, Flush–Device Boxes and Covers • UL 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Location. 100.3.5.3. Products Provide galvanized or other approved corrosion resistant finish for all boxes, accessories and fittings. Provide minimum 4–inch square by 1–1/2–inch deep, one piece, deep–drawn, galvanized steel outlet boxes for general use. Provide 4–inch octagonal concrete boxes and hung ceiling boxes of the folded or welded type where required by project conditions. Construct with stamped knockouts in the back and sides. Provide threaded screw holes with corrosion–resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices. New Electrical Building Page 201 of 497 Provide interior outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including covers, mounting brackets, hangers, extension rings, cable clamps, and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring situations. Provide corrosion–resistant cast–metal weatherproof outlet boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, with threaded conduit ends, cast–metal face plates with spring–hinged waterproof caps suitable configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion–resistant fasteners. For Junction and Pull Boxes, provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw–on covers and of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation. Provide welded seams and stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws, and washers. Where necessary for boxes to provide a rigid assembly, provide integral structural steel bracing. Provide galvanized cast–metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes, and sizes, to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded–conduit–entrance ends, removable covers, and corrosion– resistant screws. Provide corrosion–resistant punched–steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts, malleable iron conduit bushings and offset connectors of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation. Provide boxes UL listed for the particular type and class for Hazardous Locations. Provide outlet boxes conforming to UL 886 for hazardous locations and install in conformance with NFPA 70 Articles 500 through 555 for Hazardous Locations. 100.3.5.4. Installation Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. Provide weatherproof outlets for all interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed. Provide boxes of sizes adequate to meet NFPA 70 volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes indicated in the Contract Documents. When the mounting height of a wall–mounted outlet box is shown on the drawings, it is defined as the height from the finished floor to a finished grade, to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. Where mounting heights are not indicated or where heights and locations interfere with mechanical, architectural or structural features, install outlet boxes as approved by the Engineer. Mount outlet boxes for switches with the long axis vertical. Mount boxes for receptacles either vertically or horizontally but consistently one way. Three or more gang boxes shall be mounted with the long axis horizontal. Do not use sectional (gangable) boxes, device plates as covers for boxes in exposed locations, or round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box. Protect outlet boxes to prevent entrance of debris. Thoroughly clean foreign material from boxes before conductors are installed. At the following locations use threaded hub type boxes with gasketed weatherproof covers: a. Exterior locations. New Electrical Building Page 202 of 497 b. Where exposed to moisture laden atmosphere c. Where indicated in the Contract Documents. For installation of junction and pull boxes, conform to the following: a. For boxes exposed to rain or installed in wet locations use NEMA 4 stainless steel. b. Conductors larger than 3/0 in any pull or junction box including equipment grounding conductors shall not exceed the sizes in Table 1. TABLE 1. CONDUCTORS SIZE OF LARGEST CONDUCTORS MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS No. 4/0 AWG 30 250 MCM 20 500 MCM 15 Over 500 MCM 10 Provide each box with sufficient clamps, grids, or devices to which cables are secured in neat and orderly fashion permitting ready identification and so that no cable will have an unsupported length of more than 30 inches. 100.3.6 Wiring Devices The Contractor shall provide wiring devices at locations indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the following Specifications. Section Includes. a. Receptacles. b. Ground–fault circuit interrupters. c. Switches. d. Photocells. 100.3.6.2. References American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Provide plugs and receptacle devices constructed in accordance with ANSI C73, "Attachment Plugs and Receptacles." Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): Construct and install wiring devices in accordance with requirements of IEEE 241, "Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings." National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Provide wiring devices constructed and configured in accordance with the requirements of: • NEMA WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices. • NEMA WD 2 Semiconductor Dimmers for Incandescent Lamps. • NEMA WD 6 Wiring Devices – Dimensional Requirements National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with NFPA 70, as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide wiring devices which are UL listed and comply with the requirements of: • UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings • UL 20 General–Use Snap Switches New Electrical Building Page 203 of 497 • UL 498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. • UL 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes • UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes. • UL 943 Ground–Fault Circuit Interrupters. 100.3.6.3. Products Provide factory–fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide devices and wall plates submit color selections for approval by Engineer. Provide specification grade single and duplex receptacles, 2–pole, 3–wire grounding, with green hexagonal equipment ground screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, 20 A, 125 V, with metal plaster ears, design for side wiring with four captively held binding screws and provisions for back wiring with NEMA configuration 5–20R unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide feed–through type ground fault circuit interrupters, with duplex receptacles, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit, and installed in a 2–3/4 inch deep outlet box without adapter. Provide grounding type UL rated Class A, Group 1. rated 20 A, 125 V, 60 Hz, solid–state ground fault sensing and signaling with 5 milliamperes ground fault trip level, equip with NEMA configuration 5– 2OR. Provide weatherproof single and duplex receptacles, 20A, 125 V, NEMA 5–20R in cast metal box with gasketed, weatherproof cast metal cover plate and gasketed cap over each receptacle opening. Provide cap with spring hinged cover flap. Provide specification grade, general duty flush single pole 3–way and 4–way toggle and key operated AC quiet snap switches, 20 A, 120–277 V, with mounting yoke insulated from mechanism, equip with plaster ears, switch handle and back or side–wired screw terminals. Provide captive or terminal type terminal screws not smaller than No. 8. Provide back–wired devices with separate access holes for wiring. Color shall be selected by the Engineer. Provide switches for hazardous locations that meet all requirements of NFPA 70 for Class 1, division 1. Provide covers with a finish to match the housing for surface mounted units. Provide wall plate for each switch, receptacle, signal special purpose outlet. Do not use sectional gang plates. Provide multi–gang outlet plates for multi–gang boxes. Wall plates shall be in accordance with UL 514A, UL 514B, and UL 514C. Provide 0.04 inch satin finished steel in all unfinished areas and mechanical spaces. Match the finish of fastening crews with the plates. Provide plates for exposed screw jointed fittings that match the fittings with edges of plates flush with edges of fittings and made of heavy cadmium plated steel. Provide plates for finished areas subject to wet or rain as directed by the Engineer. For FAA approved lighting and NAVAIDS, provide FAA required photocells with (2) N.O. 20 amp contacts, surge protection, energizing at 35 foot candles and de-energizing at 60 foot candles, in cast aluminum enclosure. For all other lighting provide quick–response, cadmium–sulfide type photocell with15 to 20 second built–in time delay to prevent response to momentary lightning flashes, car headlights or cloud movements. Photocell shall be adjustable and energize when north sky light decreases to 1.5-foot candles and shall remain energized until north sky light increases to a minimum of 3 foot candles. New Electrical Building Page 204 of 497 Provide photocells of voltage and wattage ratings as indicated in the Contract Documents. 100.3.6.4. Installation Handle wiring devices carefully to prevent damage. Do not install damaged wiring devices. Store wiring devices in a clean and dry place. Protect from dirt, construction debris, and physical damage. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. Where not indicated, mount switch adjacent to latch jamb of door. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring Work, as necessary to integrate installation of wiring devices with other Work. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building materials, dirt, and debris. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A, "Wire connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Install switches with centerline located 4 feet above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Install receptacles in machine with centerline 4 feet above finished floor. All other devices shall be located as indicated in the Contract Documents or as direct by the Engineer. Test wiring devices for electrical continuity, and for short–circuits prior to energizing circuitry. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. 100.3.7 Cabinets and Enclosures 100.3.7.1 General Contractor shall provide covers, cabinets, and individual hinged–door enclosures for all electrical systems as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the following Specifications. 100.3.7.2. References National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Comply with NEMA 250, "Enclosures for Electrical equipment 1000 Volts Maximum." National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" for application, and installation of electrical cabinets and enclosures. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Provide electrical cabinets and enclosures which are UL listed and labeled, and constructed in conformance with UL 50 "Cabinets and Boxes." New Electrical Building Page 205 of 497 100.3.7.3. Products Provide cabinets and enclosures as follows: a. Surface NEMA 1 Cabinets and Enclosures: • Provide a front consisting of a one– piece sheet steel frame and a hinged door with catch and lock. • Provide each cabinet with a combination catch and flat key lock. • Doors shall be hinged directly to cabinet, with 3/4–inch flange around all edges shaped to cover edge of box. b. Surface NEMA 12 Cabinets and Enclosures: • Fabricate of minimum 16 MSG steel with continuous welded seams. • Provide removable doors, with neoprene door gasket attached with oil–resistant adhesive, and held in place with steel retaining strips. Provide removable internal mounting panel for component installation. • Provide multiple doors where required. Individual door width shall be no greater than 24 inches. • Provide butt hinges or continuous hinges. • Furnish single door cabinets with padlock and hasp, and double door cabinets with 3–point handle–operated–latch plus hasp. c. Surface NEMA 4 Cabinets and Enclosures: • Provide features similar to those for NEMA 12 units except provide NEMA 4 protection against hose directed water. • Provide multiple cover clamps in lieu of handle latches. • Provide doors over 36 inches in height with vault handle and a 3–point catch, arrange to fasten door at top, bottom, and center. All cabinets and enclosures located in dry locations shall be painted, unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. In addition to a priming coat, all outside surfaces of trim and doors shall be given factory finish coat of gray paint. All cabinet interiors and panel mounted back plates shall be white. NEMA 4 stainless cabinets and enclosures shall maintain a natural finish. Provide cabinets and enclosures with provision for cabinet grounding without penetrating exterior wall of the enclosure. 100.3.7.4. Installation Touch up all scrapes and other mars in the enclosure finish equal to the manufacturer's finish. Mount cabinets at a uniform height, nominally 6 feet 6 inches to the top of the enclosure above finished floor, except as otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. Support and fasten all cabinets securely in place. 100.3.8 Supporting Devices New Electrical Building Page 206 of 497 100.3.8.1 General Contractor shall provide all electrical supports, anchors, sleeves, seals, fastenings and other components indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications sections includes: Section Includes. a. Clevis hangers. b. Riser clamps. c. C–clamps. d. One–hole conduit straps. e. Two–hole conduit straps. f. Round steel rods. g. Expansion anchors. 100.3.8.2. References National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Comply with NFPA 70 as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL). Conform to UL listings and labeling. 100.3.8.3. Products Provide supporting devices with manufacturer's standard materials, designed and constructed in accordance with published product information. Provide all supports, support hardware and fasteners hot dipped galvanized for exterior installations and cadmium plated for interior installations. Provide manufactured standard supports including clevis hangers, risers clamps, conduit straps, threaded C–clamps with retainers, wall brackets and spring steel clamps. Provide U–channel strut system for mounting and supporting electrical equipment. Fabricate strut from 16–gauge hot–dip galvanized steel sheet, 9/16–inch diameter holes, 8–inches on center on top surface. Fittings shall be compatible with the U–channel struts. 100.3.8.4. Installation Install hangers, sleeves, seals, U–channel supports and fasteners as indicted and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70 and American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) for installation of supporting devices. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work. Provide raceway structural support capacity equal to the maximum weight of the raceway plus a safety factor of 200 pounds. Provide additional support strength where required to prevent distortion of raceway during wire pulling. New Electrical Building Page 207 of 497 Provide individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers, and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U–bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly, and for securing hanger rods and conduits. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal raceways to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Support individual horizontal conduits and EMT 1–1/2 inch size and smaller by either one or two hole pipe straps or separate pipe hangers. Use separate pipe hangers for larger sizes. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of pipe straps or hangers for sizes 1–1/2–inch and smaller in dry locations. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use a minimum 1/4–inch diameter or larger threaded steel to meet the safety factor. Use steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or EMT. Do not use wire as a means of support. Space supports for metallic raceways in accordance with the requirements or this Section and the requirements of the NFPA 70, except as otherwise indicated. In vertical runs provide such support that the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports, with no weight load on raceway termination or conductor terminals. Provide supports for all miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce the same safety allowances as specified for raceway supports previously mentioned. Provide metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes and junction boxes. Install cable supports in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Spacing not to exceed NFPA 70 tabulation for spacing of conductor supports. Allow adequate slack in conductors to prevent any stress on terminations. Installation shall consider conductor thermal expansion and contraction. Securely fasten all electrical items and their supporting hardware including, but not limited to, conduits, raceways, cables, busways, cabinets, boxes, switches, and control components to a building structure, or structural fixture, unless otherwise indicated. Fasten by means of round head full threaded hood screws on wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws; welded threaded studs, or spring–tension clamps on steel work. Threaded studs driven in by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts. Do not weld conduits or pipe strap inserts or steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction use sheet metal screws. Holes cut to a depth of more than1/2-inch in reinforced concrete or to a depth of more than 3/4–inch in concrete joints shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. Loads applied to any fastener shall not exceed one–fifth of the proof test load. Use vibration and shock– resistant fasteners, where applicable. Rawl plugs are not permitted. New Electrical Building Page 208 of 497 100.3.9 Electrical Identification 100.3.9.1 General Contractor shall provide electrical identification as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following Specifications. Section Includes: a. Buried electrical line warnings. b. Identification of electrical power, control and communication, cables and conductors. c. Operational instruction signs. d. Warning and caution signs. e. Equipment labels and signs. 100.3.9.2. References American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Comply with requirements of ANSI A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" with regard to type and size of lettering for raceway and cable labels. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" requirements for identification and for provision of warning and caution signs for wiring and equipment. 100.3.9.3. Products Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application, except as otherwise indicated. Adhesive Marking Labels for Raceways shall be pre–printed, flexible, self–adhesive labels with legend indicating voltage and service. Size: 1–1/8 inches high by 4 inches long for raceway 1–inch diameter and less, 1–1/8 inches high by 8 inches long for raceway over 1–inch diameter. Color: Black legend on orange background. Underground Line Marking Tape shall be permanent bright–colored continuous–printed plastic tape compounded for all direct–burial signal and communication circuits; not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. Provide printed legend indicative of general type of underground line below. Vinyl or Vinyl Cloth Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers shall be self-adhesive wrap–around cable/conductor markers with pre–printed numbers and letters for designation purposes. Aluminum Wrap–Around Cable Marker Bands shall be cut from 0.014–inch thick aluminum sheet and fitted with slots or ears for securing permanently around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. Provide for legend application with stamped letters or numbers. Engraved Plastic–Laminate Labels, Sign and Instruction Plates shall be engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16–inch minimum thickness for up to 20 square inch sign or 8–inch length; 1/8 inch thickness for larger sizes. Engrave legend in white letters on black face and punch for mechanical fasteners. Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs shall be pre–printed aluminum signs appropriate to the location, punched for fasteners, and sized for good visibility. Fasteners for Plastic Laminate and Metal Signs shall be self-tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 minimum stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. New Electrical Building Page 209 of 497 Cable Ties shall be fungus–inert, self–extinguishing, one piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18 inch minimum width, 50 pounds minimum tensile strength and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 degrees Fahrenheit to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide ties in specified colors when used for color coding. 100.3.9.4. Installation Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in electrical identification work, with corresponding designations, specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as approved in submittals, as required by code, or as recommended by manufacturers. Install products covered by this Section where indicated on drawings or specified. Install products covered by this Section where required by NFPA 70, whether or not otherwise indicated. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NFPA 70. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install identification after completion of finish work. In all areas where inside circuits are routed from a vault through an inhabited space, identify all exposed high voltage feeder conduits (over 600 volts) by words "DANGER–HIGH VOLTAGE" in black letters 2 inches high, stenciled on adhesive labels at 10–foot intervals over continuous painted orange background applied as follows: a. On entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of basement or ground floor in contact with earth or framed above unexcavated space. b. On wall surfaces directly exterior to conduits run concealed within the wall. c. On all accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts exposed at ceilings or concealed above suspended ceilings. d. On entire surface of exposed conduits. e. Clean surface of dust, loose material and oil films before painting. f. Prime unpainted surfaces. For galvanized metal use single component acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units use heavy duty acrylic resin block– filler. For concrete surfaces use clear alkali–resistant alkyd binder type sealer. g. Provide one intermediate and one finish coat of orange silicone alkyd enamel. h. Apply all primer and finish materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Pull and Connection Boxes shall be identified with pressure sensitive, self–adhesive labels indicating system voltage in black pre–printed on orange background as required by NFPA 70 for caution signs on all electrical power and lighting system boxes. Install on outside of box cover. Also label boxes covers to identify the circuits contained therein. Use pressure sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels or plasticized card stock tags at concealed boxes. During backfilling of the trench for each exterior underground communications and control circuit, install continuous underground–type plastic line marker, located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where multiple lines are installed in a common trench or concrete envelope and do not exceed and overall width of 16 inches, install a single line marker. Provide identifying metal tags or aluminum wrap–around marker bands securely fastened to all power circuit cables, feeders, and power circuits in electrical equipment rooms, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes and hand holes with tags or bands with 1/4–inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with approximately 55–pound test monofilament line or one piece self–locking nylon cable ties. New Electrical Building Page 210 of 497 Tag or label conductors as follows: a. Tag or label all conductors with identification indicating source and circuit numbers. b. Where Multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/signal conductors are present in the same box or enclosure, label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number as applicable. For control and communications/signal wiring, use wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at all intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes. c. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards, shop drawings, Contract documents and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility electrical work. d. Where required by NFPA 70, to ensure a safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect, install warning, caution or instruction signs. a. Where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation, provide engraved plastic laminated instruction signs with approved legend. For outdoor items provide butyrate signs with metal backing. e. For emergency instructions or other emergency operations, provide engraved laminated signs with approved white legend on red background with minimum 3/8–inch high lettering. Provide sign or stenciled legend to identify equipment concealed behind bolted covers of housing for disconnecting switches, transformers and switchboards. Stencil or provide equipment identification label of engraved plastic–laminate of each major unit of electrical equipment; including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication /signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self–explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, a minimum 1 inch high lettering. Engraved labels shall be 2 inches high black lettering in white field. Provide text that matches terminology and numbering of the Contract document and shop drawings. Provide label for each unit of the following categories of electrical work: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Electrical switchgear and switch boards. d. Regulators. e. Power transfer equipment. f. Contactors. g. Remote controlled switches. h. Control devices. i. Transformers. j. Power generating units. For panelboards, provide circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. Stencil and install labels at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. New Electrical Building Page 211 of 497 100.3.10 Secondary Grounding 100.3.10.1 General Provide secondary grounding as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the following Specifications. This section Includes: a. Materials and methods for grounding constant voltage 600V or less electrical systems only. b. Grounding conductors. c. Bonding jumpers. d. Ground bus. e. Ground rods and plates. f. Grounding terminations. 100.3.10.2. References American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Comply with the requirements of ANSI C2 National Electric Safety Code. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Comply with the requirements of ASTM B1 Standard Specification for Hard–Drawn Copper Wire. 100.3.10.3 Products Provide insulated equipment grounding conductors which run in the same raceway with circuit wires. Provide bare ground conductors for grounding of transformers, switch gear, other service equipment, grounding service poles and electrical equipment structures both underground and above ground. Conductors shall be stranded copper conductors. Provide braided copper tape constructed of No. 30 gauge bare copper wires sized to suit the application. Ground rods and plates are as indicated by the Contract Documents and NFPA 70. All rods shall have a hard, clean, smooth continuous surface throughout the entire length of the rod. Where welded connections are required, such welds shall be made by the exothermic process utilizing factory provided molds. 100.3.10.4 Installation Deliver grounding materials in factory–sealed containers and with conductors wound on National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) wire and cable reels. Store grounding materials in a clean dry space in original containers. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris, and traffic. Supplement the grounded neutral of the secondary distribution system with an equipment grounding system to properly safeguard equipment and personnel. The system shall, as a minimum, comply with NFPA 70. Provide the equipment grounding system such that all metallic structures, enclosures, raceways, junction boxes, outlet boxes, cabinets, frames, portable equipment, and other conductive items in close proximity New Electrical Building Page 212 of 497 with electrical circuits operate continuously at ground potential and provide a low impedance path for possible ground fault currents. In bus installations other than UL listed assemblies, provide where indicated, a bare copper ground bus spaced 1 inch from the wall and not more than 6 inches above the finished floor in each electrical equipment area. The required length of the ground bus shall be as shown in the Contract Documents. Connect the ground bus by utilizing hard–drawn copper conductors and make connections between the conductors and the ground bus with connectors UL listed for the application. Drive electrical system ground rods until the top is six inches below the final grade. Interconnect the electrical system ground rods with bare copper grounding electrode conductors buried at least 24 inches below grade. Size all required equipment grounding and grounding electrode conductors and straps in compliance with NFPA 70. Provide insulated equipment grounding and grounding electrode conductors of the same type and class for the associated phase and neutral conductors of the secondary distribution system. Provide the proper number and size of pressure connectors required for all equipment grounding bars in panelboards and other electrical equipment for the termination of equipment grounding conductors. Provide pressure connectors for all active and spare circuits. Where metallic conduits terminate at a metallic housing without mechanical connection, such as locknuts and bushings, provide each conduit with a ground bushing. Connect each such ground bushings with a bare copper bonding jumper to the ground lug or bus in the electrical equipment. Size the conductor as required by NFPA 70. Make all ground connections with UL listed products. Where an insulated ground wire is connected to ground rods below grade or in wet locations, insulate the connection and seal against moisture penetrating under the insulation. 100.3.11 Panelboards 100.3.11.1 General Contractor shall provide panelboards as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following Specifications. Section Includes: a. Distribution panelboards. b. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards. Section Does Not Include. a. Switchboards. b. Service entrance equipment. 100.3.11.2 References National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Provide panelboards and switches constructed and configured in accordance with the following: New Electrical Building Page 213 of 497 • NEMA AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches • NEMA KS 1 Encloses Switches • NEMA PB 1 Panelboards National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Construct panelboards in accordance with the following UL publications: • UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes • UL 67 Panelboards • UL 310 Electrical Quick–Correct Terminals • UL 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors • UL 489 Molded–Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit–Breaker Enclosures • UL 943 Ground–Fault Circuit Interrupters • UL 1053 Ground–Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment 100.3.11.3. Products 100.3.11.3.1 Distribution Panelboards Provide panelboards with buses constructed of solid copper, minimum conductivity 98 percent and rectangular shape. a. Mechanically mount and brace buses in conformance with UL 67. b. Provide solderless lugs for copper cable. c. Provide ampacity as indicated on the drawings. Provide bare, uninsulated copper, factory installed grounding bus with ampacity equal to the main bus. Provide copper pressure connected terminations. Provide bus bar connections to branch circuits of the sequenced phased type. d. Mount in accordance with UL 67. e. Provide numbered terminals. f. Provide pressure connectors for copper. Where words similar to "space", "space only", "future space", or similar wording are used on the drawings and panel schedules, provide bus space for future overcurrent devices. a. Extend buses full size. b. Brace and insulate bus in accordance with UL 67. c. Provide bolted connections for future overcurrent devices. Construct enclosures in accordance with UL 50 except modify as hereinafter specified. a. Construct of minimum 16–gauge galvanized steel NEMA 1, unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. b. Conform to UL 67 for additional enclosure requirements. c. Provide inner and outer door with hinged trim. d. Panelboard, back–box and front plate shall be the product of one manufacturer. Factory fit components before shipment. New Electrical Building Page 214 of 497 e. Provide enclosure type in conformance with UL 50 and NEMA PB 1. f. Provide removable front plates of the dead–front type with removable, and flush hinged enclosure door. g. Provide a keyed lock for circuit breaker access cover. Provide multiple knockouts not fewer than 1.5 times the number of bus circuits. In addition to the priming coat, all inside and outside surfaces of trim and doors shall be given a factory finish coat of gray paint. Recessed boxes, and surface boxes in vaults, switchgear rooms and electrical equipment enclosures shall be painted as previously described. Provide factory printed directories with a clear plastic directory cover and metal frame attached to the panel door. Provide Wiring Space that conforms to the requirements of UL 67. Feed–through gutters not permitted. a. Conform to NFPA 70 for maximum gutter fill. b. Conform to UL 67 for minimum width of gutter and wire bending space. Breakers shall have inverse time automatic tripping. Provide adjustable trip circuit breakers as noted in the Contract Documents. Circuit breakers shall be bolt–in type, factory assembled, except breakers 225 amperes frame size and larger may be plug–in type if held in place by positive locking device requiring mechanical release for removal. Integrally fused circuit breakers with inverse time automatic tripping, and fuses shall conform to UL 198B, 198C, 198D, 198E, 198F, 198G, 198H, 198L, and 198M. Provide breakers as indicated in the Contract Documents with current interrupting ratings, in RMS symmetrical amps. 100.3.11.3.2 Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards Provide enclosures, bus systems, spacing and knockouts same as for distribution panelboards. Provide interrupting ratings, circuit arrangements, and trip settings as noted in the Contract Documents. Provide common trip mechanisms for multi–pole breakers. Provide instantaneous automatic trips conforming to NEMA AB 1. Breakers shall be bolt–on type, factory assembled. Stab–in circuit breaker types are not acceptable. Provide quick–make and quick–break mechanism. 100.3.11.4 Installation Install panelboards in conformance with NEMA PB 1 and NFPA 70. New Electrical Building Page 215 of 497 Torque lug screws in accordance with UL 486A for copper conductors and UL 486B for aluminum conductors. Install connectors, lugs, neutral bus and other field installed components in accordance with manufacturer's published literature. Verify gutter size conforms to wire bending space requirements of NFPA 70 and UL 67. Wire wrap branch circuits in gutters after installation. Use approved wire ties. Verify maximum gutter fill to conform with NFPA 70 and UL 67. Verify bolted circuit breaker connection lugs conforming to shop drawings. Verify breaker size, trip setting, and breaker type in conformance with Contract Documents. Complete typewritten panelboard circuit directory prior to project acceptance. Only wires made of the conductor material for which the panelboard terminals have been marked shall be used. Adjustable Trip Settings. Install lugs and ground connectors in conformance with UL 486A and UL 486B. Verify factory settings for adjustable trip breakers. Field adjust in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, if necessary. 100.3.12 Overcurrent Protective Devices 100.3.12.1 General Contractor shall provide overcurrent protective device as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with these specifications. Section Includes. a. Molded case circuit breakers. b. Heavy duty safety switches. c. Combination molded case circuit breakers and current–limiting fuses. Section Does Not Include. a. Main service switches. 100.3.12.2 References National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Provide and install fuses and circuit breakers conforming to NEMA, including: • NEMA AB–1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches. • NEMA AB–2 Field Inspection and Performance Verification of Molded Case Circuit. Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications, Procedures for. • NEMA AB–3 Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application. New Electrical Building Page 216 of 497 • NEMA FU–1 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" requirements as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent devices. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Provide overcurrent protective devices that are UL–listed and labeled. Provide fuses and circuit breakers conforming to UL including: • UL 512 Fuseholders • UL 198B Class H Fuses • UL 198C High–Interrupting–Capacity Fuses, Current–Limiting Types • UL 198D Class K Fuses • UL 198E Class R Fuses • UL 198G Fuses for Supplementary Overcurrent Protection • UL 198H Class T Fuses • UL 489 Molded–Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit–Breaker Enclosures. 100.3.12.3 Products Enclosures shall be NEMA 1, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. Enclosures shall have an externally operable handle with interlock to prevent opening of front cover with the switch in the "ON" position. Handle shall be lockable in the "OFF" position. Molded Case Circuit Breakers. a. Circuit breakers shall conform to NEMA AB 1. b. Circuit breakers shall have trip rating and number of poles as indicated on the Contract Documents. c. Circuit breakers shall have an interrupting current rating equal to or greater than the available fault current at their location in the electrical system, unless otherwise specified. Provide a minimum rating of 10,000 amperes symmetrical, unless a greater rating is shown on the Contract Documents. d. All circuit breakers shall be of the same manufacturer. e. Provide circuit breakers with a quick–made and quick–break toggle mechanism with inverse–time trip characteristics. f. Automatic release is to be secured by a bimetallic thermal element releasing the mechanism latch. g. A magnetic armature shall be provided to trip the breaker instantaneously for short–circuit currents above the overload range. h. Automatic tripping shall be indicated by a handle position between the manual OFF and ON position. i. Provide adjustable magnetic trip devices adjusted at the factory to "low" trip setting ampere values. Heavy Duty Safety Switches. a. Provide quick make, quick break load interrupter enclosed knife switch assemblies. b. Provide fuses that conform to UL 198B, 198C, 198D, 198E 198F, 198G, 198H, 198L, and 198M. Provide fuses of the sizes noted on the Contract Documents. c. Current–limiting fuses shall be installed in lieu of regular fuses where the fault current exceeds d. 10,000 RMS amperes. e. Fuses rated over 600 amperes shall be NEMA Class L. f. Fuses for use with switches rated 600 amperes and less shall be UL Class RK–5 or RK–1 as noted, unless otherwise specified. Class RK–5 and RK–1 fuses shall be dual element type with minimum time–delay of ten seconds at 500 percent of rating. New Electrical Building Page 217 of 497 g. Provide one complete set of fuses installed for all switches requiring fuses. Provide one spare fuse of each size and type installed. Combination Molded Case Circuit Breaker and Current–Limiting Fuses. a. Where the short circuit current exceeds the interrupting ratings of molded case circuit breakers, provide high–interrupting capacity integral current limiters on the load side of the circuit breakers. b. The circuit breaker and limiter combination shall be a coordinated unit meeting the applicable requirements of UL 489, so designed that the normal thermal magnetic overcurrent devices provide coordinated protection against overloads and short circuits up to a predetermined value. The current limiters shall assume the fault–clearing duty and extend short circuit protection up to and including 100,000 RMS amperes. c. High–interrupting–capacity circuit breakers adequate for the short circuit current available at the particular location in the system may be provided in lieu of the combination current limiting fuse units. 100.3.12.4. Installation Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NFPA 70 and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. Fasten overcurrent devices without causing mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being exerted by clamps, supports, or cabling. Set field–adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as indicated, subsequent to installation of units. Install fuses and package the spare fuses in an orderly fashion. Inspect circuit–breaker operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and short– circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements. 100.3.13 Method of Measurement and Basis of Payment Work specified herein shall be measured for payment as part of other Pay Items described in other Specifications. The cost of Work required in this Specification shall be included in the prices bid for Pay Items included in the Schedule of Prices. END OF SPECIFICATION L100 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 218 of 497 ITEM L-108 UNDERGROUND POWER CABLE FOR AIRPORTS DESCRIPTION 108-1.1 This item shall consist of furnishing and installing power cables that are direct buried and furnishing and/or installing power cables within conduit or duct banks per these Specifications at the locations shown on the Plans. It includes excavation and backfill of trench for direct-buried cables only. Also included are the installation of counterpoise wires, ground wires, ground rods and connections, cable splicing, cable marking, cable testing, and all incidentals necessary to place the cable in operating condition as a completed unit to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This item shall not include the installation of duct banks or conduit, trenching and backfilling for duct banks or conduit, or furnishing or installation of cable for FAA owned/operated facilities. Requirements and payment for trenching and backfilling for the installation of underground conduit and duct banks is in Item L-110, Airport Underground Electrical Duct Banks and Conduits. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 108-2.1 General. a. Airport lighting equipment and materials covered by advisory circulars (AC) shall be approved under the Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program per AC 150/5345-53, current version. b. All other equipment and materials covered by other referenced specifications shall be subject to acceptance through manufacturer’s certification of compliance with the applicable specification, when requested by the Engineer. c. Manufacturer’s certifications shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide materials per these Specifications. Materials supplied and/or installed that do not comply with these Specifications shall be removed (when directed by the Engineer) and replaced with materials that comply with these Specifications at the Contractor’s cost. d. All materials and equipment used to construct this item shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering the equipment. Submittals consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be provided. Submittal data shall be presented in a clear, precise and thorough manner. Original catalog sheets are preferred. Photocopies are acceptable provided they are as good a quality as the original. Clearly and boldly mark each copy to identify products or models applicable to this project. Indicate all optional equipment and delete any non-pertinent data. Submittals for components of electrical equipment and systems shall identify the equipment to which they apply on each submittal sheet. Markings shall be made bold and clear with arrows or circles (highlighting is not acceptable). The Contractor is solely responsible for delays in the project that may accrue directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of submittals. e. The data submitted shall be sufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, to determine compliance with the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor’s submittals shall be neatly bound in a properly sized 3-ring binder, tabbed by specification section. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all equipment, materials, or procedures that do not meet the system design and the standards and codes, specified in this document. f. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this section shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for at least twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. The defective materials and/or equipment shall be repaired or replaced, at the Owner’s discretion, with no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible to maintain a minimum insulation resistance per AC 150/5340-26C, Maintenance Airport Visual aid Facilities, Table 5-1 and paragraph 5.1.3.1, with isolation transformers connected in new circuits and new segments of existing circuits through the end of the Contract warranty period. New Electrical Building Page 219 of 497 108-2.2 Cable. Underground cable for airfield lighting facilities (runway and taxiway lights and signs) shall conform to the requirements of AC 150/5345-7, Specification for L-824 Underground Electrical Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits latest edition. Conductors for use on 6.6 ampere primary airfield lighting series circuits shall be single conductor, seven strand, #8 American wire gauge AWG), L-824 Type C, 5,000 volts, nonshielded, with cross-linked polyethylene insulation. Conductors for use on 20 ampere primary airfield lighting series circuits shall be single conductor, seven strand, #6 AWG, L-824 Type C, 5,000 volts, nonshielded, with cross-linked polyethylene insulation. L-824 conductors for use on the L-830 secondary of airfield lighting series circuits shall be sized in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. All other conductors shall comply with FAA and National Electric Code (NEC) requirements. Conductor sizes noted above shall not apply to leads furnished by manufacturers on airfield lighting transformers and fixtures. Wire for electrical circuits up to 600 volts shall comply with Specification L-824 and/or Federal Specification J-C-30 and shall be type THWN-2, 75°C. Conductors for parallel (voltage) circuits shall be sized and installed in accordance with NFPA-70, National Electrical Code. Unless noted otherwise, all 600-volt and less non-airfield lighting conductor sizes are based on a 75°C, THWN-2, 600-volt insulation, copper conductors, not more than three single insulated conductors, in raceway, in free air. The conduit/duct sizes are based on the use of THWN-2, 600 volt insulated conductors. The Contractor shall make the necessary increase in conduit/duct sizes for other types of wire insulation. In no case shall the conduit/duct size be reduced. The minimum power circuit wire size shall be #12 AWG. Conductor sizes may have been adjusted due to voltage drop or other engineering considerations. Equipment provided by the Contractor shall be capable of accepting the quantity and sizes of conductors shown in the Contract Documents. All conductors, pigtails, cable step-down adapters, cable step-up adapters, terminal blocks and splicing materials necessary to complete the cable termination/splice shall be considered incidental to the respective pay items provided. Cable type, size, number of conductors, strand and service voltage shall be as specified in the Contract Document. 108-2.3 Bare copper wire (counterpoise, bare copper wire ground and ground rods). Wire for counterpoise or ground installations for airfield lighting systems shall be No. 6 AWG bare solid copper wire for counterpoise and/or No. 6 AWG insulated stranded for ground wire per ASTM B3 and ASTM B8, and shall be bare copper wire per ASTM B33. See AC 150/5340-30 for additional details about counterpoise and ground wire types and installation. For voltage powered circuits, the equipment ground conductor shall be minimum No. 6 AWG, 600V rated, Type XHHW insulated, green color, stranded copper equipment ground conductor. Ground rods shall copper-clad steel. The ground rods shall be of the length and diameter specified on the Plans, but in no case be less than 10 feet (2.54 m) long and 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter. 108-2.4 Cable connections. In-line connections or splices of underground primary cables shall be of the type called for on the Plans and shall be one of the types listed below. No separate payment will be made for cable connections. a. The cast splice. Not used this project. b. The field-attached plug-in splice. Figure 3 of AC 150/5345-26, Specification for L-823 Plug and Receptacle, Cable Connectors, employing connector kits, is acceptable for field attachment to single conductor cable. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to determine the outside diameter of the cable to be spliced and to furnish appropriately sized connector kits and/or adapters and tape New Electrical Building Page 220 of 497 (2 layers of linerless rubber splicing tape and 2 layers electrical tape) or heat shrink tubing with integral sealant. c. The factory-molded plug-in splice. Specification for L-823 Connectors, Factory-Molded to Individual Conductors, is acceptable. d. The taped or heat-shrink splice. Not used this project. In all the above cases, connections of cable conductors shall be made using crimp connectors using a crimping tool designed to make a complete crimp before the tool can be removed. All L-823/L-824 splices and terminations shall be made per the manufacturer’s recommendations and listings. All connections of counterpoise, grounding conductors and ground rods shall be made by the exothermic process or approved equivalent, except that a light base ground clamp connector shall be used for attachment to the light base. See AC 150/5340-30 for additional information about methods of attaching a ground to a galvanized light base. All exothermic connections shall be made per the manufacturer’s recommendations and listings. 108-2.5 Splicer qualifications. Every airfield lighting cable splicer shall be qualified in making airport cable splices and terminations on cables rated at or above 5,000 volts AC. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer proof of the qualifications of each proposed cable splicer for the airport cable type and voltage level to be worked on. Cable splicing/terminating personnel shall have a minimum of three (3) years continuous experience in terminating/splicing medium voltage cable. 108-2.6 Concrete. Concrete for cable markers shall be per Specification Item P-610, Structural Portland Cement Concrete. 108-2.7 Flowable backfill. Flowable material used to backfill trenches for power cable trenches shall conform to the requirements of Item P-153, Controlled Low Strength Material. 108-2.8 Cable identification tags. Cable identification tags shall be made from a non-corrosive material with the circuit identification stamped or etched onto the tag. The tags shall be of the type as detailed on the Plans. 108-2.9 Tape. Electrical tapes shall be ScotchTM Electrical Tapes –ScotchTM 88 (1-1/2 inch (38 mm) wide) and ScotchTM 130C® linerless rubber splicing tape (2-inch (50 mm) wide), as manufactured by the Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company (3MTM), or an approved equivalent. 108-2.10 Electrical coating. Electrical coating shall be Scotchkote™ as manufactured by 3MTM, or an approved equivalent. 108-2.11 Existing circuits. Whenever the scope of work requires connection to an existing circuit, the circuit’s insulation resistance shall be tested, in the presence of the Engineer. The test shall be performed per this item and prior to any activity that will affect the respective circuit. The Contractor shall record the results on forms acceptable to the Engineer. When the work affecting the circuit is complete, the circuit’s insulation resistance shall be checked again, in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall record the results on forms acceptable to the Engineer. The second reading shall be equal to or greater than the first reading or the Contractor shall make the necessary repairs to the circuit to bring the second reading above the first reading. All repair costs including a complete replacement of the L-823 connectors, L-830 transformers and L-824 cable, if necessary, shall be borne by the Contractor. All test results shall be submitted in the Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual. New Electrical Building Page 221 of 497 108-2.12 Detectable warning tape. Plastic, detectable, American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) Red (electrical power lines, cables, conduit and lighting cable) with continuous legend magnetic tape shall be polyethylene film with a metalized foil core and shall be 3-6 inches (75-150 mm) wide. Detectable tape is incidental to the respective bid item. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 108-3.1 General. The Contractor shall install the specified cable at the approximate locations indicated on the Plans. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all cable required to cross under pavements expected to carry aircraft loads shall be installed in concrete encased duct banks. Wherever possible, cable shall be run without splices, from connection to connection. Cable connections between lights will be permitted only at the light locations for connecting the underground cable to the primary leads of the individual isolation transformers. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing cable in continuous lengths for home runs or other long cable runs without connections unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Engineer or shown on the Plans. In addition to connectors being installed at individual isolation transformers, L-823 cable connectors for maintenance and test points shall be installed at locations shown on the Plans. Cable circuit identification markers shall be installed on both sides of the L-823 connectors installed or at least once in each access point where L-823 connectors are not installed. Provide not less than 3 feet (1 m) of cable slack on each side of all connections, isolation transformers, light units, and at points where cable is connected to field equipment. Where provisions must be made for testing or for future above grade connections, provide enough slack to allow the cable to be extended at least one foot (30 cm) vertically above the top of the access structure. This requirement also applies where primary cable passes through empty light bases, junction boxes, and access structures to allow for future connections, or as designated by the Engineer. Primary airfield lighting cables installed shall have cable circuit identification markers attached on both sides of each L-823 connector and on each airport lighting cable entering or leaving cable access points, such as manholes, hand holes, pull boxes, junction boxes, etc. Markers shall be of sufficient length for imprinting the cable circuit identification legend on one line, using letters not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) in size. The cable circuit identification shall match the circuits noted on the construction Plans. Existing cable conduit not being used or marked for future use shall be removed to the power source. Existing direct buried cable shall be disconnected and the last 2 feet on both ends shall be removed and the rest abandoned. 108-3.2 Installation in duct banks or conduits. This item includes the installation of the cable in duct banks or conduit per the following paragraphs. The maximum number and voltage ratings of cables installed in each single duct or conduit, and the current-carrying capacity of each cable shall be per the latest version of the National Electric Code, or the code of the local agency or authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall make no connections or splices of any kind in cables installed in conduits or duct banks. Unless otherwise designated in the Plans, where ducts are in tiers, use the lowest ducts to receive the cable first, with spare ducts left in the upper levels. Check duct routes prior to construction to obtain assurance that the shortest routes are selected, and that any potential interference is avoided. New Electrical Building Page 222 of 497 Duct banks or conduits shall be installed as a separate item per Item L-110, Airport Underground Electrical Duct Banks and Conduit. The Contractor shall run a mandrel through duct banks or conduit prior to installation of cable to ensure that the duct bank or conduit is open, continuous and clear of debris. The mandrel size shall be compatible with the conduit size. The Contractor shall swab out all conduits/ducts and clean light bases, manholes, etc., interiors immediately prior to pulling cable. Once cleaned and swabbed, the light bases and all accessible points of entry to the duct/conduit system shall be kept closed except when installing cables. Cleaning of ducts, light bases, manholes, etc., is incidental to the pay item of the item being cleaned. All raceway systems left open, after initial cleaning, for any reason shall be re- cleaned at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall verify existing ducts proposed for use in this project as clear and open. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any blockage in the existing ducts. The cable shall be installed in a manner that prevents harmful stretching of the conductor, damage to the insulation, or damage to the outer protective covering. The ends of all cables shall be sealed with moisture-seal tape providing moisture-tight mechanical protection with minimum bulk, or alternately, heat shrinkable tubing before pulling into the conduit and it shall be left sealed until connections are made. Where more than one cable is to be installed in a conduit, all cable shall be pulled in the conduit at the same time. The pulling of a cable through duct banks or conduits may be accomplished by hand winch or power winch with the use of cable grips or pulling eyes. Maximum pulling tensions shall not exceed the cable manufacturer’s recommendations. A non-hardening cable-pulling lubricant recommended for the type of cable being installed shall be used where required. The Contractor shall submit the recommended pulling tension values to the Engineer prior to any cable installation. If required by the Engineer, pulling tension values for cable pulls shall be monitored by a dynamometer in the presence of the Engineer. Cable pull tensions shall be recorded by the Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer. Cables exceeding the maximum allowable pulling tension values shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense. The manufacturer’s minimum bend radius or NEC requirements (whichever is more restrictive) shall apply. Cable installation, handling and storage shall be per manufacturer’s recommendations. During cold weather, particular attention shall be paid to the manufacturer’s minimum installation temperature. Cable shall not be installed when the temperature is at or below the manufacturer’s minimum installation temperature. At the Contractor’s option, the Contractor may submit a plan, for review by the Engineer, for heated storage of the cable and maintenance of an acceptable cable temperature during installation when temperatures are below the manufacturer’s minimum cable installation temperature. Cable shall not be dragged across base can or manhole edges, pavement or earth. When cable must be coiled, lay cable out on a canvas tarp or use other appropriate means to prevent abrasion to the cable jacket. 108-3.3 Installation of direct-buried cable in trenches. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall not use a cable plow for installing the cable. Cable shall be unreeled uniformly in place alongside or in the trench and shall be carefully placed along the bottom of the trench. The cable shall not be unreeled and pulled into the trench from one end. Slack cable sufficient to provide strain relief shall be placed in the trench in a series of S curves. Sharp bends or kinks in the cable shall not be permitted. Where cables must cross over each other, a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) vertical displacement shall be provided with the topmost cable depth at or below the minimum required depth below finished grade. a. Trenching. Where turf is well established, and the sod can be removed, it shall be carefully stripped and properly stored. Trenches for cables may be excavated manually or with mechanical trenching equipment. Walls of trenches shall be essentially vertical so that a minimum of surface is disturbed. Graders shall not be used to excavate the trench with their blades. The bottom surface New Electrical Building Page 223 of 497 of trenches shall be essentially smooth and free from coarse aggregate. Unless otherwise specified, cable trenches shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 18 inches (0.5 m) below finished grade per NEC Table 300.5, except as follows: (1) When off the airport or crossing under a roadway or driveway, the minimum depth shall be 36 inches (91 cm) unless otherwise specified. (2) Minimum cable depth when crossing under a railroad track, shall be 42 inches (1 m) unless otherwise specified. Dewatering necessary for cable installation, erosion and turbidity control, per Federal, state, and local requirements is incidental to its respective pay items as part of Item L-108. The cost of all excavation regardless of type of material encountered, shall be included in the unit price bid for the L-108 Item. The Contractor shall excavate all cable trenches to a width not less than 6 inches (150 mm). Unless otherwise specified on the Plans, all cables in the same location and running in the same general direction shall be installed in the same trench. When rock is encountered, the rock shall be removed to a depth of at least 3 inches (75 mm) below the required cable depth and it shall be replaced with bedding material of earth or sand containing no mineral aggregate particles that would be retained on a 1/4 inch (6 mm) sieve. Flowable backfill material may alternatively be used. The Contractor shall ascertain the type of soil or rock to be excavated before bidding. All such rock removal shall be performed and paid for under Item P-152. Duct bank or conduit markers temporarily removed for trench excavations shall be replaced as required. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to locate existing utilities within the work area prior to excavation. Where existing active cables cross proposed installations, the Contractor shall ensure that these cables are adequately protected. Where crossings are unavoidable, no splices will be allowed in the existing cables, except as specified on the Plans. Installation of new cable where such crossings must occur shall proceed as follows: (1) Existing cables shall be located manually. Unearthed cables shall be inspected to assure absolutely no damage has occurred. (2) Trenching, etc., in cable areas shall then proceed, with approval of the Engineer, with care taken to minimize possible damage or disruption of existing cable, including careful backfilling in area of cable. In the event that any previously identified cable is damaged during the course of construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for the complete repair or replacement. b. Backfilling. After the cable has been installed, the trench shall be backfilled. The first layer of backfill in the trench shall be 3 inches (75 mm) deep, loose measurement, and shall be either earth or sand containing no mineral aggregate particles that would be retained on a ¼-inch (6 mm) sieve. This layer shall not be compacted. The second layer shall be 5 inches (125 mm) deep, loose measurement, and shall contain no particles that would be retained on a one inch (25 mm) sieve. The remaining third and subsequent layers of backfill shall not exceed 8 inches (20 cm) of loose measurement and be excavated or imported material and shall not contain stone or aggregate larger than 4 inches (100 mm) maximum diameter. The second and subsequent layers shall be thoroughly tamped and compacted to at least the density of the adjacent undisturbed soil, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If necessary to obtain the desired compaction, the backfill material shall be moistened or aerated as required. New Electrical Building Page 224 of 497 If the cable is to be installed in locations or areas where other compaction requirements are specified (under pavements, embankments, etc.) the compaction requirements per Item P-152 for that area shall be followed. Trenches shall not contain pools of water during backfilling operations. The trench shall be completely backfilled and tamped level with the adjacent surface, except that when turf is to be established over the trench, the backfilling shall be stopped at an appropriate depth consistent with the type of turfing operation to be accommodated. A proper allowance for settlement shall also be provided. Any excess excavated material shall be removed and disposed of per the Plans and Specifications. Underground electrical warning (caution) tape shall be installed in the trench above all direct-buried cable. Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed warning tape for acceptance by the Engineer. If not shown on the Plans, the warning tape shall be located 6 inches (150 mm) above the direct-buried cable or the counterpoise wire if present. A 4-6 inch (100 - 150 mm) wide polyethylene film detectable tape, with a metalized foil core, shall be installed above all direct buried cable or counterpoise. The tape shall be of the color and have a continuous legend as indicated on the Plans. The tape shall be installed 8 inch (200 mm) minimum below finished grade. c. Restoration. Following restoration of all trenching near airport movement surfaces, the Contractor shall visually inspect the area for foreign object debris (FOD) and remove any that is found. Where soil and sod has been removed, it shall be replaced as soon as possible after the backfilling is completed. All areas disturbed by work shall be restored to its original condition. The restoration shall include the topsoiling, fertilizing, seeding, and mulching to return the area to original condition. The Contractor shall be held responsible for maintaining all disturbed surfaces and replacements until final acceptance. When trenching is through paved areas, restoration shall be equal to existing conditions and compaction shall meet the requirements of Item P-152. Restoration shall be considered incidental to the pay item of which it is a component part. 108-3.4 Cable markers for direct-buried cable. The location of direct buried circuits shall be marked by a concrete slab marker, 2 feet (60 cm) square and 4-6 inch (10 - 15 cm) thick, extending approximately one inch (25 mm) above the surface. Each cable run from a line of lights and signs to the equipment vault shall be marked at approximately every 200 feet (61 m) along the cable run, with an additional marker at each change of direction of cable run. All other direct-buried cable shall be marked in the same manner. Cable markers shall be installed directly above the cable. The Contractor shall impress the word “CABLE” and directional arrows on each cable marking slab. The letters shall be approximately 4 inches (100 mm) high and 3 inches (75 mm) wide, with width of stroke 1/2 inch (12 mm) and 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep. At the location of each underground cable connection, except at lighting units, or isolation transformers, or power a concrete marker slab must mark adapters placed above the connection. The Contractor shall impress the word “SPLICE” on each slab. The Contractor also shall impress additional circuit identification symbols on each slab as directed by the Engineer. All cable markers and splice markers shall be painted international orange. Paint shall be specifically manufactured for uncured exterior concrete. After placement, all cable or splice markers shall be given one coat of high-visibility aviation orange paint as approved by the Engineer. Furnishing and installation of cable markers is incidental to the respective cable pay item. 108-3.5 Splicing. Connections of the type shown on the Plans shall be made by experienced personnel regularly engaged in this type of work and shall be made as follows: a. Cast splices. Not used this project. b. Field-attached plug-in splices. These shall be assembled per the manufacturer’s instructions. These splices shall be made by plugging directly into mating connectors. In all cases the joint where New Electrical Building Page 225 of 497 the connectors come together shall be wrapped with at least one layer of rubber or synthetic rubber tape and one layer of plastic tape, one-half lapped, extending at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) on each side of the joint. c. Factory-molded plug-in splices. These shall be made by plugging directly into mating connectors. In all cases, the joint where the connectors come together shall be wrapped with at least one layer of rubber or synthetic rubber tape and one layer of plastic tape, one-half lapped, extending at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) on each side of the joint. d. Taped or heat-shrink splices. Not used this project. When heat shrinkable tubing is used per the details it shall be installed following manufacturer’s instructions. Direct flame heating shall not be permitted unless recommended by the manufacturer. Cable surfaces within the limits of the heat-shrink application shall be clean and free of contaminates prior to application. Surfaces of equipment or conductors being terminated or connected shall be prepared in accordance with industry standard practice and manufacturer’s recommendations. All surfaces to be connected shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all dirt, grease, oxides, nonconductive films, or other foreign material. Paints and other nonconductive coatings shall be removed to expose base metal. Clean all surfaces at least 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) beyond all sides of the larger bonded area on all mating surfaces. Use a joint compound suitable for the materials used in the connection. Repair painted/coated surface to original condition after completing the connection. 108-3.6 Bare counterpoise wire installation for lightning protection and grounding. If shown on the Plans or included in the job Specifications, bare solid #6 AWG copper counterpoise wire shall be installed for lightning protection of the underground cables. The Engineer shall select one of two methods of lightning protection for the airfield lighting circuit based on the frequency of local lightning: a. Equipotential. – may be used by the Engineer for areas that have high rates of lightning strikes. This is where the counterpoise is bonded to the light base (edge lights included) and counterpoise size is determined by the Engineer. b. Isolation – used in areas where lightning strikes are not common. The counterpoise is not bonded to edge light fixtures, in-pavement fixtures are boned to the counterpoise. Counterpoise size is selected by the Engineer. Counterpoise wire shall be installed in the same trench for the entire length of buried cable, conduits and duct banks that are installed to contain airfield cables. For edge light fixtures installed in turf (stabilized soils) and for raceways or cables adjacent to the full strength pavement edge, the counterpoise conductor shall be installed halfway between the pavement edge and the light base, mounting stake, raceway, or cable. The counterpoise conductor shall be installed 8 inches (203 mm) minimum below grade. Each light base or mounting stake shall be provided with a grounding electrode. When a metallic light base is used, the grounding electrode shall be bonded to the metallic light base or mounting stake with a No. 6 AWG bare, annealed or soft drawn, solid copper conductor. Nonmetallic light bases are not allowed. For raceways installed under pavement; for raceways and cables not installed adjacent to the full strength pavement edge; for fixtures installed in full strength pavement and shoulder pavement and for optional New Electrical Building Page 226 of 497 method of edge lights installed in turf (stabilized soils); and for raceways or cables adjacent to the full strength pavement edge, the counterpoise conductor shall be centered over the raceway or cable to be protected as described below. The counterpoise conductor shall be installed no less than 8 inches (203 mm) above the raceway or cable to be protected, except as permitted below. The minimum counterpoise conductor height above the raceway or cable to be protected shall be permitted to be adjusted subject to coordination with the airfield lighting and pavement designs. Where raceway is installed by the directional bore, jack and bore, or other drilling method, the counterpoise conductor shall be permitted to be installed concurrently with the directional bore, jack and bore, or other drilling method raceway, external to the raceway or sleeve. The counterpoise conductor shall be installed no more than 12 inches (305 mm) above the raceway or cable to be protected. The counterpoise conductor height above the protected raceway(s) or cable(s) shall be calculated to ensure that the raceway or cable is within a 45-degree area of protection. The counterpoise conductor shall be bonded to each metallic light base, mounting stake, and metallic airfield lighting component. All metallic airfield lighting components in the field circuit on the output side of the constant current regulator (CCR) or other power source shall be bonded to the airfield lighting counterpoise system. The counterpoise wire shall also be exothermically welded to ground rods installed as shown on the Plans but not more than 500 feet (150 m) apart around the entire circuit. The counterpoise system shall be continuous and terminate at the transformer vault or at the power source. It shall be securely attached to the vault or equipment external ground ring or other made electrode-grounding system. The connections shall be made as shown on the Plans and in the Specifications. If shown on the Plans or in the Specifications, a separate equipment (safety) ground system shall be provided in addition to the counterpoise wire using one of the following methods: a. A ground rod installed at and securely attached to each light fixture base, mounting stake, and to all metal surfaces at junction/access structures via #6 AWG wire. b. For parallel voltage systems only, install a #6 AWG green insulated equipment ground conductor internal to the conduit system and securely attached it to each light fixture base internal grounding lug and to all metal surfaces at junction/access structures. Dedicated ground rods shall be installed and exothermically welded to the counterpoise wires at each end of a duct bank crossing under pavement. Where an existing airfield lighting system is being extended or modified, the new counterpoise conductors shall be interconnected to existing counterpoise conductors at each intersection of the new and existing airfield lighting counterpoise systems. 108-3.7 Counterpoise installation above multiple conduits and duct banks. Counterpoise wires shall be installed above multiple conduits/duct banks for airfield lighting cables, with the intent being to provide a complete area of protection over the airfield lighting cables. When multiple conduits and/or duct banks for airfield cable are installed in the same trench, the number and location of counterpoise wires above the New Electrical Building Page 227 of 497 conduits shall be adequate to provide a complete cone of protection measured 22-1/2 degrees each side of vertical. Where duct banks pass under pavement to be constructed in the project, the counterpoise shall be placed above the duct bank. Reference details on the construction Plans. 108-3.8 Counterpoise installation at existing duct banks. When airfield lighting cables are indicated on the Plans to be routed through existing duct banks, the new counterpoise wiring shall be terminated at ground rods at each end of the existing duct bank where the cables being protected enter and exit the duct bank. The new counterpoise conductor shall be bonded to the existing counterpoise system. 108-3.9 Exothermic bonding. Bonding of counterpoise wire shall be by the exothermic welding process. Only personnel experienced in and regularly engaged in this type of work shall make these connections. Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the welding kits, materials and procedures to be used for welded connections prior to any installations in the field. The installations shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the following: a. All slag shall be removed from welds. b. Using an exothermic weld to bond the counterpoise to a lug on a galvanized light base is not recommended unless the base has been specially modified. Consult the manufacturer’s installation directions for proper methods of bonding copper wire to the light base. See also AC 150/5340-30 for galvanized light base exception. c. If called for in the Plans, all buried copper and weld material at weld connections shall be thoroughly coated with 6 mm of 3MTM ScotchkoteTM, or approved equivalent, or coated with coal tar Bitumastic® material to prevent surface exposure to corrosive soil or moisture. 108-3.10 Testing. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment and appliances for testing the airport electrical systems and underground cable circuits before and after installation. The Contractor shall perform all tests in the presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall demonstrate the electrical characteristics to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All costs for testing are incidental to the respective item being tested. For phased projects, the tests must be completed by phase. The Contractor must maintain the test results throughout the entire project as well as during the warranty period that meet the following: a. Earth resistance testing methods shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Earth resistance testing results shall be recorded on an approved form and testing shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer. All such testing shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor. b. Should the counterpoise or ground grid conductors be damaged or suspected of being damaged by construction activities the Contractor shall test the conductors for continuity with a low resistance ohmmeter. The conductors shall be isolated such that no parallel path exists and tested for continuity. The Engineer shall approve of the test method selected. All such testing shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor. After installation, the Contractor shall test and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer the following: c. That all affected lighting power and control circuits (existing and new) are continuous and free from short circuits. d. That all affected circuits (existing and new) are free from unspecified grounds. e. That the insulation resistance to ground of all new non-grounded high voltage series circuits or cable segments is not less than 500 megohms. New Electrical Building Page 228 of 497 f. That the insulation resistance to ground of all new non-grounded conductors of new multiple circuits or circuit segments is not less than 500 megohms. g. That all affected circuits (existing and new) are properly connected per applicable wiring diagrams. h. That all affected circuits (existing and new) are operable. Tests shall be conducted that include operating each control not less than 10 times and the continuous operation of each lighting and power circuit for not less than 1/2 hour. i. That the impedance to ground of each ground rod does not exceed 25 ohms prior to establishing connections to other ground electrodes. The fall-of-potential ground impedance test shall be used, as described by American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) Standard 81, to verify this requirement. As an alternate, clamp-on style ground impedance test meters may be used to satisfy the impedance testing requirement. Test equipment and its calibration sheets shall be submitted for review and approval by the Engineer prior to performing the testing. Two copies of tabulated results of all cable tests performed shall be supplied by the Contractor to the Engineer. Where connecting new cable to existing cable, ground resistance tests shall be performed on the new cable prior to connection to the existing circuit. There are no approved “repair” procedures for items that have failed testing other than complete replacement. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 108-4.1 Trenching shall be measured by the linear feet (meters) of trench, including the excavation, backfill, and restoration, completed, measured as excavated, and accepted as satisfactory. When specified, separate measurement shall be made for trenches of various specified widths. The cost of all excavation, backfill, dewatering and restoration regardless of the type of material encountered shall be included in the unit price bid for the work. 108-4.2 Cable or counterpoise wire installed in trench, duct bank or conduit shall be measured by the number of linear feet (meters) installed and grounding connectors, and trench marking tape ready for operation, and accepted as satisfactory. Separate measurement shall be made for each cable or counterpoise wire installed in trench, duct bank or conduit. The measurement for this item shall not include additional quantities required for slack. Cable and counterpoise slack is considered incidental to this item and is included in the Contractor’s unit price. No separate measurement or payment will be made for cable or counterpoise slack. 108-4.3 Ground rods shall be incidental to the bid item and are included in the Contractor’s unit price. 108-4.4 Cable in conduit removed shall be measured by the linear feet (meters) of cable removed from conduit. Direct buried cable shall have the first and last 2 feet removed, and the rest abandoned in place. Direct buried cable removal shall be incidental to the respective bid item. BASIS OF PAYMENT 108-5.1 Payment will be made at the Contract unit price for trenching, cable and bare counterpoise wire installed in trench (direct-buried), or cable and equipment ground installed in duct bank or conduit, in place by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation and installation of these materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and New Electrical Building Page 229 of 497 incidentals, including ground rods and ground connectors and trench marking tape, necessary to complete this item. Payment will be made under: Item L-108.1 No. 8 AWG, 5kV, L-824, Type C Cable, Installed in Duct Bank or Conduit (AIP Eligible) – per linear foot Item L-108.2 No. 8 AWG, 5 kV, L-824, Type C Cable, Installed in Duct Bank or Conduit (RW 8-26 & TW E – Local Funding) - per linear foot. Item L-108.3 No. 6 AWG, Solid, Bare Counterpoise Wire, Installed in Trench, or Above the Duct Bank or Conduit, Including Ground Rods and Ground Connectors - per linear foot. Item L-108.4 No. 8 AWG, 600V, THWN-2, Installed in Duct Bank or Conduit - per liner foot. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS AC 150/5340-26 Maintenance of Airport Visual Aid Facilities AC 150/5340-30 Design and Installation Details for Airport Visual Aids AC 150/5345-7 Specification for L-824 Underground Electrical Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits AC 150/5345-26 Specification for L-823 Plug and Receptacle, Cable Connectors AC 150/5345-53 Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program Commercial Item Description A-A-59544 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation) Commercial Item Description A-A-55809 Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure-Sensitive Adhesive, Plastic ASTM B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ASTM B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft ASTM B33 Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes ASTM D4388 Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically Insulating Rubber Tapes FED SPEC J-C-30 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation) MIL-I-24391 Insulation Tape, Electrical, Plastic, Pressure Sensitive New Electrical Building Page 230 of 497 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA-780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems MIL-S-23586F Performance Specification: Sealing Compound (with Accelerator), Silicone Rubber, Electrical ANSI/IEEE STD 81 IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System END OF ITEM L-108 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 231 of 497 ITEM L-109 AIRPORT TRANSFORMER VAULT AND VAULT EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 109-1.1 This item shall consist of constructing an airport transformer vault or a prefabricated metal housing per these specifications and per the design and dimensions shown in the plans. This work shall also include the installation of conduits in the floor and foundation, painting and lighting of the vault or metal housing, and the furnishing of all incidentals that are necessary to produce a completed unit. Included as a separate part under this item or as a separate item where an existing vault is to be used shall be the furnishing of all vault equipment, wiring, electrical buses, cable, conduit, potheads, and grounding systems. This work shall also include the painting of equipment and conduit; the marking and labeling of equipment and the labeling or tagging of wires; the testing of the installation; and the furnishing of all incidentals necessary to place it in operating condition as a completed unit to the satisfaction of the Engineer. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 109-2.1 General. a. Airport lighting equipment and materials covered by advisory circulars (AC) shall be certified and listed in AC 150/5345-53, Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program. b. All other equipment and materials covered by other referenced specifications shall be subject to acceptance through manufacturer’s certification of compliance with the applicable specification when requested by the Engineer. c. Manufacturer’s certifications shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide materials per these specifications. Materials supplied and/or installed that do not comply with these specifications shall be removed (when directed by the Engineer) and replaced with materials that comply with these specifications at the Contractor’s cost. d. All materials and equipment used to construct this item shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering the equipment. Submittals consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be provided. Submittal data shall be presented in a clear, precise and thorough manner. Original catalog sheets are preferred. Photocopies are acceptable provided they are as good a quality as the original. Clearly and boldly mark each copy to identify products or models applicable to this project. Indicate all optional equipment and delete any non-pertinent data. Submittals for components of electrical equipment and systems shall identify the equipment to which they apply on each submittal sheet. Markings shall be made bold and clear with arrows or circles (highlighting is not acceptable). The Contractor is solely responsible for delays in the project that may accrue directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of submittals. e. The data submitted shall be sufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, to determine compliance with the plans and specifications. The Contractor’s submittals shall be neatly bound in a properly sized 3-ring binder or PDF, tabbed by specification section. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all equipment, materials or procedures that do not meet the system design and the standards and codes, specified in this document. f. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this section shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of at least twelve (12) months from final acceptance by the Owner. The defective materials and/or equipment shall be repaired or replaced, at the Owner’s discretion, with no additional cost to the Owner. New Electrical Building Page 232 of 497 CONSTRUCTION OF VAULT AND PREFABRICATED METAL HOUSING 109-2.2 Concrete. The concrete for the vault shall be proportioned, placed, and cured per Item P-610, Structural Portland Cement Concrete, using 3/4 inch (19 mm) maximum size coarse aggregate. 109-2.3 Reinforcing steel. Reinforcing steel bars shall be intermediate or structural grade deformed-type bars and shall be per ASTM A615. 109-2.4 Brick. Brick shall be per ASTM C62, Grade SW. 109-2.5 Rigid steel conduit. Rigid steel conduit and fittings shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standards 6 and 514B. 109-2.6 Plastic Conduit and fittings. Plastic Conduit and fittings shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-1094 and UL-651 and UL-654 schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) suitable for use above or below ground. 109-2.7 Lighting. Vault or metal-housing light fixtures shall be of a vapor-proof type LED. 109-2.8 Outlets. Convenience outlets shall be heavy-duty duplex units designed for industrial service. 109-2.9 Switches. Vault or metal-housing light switches shall be industrial rated single-pole switches. 109-2.10 Paint. a. Priming paint for non-galvanized metal surfaces shall be a high solids alkyd primer per Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Specification – Paint 25, Primer, Raw Linseed Oil and Alkyd Primer, (Without Lead and Chromate Pigments). b. White paint for body and finish coats on metal and wood surfaces shall be ready-mixed paint conforming to the Master Painter’s Institute (MPI), Reference #9, Exterior Alkyd, Gloss. c. Priming paint for wood surfaces shall be mixed on the job by thinning the specified white paint by adding 1/2 pint (0.24 liter) of raw linseed oil to each gallon (liter). d. Paint for the floor, ceiling, and inside walls shall be per Porter Paint Company 69, 71, and 79 or equivalent. Walls and ceiling shall be light gray and the floor shall be medium gray. e. The roof coating shall be hot asphalt material per ASTM D2823. Asbestos-free roof coating per ASTM D4479 may be substituted if required by local codes. 109-2.11 Ground bus. Ground bus shall be 1/4  1 1/4 inch minimum copper bus bar with 1” spacers. 109-2.12 Square duct. Duct shall be square similar to that manufactured by the Square D Company (or equivalent), or the Trumbull Electric Manufacturing Company (or equivalent). The entire front of the duct on each section shall consist of hinged or removable cover for ready access to the interior. The cross-section of the duct shall be not less than 4  4 inch (100  100 mm) except where otherwise shown in the plans. 109-2.13 Ground rods. Ground rods shall be in accordance with L-108. 109-2.14 Potheads. Potheads shall be similar to Gear and Williams (G&W) Type N, Shape C (or equivalent), unless otherwise specified. Potheads shall be furnished with plain insulator bushings and conduit couplings. Potheads shall have a rating not less than the circuit voltage. New Electrical Building Page 233 of 497 109-2.15 Vault prefabricated metal housing. The prefabricated metal housing shall be a commercially available unit. 109-2.16 FAA-approved equipment. Certain items of airport lighting equipment installed in vaults are covered by individual ACs listed below: AC 150/5345-3 Specification for L-821, Panels for Remote Control of Airport Lighting AC 150/5345-5 Circuit Selector Switch AC 150/5345-7 Specification for L-824 Underground Electrical Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits AC 150/5345-10 Specification for Constant Current Regulators and Regulator Monitors AC 150/5345-13 Specification for L-841 Auxiliary Relay Cabinet Assembly for Pilot Control of Airport Lighting Circuits. AC 150/5345-49 Specification for L-854, Radio Control Equipment 109-2.17 Other electrical equipment. Distribution transformers, oil switches, cutouts, relays, terminal blocks, transfer relays, circuit breakers, and all other regularly used commercial items of electrical equipment not covered by FAA equipment specifications and ACs shall conform to the applicable rulings and standards of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) or the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). When specified, test reports from a testing laboratory indicating that the equipment meets the specifications shall be supplied. In all cases, equipment shall be new and a first- grade product. This equipment shall be supplied in the quantities required for the specific project and shall incorporate the electrical and mechanical characteristics specified in the proposal and plans. Equipment selected and installed by the Contractor shall maintain the interrupting current rating of the existing systems or specified rating whichever is greater. 109-2.18 Wire. Wire (in conduit) rated up to 5,000 volts shall be per AC 150/5345-7, Specification for L- 824 Underground Electrical Cables for Airport Lighting Circuits. For ratings up to 600 volts, moisture and heat resistant thermoplastic wire conforming to Commercial Item Description A-A-59544A Type THWN-2 shall be used. The wires shall be of the type, size, number of conductors, and voltage shown in the plans or in the proposal. a. Control circuits. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, wire shall be not less than No. 12 American wire gauge (AWG) and shall be insulated for 600 volts. If telephone control cable is specified, No. 19 AWG telephone cable per ANSI/Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) S-85-625-2007 specifications shall be used. b. Power circuits. (1) 600 volts maximum-Wire shall be No. 6 AWG or larger and insulated for at least 600 volts. (2) 3,000 volts maximum-Wire shall be No. 6 AWG or larger and insulated for at least 3,000 volts. (3) Over 3,000 volts-Wire shall be No. 6 AWG or larger and insulated for at least the circuit voltage. 109-2.19 Short circuit / coordination / device evaluation / arc flash analysis. The Contractor shall, based upon the equipment provided, include as a part of the submittal process the electrical system “Short Circuit / Coordination / Device evaluation / Arc Flash Analysis”. The analysis shall be performed by the equipment manufacturer and submitted in a written report. The analysis shall be signed and sealed by a registered professional Engineer from the state in which the project is located. The analysis shall comply with NFPA-70E and IEEE 1584. New Electrical Building Page 234 of 497 The analysis will include: one-line diagrams, short circuit analysis, coordination analysis, equipment evaluation, arc flash analysis and arc flash labels containing at a minimum, equipment name, voltage/current rating, available incident energy and flash protection boundary. The selected firms field service Engineer shall perform data gathering for analysis completion and device settings, perform device setting as recommended by the analysis and will furnish and install the arc flash labels. The components worst case incident energy will be considered the available arc flash energy at that specific point in the system. Submit three written copies and one electronic copy of the report. CONSTRUCTION METHODS CONSTRUCTION OF VAULT AND PREFABRICATED METAL HOUSING 109-3.1 General. The Contractor shall construct the transformer vault or prefabricated metal housing at the location indicated in the plans. Vault construction shall be reinforced concrete, concrete masonry, or brick wall as specified. The metal housing shall be prefabricated equipment enclosure to be supplied in the size specified. The mounting pad or floor details, installation methods, and equipment placement are shown in the plans. The Contractor shall clear, grade, and seed the area around the vault or metal housing for a minimum distance of 10 feet (3 m) on all sides. The slope shall be not less than 1/2 inch per foot (12 mm per 0.3 m) away from the vault or metal housing in all directions. The vault shall provide adequate protection against weather elements, including rain, wind-driven dust, snow, ice and excessive heat. The vault shall have sufficient filtered ventilation, to assure that the interior room temperatures and conditions do not exceed the recommended limits of the electrical equipment to be installed in the vault. The Contractor is responsible for contacting the manufacturer of the equipment to be installed to obtain environmental limitations of the equipment to be installed. Refer to the electrical vault detail plan sheets for construction requirements. The prefabricated building shall include roof, walls and floor in accordance with the details and these specifications. 109-3.2 Foundation and walls. a. Reinforced concrete construction. The Contractor shall construct the foundation and walls per the details shown in the plans. Unless otherwise specified, internal ties shall be of the mechanical type so that when the forms are removed the ends of the ties shall be at least one inch (25 mm) beneath the concrete surface; the holes shall be plugged and finished to prevent discoloration. Reinforcing steel shall be placed, as shown in the drawings, and secured in position to prevent displacement during the concrete placement. The external surfaces of the concrete shall be thoroughly worked during the placing operation to force all coarse aggregate from the surface. Thoroughly work the mortar against the forms to produce a smooth finish free from air pockets and honeycomb. The surface film of all pointed surfaces shall be removed before setting occurs. As soon as the pointing has set sufficiently, the entire surface inside and outside of the vault shall be thoroughly wet with water and rubbed with a No. 16 carborundum stone, or equivalent quality abrasive, bringing the surface to a paste. All form marks and projections shall be removed. The surface produced shall be smooth and dense without pits or irregularities. The materials which have been ground into a paste during the rubbing process shall be spread or brushed uniformly over the entire surface (except the interior surfaces that are to be painted shall have all paste removed by washing before painting) and permitted to reset. Final exterior finish shall be obtained by rubbing with No. New Electrical Building Page 235 of 497 30 carborundum stone, or an equivalent quality abrasive. The surface shall be rubbed until the entire surface is smooth and uniform in color. b. Brick and concrete construction. When this type of construction is specified, the foundation shall be concrete conforming to the details shown in the plans. The outer edge of the foundation at the floor level shall be beveled 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) at 45 degrees. Brick walls shall be 8 inches (200 mm) thick, laid in running bond with every sixth course a header course. Brick shall be laid in cement mortar (one part masonry cement and 3 parts sand) with full mortar bed and shoved joints. All joints shall be completely filled with mortar, and facing brick shall be back-parged with mortar as work progresses. All joints shall be 3/8 inch (9 mm) thick, exterior joints tooled concave, and interior joints struck flush. Both interior and exterior brick surfaces shall be cleaned and nail holes, cracks and other defects filled with mortar. When specified, a nonfading mineral pigment mortar coloring shall be added to the mortar. Steel reinforcing bars, 3/8 inch (9 mm) in diameter and 12 inches (300 mm) long, shall be set vertically in the center of the brick wall on not more than 2 feet (60 cm) centers to project 2-1/2 inches (60 mm) into the concrete roof slab. Lintels for supporting the brickwork over doors, windows, and louvers shall consist of two 4  3  3/8 inch (100  75  9 mm) steel angles. Lintels shall be painted with one coat of corrosion-inhibiting primer before installation, and all exposed parts shall be painted similar to doors and window sash after installation. Window sills may be concrete poured in place or precast concrete as indicated in the plans. All exposed surfaces shall have a rubbed finish as specified under reinforced concrete construction. After completion, all interior and exterior faces of walls shall be scrubbed with a solution of muriatic acid and water in the proportions of not less than one part acid to 10 parts of water. All traces of efflorescence, loose mortar, and mortar stain shall be removed, and the walls washed down with clear water. c. Concrete masonry construction. When this type of construction is specified, the foundation shall be concrete conforming to the details shown in the plans. The concrete masonry units shall be standard sizes and shapes and shall conform to ASTM C90 and shall include the closures, jambs, and other shapes required by the construction as shown in the plans. Standard construction practice shall be followed for this type of work including mortar, joints, reinforcing steel for extensions into roof slab, etc. Plaster for interior walls, if specified, shall be Portland cement plaster. 109-3.3 Roof. The roof shall be reinforced concrete as shown in the plans. Reinforcing steel shall be placed as shown in the drawing and secured in position to prevent displacement during the pouring of the concrete. The concrete shall be poured monolithically and shall be free of honeycombs and voids. The surface shall have a steel-troweled finish and shall be sloped as shown in the drawing. The underside of the roof slab shall be finished in the same manner as specified for walls. One brush or mop coat of hot asphalt roof coating shall be applied to the top surface of the roof slab. The asphalt material shall be heated to within the range specified by the manufacturer and immediately applied to the roof. The finished coat shall be continuous over the roof surface and free from holidays and blisters. Smears and dribbles of asphalt on the roof edges and building walls shall be removed. 109-3.4 Floor. The floor shall be reinforced concrete as shown in the drawings. When present, all sod, roots, refuse, and other perishable material shall be removed from the area under the floor to a depth of 8 inches (200 mm), unless a greater depth is specified in the Contract. This area shall be backfilled with materials consisting of sand, cinders, gravel, or stone. Fill shall be placed in layers not to exceed 4 inches (100 mm) and shall be thoroughly compacted by tamping or rolling. A layer of building paper shall be placed over the fill prior to placing concrete. The floor surfaces shall have a steel-troweled finish. The floor shall be level unless a drain is specified, in which case the floor shall be pitched 1/4 inch (6 mm) per foot New Electrical Building Page 236 of 497 downward toward the drain. A 1/4-inch (6-mm) asphalt felt expansion joint shall be placed between floor and foundation walls. The floor shall be poured monolithically and shall be free of honeycombs and voids. 109-3.5 Floor drain. If shown in the plans, a floor drain and dry well shall be installed in the center of the floor of the equipment room. The dry well shall be excavated 4 × 4 feet (1.2 × 1.2 m) square and to a depth of 4 feet (1.2 m) below the finished floor elevation and shall be backfilled to the elevation of the underside of the floor with gravel - which shall all pass a 2 inches (50 mm) mesh sieve and shall all be retained on a 1/4 inch (6 mm) mesh sieve. The gravel backfill shall be placed in 6 inch (150 mm) maximum layers, and the entire surface of each layer shall be tamped either with a mechanical tamper or with a hand tamper weighing not less than 25 pounds (11 kg) and having a face area of not more than 36 square inches (232 square cm) nor less than 16 square inches (103 square cm). The drain inlet shall be set flush in the concrete floor. The drain shall have a clear opening of not less than 8 inch (200 mm) in diameter. 109-3.6 Conduits in floor and foundation. Conduits shall be installed in the floor and through the foundation walls per the details shown in the plans. All underground conduit shall be painted with a bituminous compound. Conduit shall be installed with a coupling or metal conduit adapter flush with the top of the floor. All incoming conduit shall be closed with a pipe plug to prevent the entrance of foreign material during construction. Space conduit entrances shall be left closed. 109-3.7 Doors. Doors shall be metal-clad fireproof Class A (three (3) hour rated) doors conforming to requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local electrical codes. Panic bar exit hardware shall be installed per NEC requirements. Refer to the new electrical vault detail plan sheets for construction requirements." 109-3.8 Painting. The floor, ceiling, and inside walls of concrete construction shall first be given a hardening treatment, after which the Contractor shall apply two coats of paint as specified below, except that interior face brick walls need not be painted. The hardening treatment shall consist of applying two coats of either a commercial floor hardener or a solution made by dissolving 2 pounds (0.9 kg) of magnesium fluorosilicate or zinc sulfate crystals in one gallon (liter) of water. Each coat shall be allowed to dry at least 48 hours before the next application. After the second treating coat has dried, the surfaces shall be brushed clean of all crystals and thoroughly washed with clear water. Paint for walls and ceiling shall be a light gray color approved by the Engineer. The floor paint shall be a medium gray color approved by the Engineer. Before painting, the surfaces shall be dry and clean. The first coat shall be thinned by adding 2/3-quart (0.63 liters) of spar varnish and 1/3-quart (0.31 liters) of turpentine to each gallon (liter) of paint. The second coat shall be applied without thinning. All doors, lintels, and windows shall be cleaned to remove any rust or foreign material and shall be given one body and one finish coat of white paint. Bare metal surfaces shall be given a prime coat of corrosion-inhibiting primer prior to the body and finish coats. 109-3.9 Lights and switches. The Contractor shall furnish and install a minimum of two duplex convenience outlets in the vault room. Where a control room is specified, at least two duplex outlets shall be installed. INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT IN VAULT OR PREFABRICATED METAL HOUSING 109-3.10 General. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and connect all equipment, equipment accessories, conduit, cables, wires, buses, grounds, and support necessary to ensure a complete and operable electrical distribution center for the airport lighting system as specified herein and shown in the plans. When specified, an emergency power supply and transfer switch shall be provided and installed. The equipment installation and mounting shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and local code agency having jurisdiction. New Electrical Building Page 237 of 497 109-3.11 Power supply equipment. Transformers, regulators, booster transformers, and other power supply equipment items shall be furnished and installed at the location shown in the plans or as directed by the Engineer. The power supply equipment shall be set on steel “H” sections, “I” beams, channels, or concrete blocks to provide a minimum space of 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) between the equipment and the floor. The equipment shall be placed so as not to obstruct the oil-sampling plugs of the oil-filled units; and name-plates shall, so far as possible, not be obscured. If specified in the plans and specifications, equipment for an alternate power source or an emergency power generator shall be furnished and installed. The alternate power supply installation shall include all equipment, accessories, an automatic changeover switch, and all necessary wiring and connections. The emergency power generator set shall be the size and type specified. 109-3.12 Switchgear and panels. Oil switches, fused cutouts, relays, transfer switches, panels, panel boards, and other similar items shall be furnished and installed at the location shown in the plans or as directed by the Engineer. Wall or ceiling mounted items shall be attached to the wall or ceiling with galvanized bolts of not less than 3/8 inch (9 mm) diameter engaging metal expansion shields or anchors in masonry or concrete vaults. 109-3.13 Duct and conduit. The Contractor shall furnish and install square-type exposed metallic ducts with hinged covers for the control circuits in the vault. These shall be mounted along the walls behind all floor-mounted equipment and immediately below all wall-mounted equipment. The hinged covers shall be placed to open from the front side with the hinges at the front bottom. Wall brackets for square ducts shall be installed at all joints 2 feet (60 cm) or more apart with intermediate brackets as specified. Conduit shall be used between square ducts and equipment or between different items of equipment when the equipment is designed for conduit connection. When the equipment is not designed for conduit connection, conductors shall enter the square-type control duct through insulating bushings in the duct or on the conduit risers. 109-3.14 Wiring and connections. The Contractor shall make all necessary electrical connections in the vault per the wiring diagrams furnished and as directed by the Engineer. In wiring to the terminal blocks, the Contractor shall leave sufficient extra length on each control lead to make future changes in connections at the terminal block. This shall be accomplished by running each control lead the longest way around the box to the proper terminal. Leads shall be neatly laced in place. 109-3.15 Marking and labeling. All equipment, control wires, terminal blocks, etc., shall be tagged, marked, or labeled as specified below: a. Wire identification. The Contractor shall furnish and install self-sticking wire labels or identifying tags on all control wires at the point where they connect to the control equipment or to the terminal blocks. Wire labels, if used, shall be of the self-sticking preprinted type and of the manufacturer’s recommended size for the wire involved. Identification -markings designated in the plans shall be followed. Tags, if used, shall be of fiber not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter and not less than 1/32 inch (1 mm) thick. Identification markings designated in the plans shall be stamped on tags by means of small tool dies. Each tag shall be securely tied to the proper wire by a nonmetallic cord. b. Labels. The Contractor shall stencil identifying labels on the cases of regulators, breakers, and distribution and control relay cases with white oil paint as designated by the Engineer. The letters and numerals shall be not less than one inch (25 mm) in height and shall be of proportionate width. New Electrical Building Page 238 of 497 The Contractor shall also mark the correct circuit designations per the wiring diagram on the terminal marking strips, which are a part of each terminal block. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 109-4.1 The quantity of electrical building to be paid for under this item shall consist of the number of electrical buildings constructed in place and accepted as a complete unit. 109-4.2 The quantity of electrical building equipment to be paid for under this item shall consist of all equipment installed, connected, and accepted as a complete unit ready for operation, including separate gen set and enclosure. BASIS OF PAYMENT 109-5.1 Payment will be made at the Contract unit price for each completed and accepted electrical building or prefabricated metal housing equipment installation. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, assembly, and installation of these materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the item. Payment will be made under: Item L-109.1 Construction of Airport Electrical Building, with foundation in Place - per unit Item L-109.2 Installation of Airport Electrical Building Equipment in Place - per unit MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS AC 150/5340-30 Design and Installation Details for Airport Visual Aids AC 150/5345-3 Specification for L-821, Panels for Remote Control of Airport Lighting AC 150/5345-5 Circuit Selector Switch AC 150/5345-7 Specification for L-824 Underground Electrical Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits AC 150/5345-10 Specification for Constant Current Regulators and Regulator Monitors AC 150/5345-13 Specification for L-841 Auxiliary Relay Cabinet Assembly for Pilot Control of Airport Lighting Circuits AC 150/5345-49 Specification L-854, Radio Control Equipment; AC 150/5345-53 Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program American National Standards Institute / Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ANSI/ICEA) S-85-625 Standard for Telecommunications Cable Aircore, Polyolefin Insulated, Copper Conductor Technical Requirements ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C62 Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale) ASTM C90 Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units ASTM D2823 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings, Asbestos Containing ASTM D4479 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings – Asbestos-Free New Electrical Building Page 239 of 497 Commercial Item Description (CID) A-A 59544 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation) FED SPEC W-C-1094 Conduit and Conduit Fittings Plastic, Rigid IEEE 1584 Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations MPI Reference #9 Alkyd, Exterior, Gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6) SSPC Paint 25 BCS Zinc Oxide, Alkyd, Linseed Oil, Primer for Underwriters Laboratories Standard 6 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC) NFPA-70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace NFPA-780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems END OF ITEM L-109 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 240 of 497 ITEM L-110 – AIRPORT UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DUCT BANKS AND CONDUITS DESCRIPTION 110-1.1 This item shall consist of underground electrical conduits and duct banks (single or multiple conduits encased in concrete or buried in sand) installed per this Specification at the locations and per the dimensions, designs, and details shown on the Plans. This item shall include furnishing and installing of all underground electrical duct banks and individual and multiple underground conduits. It shall also include all turfing trenching, backfilling, removal, and restoration of any paved or turfed areas; concrete encasement, mandrelling, pulling lines, duct markers, plugging of conduits, and the testing of the installation as a completed system ready for installation of cables per the Plans and Specifications. This item shall also include furnishing and installing conduits and all incidentals for providing positive drainage of the system. Verification of existing ducts is incidental to the pay items provided in this Specification. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 110-2.1 General. a. All equipment and materials covered by referenced specifications shall be subject to acceptance through manufacturer’s certification of compliance with the applicable specification when requested by the Engineer. b. Manufacturer’s certifications shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide materials per these Specifications and acceptable to the Engineer. Materials supplied and/or installed that do not comply with these Specifications shall be removed, when directed by the Engineer and replaced with materials that comply with these Specifications, at the Contractor’s cost. c. All materials and equipment used to construct this item shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering the equipment. Submittals consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be provided. Submittal data shall be presented in a clear, precise and thorough manner. Original catalog sheets are preferred. Photocopies are acceptable provided they are as good a quality as the original. Clearly and boldly mark each copy to identify products or models applicable to this project. Indicate all optional equipment and delete non-pertinent data. Submittals for components of electrical equipment and systems shall identify the equipment for which they apply on each submittal sheet. Markings shall be made bold and clear with arrows or circles (highlighting is not acceptable). The Contractor is solely responsible for delays in project that accrue directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of submittals. d. The data submitted shall be sufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, to determine compliance with the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor’s submittals shall be neatly bound in a properly sized 3-ring binder, tabbed by specification section. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all equipment, materials or procedures that do not meet the system design and the standards and codes specified in this document. e. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this section shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of at least twelve (12) months from final acceptance by the Owner. The defective materials and/or equipment shall be repaired or replaced, at the Owner’s discretion, with no additional cost to the Owner. 110-2.2 Steel conduit. Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit and fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized inside and out and conform to the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standards 6, 514B, and 1242. All RGS conduits or RGS elbows installed below grade, in concrete, permanently wet locations or other similar environments shall be painted with a 10 mil thick coat of asphaltum sealer or shall have a factory New Electrical Building Page 241 of 497 bonded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) cover. Any exposed galvanizing or steel shall be coated with 10 mil of asphaltum sealer. When using PVC coated RGS conduit, care shall be exercised not to damage the factory PVC coating. Damaged PVC coating shall be repaired per the manufacturer's written instructions. 110-2.3 Plastic conduit. Plastic conduit and fittings-shall conform to the following requirements: • UL 514B covers W-C-1094-Conduit fittings all types, classes 1 thru 3 and 6 thru 10.  • UL 514C covers W-C-1094- all types, Class 5 junction box and cover in plastic (PVC). • UL 651 covers W-C-1094-Rigid PVC Conduit, types I and II, Class 4. • UL 651A covers W-C-1094-Rigid PVC Conduit and high density polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit type III and Class 4. Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL-651 and Article 352 of the current National Electrical Code shall be one of the following, as shown on the Plans: a. Type I–Schedule 40 PVC suitable for underground use either direct-buried or encased in concrete. b. Type II–Schedule 40 PVC suitable for either above ground or underground use. c. Type III – Schedule 80 PVC suitable for either above ground or underground use either direct- buried or encased in concrete. d. Type III –HDPE pipe, minimum standard dimensional ratio (SDR) 11, suitable for placement with directional boring under pavement. The type of solvent cement shall be as recommended by the conduit/fitting manufacturer. 110-2.4 Split conduit. Split conduit shall be pre-manufactured for the intended purpose and shall be made of steel or plastic. 110-2.5 Conduit spacers. Conduit spacers shall be prefabricated interlocking units manufactured for the intended purpose. They shall be of double wall construction made of high grade, high density polyethylene complete with interlocking cap and base pads, They shall be designed to accept No. 4 reinforcing bars installed vertically. 110-2.6 Concrete. Concrete shall conform to Item P-610, Structural Portland Cement Concrete. 110-2.7 Flowable backfill. Flowable material used to back fill conduit and duct bank trenches shall conform to the requirements of Item P-153, Controlled Low Strength Material. Fill shall be designed to achieve a 28-day compressive strength of 200 psi (1.4 MPa) under pavement. 110-2.8 Detectable warning tape. Plastic, detectable, American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA) Red (electrical power lines, cables, conduit and lighting cable) with continuous legend magnetic tape shall be polyethylene film with a metallized foil core and shall be 3-6 inches (75-150 mm) wide. Detectable tape is incidental to the respective bid item. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 110-3.1 General. The Contractor shall install underground duct banks and conduits at the approximate locations indicated on the Plans. The Engineer shall indicate specific locations as the work progresses, if required to differ from the Plans. Duct banks and conduits shall be of the size, material, and type indicated on the Plans or Specifications. Where no size is indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, conduits shall be not less than 2 inches (50 mm) inside diameter or comply with the National Electrical Code based New Electrical Building Page 242 of 497 on cable to be installed, whichever is larger. All duct bank and conduit lines shall be laid so as to grade toward access points and duct or conduit ends for drainage. Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, grades shall be at least 3 inches (75 mm) per 100 feet (30 m). On runs where it is not practicable to maintain the grade all one way, the duct bank and conduit lines shall be graded from the center in both directions toward access points or conduit ends, with a drain into the storm drainage system. Pockets or traps where moisture may accumulate shall be avoided. No duct bank or underground conduit shall be less than 18 inches (0.5 m) below finished grade. Where under pavement, the top of the duct bank shall not be less than 18 inches (0.5 m) below the subgrade. The Contractor shall mandrel each individual conduit whether the conduit is direct-buried or part of a duct bank. An iron-shod mandrel, not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) smaller than the bore of the conduit shall be pulled or pushed through each conduit. The mandrel shall have a leather or rubber gasket slightly larger than the conduit hole. The Contractor shall swab out all conduits/ducts and clean base can, manhole, pull boxes, etc., interiors IMMEDIATELY prior to pulling cable. Once cleaned and swabbed the light bases, manholes, pull boxes, etc., and all accessible points of entry to the duct/conduit system shall be kept closed except when installing cables. Cleaning of ducts, base cans, manholes, etc., is incidental to the pay item of the item being cleaned. All raceway systems left open, after initial cleaning, for any reason shall be re-cleaned at the Contractor’s expense. All accessible points shall be kept closed when not installing cable. The Contractor shall verify existing ducts proposed for use in this project as clear and open. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of any blockage in the existing ducts. For pulling the permanent wiring, each individual conduit, whether the conduit is direct-buried or part of a duct bank, shall be provided with a 200-pound (90 kg) test polypropylene pull rope. The ends shall be secured and of sufficient length shall be left in access points to prevent it from slipping back into the conduit. Where spare conduits are installed, as indicated on the Plans, the open ends shall be plugged with removable tapered plugs, designed for this purpose. All conduits shall be securely fastened in place during construction and shall be plugged to prevent contaminants from entering the conduits. Any conduit section having a defective joint shall not be installed. Ducts shall be supported and spaced apart using approved spacers at intervals not to exceed 5 feet (1.5 m). Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, concrete encased duct banks shall be used when crossing under pavements expected to carry aircraft loads, such as runways, taxiways, taxilanes, ramps and aprons. When under paved shoulders and other paved areas, conduit and duct banks shall be encased using flowable fill for protection. All conduits within concrete encasement of the duct banks shall terminate with female ends for ease in current and future use. Install factory plugs in all unused ends. Do not cover the ends or plugs with concrete. Where turf is well established, and the sod can be removed, it shall be carefully stripped and properly stored. Trenches for conduits and duct banks may be excavated manually or with mechanical trenching equipment unless in pavement, in which case they shall be excavated with mechanical trenching equipment. Walls of trenches shall be essentially vertical so that a minimum of shoulder surface is disturbed. Blades of graders shall not be used to excavate the trench. When rock is encountered, the rock shall be removed to a depth of at least 3 inches (75 mm) below the required conduit or duct bank depth and it shall be replaced with bedding material of earth or sand containing no mineral aggregate particles that would be retained on a 1/4 inch (6 mm) sieve. Flowable New Electrical Building Page 243 of 497 backfill may alternatively be used The Contractor shall ascertain the type of soil or rock to be excavated before bidding. All such rock removal shall be performed and paid for under Item P-152. Underground electrical warning (Caution) tape shall be installed in the trench above all underground duct banks and conduits in unpaved areas. Contractor shall submit a sample of the proposed warning tape for approval by the Engineer. If not shown on the Plans, the warning tape shall be located 6 inches above the duct/conduit or the counterpoise wire if present. Joints in plastic conduit shall be prepared per the manufacturer’s recommendations for the particular type of conduit. Plastic conduit shall be prepared by application of a plastic cleaner and brushing a plastic solvent on the outside of the conduit ends and on the inside of the couplings. The conduit fitting shall then be slipped together with a quick one-quarter turn twist to set the joint tightly. Where more than one conduit is placed in a single trench, or in duct banks, joints in the conduit shall be staggered a minimum of 2 feet (60 cm). Changes in direction of runs exceeding 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished using manufactured sweep bends. Whether or not specifically indicated on the drawings, where the soil encountered at established duct bank grade is an unsuitable material, as determined by the Engineer, the unsuitable material shall be removed per Item P-152 and replaced with suitable material. Alternatively, additional duct bank supports that are adequate and stable shall be installed, as approved by the Engineer. All excavation shall be unclassified and shall be considered incidental to the respective L-110 pay item of which it is a component part. Dewatering necessary for duct installation, erosion and turbidity control, per Federal, state, and local requirements is incidental to its respective pay item as a part of Item L-110. The cost of all excavation regardless of type of material encountered, shall be included in the unit price bid for the L-110 Item. Unless otherwise specified, excavated materials that are deemed by the Engineer to be unsuitable for use in backfill or embankments shall be removed and disposed of offsite. Any excess excavation shall be filled with suitable material approved by the Engineer and compacted per Item P-152. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to locate existing utilities within the work area prior to excavation. Where existing active cables) cross proposed installations, the Contractor shall ensure that these cables are adequately protected. Where crossings are unavoidable, no splices will be allowed in the existing cables, except as specified on the Plans. Installation of new cable where such crossings must occur shall proceed as follows: a. Existing cables shall be located manually. Unearthed cables shall be inspected to assure absolutely no damage has occurred b. Trenching, etc., in cable areas shall then proceed with approval of the Engineer, with care taken to minimize possible damage or disruption of existing cable, including careful backfilling in area of cable. In the event that any previously identified cable is damaged during the course of construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for the complete repair. New Electrical Building Page 244 of 497 110-3.2 Duct banks. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, duct banks shall be installed so that the top of the concrete envelope is not less than 18 inches (0.5 m) below the bottom of the base or stabilized base course layers where installed under runways, taxiways, aprons, or other paved areas, and not less than 18 inches (0.5 m) below finished grade where installed in unpaved areas. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, duct banks under paved areas shall extend at least 3 feet (1 m) beyond the edges of the pavement or 3 feet (1 m) beyond any under drains that may be installed alongside the paved area. Trenches for duct banks shall be opened the complete length before concrete is placed so that if any obstructions are encountered, provisions can be made to avoid them. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all duct banks shall be placed on a layer of concrete not less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick prior to its initial set. The Contractor shall space the conduits not less than 3 inch (75 mm) apart (measured from outside wall to outside wall). All such multiple conduits shall be placed using conduit spacers applicable to the type of conduit. As the conduit laying progresses, concrete shall be placed around and on top of the conduits not less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick unless otherwise shown on the Plans. All conduits shall terminate with female ends for ease of access in current and future use. Install factory plugs in all unused ends. Do not cover the ends or plugs with concrete. Conduits forming the duct bank shall be installed using conduit spacers. No. 4 reinforcing bars shall be driven vertically into the soil a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) to anchor the assembly into the earth prior to placing the concrete encasement. For this purpose, the spacers shall be fastened down with locking collars attached to the vertical bars. Spacers shall be installed at 5-foot (1.5-m) intervals. Spacers shall be in the proper sizes and configurations to fit the conduits. Locking collars and spacers shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to use. When specified, the Contractor shall reinforce the bottom side and top of encasements with steel reinforcing mesh or fabric or other approved metal reinforcement. When directed, the Contractor shall supply additional supports where the ground is soft and boggy, where ducts cross under roadways, or where shown on the Plans. Under such conditions, the complete duct structure shall be supported on reinforced concrete footings, piers, or piles located at approximately 5-foot (1.5-m) intervals. All pavement surfaces that are to have ducts installed therein shall be neatly saw cut to form a vertical face. All excavation shall be included in the contract with price for the duct. Install a plastic, detectable, color as noted, 3 to 6 inches (75 to 150 mm) wide tape, 8 inches (200 mm) minimum below grade above all underground conduit or duct lines not installed under pavement. Utilize the 3-inch (75-mm) wide tape only for single conduit runs. Utilize the 6-inch (150-mm) wide tape for multiple conduits and duct banks. For duct banks equal to or greater than 24 inches (600 mm) in width, utilize more than one tape for sufficient coverage and identification of the duct bank as required. When existing cables are to be placed in split duct, encased in concrete, the cable shall be carefully located and exposed by hand tools. Prior to being placed in duct, the Engineer shall be notified so that he may inspect the cable and determine that it is in good condition. Where required, split duct shall be installed as shown on the drawings or as required by the Engineer. 110-3.3 Conduits without concrete encasement. Trenches for single-conduit lines shall be not less than 6 inches (150 mm) nor more than 12 inches (300 mm) wide. The trench for 2 or more conduits installed at the same level shall be proportionately wider. Trench bottoms for conduits without concrete encasement shall be made to conform accurately to grade so as to provide uniform support for the conduit along its entire length. New Electrical Building Page 245 of 497 Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, a layer of fine earth material, at least 4 inches (100 mm) thick (loose measurement) shall be placed in the bottom of the trench as bedding for the conduit. The bedding material shall consist of soft dirt, sand or other fine fill, and it shall contain no particles that would be retained on a 1/4 inch (6 mm) sieve. The bedding material shall be tamped until firm. Flowable backfill may alternatively be used. Unless otherwise shown on Plans, conduits shall be installed so that the tops of all conduits within the Airport’s secured area where trespassing is prohibited are at least 18 inches (0.5 m) below the finished grade. Conduits outside the Airport’s secured area shall be installed so that the tops of the conduits are at least 24 inches (60 cm) below the finished grade per National Electric Code (NEC), Table 300.5. When two or more individual conduits intended to carry conductors of equivalent voltage insulation rating are installed in the same trench without concrete encasement, they shall be spaced not less than 3 inches (75 mm) apart (measured from outside wall to outside wall) in a horizontal direction and not less than 6 inches (150 mm) apart in a vertical direction. Where two or more individual conduits intended to carry conductors of differing voltage insulation rating are installed in the same trench without concrete encasement, they shall be placed not less than 3 inches (75 mm) apart (measured from outside wall to outside wall) in a horizontal direction and lot less than 6 inches (150 mm) apart in a vertical direction. Trenches shall be opened the complete length between normal termination points before conduit is installed so that if any unforeseen obstructions are encountered, proper provisions can be made to avoid them. Conduits shall be installed using conduit spacers. No. 4 reinforcing bars shall be driven vertically into the soil a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) to anchor the assembly into the earth while backfilling. For this purpose, the spacers shall be fastened down with locking collars attached to the vertical bars. Spacers shall be installed at 5-foot (1.5-m) intervals. Spacers shall be in the proper sizes and configurations to fit the conduits. Locking collars and spacers shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to use. 110-3.4 Markers. The location of each end and of each change of direction of conduits and duct banks shall be marked by a concrete slab marker 2 feet (60 cm) square and 4 - 6 inches (100 - 150 mm) thick extending approximately one inch (25 mm) above the surface. The markers shall also be located directly above the ends of all conduits or duct banks, except where they terminate in a junction/access structure or building. Each cable or duct run from a line of lights and signs to the equipment vault must be marked at approximately every 200 feet (61 m) along the cable or duct run, with an additional marker at each change of direction of cable or duct run. The Contractor shall impress the word “DUCT” or “CONDUIT” on each marker slab. Impression of letters shall be done in a manner, approved by the Engineer, for a neat, professional appearance. All letters and words must be neatly stenciled. After placement, all markers shall be given one coat of high-visibility orange paint, as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also impress on the slab the number and size of conduits beneath the marker along with all other necessary information as determined by the Engineer. The letters shall be 4 inches (100 mm) high and 3 inches (75 mm) wide with width of stroke 1/2 inch (12 mm) and 1/4 inch (6 mm) deep or as large as the available space permits. Furnishing and installation of duct markers is incidental to the respective duct pay item. 110-3.5 Backfilling for conduits. For conduits, 8 inches (200 mm) of sand, soft earth, or other fine fill (loose measurement) shall be placed around the conduits ducts and carefully tamped around and over them with hand tampers. The remaining trench shall then be backfilled and compacted per Item P-152 “Excavation and Embankment” except that material used for back fill shall be select material not larger than 4 inches (100 mm) in diameter. New Electrical Building Page 246 of 497 Flowable backfill may alternatively be used. Trenches shall not contain pools of water during back filling operations. The trench shall be completely backfilled and tamped level with the adjacent surface; except that, where sod is to be placed over the trench, the backfilling shall be stopped at a depth equal to the thickness of the sod to be used, with proper allowance for settlement. Any excess excavated material shall be removed and disposed of per instructions issued by the Engineer. 110-3.6 Backfilling for duct banks. After the concrete has cured, the remaining trench shall be backfilled and compacted per Item P-152 “Excavation and Embankment” except that the material used for backfill shall be select material not larger than 4 inches (100 mm) in diameter. In addition to the requirements of P-152, where duct banks are installed under pavement, one moisture/density test per lift shall be made for each 250 linear feet (76 m) of duct bank or one work period’s construction, whichever is less. Flowable backfill may alternatively be used. Trenches shall not contain pools of water during backfilling operations. The trench shall be completely backfilled and tamped level with the adjacent surface; except that, where sod is to be placed over the trench, the backfilling shall be stopped at a depth equal to the thickness of the sod to be used, with proper allowance for settlement. Any excess excavated material shall be removed and disposed of per instructions issued by the Engineer. 110-3.7 Restoration. Where sod has been removed, it shall be replaced as soon as possible after the backfilling is completed. All areas disturbed by the work shall be restored to its original condition. The restoration shall include topsoiling, fertilizing, seeding, and mulching needed to return the site to original conditions. The Contractor shall be held responsible for maintaining all disturbed surfaces and replacements until final acceptance. All restoration shall be considered incidental to the respective L-110 pay item. Following restoration of all trenching near airport movement surfaces, the Contractor shall thoroughly visually inspect the area for foreign object debris (FOD) and remove any such FOD that is found. This FOD inspection and removal shall be considered incidental to the pay item of which it is a component part. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 110-4.1 Underground conduits and duct banks shall be measured by the linear feet (meter) of conduits and duct banks installed, including encasement, locator tape, trenching and backfill with designated material, and for drain lines, the termination at the drainage structure, all measured in place, completed, and accepted. Separate measurement shall be made for the various types and sizes. BASIS OF PAYMENT 110-5.1 Payment will be made at the contract unit price per linear foot for each type and size of conduit and duct bank completed and accepted, including trench and backfill with the designated material, and, for drain lines, the termination at the drainage structure. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, assembly, and installation of these materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete this item per the provisions and intent of the Plans and Specifications. New Electrical Building Page 247 of 497 Payment will be made under: Item L-110.1 Non-Encased Electrical Conduit, 1W-2” Sch 40 PVC - per linear foot (meter) Item L-110.2 Non-Encased Electrical Conduit, 2W-2” Sch 40 PVC – per linear foot (meter) Item L-110.3 Non-Encased Electrical Duct, 2W-4” Sch 40 PVC – per linear foot (meter) Item L-110.4 Non-Encased Electrical Duct, 4W-4” Sch 40 PVC – per linear foot (meter) MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS Advisory Circular (AC) 150/5340-30 Design and Installation Details for Airport Visual Aids AC 150/5345-53 Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM D1556 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method ASTM D1557 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3(2,700 kN-m/m3)) ASTM D2167 Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber Balloon Method ASTM D2922 Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Underwriters Laboratories Standard 6 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel Underwriters Laboratories Standard 514B Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings Underwriters Laboratories Standard 514C Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers Underwriters Laboratories Standard 1242 Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit Steel Underwriters Laboratories Standard 651 Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings Underwriters Laboratories Standard 651A Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit END OF ITEM L-110 New Electrical Building Page 248 of 497 L-115 ELECTRICAL MANHOLES, HANDHOLES AND JUNCTION STRUCTURES DESCRIPTION 115-1.1 This item shall consist of electrical manholes, handholes and junction structures (hand holes, pull boxes, junction cans, etc.) installed per this Specification, at the indicated locations and conforming to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Plans or as required by the Engineer. This item shall include the installation of each electrical manhole and/or junction structures with all associated excavation, backfilling, sheeting and bracing, concrete, reinforcing steel, ladders, appurtenances, testing, dewatering and restoration of surfaces to the satisfaction of the Engineer. EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 115-2.1 General. a. All equipment and materials covered by referenced specifications shall be subject to acceptance through manufacturer’s certification of compliance with the applicable specification when so requested by the Engineer. b. Manufacturer’s certifications shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to provide materials per these Specifications. Materials supplied and/or installed that do not comply with these Specifications shall be removed (when directed by the Engineer) and replaced with materials that comply with these Specifications at the Contractor’s cost. c. All materials and equipment used to construct this item shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering the equipment. Submittals consisting of marked catalog sheets or shop drawings shall be provided. Submittal data shall be presented in a clear, precise and thorough manner. Original catalog sheets are preferred. Photocopies are acceptable provided they are as good a quality as the original. Clearly and boldly mark each copy to identify products or models applicable to this project. Indicate all optional equipment and delete any non-pertinent data. Submittals for components of electrical equipment and systems shall identify the equipment to which they apply on each submittal sheet. Markings shall be made bold and clear with arrows or circles (highlighting is not acceptable). The Contractor is solely responsible for delays in the project that may accrue directly or indirectly from late submissions or resubmissions of submittals. d. The data submitted shall be sufficient, in the opinion of the Engineer, to determine compliance with the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor’s submittals shall be neatly bound in a properly sized 3-ring binder, tabbed by specification section. The Engineer reserves the right to reject any and all equipment, materials or procedures that do not meet the system design and the standards and codes, specified in this document. e. All equipment and materials furnished and installed under this section shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of at least twelve (12) months from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. The defective materials and/or equipment shall be repaired or replaced, at the Owner’s discretion, with no additional cost to the Owner. 115-2.2 Concrete structures. Cast-in-place concrete structures shall be per the details and dimensions shown on the Plans. Provide precast concrete structures where shown on the Plans. Precast concrete structures shall be an approved standard design of the manufacturer. Precast units shall have mortar or bitumastic sealer placed between all joints to make them watertight. The structure shall be designed to withstand 100,000 lb. aircraft loads, unless otherwise shown on the Plans. Openings or knockouts shall be provided in the structure as detailed on the Plans. New Electrical Building Page 249 of 497 Threaded inserts and pulling eyes shall be cast in as shown. If the Contractor chooses to propose a different structural design, signed and sealed shop drawings, design calculations, and other information requested by the Engineer shall be submitted by the Contractor to allow for a full evaluation by the Engineer. The Engineer shall review per the process defined in the General Provisions. 115-2.3 Junction boxes. Junction boxes shall be L-867 Class 1 (non-load bearing) or L-868 Class 1 (load bearing) airport light bases that are encased in concrete. The light bases shall have a galvanized steel blank cover, gasket, and stainless steel or coated steel hardware per FAA Engineering Brief (EB) #83. Covers shall be 3/8-inch (9-mm) thickness for L-867 and 3/4-inch (19-mm) thickness for L-868. 115-2.4 Mortar. The mortar shall be composed of one part of Portland cement and two parts of mortar sand, by volume. The Portland cement shall be per the requirements in ASTM C150, Type I. The sand shall be per the requirements in ASTM C144. Hydrated lime may be added to the mixture of sand and cement in an amount not to exceed 15% of the weight of cement used. The hydrated lime shall meet the requirements of ASTM C6. Water shall be potable, reasonably clean and free of oil, salt, acid, alkali, sugar, vegetable, or other substances injurious to the finished product. 115-2.5 Concrete. All concrete used in structures shall conform to the requirements of Item P-610, Structural Portland Cement Concrete. 115-2.6 Frames and covers. The frames shall conform to one of the following requirements: a. ASTM A48 Gray iron castings b. ASTM A47 Malleable iron castings c. ASTM A27 Steel castings d. ASTM A283, Grade D Structural steel for grates and frames e. ASTM A536 Ductile iron castings f. ASTM A897 Austempered ductile iron castings All castings specified shall withstand a maximum load of 100,000 lbs. All castings or structural steel units shall conform to the dimensions shown on the Plans and shall be designed to support the loadings specified. Each frame and cover unit shall be provided with fastening members to prevent it from being dislodged by traffic, but which will allow easy removal for access to the structure. All castings shall be thoroughly cleaned. After fabrication, structural steel units shall be galvanized to meet the requirements of ASTM A123. Each cover shall have the word “ELECTRIC” or other approved designation cast on it. Each frame and cover shall be as shown on the Plans or approved equivalent. No cable notches are required. Each manhole shall be provided with a “DANGER -- PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER” safety warning sign as detailed in the Contract Documents and in accordance with OSHA 1910.146 (c)(2). 115-2.7 Ladders. Ladders, if specified, shall be galvanized steel or as shown on the Plans. New Electrical Building Page 250 of 497 115-2.8 Reinforcing steel. All reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars of new billet steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A615, Grade 60. 115-2.9 Bedding/special backfill. Bedding or special backfill shall be as shown on the Plans. 115-2.10 Flowable backfill. Flowable material used to backfill shall conform to the requirements of Item P-153, Controlled Low Strength Material. 115-2.11 Cable trays. Cable trays shall be of galvanized steel, plastic, or aluminum. Cable trays shall be located as shown on the Plans. 115-2.12 Plastic conduit. Plastic conduit shall comply with Item L-110, Airport Underground Electrical Duct Banks and Conduits. 115-2.13 Conduit terminators. Conduit terminators shall be pre-manufactured for the specific purpose and sized as required or as shown on the Plans. 115-2.14 Pulling-in irons. Pulling-in irons shall be manufactured with 7/8 inch (22 mm) diameter hot-dipped galvanized steel or stress-relieved carbon steel roping designed for concrete applications (7 strand, 1/2 inch (12 mm) diameter with an ultimate strength of 270,000 psi (1862 MPa)). Where stress-relieved carbon steel roping is used, a rustproof sleeve shall be installed at the hooking point and all exposed surfaces shall be encapsulated with a polyester coating to prevent corrosion. 115-2.15 Ground rods. Ground rods shall be one piece, copper clad. The ground rods shall be of the length and diameter specified on the Plans, but in no case shall they be less than 10 feet (2.54 m) long nor less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) in diameter. CONSTRUCTION METHODS 115-3.1 Unclassified excavation. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to locate existing utilities within the work area prior to excavation. Damage to utility lines, through lack of care in excavating, shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer without additional expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall perform excavation for structures and structure footings to the lines and grades or elevations shown on the Plans or as staked by the Engineer. The excavation shall be of sufficient size to permit the placing of the full width and length of the structure or structure footings shown. All excavation shall be unclassified and shall be considered incidental to the respective L-115 pay item of which it is a component part. Dewatering necessary for L-115 structure installation, erosion and turbidity control, per Federal, state, and local requirements is incidental to its respective pay item as a part of Item L-115. The cost of all excavation regardless of type of material encountered, shall be included in the unit price bid for the L-115 Item. Boulders, logs and all other objectionable material encountered in excavation shall be removed. All rock and other hard foundation material shall be cleaned of all loose material and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped or serrated, as directed by the Engineer. All seams, crevices, disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed. When concrete is to rest on a surface other than rock, special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before the concrete or reinforcing is to be placed. New Electrical Building Page 251 of 497 The Contractor shall provide all bracing, sheeting and shoring necessary to implement and protect the excavation and the structure as required for safety or conformance to governing laws. The cost of bracing, sheeting and shoring shall be included in the unit price bid for the structure. Unless otherwise provided, bracing, sheeting and shoring involved in the construction of this item shall be removed by the Contractor after the completion of the structure. Removal shall be effected in a manner that will not disturb or mar finished masonry. The cost of removal shall be included in the unit price bid for the structure. After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. Structures shall be placed after the Engineer has approved the depth of the excavation and the suitability of the foundation material. Prior to installation the Contractor shall provide a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) of sand or a material approved by the Engineer as a suitable base to receive the structure. The base material shall be compacted and graded level and at proper elevation to receive the structure in proper relation to the conduit grade or ground cover requirements, as indicated on the Plans. 115-3.2 Concrete structures. Concrete structures shall be built on prepared foundations conforming to the dimensions and form indicated on the Plans. The concrete and construction methods shall conform to the requirements specified in Item P-610. Any reinforcement required shall be placed as indicated on the Plans and shall be approved by the Engineer before the concrete is placed. 115-3.3 Precast unit installations. Precast units shall be installed plumb and true. Joints shall be made watertight by use of sealant at each tongue-and-groove joint and at roof of manhole. Excess sealant shall be removed and severe surface projections on exterior of neck shall be removed. 115-3.4 Placement and treatment of castings, frames and fittings. All castings, frames and fittings shall be placed in the positions indicated on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer and shall be set true to line and to correct elevation. If frames or fittings are to be set in concrete or cement mortar, all anchors or bolts shall be in place and position before the concrete or mortar is placed. The unit shall not be disturbed until the mortar or concrete has set. Field connections shall be made with bolts, unless indicated otherwise. Welding will not be permitted unless shown otherwise on the approved shop drawings and written permission is granted by the casting manufacturer. Erection equipment shall be suitable and safe for the workman. Errors in shop fabrication or deformation resulting from handling and transportation that prevent the proper assembly and fitting of parts shall be reported immediately to the Engineer and approval of the method of correction shall be obtained. Approved corrections shall be made at Contractor’s expense. Anchor bolts and anchors shall be properly located and built into connection work. Bolts and anchors shall be preset by the use of templates or such other methods as may be required to locate the anchors and anchor bolts accurately. Pulling-in irons shall be located opposite all conduit entrances into structures to provide a strong, convenient attachment for pulling-in blocks when installing cables. Pulling-in irons shall be set directly into the concrete walls of the structure. 115-3.5 Installation of ladders. Ladders shall be installed such that they may be removed if necessary. Mounting brackets shall be supplied top and bottom and shall be cast in place during fabrication of the structure or drilled and grouted in place after erection of the structure. New Electrical Building Page 252 of 497 115-3.6 Removal of sheeting and bracing. In general, all sheeting and bracing used to support the sides of trenches or other open excavations shall be withdrawn as the trenches or other open excavations are being refilled. That portion of the sheeting extending below the top of a structure shall be withdrawn, unless otherwise directed, before more than 6 inches (150 mm) of material is placed above the top of the structure and before any bracing is removed. Voids left by the sheeting shall be carefully refilled with selected material and rammed tight with tools especially adapted for the purpose or otherwise as may be approved. The Engineer may order the Contractor to delay the removal of sheeting and bracing if, in his judgment, the installed work has not attained the necessary strength to permit placing of backfill. 115-3.7 Backfilling. After a structure has been completed, the area around it shall be backfilled in horizontal layers not to exceed 6 inches (150 mm) in thickness measured after compaction to the density requirements in Item P-152. Each layer shall be deposited all around the structure to approximately the same elevation. The top of the fill shall meet the elevation shown on the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Backfill shall not be placed against any structure until permission is given by the Engineer. In the case of concrete, such permission shall not be given until tests made by the laboratory under supervision of the Engineer establish that the concrete has attained sufficient strength to provide a factor of safety against damage or strain in withstanding any pressure created by the backfill or the methods used in placing it. Where required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to add, at his own expense, sufficient water during compaction to assure a complete consolidation of the backfill. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury done to conduits, duct banks, structures, property or persons due to improper placing or compacting of backfill. 115-3.8 Connection of duct banks. To relieve stress of joint between concrete-encased duct banks and structure walls, reinforcement rods shall be placed in the structure wall and shall be formed and tied into duct bank reinforcement at the time the duct bank is installed. 115-3.9 Grounding. A ground rod shall be installed in the floor of all concrete structures so that the top of rod extends 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. The ground rod shall be installed within one foot (30 cm) of a corner of the concrete structure. Ground rods shall be installed prior to casting the bottom slab. Where the soil condition does not permit driving the ground rod into the earth without damage to the ground rod, the Contractor shall drill a 4 inch (100 mm) diameter hole into the earth to receive the ground rod. The hole around the ground rod shall be filled throughout its length, below slab, with Portland cement grout. Ground rods shall be installed in precast bottom slab of structures by drilling a hole through bottom slab and installing the ground rod. Bottom slab penetration shall be sealed watertight with Portland cement grout around the ground rod. A grounding bus of 4/0 bare stranded copper shall be exothermically bonded to the ground rod and loop the concrete structure walls. The ground bus shall be a minimum of one foot (30 cm) above the floor of the structure and separate from other cables. No. 2 American wire gauge (AWG) bare copper pigtails shall bond the grounding bus to all cable trays and other metal hardware within the concrete structure. Connections to the grounding bus shall be exothermic. If an exothermic weld is not possible, connections to the grounding bus shall be made by using connectors approved for direct burial in soil or concrete per UL 467. Hardware connections may be mechanical, using a lug designed for that purpose. 115-3.10 Cleanup and repair. After erection of all galvanized items, damaged areas shall be repaired by applying a liquid cold-galvanizing compound per MIL-P-21035. Surfaces shall be prepared and the compound applied per the manufacturer’s recommendations. New Electrical Building Page 253 of 497 Prior to acceptance, the entire structure shall be cleaned of all dirt and debris. 115-3.11 Restoration. After the backfill is completed, the Contractor shall dispose of all surplus material, dirt and rubbish from the site. The Contractor shall restore all disturbed areas equivalent to or better than their original condition. All sodding, grading and restoration shall be considered incidental to the respective L-115 pay item. The Contractor shall grade around structures as required to provide positive drainage away from the structure. Areas with special surface treatment, such as roads, sidewalks, or other paved areas shall have backfill compacted to match surrounding areas, and surfaces shall be repaired using materials comparable to original materials. Following restoration of all trenching near airport movement surfaces, the Contractor shall thoroughly visually inspect the area for foreign object debris (FOD), and remove any such FOD that is found. This FOD inspection and removal shall be considered incidental to the pay item of which it is a component part. After all work is completed, the Contractor shall remove all tools and other equipment, leaving the entire site free, clear and in good condition. 115-3.12 Inspection. Prior to final approval, the electrical structures shall be thoroughly inspected for conformance with the Plans and this Specification. Any indication of defects in materials or workmanship shall be further investigated and corrected. The earth resistance to ground of each ground rod shall not exceed 25 ohms. Each ground rod shall be tested using the fall-of-potential ground impedance test per American National Standards Institute / Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE) Standard 81. This test shall be performed prior to establishing connections to other ground electrodes. 115-3.13 Manhole elevation adjustments. Not used this project. 115-3.14 Duct extension to existing ducts. Where existing concrete encased ducts are to be extended, the duct extension shall be concrete encased plastic conduit. The fittings to connect the ducts together shall be standard manufactured connectors designed and approved for the purpose. The duct extensions shall be installed according to the concrete encased duct detail and as shown on the Plans. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 115-4.1 Electrical manholes, handholes and junction structures shall be measured by each unit completed in place and accepted. The following additional items are specifically included in each unit: • All Required Excavation, Dewatering • Sheeting and Bracing • All Required Backfilling with On-Site Materials • Restoration of All Surfaces and Finished Grading, Sodding • All Required Connections • Dewatering If Required • Temporary Cables and Connections • Ground Rod Testing 115-4.2 Manhole elevation adjustments shall be measured by the completed unit installed, in place, completed, and accepted. Separate measurement shall not be made for the various types and sizes. New Electrical Building Page 254 of 497 BASIS OF PAYMENT 115-5.1 The accepted quantity of electrical handholes and junction structures will be paid for at the Contract unit price per each, complete and in place. This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all preparation, excavation, backfilling and placing of the materials, furnishing and installation of appurtenances and connections to duct banks and other structures as may be required to complete the item as shown on the Plans and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the structure. Payment will be made under: Item L-115.1 4’ x 4’ Electrical Handhole with Spring Assist Lid – Per Each MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS ANSI/IEEE STD 81 IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System Advisory Circular (AC) 150/5345-7 Specification for L-824 Underground Electrical Cable for Airport Lighting Circuits AC 150/5345-26 Specification for L-823 Plug and Receptacle, Cable Connectors AC 150/5345-42 Specification for Airport Light Bases, Transformer Housings, Junction Boxes, and Accessories AC 150/5340-30 Design and Installation Details for Airport Visual Aids AC 150/5345-53 Airport Lighting Equipment Certification Program Commercial Item Description A-A 59544 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation) ASTM A27 Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application ASTM A47 Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A48 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A283 Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement New Electrical Building Page 255 of 497 ASTM A897 Standard Specification for Austempered Ductile Iron Castings ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C206 Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime FAA EB #83 In Pavement Light Fixture Bolts MIL-P-21035 Paint High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC) END OF ITEM L-115 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 256 of 497 L-890 NEW ALCMS SYSTEM A. Description The L-890 Airfield Lighting and Control System shall consist of a state-of-the-art, computerize, fully distributed monitoring and control system with automatic insulation resistance measuring and monitoring system (IRMMS). The control and monitoring system shall be certified per the latest edition of FAA AC 150/5345-56 “Specification for L-890 Airport Lighting Control and Monitoring System (ALCMS)”. The system shall be a L890-CA control system with advanced monitoring and preset fail safe design. Communications shall consist of a 10 MB Ethernet fiber-optic network between the tower and airfield electrical building. The Plans prepared for this project follow the concept of a fully distributed control and monitoring system. The location of all main components shall be as shown on the Plans and final determination in the field. B. Qualifications 1. The Airfield Lighting Computer Systems (ALCS) shall combine state-of-the-art programming intelligence with high quality, industrial strength components. The system should represent the leading edge in aviation lighting technology with innovative touchscreen control stations, Distributed Monitoring and Control Equipment (DMCE) and powerful database storage and retrieval systems. 2. The ALCMS manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and thus demonstrate a commitment to the highest quality standards. The ALCMS system shall be certified per the latest edition of FAA AC 150/5345-53 as compliance with an L890-CA system. C. Scope 1. The Contractor shall furnish and commission a complete and functional computerized airfield lighting control system on an industry standard Ethernet fiber optic network at the project site. 2. This project shall include software, programming, computers, manuals, installation, on-site commissioning, on-site testing, on-site training, and any other materials, tools, and equipment to provide a fully functional, complete and operational system to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. Coordination ALCMS manufacturer shall provide an experienced and qualified Engineering, Sales and Service staff to support Contractor and Airport throughout the installation and life of the system. The project flow shall follow this basic cycle of events: Milestone Description 1. Receipt of Construction ALCMS manufacturer Specifications and Drawings reviews Specifications and drawings and prepares submittal 2. Specifications submitted ALCMS manufacturer submits ALCMS specifications to the Contractor New Electrical Building Page 257 of 497 3. Submittal review and approval Submittal is reviewed by Contractor, Airport, and Engineer 4. Production Release ALCMS manufacturer releases approved system to manufacturing 5. Production System is manufactured 6. DEMO CD 35% Software Completion Submittal of a DEMO CD with the planned layout of the touchscreen that will be used for the control of the ALCMS system to the Contractor, Airport, and Engineers. 7. Production Testing System is tested by ALCMS manufacturer’s engineering 8. FAT Witnessed by Engineer 9. Shipment of system Approved system is shipped to installation site 10. Installation Contractor installs equipment and completed external wiring 11. Commissioning ALCMS manufacturer arrives at installation site to complete commissioning of system and verify Contractor installation and wiring 12. Initial Training Initial training on the system operation and the Touchscreen is provided prior to system cut-over 13. System Cut-over ALCMS manufacturer and Contractor cut-over the new system and bring it on- line 14. System Acceptance Testing System is available for System Acceptance Testing (SAT) witnessed by Engineer 15. Manuals ALCMS manufacturer issues operator manuals, maintenance manuals, ATC manuals and final as-installed system prints 16. Final Training ALCMS manufacturer completes on-site training of maintenance and ATC personnel 17. Final Owner Acceptance Upon completion of all contractual requirements, system is accepted in writing by the Engineer 18. Warranty and Support ALCS manufacturer provides warranty and support per the contractual requirements E. System Progress Review Two (2) trips by the ALCMS manufacturer to the Airport shall be included for progress review meetings with the Airport and Engineer. New Electrical Building Page 258 of 497 During the progress review meetings, the ALCMS manufacturer shall provide prototype touchscreen layouts and functionality demonstrations that will allow Air Traffic Control and the Airport to review the screen layouts, colors, etc. and provide development feedback. During the design and development of the ALCMS system, minimum response times for Requests for Information (RFI) should be established between the Engineer and the Contractor. F. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) 1. Before shipment, the ALCMS system shall be assembled as an operating system at the ALCMS manufacturer’s test facility. ALCMS manufacturer shall coordinate the FAT for representative(s) of the Airport/Owner and Engineer to witness the testing of the system and to authorize shipment. 2. The length of the FAT is typically one (1) day but may require additional time depending on the results of the testing. G. Contractor Installation Requirements and Division of Labor The Contractor shall be responsible for the physical installation of all associated ALCMS components. At a minimum, this includes: electrical building and tower computer cabinets, touchscreen control stations, fiber optic patch panels and patch cords, fiber-optic switching equipment, Pilot Controlled Radio, and Distributed Monitoring and Control Equipment (DMCE). The Contractor shall furnish, install, relocate, connect, and test all equipment, equipment accessories, conduit, cables, wires, buses, grounds and support necessary to insure a complete and operable electrical distribution facilities for the airport lighting system as per Plans and Specifications. The equipment installation and mounting shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code and local agencies having jurisdiction. Contractor shall provide recording equipment and shall coordinate with ALCMS manufacturer to record all training sessions. Contractor shall coordinate all work in the tower with tower personal and give 1-week notification before working in the tower itself. Tower work, including cable installations, shall be on a field verification. Final locations of equipment and cables shall be field directed. Wire and Connections The Contractor shall make all necessary electrical connections at each location in accordance with the ALCMS manufacturer’s wiring diagrams furnished. All wires called out in the drawings associated with equipment that is to be controlled or monitored should be pulled, terminated, and dressed at the appropriate terminal blocks and at the associated equipment. When wiring the terminal blocks, the Contractor shall leave sufficient extra length on each control lead to make future changes, if necessary, to connections at the terminal block. New Electrical Building Page 259 of 497 Marking and Labeling All equipment, control wires, terminal blocks, etc., shall be tagged, marked or labeled as specified below: Wire Identification: The Contractor shall furnish and install self-sticking wire labels or identifying tags on all control wires at the point where they connect to the control equipment or to the terminal blocks. Wire labels, if used, shall be of the self-sticking, pre-printed type and of the manufacturer’s recommended size for the wire involved. Identification markings designated in the manufacturer’s plans shall be followed. Tags, if used, shall be nonferrous metal or plastic. Each tag shall be securely tied to the proper wire by a nonmetallic cord or plastic wire tie. Installation of Fiber Optic Communication Equipment The Contractor shall install, terminate, and test all fiber optic communications required for the project. This includes all the following components: Fiber optic cable Fiber optic patch panels Fiber optic jumper cables Fiber connectors / couplings Fiber junction Boxes A trained and qualified fiber optic specialist shall do all installation of the fiber optic communication equipment. All associated fiber optic equipment including fiber cables, splices, jumper cable shall be tested upon completion of the fiber cable installation and termination of connectors. Fiber terminations shall consist of splicing a factory-made termination pigtail to the end of the fiber optic cable at termination locations. The Contractor shall install new single-mode fiber between stations as shown on the Plans and as specified. Tests shall include verification that the ‘dB loss versus the distance of the fiber pull is within acceptable limits. All test data shall be recorded and compiled into a test report and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Commissioning of the system shall not begin until all test reports have been submitted and approved. The Contractor shall be responsible to remove all old equipment and dispose of any equipment the Airport does not want to salvage. The Contractor shall leave a clean and functional area(s) when done. New Electrical Building Page 260 of 497 H. Training Audio/Video Recording All audio/video ALCMS related training sessions shall be recorded and shall be turned over to the Owner at the end of the project. The ALCMS Manufacturer will coordinate training dates with the Contractor and the Engineer. All audio/video recording should be completed in a digital format viewable in CD-ROM or DVD player. The Contractor shall coordinate all training filming with the Manufacturer and Airport. The Contractor shall be responsible party to provide recordings to the Airport regardless of who does the actual recordings. I. ALCMS Manufacturer Commissioning ALCMS manufacturer shall perform the following commissioning tasks: Verify Contractor connections including power, control, and monitoring. Verify proper labeling of equipment. Verify communications between all associated equipment. Perform all hardware calibrations. Perform system testing including control, monitoring, and diagnostic. Perform System Acceptance Testing (SAT). J. Initial On-Site Training: Prior To Cut-Over The ALCMS manufacturer shall provide the Contractor a training course syllabus and training schedule thirty (30) days before on-site training. Coordination of the video recording shall be organized by the Contractor. Before system cut-over, the ALCMS manufacturer shall provide a minimum of one (1), 8 hour (one-day) training classes for maintenance and operation personnel. This training will include discussion and review of the following: Basic system operation Power up and Power down sequences Failsafe Operations Graphical User Interface (GUI) Screens Touchscreen Operation Basic Maintenance and Troubleshooting Before system cut-over, ALCMS manufacturer shall provide a minimum of two (2), 1 hour training classes for the Air Traffic Control (ATC) personnel. This training will include discussion and review of the following: Touchscreen operations Using the presets Alarm and Warning messages Failsafe conditions Granting local control to the Electrical building New Electrical Building Page 261 of 497 Training classes shall be limited to a maximum of 10 people per class. All training sessions will be held in a facility provided by the Airport. This facility shall have tables, chairs, projection screen, and sufficient space to lay out manuals and drawings. The ALCMS manufacturer shall provide all required visual aids. The Contractor shall provide or coordinate the availability of recording devices and projectors as needed. The Contractor is responsible for all recording and delivering the recordings to the Airport with the O&Ms for future training. K. System Acceptance Test (SAT) Following the final installation, commissioning, and calibration of the system, ALCMS manufacturer shall perform a demonstration of the system performance. This demonstration shall include the following: Control functions Monitoring functions Alarm functions Print functions Display functions The ALCMS manufacturer shall develop a SAT test plan in accordance with the Specifications and issue this for approval by the Engineer. The SAT shall be witnessed by the Owner’s representatives and Engineer. Contractor shall provide personnel to adjust system wiring and equipment during the SAT. Operation and Maintenance Manuals ALCMS manufacturer shall provide six (6) operation and maintenance manuals that are hard-covered and suitable for daily operation and maintenance of the system. The manuals shall include the following information: Operational overview and system description Graphical User Interface Screen operation User configuration tools instruction manual System Block Diagram Detailed external wiring diagrams (Electrical Contractor wiring) Detailed assembly drawings and wiring diagrams Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) Manuals ALCMS manufacturer shall provide six (6) operation manuals for the Air Traffic Controllers (ATC) that are suitable for use in the daily operation of the system. At a minimum, the manuals shall include the following information: Touchscreen operation (human-machine interface) Touchscreen maintenance (i.e. calibration) The manuals shall be provided in hardbound 3-ring binders. The cover and spine-end of each binder shall be labeled with all project-related information. New Electrical Building Page 262 of 497 As-Built Drawings ALCMS manufacturer shall provide six (6) sets of As-Built drawings after system acceptance. The As-Built drawings shall include the following information: System Block Diagram (1-line drawings) System External Wiring Diagrams Assembly Drawings Assembly Wiring Diagrams that are project specific showing terminations at all equipment monitored. The As-Built drawings shall be 11” X 17” in size and shall made part of the operation and maintenance manuals. As-built drawings shall be provided on CD-ROM in electronic format as 11x17 PDFs and as AutoCAD drawings version 2016. The CD-ROM shall also contain electronic copies of the Maintenance O&M and ATC operational manuals. Final On-site Training: Cut-over and SAT Complete The ALCMS manufacturer shall provide the Contractor a final training course syllabus and training schedule thirty (30) days before on-site training. After the System Acceptance Test (SAT) is complete, the ALCMS manufacturer shall provide one (1), 4 hour training classes for maintenance personnel. This training will include discussion and review of the following: System block diagram System assemblies and wiring diagrams Graphical User Interface (GUI) Screens (Hands-on) Touchscreen Operation Maintenance and Troubleshooting (Hands-on) Granting local control to the Electrical Building Power up and Power down sequences Failsafe Operations After the SAT, ALCMS manufacturer shall provide two (2), 1 hour training classes for FAA Air Traffic Control (ATC). This training will include discussion and review of the following: Touchscreen operations Using the presets Alarm and Warning messages Failsafe conditions Granting local control to the Electrical Building Training classes shall be limited to a maximum of 10 people per class. Any hands-on training classes for Maintenance personnel shall be limited to 2-4 people. The Contractor shall give at least two (2) weeks advanced notice to the ALCMS manufacturer prior to performing final on-site training classes. All training sessions will be held in a facility provided by the Airport. This facility should have tables, chairs, projection screen, and sufficient space to lay out manuals and drawings. The ALCMS manufacturer shall provide all required visual aids. The Contractor shall provide or coordinate the availability of recording devices and projectors as needed. New Electrical Building Page 263 of 497 L. Owner System Acceptance System Warranty All equipment, hardware, and software shall be warranted against defects in workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months after system final acceptance. M. System Support The ALCMS manufacturer’s Service Department shall provide technical assistance and support during the warranty period. The Service Department shall provide 7 days a week / 24 hours a day support phone line. The support phone number shall be specified in the submittal. The Service Department shall provide technical phone support within two (2) hours of the initial call. The ALCMS manufacturer shall provide free phone consultation and technical support, as required, during the warranty period. If needed, the manufacturer’s representative shall be on-site within 24 hours. The ALCMS manufacturer shall provide, as part of the bid, a preventative maintenance program consisting of two (2) trips during the warranty period. N. Spare Parts Spare parts list shall be included as part of the ALCMS Bid Item. At a minimum, the spare parts list shall include the following components: Recommended Qty Part Number Description 1 Distributed Monitoring and Control Equipment (DMCE) Assembly 2 Current / Voltage Module (CVM) 2 Insulation Resistance Monitoring Module (IRMM) 2 Ethernet Fiber Optic Transceiver 1 Network Interface Card (NIC) 1 Ethernet Switch Contractor shall coordinate with Manufacturer to submit any changes to this list as recommended by the Manufacturer. O. Equipment and Materials General Basic system (Distributed Monitor and Control system) New Electrical Building Page 264 of 497 1. The ALCMS system shall be based on a network ready system that operates within an industrial accepted operating system, or Engineer approved equal. 2. An Ethernet communication network shall be used for data transfer between the electrical building and control tower work station locations. 3. The computerized airfield lighting control and monitoring system shall be comprised of the following major hardware components: a. Touchscreen control station located in the tower cab. b. Tower computer subsystem consisting of an industrial enclosure, industrial tower computer, and communication equipment. c. Electrical building computer subsystem consisting of: an industrial enclosure, industrial electrical building computer, communication equipment, printer, and a redundant electrical building control/monitoring network. 4. Within the airfield lighting electrical building shall be a distributed control and monitoring system which operates on a redundant communication network. 5. The Distributed Monitoring and Control Equipment (DMCE) shall be of a distributed nature that shall be installed locally at each controlled element within the electrical building. The electrical building industrial computer communicates to each DMCE via two (2) shielded cables each comprised of two (2) twisted pairs. DMCE IRMS modules for regulators shall be included in the bid price as required and installed as integral to the regulator. The system shall monitor the operation of the various lighting systems per AC 150/5345-10 (current edition) requirements. Communication Network The tower station computer shall communicate with electrical building computer via fiber communication network: 1. Fiber Optic Ethernet a. The fiber optic cables shall be single-mode fiber cable. Each fiber communication link requires 2 fibers. Each station shall have 2 links active, with one acting as a backup for the other. b. All fiber optic cable shall be terminated at a fiber optic patch panel within each subsystem before being terminated at the communication equipment. c. Fiber optic jumper cables shall be provided from the fiber patch panel to the computer equipment enclosures. d. Fiber optic cable shall be terminated with connectors to match airport standards at the fiber optic transceivers located within the electrical building computer cabinet. e. Fiber optic runs shall be direct point-to-point runs with no splices. f. Upon completion of fiber optic installation, the Contractor shall provide Airport/Owner with a test report that includes dB loss test results. New Electrical Building Page 265 of 497 Computers Technical Specifications 1. The industrial-grade computer in the ALCMS system shall have the following technical specifications (or greater): Options Description a. Type Industrial-grade computer b. Processor Type I3 multi-core technology, Intel Pentium 4, or Engineer approved equal c. Processor Clock Rate 3.3 GHz or better d. Memory Capacity 4 GB RAM minimum e. Hard Disk 64 GB solid state flash drive (Standard rotating drives are not acceptable) f. Cache Memory 3 MB or better g. CDR-ROM 52x or faster h. Video SVGA 8 MB 1280 x 1024 i. Back-Up Flash Drive 4 GB CF Card Compact Flash j. 2 – Front accessible USB ports k. Redundant and hot swappable power supplies l. Hot swappable fans 2. The industrial-grade computer in the ALCMS system shall be designed using a slot board computer. a. The computer back-plane shall be passive, meaning a motherboard and daughter-board design is not acceptable. b. The central processing unit (CPU) shall be on a slot board type card that is installed into the back-plane of the computer chassis. c. CPU upgrades shall be as simple as replacing the CPU of the slot board or removing the slot board card and plugging in a new one. d. To ensure stability, the slot board computers are to have undergone a 140°F (60°C) dynamic burn-in test. e. The slot board computer shall be designed to withstand harsh environmental conditions like shock, vibration, power surges and fluctuations, heavy dust, and extreme temperatures. Electrical Building Computer 1. The electrical building computer shall be capable of independently carrying out the following functions: a. Decode all commands received and transfer them to the corresponding Distributed Monitoring and Control Equipment (DMCE) unit for execution. b. Interrogate all the DMCE units to determine the status of the Constant Current Regulators (CCRs) and other controllable items. c. Transfer the status of the CCRs and other controllable items to the control tower computer, maintenance center computer (if applicable), and all other specified computers on the network. New Electrical Building Page 266 of 497 d. Continuously check for proper operation of all the communication networks connected to the computer. e. Continuously check for proper operation of the electrical building distributed control and monitoring network. f. Duplicate the tower control and graphical displays for allowing authorized control from the electrical building. g. The electrical building touchscreen shall not be able to initiate lighting commands unless the control tower authorizes control to the electrical building. h. The electrical building shall also duplicate the maintenance center status information (if applicable). 2. Electrical building computer shall be industrial 19” rack mounted, along with rack mounted F.O. patch panels and UPS in an environmental controlled enclosure. Tower Computer 1. The tower computer shall be capable of independently carrying out the following functions: a. Receive commands from the touchscreen control station and transfer lighting control commands to the electrical building computer for execution. b. Receive the airfield lighting status information from the electrical building computer and transfer the status to the touchscreen control station. Tower Touchscreen Control Station Touchscreen Technology Technical Specifications 1. The touchscreen technology shall be integrated into the display monitor(s) and shall have the following technical specifications: Options Description a. Technology 5 wire resistive b. Screen Resolution 1280 X 1024 c. Accuracy Standard deviation of error is less than ± .080 in. Equates to less than ±1% error on most displays. d. Approvals FCC Class A and UL approved e. Chemical Resistance The active area of the touchscreen is resistant to all chemicals that do not affect glass. f. Temperature / Relative Humidity -20°C to 40°C at 90% RH, non- condensing g. Electrostatic Meets Level 4 (15 kV air/8 kV contact discharges). h. Construction Surface durability is that of glass, Mohs’ hardness rating of 7 i. Face Plate Anti-glare: 5:3 minimum j. Optical clarity 90% over visible light spectrum k. Touch Contact Requirement 3 ms, with less than 3 ounce touch activation New Electrical Building Page 267 of 497 l. Conversion Speed 22 ms, 19.2kbps m. Contaminants See Chemical Resistance n. EMI Unaffected by EMI from other nearby touch screens, CRT’s, and displays. Unaffected by environmental EMI. o. Optical Coating Provide glare screen. p. Thickness N/A No external overlays or films required. 2. Touch Screen Monitor Display Technical Specifications a. Touch screen shall be 19” with front mounted dimming control. Subsystem Equipment 1. Tower Equipment a. Computer (1) The tower computer shall be a 19” industrial rack mount computer. (2) The tower computer shall be installed on 19” rails for easy removal. (3) Refer to the “Computers” section for more detailed information regarding the technical specifications of the computer. (4) 120 VAC, uninterruptible power shall be supplied to the computer. b. Touchscreen Monitor (1) The touchscreen shall be a 19” LCD monitor display. (2) The touchscreen shall be flush mounted in the tower cab console. (3) 120 VAC, uninterruptible power shall be supplied to the touchscreen. c. Local Service Monitor (1) The local service monitor shall be a 17” flat screen monitor display. (2) The local service monitor shall be mounted on a shelf within the tower computer equipment enclosure. (3) 120 VAC, uninterruptible power shall be supplied to the monitor. d. Video/Serial Communication Extension equipment (1) A Video/Serial Communication Extension Receiver box shall be installed in conjunction with each touchscreen display under the tower cab console or Ops touchscreen. (2) 120VAC, uninterruptible power shall be supplied to the Receiver box. (3) A Video/Serial Communication Extension Transmitter box shall be installed in conjunction with the tower computer located in equipment room. (4) A Video/Serial extension cable shall be installed between the Receiver and Transmitter boxes. e. Audible Alarm assembly (1) An audible speaker shall be installed in conjunction with each touchscreen display. Speakers shall have volume controls. (2) An audio cable shall be installed between the audible speaker and the tower computer located in the tower sub-junction. New Electrical Building Page 268 of 497 f. Uninterruptible Power System (1) An uninterruptible power system (UPS) shall be provided for supporting power of the tower equipment. (2) The uninterruptible power system (UPS) shall be sized by ALCMS manufacturer. (3) The UPS shall be capable of supplying full load power for 12 minutes after loss of main input power. (4) The UPS shall be 19” rack-mount unit installed in the tower computer equipment enclosure. (5) The UPS shall be installed on 19” rack-mount guides for easy removal. g. Industrial Enclosures (1) A NEMA 12 industrial enclosure shall be provided for housing associated tower computer equipment. (2) The enclosure shall be designed for indoor use to provide protection against dust, dirt, dripping water, and external condensation of non- corrosive liquids. (3) The enclosure shall be an industry standard 19” rack-mount type enclosure. (4) The industrial enclosure shall include a pagoda top with exhaust fan and ventilation kit with filter for proper convection cooling. Electrical Building Equipment 1. Computer a. The electrical building computer shall be a 19” industrial rack-mount computer. b. The electrical building computer shall be installed on 19” rails for easy removal. c. Refer to the “Computers” section for more detailed information regarding the technical specifications of the computer. d. 120 VAC, uninterruptible power shall be supplied to the monitor. 2. Electrical Building Monitor a. The Electrical Building monitor shall be a 17” flat screen monitor display. b. The monitor shall be mounted on a shelf within the electrical building computer equipment enclosure. c. 120 VAC, uninterruptible power shall be supplied to the monitor. 3. Uninterruptible Power System: Electrical Building Computer Equipment a. An uninterruptible power system (UPS) shall be provided for supporting power of the tower equipment. b. The uninterruptible power system (UPS) shall be sized by ALCMS manufacturer. c. The UPS shall be capable of supplying full load power for 12 minutes after loss of main input power. d. The UPS shall be a 19” rack-mount unit installed in the electrical building computer equipment enclosure. e. The UPS shall be installed on 19” rack-mount guides for easy removal. New Electrical Building Page 269 of 497 4. Industrial Enclosures a. A NEMA 12 industrial enclosure shall be provided for housing associated electrical building computer equipment. b. The enclosure shall be designed for indoor use to provide protection against dust, dirt, dripping water, and external condensation of non-corrosive liquids. c. The enclosure shall be an industry standard 19” rack-mount type enclosure. d. The industrial enclosure shall include a pagoda top with exhaust fan and ventilation kit for proper convection cooling. e. The environmental conditions within the area of the enclosure installation shall not exceed 122°F (50°C) or fall below 32°F (0°C). 5. Printer a. Provide a black and white laser jet printer. Control and Monitoring Equipment The control and monitoring equipment shall be of a distributed nature. The DMCE units shall be installed locally at each device (i.e. CCR) which requires control and/or monitoring within the airfield lighting electrical building. 1. General a. Each CCR or controllable item shall be connected to a DMCE. b. The DMCE shall be a microprocessor-based module that includes all of the communication, control commands, input/output interface, and failsafe functionality. c. The DMCE shall be connected to both networks associated with the Redundant Communications Network (RCN) via quick disconnects. d. The DMCE can communicate back to the electrical building computer via either of the networks. e. Removal of any DMCE unit(s) from the electrical building network shall not affect the operations of the ALCS system other than a communication alarm. f. The DMCE shall be a universal device that can be used on any type of CCR and/or controlled element from any manufacturer. g. Each DMCE shall be identical and have interchangeable components. 2. Redundant Electrical Building Control and Monitoring Network a. A Redundant Communication Network (RCN) using two (2) independent communication networks shall be installed in the electrical building. b. The RCN shall use two (2) cables each consisting of two (2), 24AWG, shielded twisted pairs with a common (drain wire) meeting EIA RS-422 applications (Belden™ no. 9842 or equivalent). c. The network shall be used to control and monitor all the various controllable elements located within the electrical building such as CCR(s) and contactors. d. Each controllable element shall be interfaced to a DMCE (See section to follow). e. Any malfunction in one network shall not affect the operation of the system. f. Any malfunction in one of the DMCE communication ports, transfers communication to the remaining port without affecting system functions. New Electrical Building Page 270 of 497 3. Overview of Operation a. Each Distributed Monitoring and Control Equipment (DMCE) unit shall have a unique factory set address and a field programmable communication address. b. The DMCE receives commands via the RCN, executes those commands, and transfers back the status of the element to the electrical building computer. c. The DMCE shall perform the following functions: 1. Brightness setting control of the CCR(s) or ON/OFF control as required by the controlled element (i.e. Beacon contactor only requires ON/OFF control). 2. CCR output voltage and current monitoring. 3. CCR status monitoring (i.e. remote/local, loss of input power). 4. Monitor all requirements per FAA L-827 monitoring requirements (See Monitoring section). 5. Perform all failsafe functions. 6. Communication via both networks to the electrical building computer. 7. Self-diagnostic function to monitor for proper operation. 8. Locally store all data and parameters specific to the controlled element. 4. DMCE Sub-Components: a. Input / Output Board 1. Interface for all control and monitoring connections. 2. Distribution buss for interfacing internal boards. 3. Easy access, quick-disconnect terminal blocks. b. Processor Board 1. Interface for redundant communication network. 2. Easy access, RJ-45 or quick-disconnect terminal block connections for RCN. 3. Receives and transmits data to the electrical building computer. 4. Interface for insulation resistance monitoring. 5. Quick-disconnect, fiber optic connection for interface to the Insulation Resistance Monitoring Module. c. Monitoring Board 1. Interface for current and voltage monitoring. 2. Quick-disconnect fiber optic connections for interface to the Voltage and Current Sensor Module. 3. Receives current and voltage samples from the Voltage and Current Sensor Module. 4. Can interface with up to one (1) circuit. 5. Can be expanded to interface to nine (9) circuits (with additional boards). d. Current and Voltage Module (CVM) 1. Collects current and voltage samples. 2. Transmits current and voltage samples to the Monitoring Board. 3. Interfaces to the output of the CCR. 4. Shall be optically isolated from the series circuit via a quick disconnect fiber optic interface. 5. Screw terminal connections for circuit cabling. New Electrical Building Page 271 of 497 6. Quick-disconnect, fiber optic connections for interface to the Monitoring Board. e. Insulation Resistance Monitoring Module (IRMM) 1. Collects insulation resistance samples. 2. Transmits insulation resistance samples to the Processor Board. 3. Interfaces to the output of the CCR. 4. Shall be optically isolated from the series circuit via a quick disconnect fiber optic interface. 5. Screw terminal connections for circuit cabling. 6. Quick-disconnect, fiber optic connection for interface to the Processor Board. 5. Control and Feedback Interface a. The DMCE unit shall have the following interface points available: 1. Control: Five (5) mechanical-latching output points (expandable to sixteen (16)). These control points shall also be self-monitored and provide back-indication to the electrical building computer verifying proper execution of control command. 2. Feedback: Two (2) optical-isolated input points (expandable to sixteen (16)). 3. Current/Voltage Monitoring: One (1) fiber-optic digital interface (expandable to three (3)) 4. Insulation Resistance Monitoring: Two (2) fiber-optic digital interfaces. 6. Monitoring a. The DMCE unit shall provide full FAA L-829 monitoring per FAA AC 150/5345-10 (current edition): b. The DMCE shall include the monitoring board and provide the following information for each CCR: 1. Loss of input power to the CCR. 2. CCR shutdown by open-circuit / over-current protective devices. 3. Drop of more than 10% in the CCR VA load. 4. Failure of the CCR to deliver the selected output current. 5. Remote / Local status of the CCR. 6. Actual CCR output current 7. Actual CCR output voltage 8. Actual CCR output load (wattage) c. The DMCE will also monitor the control relays that are interfaced to the control equipment. 1. Each relay output is fed to a discrete digital input on the DMCE device. 2. Each digital input is monitored for proper execution by the DMCE device. 3. This type of contact monitoring provides positive back indication that the correct control commands have been executed by the DMCE device. d. The system shall include software for calibrating the following measurements: 1. Actual CCR output current 2. Actual CCR output voltage New Electrical Building Page 272 of 497 3. Actual CCR output load (wattage) 4. Operating brightness steps. 7. Programming a. Each DMCE unit shall have a unique factory set address and specific parameters, which are field-programmable. Downloading of the DMCE’s parameters shall be done from the electrical building industrial computer. b. The control system shall continuously scan all the DMCE units and detect any malfunctioning units as well as inconsistency between the commanded brightness step and the actual brightness step. c. Each DMCE unit shall transmit internal diagnostic information to the control system and provide detailed information regarding its operating status. Any malfunction shall be easily isolated to the exact location using the troubleshooting and diagnostic screens available at the electrical building computer. d. A computer, when connected to the DMCE’s RS232 port, shall be able to perform the following functions: 1. Monitor the commands being received at the DMCE unit. 2. Perform ON/OFF and brightness step switching of the CCR. 3. Monitor the communications status of the Redundant Communication network. 4. Read all the status information of the CCR (i.e. Remote/Local) 5. Read the current, voltage and wattage of the CCR. 6. Monitor all the information received at that location. 7. Configure and test the DMCE at that location. 8. Interface Device Reliability a. The DMCE device shall have an actual minimum calculated Mean Time Between Failure (MTFB) of 215,000 hours. The reliability stress analysis and MTFB prediction report should be provided as part of the Submittal. 9. Interface Device Network Protocol Description a. Reliability 1. The DMCE units shall interface with the ALCMS through redundant serial networks using a master-slave protocol. 2. The protocol shall be designed for speed and reliability in highly critical applications. 3. The protocol shall support end to end acknowledgment with automatic retries. When a message packet is sent, an acknowledgment from the intended receiver(s) shall be expected. The system will automatically retransmit the message unless the intended receiver(s) responds. b. Multimedia Support 1. The protocol shall be designed for efficient and reliable communications over hard-wired, twisted pair, serial communication links within the lighting electrical building. The protocol, as an option, should also support a variety of wire and wireless media, including infrared, radio frequency (RF), fiber optic and coaxial cable. New Electrical Building Page 273 of 497 c. Response Time 1. The master-slave protocol shall provide fast and deterministic communications, not peer-to-peer network (i.e. Echelon). The master- slave architecture shall be setup to prevent collision delays. 2. The protocol supports a data communication rate of up to 115.2 kbit/sec. 3. The master-slave protocol architecture shall not require a complex priority feature. The ALCMS system should initiate communications with the DMCE units to provide optimum control and monitoring response. d. Security 1. The protocol shall include adequate security to prevent unauthorized access to the network. e. Protocol and Network Management Services 1. The master-slave architecture shall provide a simple layout that does not require complex network configuration and management tools. 2. Each DMCE unit shall be configured with the address and bit rate for each network port. The ALCMS shall be configured with the DMCE unit address for each network link. 3. All required network configurations shall be made through the simple configuration tools provided as part of the system’s software package. f. Protocol Addressing 1. The DMCE network architecture shall not require a complex, multi-level, hierarchical address structure. 2. The DMCE design shall provide easy address configurations by the use of the simple tools provided as part of the system’s software package. g. Failsafe 1. Each DMCE unit shall provide a self-contained, failsafe feature that shall perform the following functions: a. Insure default operation of the airport lighting, even if the entire airport lighting control system is not functioning. b. Display the commands sent by the computer to the CCR’s and/or to the other controllable items. c. Self-monitor the DMCE outputs and verifies proper commands are executed. d. Adaptable to each CCR regardless of internal or external control voltage. e. Permits maintenance of portions of the control system without changing the operational status of the lighting system. f. Coordinate with Airport on preset values (or settings) for all equipment during a failsafe state. 2. The failsafe mode of each DMCE unit shall be defined per the requirements of the Airport/Owner. The failsafe modes are as follows: a. Active Failsafe mode shall be executed as follows: New Electrical Building Page 274 of 497 1) If the CCR was switched ON before the failure, it shall remain ON at the same brightness level. 2) If the CCR was switched OFF before the failure, it shall switch ON to a pre-determined brightness level. b. Passive Failsafe mode shall be executed as follows: 1) If the CCR was switched ON before the failure, it shall remain ON at the same brightness level. 2) If the CCR was switched OFF before the failure, it shall remain OFF. 3. Technical Specifications a. The failsafe system shall operate independently of the computer to provide failsafe interfacing to the CCR and/or other controllable elements. b. The failsafe system shall be based on electromechanical latching relays with the following characteristics: Specification Rating Maximum switching voltage 240VAC, 125VDC Nominal switching capacity 8A / 250VAC 5A / 30VDC Rated current (resistive) 5A Operational Life Mechanical 5X107 Electrical 105 Protection IP67 (protection against ingress of dust and water in harmful quantities) 4. Mode of Operation a. The commands executed by the DMCE to switch the CCR and/or controllable element shall be momentary commands. b. The control commands shall be mechanically latched upon execution. c. Failure of an individual DMCE and/or loss of communication to the network shall not change the status of the airport lighting. d. The active failsafe mode shall be triggered by the internal watchdog of the DMCE unit upon detection of a failure within the DMCE unit or the control system. The watchdog shall activate the failsafe mode and switch any controllable items that are OFF to their predetermined state. New Electrical Building Page 275 of 497 Insulation Resistance Monitoring System 1. General a. The insulation resistance monitoring system (IRMS) shall be an integral component of the DMCE unit. b. The IRMS shall not require the installation of any additional enclosures within the electrical building or additional component within the DMCE unit itself. c. The IRMS shall be capable of automatically or manually monitoring and reporting the insulation resistance value of the series circuit cabling (one IRMS per circuit). d. The IRMS shall be capable of measuring the cable leakage current and display the actual insulation resistance. e. The IRMS shall be capable of measuring from 20k Ohms up to 2000M Ohms. f. The IRMS DC test voltage shall have an automatic range of 500 and 1000 volts with the current limited to 5 milliamperes. g. The IRMS system shall be capable of taking resistance readings on circuits that are energized or de-energized. This will allow the system to be used as a troubleshooting tool for assisting in locating circuit faults. h. The IRMS system shall provide database record keeping capacity that allows for graphical trend analysis of the insulation resistance readings. i. The IRMS system shall include warning and alarm notifications to the maintenance computer. 2. Overview of Operation a. The IRMS shall have a self-calibration feature that performs checks on the hardware to verify proper operation prior to taking measurements. b. The IRMS shall be flexible, user programmable allowing for all of the following variables to be programmed by the user at any computer location: 1. Start Time 1: This represents the first time of the day in which the IRMS is to take the first automatic reading of the series circuit. 2. Start Time 2: This represents the second time of the day in which the IRMS is to take the first automatic reading of the series circuit. 3. Period: This specifies how often the circuit is measured. The period selection shall be made from an options list that includes the following choices: 1 hour, 8 hours, daily, weekly (once a week), bi-weekly (every 2 weeks), Monthly (once a month), or any variation defined by the operator. 4. Charge Time: This is the amount of time, in seconds, that the IRMS shall charge the circuit before taking a reading. The charge time shall be a number from 15 to 900 seconds. Charge time adjustments allow for greater flexibility in the IRMS system and provide readings that are more accurate for those circuits that are older and/or are longer runs. New Electrical Building Page 276 of 497 5. Warning Limit: This is a limit value, in Ohms, at which point a resistance warning shall be generated. If a resistance reading is below this value, the warning shall be sent to the event database. When the value goes above this level, the warning shall be marked as cleared in the event database. This number can be any value between 20k Ohm and 1G Ohm. 6. Alarm Limit: This is a limit value, in Ohms, at which point a resistance alarm shall be generated. If a resistance reading is below this value, the alarm shall be sent to the event database. When the value goes above this level, the alarm shall be marked as cleared in the event database. This number can be any value between 20k Ohm and 1G Ohm. c. All user programmable variables shall be able to be changed at any specified computer within the ALCMS system. d. The IRMS data for all of the series circuits shall be viewable from any specified computer within the ALCMS system. e. All the IRMS data shall be viewable in real-time or historical at any specified computer location. The IRMS information shall be available at all times and shall not require any special transferring of data between the IRMS system and the control system. Expandability 1. The ALCMS design shall be modular and scaleable and provides the airport with a completely expandable system. The hardware components represent the core of the ALCMS manufacturer’s modular architecture. The design shall include simple and user-friendly software that will allow the airport to add additional Touchscreen Control Stations, Maintenance Computers, electrical building Computers, and Constant Current Regulator monitors. 2. The system shall include all necessary tools for easy future changes and additions on-site. In addition, the ALCMS shall include a detailed graphic editor that shall allow for simple or complex airfield graphical changes. 3. System configuration changes should be allowed from any authorized computer and not require any supplier assistance. P. Man-Machine Interface Operational Requirements General 1. The tower touchscreen display(s) shall control and monitor the airfield lighting system. The display shall show real-time information on the operational status of the airfield lighting systems. 2. The touchscreen control stations shall consist of multiple touchscreen ‘pages’ each with a specific function. These touchscreen ‘pages’ shall be defined by the Airport/Owner in New Electrical Building Page 277 of 497 conjunction with Air Traffic Control requirements. Typical touchscreen ‘pages’ include the following: a. Preset Page: Consists of pre-defined preset buttons used to simplify airfield lighting control commands. b. Runway Page: Consists of runway-control touch buttons used to individually control runway circuits. Multiple runway pages may be necessary for airports with several runways. c. Taxiway Page: Consists of taxiway-control touch buttons used to individually control taxiway circuits. Multiple taxiway pages may be necessary for airports with several runways. d. Utility Page: Consists of miscellaneous functions for calibrating the touchscreen, granting lighting control to other locations, electrical building ATS state, generator state, screen cleaning option, setting date and time etc. 3. All preset and control configurations shall be defined by the Airport/Owner in conjunction with Air Traffic Control requirements. The ALCMS manufacturer shall provide preset tables to be used by the Airport/Owner to define the configuration settings. The Airport/Traffic Control shall review preset configurations before submitting the information to the ALCMS manufacturer. The system shall allow for minor changes to the preset tables during the FAT. Overview of Operation 1. Airfield lighting control commands are entered into the system by touching the corresponding touch button or runway/taxiway section on the touchscreen video display. When a command is entered, the touchscreen shall respond by graphically displaying the button as being depressed and change the button color along with the runway/taxiway section on the graphic display. 2. The tower touchscreen shall register the command, generate a data instruction and transmit the command to the electrical building computer for implementation. The command is also simultaneously transmitted to the operations computer and all other computers connected to the network. 3. The tower touchscreen shall receive confirmation from the electrical building that the corresponding equipment has responded to the control command and display the current system status on the touchscreen display. 4. In the event that communications is lost between the tower and electrical building, an alarm shall be indicated at each computer location. User Software Configuration 1. The ALCMS shall provide for easy end-user configuration of the airfield lighting control and monitoring system. 2. The ALCMS configuration tools shall enable trained personnel to modify their existing system from any computer on the network. New Electrical Building Page 278 of 497 3. The ALCMS configuration tools shall allow the following modifications to be implemented to the system: a. Install a new DMCE device. b. Connect the DMCE to the Redundant Communications Network. c. Change lighting preset conditions. ALCMS Alarm Functions 1. Audible Alarm: The touchscreen audible alarm shall function as follows. a. The audible alarm will sound at each touchscreen display when an alarm condition occurs. In addition, the ‘ALARM ACK’ button will flash and the associated graphics will change to red. b. The audible alarm will stop automatically after three (3) seconds unless the ‘ALARM ACK’ button is pressed. c. If the alarm is not acknowledged, the audible will cease for sixty (60) seconds while the ‘ALARM ACK’ continues to flash. If the ‘ALARM ACK’ is still not pressed after the sixty (60) seconds, the audible will sound again for three (3) seconds. d. This sequence will repeat indefinitely until the alarm is acknowledged. 2. Communication Alarm: Communications monitoring shall function as follows: a. The communications status will be displayed at each touchscreen display and indicate the current status of the communication links of the ALCMS. b. ‘Green’ indicates that communications are OK and ‘Red’ indicates that there has been a communication failure. Detail of the communication failure shall be viewable on a separate ALARM PAGE. 3. Circuit Alarms: Circuit monitoring shall function as follows: a. The ALCMS will continuously monitor the status of all of the circuits per the monitoring requirements as specified previously. b. Any discrepancies in the monitoring (i.e. incorrect output current, loss of primary power), shall sound an alarm at the touchscreen display for the associated circuit. c. If the alarm affects the operating preset condition, an ‘INTENSITY INVALID’ alarm shall also be generated. Touchscreen Command Sequences 1. The touchscreen control station shall allow the airfield lighting circuits to be controlled individually (i.e. RWY Edge) or as a group based on preset tables. 2. Each control command shall require two distinct operator actions in order for the command to initiate any state changes of the airfield lighting. The command sequence shall be as follows: a. Select circuit: Operator selects the desired circuit to be changed (either using the circuit button, or the runway/taxiway section on the graphic). New Electrical Building Page 279 of 497 b. Select intensity: Operator selects the desired brightness step that the circuit is to be changed to. c. Confirm/Reject: Operator selects the ‘OK’ button to confirm the selection and initiate the lighting change. Operator selects the ‘CANCEL’ button to reject the selections and make another selection. Touchscreen Preset Sequences 1. The touchscreen control station shall allow for simultaneous airfield lighting circuit changes that will be accomplished with preset lighting sequences. 2. The preset-lighting sequences shall be defined by the Airport. 3. Each preset lighting change shall be based on the following operator inputs: a. Active Runway Selection: Operator selects the runway(s) that will be active. This is based on runway direction (i.e. 15 or 33) b. Day/Night Setting: Operator selects the day/night setting. The day/night setting will affect the intensity of the circuits. c. Visibility: Operator selects a single visibility setting that will be based upon the Runway Visual Range (RVR) options of the airport. d. Confirm/Reject: Operator selects the ‘OK’ button to confirm the preset selections and initiate the lighting change. Operator selects the ‘CANCEL’ button to reject the selections and make another preset selection. 4. Upon confirmation of the preset selections, the intensity of all the circuits associated with the preset condition shall automatically change to match the visibility requirement. 5. The visibility settings of the Regulators shall be based on the following tables that were taken from current version of FAA Order 7110.65. Visibility Day Night (Brightness step) Less than 1 mile 5 4 1 to but not including 2 miles 4 3 2 to but not including 3 miles 3 3 3 to 5 miles inclusive 0 2 More than 5 miles 0 1 Table 1: 5-step Regulators Visibility Day Night (Brightness step) Less than 1 mile 3 3 1 to but not including 2 miles 3 2 2 to but not including 3 miles 2 2 3 to 5 miles inclusive 0 1 More than 5 miles 0 1 Table 2: 3-step Regulators New Electrical Building Page 280 of 497 Graphical Airport Pictorial 1. The ALCMS display screens will display a graphical pictorial representation of the airport runways, taxiways and other requested airport features. 2. When there is a change in a lighting system status, the appropriate detail of the graphic will indicate the status by changing color. In the case of a navaids, the entire navaid would change color. For pavements (Rwy and Twy), the entire pavement (controlled by the circuit) shall change colors (outlining of the pavement is not acceptable). 3. The circuit intensity display colors will be represented as seen in the legend as follows or as determined by the Airport: 5-Step 3-step Color 5 3 Cyan 4 NA Light Green 3 2 Magenta 2 NA Dark Green 1 1 Dark Blue OFF OFF Dark Gray Red will be reserved for alarms only. Orange will be reserved for maintenance lockout only. 4. The status monitoring display colors will be represented as seen in the legend as follows. This includes ATS monitoring, Generator monitoring and communications monitoring: a. Generator Monitoring (Electrical Building Generator) The ALCMS will provide remote monitoring of the emergency diesel generator for the Electrical Building: 1. Optically isolated digital input: One (1) input per feedback point. 2. The ALCMS will monitor the following status points provided by the Generator status panel equipment: a. Generator #1 Alarm b. Auto Transfer Switch (ATS) Monitoring The ALCMS system will provide the following input(s) for ATS status monitoring at the electrical building: 1. Optically isolated digital input: One (1) input per feedback point. 2. The ALCMS will monitor the following status points provided by the ATS equipment: a. ATS #1 Emergency b. ATS #1 Normal New Electrical Building Page 281 of 497 3. Locating and wiring of the output points within the Generator and ATS equipment shall be completed by the Contractor in coordination with the Airport/Engineer and equipment manufacturer (if required). Radio Control The ALCMS will include a L-854 to provide night closure monitoring of the L-854 radio located in the electrical building. The ALCMS system shall monitor the 3, 5, 7 click and timeout outputs of the L-854 and adjust the airfield lighting intensities based on the Night Closure Preset Table to be determined during the programming phase. A button labeled “Radio OFF” shall be added to the tower touchscreen only. When pressed and confirmed, the button will change to ‘Radio ON”, then the operator shall choose which runway will remain on for the night, and the airfield lighting will be set for night closure operations. Night closure operation settings will turn all RWY and TWY circuits to their presets. Q. Method of Measurement The item Installation of L-890 Airfield Lighting Control and Monitoring System shall be paid for as a lump sum for all related work as detailed in the Contract Documents. R. Basis of Payment Payment will be made at the Contract unit price as a lump sum for the completed and accepted Installation of the L-890 Airfield Lighting Control and Monitoring System. This price will be full compensation for all site preparation, furnishing all materials, and for erection in the electrical building, and for all labor, equipment, tools, testing, removal of the old system, cleanup and incidentals necessary for a complete and operating system. Pay Items for Work covered by this Specification are as follows: Bid Item No. X-151.1 ALCMS System - per lump sum BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 282 of 497 SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements. B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure. 1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: New Electrical Building Page 283 of 497 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Floor and slab treatments. 6. Adhesives. 7. Vapor barriers. 8. Semirigid joint filler. 9. Joint-filler strips. 10. Repair materials. B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency: 1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M), and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent New Electrical Building Page 284 of 497 of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M). 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed. B. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M, fabricated from ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed bars, assembled with clips. C. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer. B. Cementitious Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I Type II Type I/II, gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. New Electrical Building Page 285 of 497 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M. Provide aggregates from a single source. 1. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse Aggregate shall conform to the requirement of ASTM C33, Class 1M or 2M (where appropriate) and shall be graded as follows: a. C.A. Mix 200: Use Size No. 357 or a combination of Size No. 3 and Size No. 57 with aggregate Size No. 3 comprising 35 to 65 percent of the total amount of coarse aggregate (2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. b. C.A. Mix 150: Use Size No. 467 or a combination of Size No.4 and Size No.67 with aggregate Size No.4 comprising 35 to 65 percent of the total amount of coarse aggregate (1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size). c. C.A. Mix 100: Use Size No. 57 (1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size). d. C.A. Mix 075: Use Size No. 67 (3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size). e. C.A. Mix 050: Use Size No. 7 (1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size). 2. Application of Coarse Aggregate: Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not exceed three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars, one-fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, or one-third of the thickness of slabs or toppings. 3. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C33, Paragraph 6, Grading, and shall be free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M. E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.5 VAPOR BARRIER A. Sheet Vapor Barrier: ASTM E 1745, 15 Mil thickness, Class A. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 2.6 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces. New Electrical Building Page 286 of 497 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: a. BASF Corp. - Construction Chemicals. b. ChemMasters, Inc. c. ChemTec Int'l. d. Dayton Superior. e. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company. 2.7 WET CURE, CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Corp. - Construction Chemicals. b. ChemMasters, Inc. c. Dayton Superior. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. D. Water: Potable. 2.8 POST WET CURE, CURING MATERIALS A. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A, 30% Solids by Weight. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Corp. - Construction Chemicals. b. ChemMasters, Inc. c. Dayton Superior. d. W. R. Meadows, Inc. 2.9 POST WET CURE, PENETRATING SEALER MATERIALS A. Clear, Breathable, High-Performance, Solvent-Borne, Silane Sealer, 100% Silane by Weight New Electrical Building Page 287 of 497 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems b. ChemMasters c. Dayton Superior Corporation 2.10 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, aromatic polyurea with a Type A shore durometer hardness range of 90 to 95 according to ASTM D 2240. 2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). New Electrical Building Page 288 of 497 1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows: 1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Slag Cement: 50 percent. C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38- mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm) to 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. B. Slabs-on-Grade: Normal-weight concrete. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. 3. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: a. 1-1/2-inch nominal aggregate size: 470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m). b. 1-inch nominal aggregate size: 520 lb/cu. yd. (309 kg/cu. m). c. 3/4-inch nominal aggregate size: 540 lb/cu. yd. (320 kg/cu. m). d. 1//2-inch nominal aggregate size: 610 lb/cu. yd. (348 kg/cu. m). 4. Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." New Electrical Building Page 289 of 497 2.15 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M). C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces. D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. New Electrical Building Page 290 of 497 K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303. 2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. 3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. 3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. 3.5 VAPOR-BARRIER INSTALLATION A. Sheet Vapor Barrier: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor barrier according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. New Electrical Building Page 291 of 497 3.6 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor barrier. Repair damage and reseal vapor barrier before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. 3.7 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. New Electrical Building Page 292 of 497 1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed. B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture. D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. New Electrical Building Page 293 of 497 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. 3.9 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated: 1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction. 1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings. C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish and to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo. New Electrical Building Page 294 of 497 D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on- grade. E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom. 1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces. F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 305.1 (ACI 305.1M) for hot-weather protection during curing. New Electrical Building Page 295 of 497 B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period. D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces. E. Cure slabs according to ACI 308.1, by the following methods: 1. Wet Cure: Moisture Curing or Moisture Retaining Cover Curing for a period of not less than seven (7) days. a. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven (7) days with the following materials 1) Water. 2) Continuous water-fog spray. 3) Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers. b. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven (7) days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. 2. Post-Wet Cure, Curing Compound: a. All new exposed interior and exterior flatwork and other new exposed concrete surfaces not scheduled, specified, or noted to receive post-cure penetrating sealers, ceramic tile, or other bonded systems, coatings, or finish materials shall receive a liquid- applied, post-wet cure, curing compound after wet curing seven (7) days as specified, to extend the curing process. b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions immediately after the seven (7) day wet cure. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 3.13 POST-WET CURE, PENETRATING SEALER: A. New concrete floors scheduled to be sealed on Room Finish Schedule shall receive a post-wet cure penetrating sealer after full seven (7) day wet cure and an additional 21-day drying/aging period. New Electrical Building Page 296 of 497 B. Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Recoat areas subject to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. 3.14 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry. C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.15 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. New Electrical Building Page 297 of 497 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 5. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. New Electrical Building Page 298 of 497 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete;one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure three sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days, one set of two specimens at 28 days, and one set of two specimens at 56 days. a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days, one set of two specimens at 28 days, and one set of two specimens at 56 days. b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa). 9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests. 10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. New Electrical Building Page 299 of 497 D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 24 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION 033000 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 300 of 497 SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 5. Masonry-joint reinforcement. 6. Embedded flashing. 7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. B. Products Installed but not Furnished under This Section: 1. Cavity wall insulation. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: New Electrical Building Page 301 of 497 1. Masonry units. Include data on material properties. 2. Integral water repellent used in CMUs. 3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 4. Mortar admixtures. 5. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 7. Reinforcing bars. 8. Joint reinforcement. 9. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. New Electrical Building Page 302 of 497 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. 2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. New Electrical Building Page 303 of 497 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B. Integral Water Repellent Admixture: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units. 1. Water Permeance of Masonry, ASTM E 514: Capable of achieving a Class E Rating when evaluated using ASTM E 514 with the test extended to 72 hours, using the rating criteria specified in ASTM E 514-74. a. Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry, ASTM C 1072: Increase minimum 10 percent when compared to reference units. b. Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms, ASTM C 1314: Maximum 5 decrease compared to reference units. c. Drying Shrinkage of CMU, ASTM C 426: Maximum 5 percent increase when compared to reference units. d. Grout Shear Bond Strength, California State Chapter 2405(c)3.C test for Grout Shear Bond Strength: Maximum 5 percent decrease when compared to reference units. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block. C. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa). 2. Density Classification: Lightweight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch (10 mm) less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. D. Split-faced CMU: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2150 psi (14.8 MPa). 2. Density Classification: Lightweight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions specified in "CMUs" Paragraph. 4. Pattern and Texture: Standard pattern, split-face finish. 5. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: New Electrical Building Page 304 of 497 a. Manufacturer: Echelon, by Oldcastle Masonry b. Product: Mesastone c. Color: #4101 2.4 MASONRY LINTELS A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. 1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. New Electrical Building Page 305 of 497 c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. J. Water: Potable. 2.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 4. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 5. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units. 2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 76-mm (3-inch) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Cheney Flashing Company; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail) or [Cheney 3-Way Flashing (Sawtooth). 2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing. 3) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Mechanically Keyed Flashing. 4. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76 mm (3 inches) into wall and 13 mm (1/2 inch) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees. 5. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 76 mm (3 inches) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 19 mm (3/4 inch) and down into joint 6 mm (1/4 inch) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 6. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel to shapes indicated. B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: New Electrical Building Page 306 of 497 1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 1.02 mm (0.040 inch). a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier Wall Flashing. 3) W. R. Meadows, Inc.; Air-Shield Thru-Wall Flashing. 4) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Sando-Seal. b. Accessories: Provide preformed corners, edge dams, other special shapes, and seaming materials produced by flashing manufacturer. C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing with a drip edge. 4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing or flexible flashing. D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: 1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane, polysulfide or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from urethane or PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 2.9 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. New Electrical Building Page 307 of 497 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a Hohmann & Barnard company. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. PROSOCO, Inc. 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime masonry cement or mortar cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. New Electrical Building Page 308 of 497 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). New Electrical Building Page 309 of 497 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches (100 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Water-Repellent CMU Masonry: Install CMU made with integral water-repellent admixture using mortar containing water-repellent admixture in manufacturer's recommend proportion. Mix and handle mortar according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Lay CMUs as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar. New Electrical Building Page 310 of 497 C. Lay solid masonry units and hollow brick with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. D. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. E. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. F. Cut joints flush where indicated to receive waterproofing, cavity wall insulation, or air barriers unless otherwise indicated.. 3.6 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as indicated. 3.8 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches (305 mm) for brick-size units and 24 inches (610 mm) for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.9 FLASHING A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. New Electrical Building Page 311 of 497 B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. 3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 150 mm (6 inches) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 150 mm (6 inches) at ends and turn up not less than 50 mm (2 inches) to form end dams. 4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant. 5. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant. 6. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 13 mm (1/2 inch) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 7. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 13 mm (1/2 inch) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 8. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. 9. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. 3.10 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. New Electrical Building Page 312 of 497 1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm). 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. G. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days. 3.12 PARGING A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in two uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Dampen wall before applying first coat, and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat. B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot (3 mm per 300 mm). Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom. C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured. 3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: New Electrical Building Page 313 of 497 1. Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Promptly remove excess wet mortar from face of masonry as work progresses by dry brushing. D. In-Progress Protection of Work: Cover top of unfinished masonry work to protect it from the weather and to prevent accumulation of water in CMU cores. E. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Remove dirt or stains from masonry walls exposed in the finished work using bucket-and-brush hand cleaning method in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions. 4. Protect adjacent non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 5. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. Do not clean using strong acids, sandblasting, or high-pressure cleaning methods. b. Comply with environmental laws and restrictions of authorities having jurisdiction END OF SECTION 042000 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 314 of 497 SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel items not defined as structural steel. 3. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface- preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. New Electrical Building Page 315 of 497 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. B. Product Test Reports: For the following: 1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 2. Shop primers. 3. Nonshrink grout. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. New Electrical Building Page 316 of 497 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than the following: 1. W-Shapes: 60 percent. 2. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: 60 percent. 3. Plate and Bar: 25 percent. 4. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. 5. Steel Pipe: 25 percent. 6. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent. B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 2.4 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. New Electrical Building Page 317 of 497 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill,or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." F. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth. G. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material. New Electrical Building Page 318 of 497 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm). 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC- PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). 2.8 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 2. Galvanize lintels shelf angles and welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. New Electrical Building Page 319 of 497 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in- place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. New Electrical Building Page 320 of 497 B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning. C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." END OF SECTION 051200 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 321 of 497 SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof deck. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck. 3. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting of deck. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. 1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture. New Electrical Building Page 322 of 497 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 2. Nucor Corp. 3. Verco Decking, Inc., a Nucor company. B. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: Triple span or more. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated. G. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck. New Electrical Building Page 323 of 497 H. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or Contract side-lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION A. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches (51 mm) minimum. B. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. New Electrical Building Page 324 of 497 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 053100 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 325 of 497 SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Roof rafter framing. 3. Soffit framing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel shapes, masonry shelf angles, and connections used with cold-formed metal framing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. D. Evaluation Reports: For nonstandard cold-formed steel framing post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. New Electrical Building Page 326 of 497 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. C. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. D. Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and Two Family Dwellings." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Clark Dietrich Building Systems. 2. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 3. MarinoWARE. 4. Steel Network, Inc. (The). 2.2 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H (ST230H). 2. Coating: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZM150), or GF30 (ZGF90). 2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). New Electrical Building Page 327 of 497 2.4 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum. 2.5 SOFFIT FRAMING A. Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum. 2.6 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers and knee braces. 9. Joist hangers and end closures. 10. Hole-reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 2.7 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC- ES AC01 ICC-ES AC193 ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel framing to structure. 2. Type: Torque-controlled expansion anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. New Electrical Building Page 328 of 497 C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, and with a fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. D. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density, multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as framing members supported by shims. E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members as required. 2.9 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screws penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: New Electrical Building Page 329 of 497 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. B. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200, AISI S202, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw or bolt wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. New Electrical Building Page 330 of 497 F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in framing-assembly members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole-reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. 3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated on Drawings. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. E. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. 3.5 JOIST INSTALLATION A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings. B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track. 1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections. C. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows: 1. Joist Spacing: As indicated on Drawings. D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers, consisting of joist and joist track or another combination of connected joists if indicated. New Electrical Building Page 331 of 497 E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement. 1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above. F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows: 1. Joist-Track Solid Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs. 2. Combination Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs. G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange. H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. C. Cold-formed steel framing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. New Electrical Building Page 332 of 497 END OF SECTION 054000 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 333 of 497 SECTION 054400 - COLD-FORMED METAL TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes cold-formed steel framing in the form of the following: 1. Cold-formed steel trusses for roofs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for cold-formed steel studs, joists, and rafters. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel trusses; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel trusses. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. C. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Field quality-control reports. New Electrical Building Page 334 of 497 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: 1. Aegis Metal Framing. 2. MarinoWARE. 3. TrusSteel; an ITW company. 4. USA Frametek. 5. WESTCO Steel Systems, Inc. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel trusses. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel trusses capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated or required by code. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 3. Design trusses to provide for movement of truss members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C). C. Cold-Formed Steel Truss Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, trusses shall comply with the following: 1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Lateral Design: AISI S213. 3. Roof Trusses: AISI S214. New Electrical Building Page 335 of 497 2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL TRUSS MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating designation as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 (Z180), A60 (ZF180), AZ50 (AZ150), or GF30 (ZGF90). 2.4 ROOF TRUSSES A. Roof Truss Members: Manufacturer's standard steel sections. 1. Connecting Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), minimum at top and bottom chords connecting to sheathing or other directly fastened construction. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). 2.5 TRUSS ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-truss accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated steel sheet, of same grade and coating designation used for truss members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with bolts of same basic metal as fastened metal, if visible, unless otherwise indicated; with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC- ES AC01 ICC-ES AC193 ICC-ES AC58 or ICC-ES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 1. Uses: Securing cold-formed steel trusses to structure. 2. Type: Torque-controlled expansion anchor. 3. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. C. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing; manufacturer's standard elsewhere. New Electrical Building Page 336 of 497 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M. B. Shims: Load-bearing, high-density multimonomer, nonleaching plastic; or cold-formed steel of same grade and metallic coating as truss members supported by shims. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel trusses and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate trusses using jigs or templates. 2. Cut truss members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel truss members by screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel trusses by bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace trusses to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated trusses by means that prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual truss members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel truss to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, conditions, and abutting trusses and framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install bridge, and brace cold-formed steel trusses according to AISI S200, AISI S202, AISI S214, and manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Coordinate with wall framing to align webs of bottom chords and load-bearing studs or continuously reinforce track to transfer loads to structure. 2. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points. New Electrical Building Page 337 of 497 3. Install continuous bridging and permanently brace trusses as indicated on Shop Drawings and designed according to CFSEI's Technical Note 551e, "Design Guide: Permanent Bracing of Cold-Formed Steel Trusses." B. Install cold-formed steel trusses and accessories true to line and location, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs plumb and parallel to each other. Align and accurately position trusses at required spacings. 2. Erect trusses without damaging truss members or connections. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel trusses by welding or mechanical fasteners. a. Locate mechanical fasteners, install according to Shop Drawings, and comply with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. C. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure trusses and support loads equal to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to trusses are secured. D. Truss Spacing: 48 inches (1220 mm). E. Do not alter, cut, or remove truss members or connections of trusses. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install cold-formed steel trusses level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual trusses no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Cold-formed metal trusses will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel trusses with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel trusses are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054400 New Electrical Building Page 1 of 497 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 2 of 497 SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-structural framing. 2. Behind wall wood blocking for support of accessories. 3. Mounting boards for electrical and telephone equipment. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in weather protected, ventilated areas with a constant, minimum temperature of 60 degrees F maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with established Grading rules; of following species and grades: 1. Non-Structural Light Framing (less than 2 in thick): Douglas Fir (WCLIB or WWPA) or Southern Pine kiln dried (SPIB); moisture content 19% maximum at time of dressing "S- DRY", or 15% maximum "MC-15" or "K-D"; graded as follows: a. General framing: Standard and better, or Stud grade. b. Plates, blocking, curbs, and nailers: Up to 2 x 10 in. Utility grade and better; over 2 x 10 in. Construction grade and better. c. General utility purposes: Economy grade. B. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. A. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit application and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel; sized to suit application and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations. New Electrical Building Page 3 of 497 C. Fasteners: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2.2 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, APA C-D INT, plugged, exterior glue; identification index Group 2; fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 19 mm (3/4-inch) nominal thickness. a. Plywood backing panels to be the finished wall material at all interior wall surfaces within the electrical vault. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ROOF RELATED WOOD BLOCKING INSTALLATION A. Anchor blocking to metal decking and framing as detailed with 1/2” bolts set a maximum of 4’-0” o.c. B. Where blocking is more than 6” wide, anchor with 1/2” bolts set at 2’-6” o.c. and stagger alignment. B. Where blocking is required on roof deck, build-up, shim, or cut as required to set top of blocking flush with the top of the adjacent insulation. C. Cover wood blocking with temporary waterproof covering until permanent flashing is installed. 3.4 PLYWOOD SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Install with face grain perpendicular to direction of framing. B. Allow minimum space 1/16” between end joints and 1/8” at edge joints for expansion and contraction of panels; double these species under wet or humid conditions. C. Fasten 6” o.c. along panel edges and 12” o.c. at intermediate supports with non-corrosive screws. New Electrical Building Page 4 of 497 END OF SECTION 061053 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 5 of 497 SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-structural framing. 2. Behind wall wood blocking for support of accessories. 3. Mounting boards for electrical and telephone equipment. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in weather protected, ventilated areas with a constant, minimum temperature of 60 degrees F maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with established Grading rules; of following species and grades: 1. Non-Structural Light Framing (less than 2 in thick): Douglas Fir (WCLIB or WWPA) or Southern Pine kiln dried (SPIB); moisture content 19% maximum at time of dressing "S- DRY", or 15% maximum "MC-15" or "K-D"; graded as follows: a. General framing: Standard and better, or Stud grade. b. Plates, blocking, curbs, and nailers: Up to 2 x 10 in. Utility grade and better; over 2 x 10 in. Construction grade and better. c. General utility purposes: Economy grade. B. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. C. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations; size and type to suit application and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel; sized to suit application and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity locations and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations. New Electrical Building Page 6 of 497 E. Fasteners: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete. Bolts or power activated type for anchorage to steel. 2.2 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, APA C-D INT, plugged, exterior glue; identification index Group 2; fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 19 mm (3/4-inch) nominal thickness. a. Plywood backing panels to be the finished wall material at all interior wall surfaces within the electrical vault. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ROOF RELATED WOOD BLOCKING INSTALLATION A. Anchor blocking to metal decking and framing as detailed with 1/2” bolts set a maximum of 4’-0” o.c. B. Where blocking is more than 6” wide, anchor with 1/2” bolts set at 2’-6” o.c. and stagger alignment. B. Where blocking is required on roof deck, build-up, shim, or cut as required to set top of blocking flush with the top of the adjacent insulation. C. Cover wood blocking with temporary waterproof covering until permanent flashing is installed. 3.4 PLYWOOD SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Install with face grain perpendicular to direction of framing. B. Allow minimum space 1/16” between end joints and 1/8” at edge joints for expansion and contraction of panels; double these species under wet or humid conditions. C. Fasten 6” o.c. along panel edges and 12” o.c. at intermediate supports with non-corrosive screws. New Electrical Building Page 7 of 497 END OF SECTION 061053 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 8 of 497 SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extruded polystyrene (XPS) foam-plastic board insulation. 2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD A. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers and products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following. The Government will not preapprove Contractors. 1. DiversiFoam Products; CertiFoam 25 SE. 2. Dow Chemical Company (The); STYROFOAM™ Brand Square Edge. 3. Kingspan Insulation; GreenGuard® Type IV XPS Insualtion Board. 4. Owens Corning; FOAMULAR® 250. New Electrical Building Page 9 of 497 B. Characteristics: 1. Material: Extruded-polystyrene board (XPS) insulation 2. R-value per 25mm (1 inch) per ASTM C518: 5 3. Fire Rating per ASTM E 84: Class B – Flame spread / Smoke developed 4. Type and Minimum Compressive Strength per ASTM C 578: Type IV, 173 kPa (25 psi). 5. Water Absorption Maximum: Three-tenths (0.3) percent, volume 6. Board Edges: Square 7. Application: a. Below slab insulation b. Foundation wall insulation c. Continuous exterior wall insulation 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET A. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers and products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following. The Government will not preapprove Contractors. 1. CertainTeed Corporation; Sustainable Insulation. 2. Johns Manville; Formaldehyde-Free™ Fiber Glass Insulation with Bio-Based Binder 3. Knauf Insulation; EcoBatt® Insulation 4. Owens Corning; EcoTouch® PINK® FIBEGLAS™. B. Characteristics: 1. Material: Glas-fiber blanket, unfaced insulation complying with the property requirements of ASTM C665, Type I 2. Fire Rating per ASTM E 84: Maximum Flame spread / Smoke developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively. 3. Combustion Characteristics: Passing ASTM E 136. 4. Framing Type: Metal stud wall framing and light gauge metal stud roof trusses at attic. 5. R-Value: Per ASTM C 518 provided unfaced glass-fiber blanket insulation with a minimum R- Value of 3.50 per inch. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: New Electrical Building Page 10 of 497 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. C. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 36 inches (915 mm) Insert dimension below exterior grade line. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) in from exterior walls. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION A. Butt panels together for tight fit. B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or damp proofing according to manufacturer's written instructions. New Electrical Building Page 11 of 497 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONTINUOUS EXTERIOR WALL INSULATION A. Install continuous board insulation in exterior wall construction as indicated on the drawings. 1. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 2. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 12 of 497 SECTION 074115 – STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Structural metal panel assembly with double seam (180º fold) standing seam metal panels, self-adhering underlayment, cover board, foam board insulation, vapor barrier, deck board, copings, flashings, gutters and downspouts, metal fascia panels, metal soffit panels, and accessories for a complete weathertight roofing system. B. All work in this section shall be completed by the standing seam metal roof panel manufacturer’s approved installer for a complete weathertight roofing system. 1.3 REFERENCES: A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only. Reference the most current edition of each publication. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM A 924 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM B 209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM E 1592 Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 1646 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 1680 Standard Test Method for Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies UL 2218 Impact Resistance of Prepared Roof Covering Materials METAL BUILDING MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (MBMA) MBMA RSDM Metal Roofing Systems Design Manual NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA) New Electrical Building Page 13 of 497 NRCA 0405 Roofing and Waterproofing Manual 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Water penetration: No water penetration when tested according to ASTME E 1646. C. Air infiltration: Minimum air infiltration through assembly when tested according to ASTM E 1680 D. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with ASTM E 1592 UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 90. a. Wind Loads: Minimum design wind pressure of 145Km/hour (90 mph), acting inward or outward. 2. Snow Loads: N/A 3. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind and snow loads with vertical deflections no greater than 1/240 of the span. E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime- sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 49 deg C (120 deg F), ambient; 82 deg C (180 deg F), material surfaces. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Provide all action submittals in this specification section for review within a single submittal. Partial submittals will be rejected by the Architect. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side-seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field-assembled work. Include manufacturer approved self-adhering underlayment, cover board, insulation and thickness, vapor barrier, and deck board (for installation over structural metal deck). 1. Cover board, board insulation, and deck board fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations. 2. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 38 mm per 305 mm (1-1/2 inches per 12 inches): New Electrical Building Page 14 of 497 a. Flashing, coping and trim. b. Fascia c. Soffit d. Gutters and downspouts e. Roof penetrations 1) Curbs 2) Ductwork with and without curbs 3) Pipes 4) Conduit D. Color Chart for Selection by Architect: 1. Provide manufacturer’s color chart of full range of standard colors. a. Double-fold standing seam metal roof panels b. Fascia c. Soffit d. Gutters and downspouts. E. Qualification Data: Signed by the roof panel manufacturer certifying that each party listed complies with requirements specified in “Quality Assurance” article. 1. Standing seam metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Standing seam metal roof system installer. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranties: Provide manufacturer and installer warranties with requirements specified in “Warranties” article with submission of O&M manuals. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company that has been in the business of manufacturing metal roof panels specified in this section for a period of not less than 5 years 1. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative: The manufacturer’s technical representative must be thoroughly familiar with the products to be installed, installation requirements and practices, and with special considerations in the geographical area of the project. The representative must perform field inspections and attend meetings as specified. New Electrical Building Page 15 of 497 B. Single Source: Roof panels and associated accessories shall be standard products of the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. The most recent design of the manufacturer’s products shall be used to operate as a complete system of the intended use. C. Installer Qualifications: Metal roof installer must be approved, authorized, or licensed in writing by the roof panel manufacturer and have a minimum of three years’ experience as an approved, authorized, or licensed installer with that manufacturer, approved at a level capable of providing the specified warranty. Supply the names, locations and client contact information of 5 projects of similar size and scope constructed by installer using the manufacturer’s roofing products submitted for this project within the previous three years if requested by the Architect for verification. D. Field Verification: Prior to the preparation of drawings and fabrication, verify location of roof framing, decking, roof openings and penetrations, and any other special conditions. Indicate all special conditions and measurements on final shop drawings. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. B. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide metal roof system material and workmanship warranties meeting specified requirements. Provide revision or amendment to manufacturer’s standard warrant as required to comply with the specified requirements. New Electrical Building Page 16 of 497 B. Metal Roof Panel Manufacturer Warranty: Metal panel manufacturer to furnish a 20-year no dollar limit roof system materials and installation workmanship warranty, including flash, insulation, components, trim, and accessories necessary for a watertight roof system construction. Make warranty directly to the Owner, commencing at time of Owner’s acceptance of the roof work. The warranty must state that: 1. If within the warranty period, the metal roof system, as installed for its intended use in the normal climatic and environmental conditions of the facility, becomes non-watertight, shows evidence of moisture intrusion within the assembly, displaces, corrodes, perforates, separates at the seams, or shows evidence of excessive weather due to defective materials or installation workmanship, the repair or replacement of the defective and damaged materials of the metal roof system and correction of defective workmanship is the responsibility of the metal roof panel manufacturer. All costs associated with the repair or replacement work are the responsibility of the metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. If the manufacturer or his approved installer fails to perform the repairs within 48 hours of notification, emergency temporary repairs performed by others do not void the warranty. C. Manufacturer’s Finish Warranty: Provided a manufacturer’s no-dollar-limit 20-year warranty for the roofing system. Issue the warranty directly to the Owner at the date of Owner’s acceptance warranting that the factory color finish, under normal atmospheric conditions at the site, will not crack, peel, or delaminate; chalk in excess of a numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with ASTM D 4214; or fade or change colors in excess of 5 NBS units as measured in accordance with ASTM D 2244. D. Metal Roof System Installer Warranty: Provide roof system installer warranty for a period no less than two years that the roof system, as installed, is free from defects in installation workmanship, to include roof panel installation, flashing, insulation, accessories, sheet metal installation integral to a complete watertight roof system assembly. Issue warranty directly to Owner. Corrections of defective workmanship and replacement of damaged or affected materials is the responsibility of the metal roof system installer. All costs associated with the repair or replacement work are the responsibility of the installer. E. Continuance of Warranty: Repair or replacement work that becomes necessary within the warranty period must be approved, as required, and accomplished in a manner so as to restore the integrity of the roof system assembly and validity of the metal roof system manufacturer warranty for the remainder of the manufacturer warranty period. 1.12 CONFORMANCE AND COMPATIBILITY A. The entire metal roofing and flashing system must be in accordance with specified and indicated requirements, including wind resistance. Work not specifically addressed and any deviation form specified requirements must be in general accordance with recommendations of the MBMA RSDM, NRCA 0405, the metal panel manufacturer’s published recommendations and details, and compatible with surrounding components and construction. Submit any deviation from specified or indicated requirements to the Architect for approval prior to installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Manufacturers and Products New Electrical Building Page 17 of 497 1. Manufacturer name and product are given to clarify the designer’s intent and are not intended to limit selection of similar products from acceptable manufacturers. a. PAC-CLAD, Peterson Aluminum; Tite-Lock Plus Panel. b. UNA-CLAD, Firestone BP Co.; UC-6 Double-Lock Panel. c. McElroy Metals, Inc.; Maxima 2” ADV Panel B. Metal Panel Systems: Double-lock (180º bend) standing seam roofing, roll formed roofing panels. 1. Material: galvanized steel 2. Thickness: 24 gauge 3. Seam Height: 51 mm (2 inches) 4. Seam Spacing: 406 mm (16 inches) 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors. 6. Length: Factory form all roof panels to full length, end splicing not permitted. 7. Pan Profile: Smooth, flat pan 8. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 9. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.2 SELF-ADHERING UNDERLAYMENT A. Self-Adhering, Polyethylene-Faced Sheet: ASTM D 1970, 40 mils thick minimum, consisting of slip- resisting polyethylene-film reinforcing and top surface laminated to SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. 1. Manufacturer approved self-adhering underlayment material to meet roof panel manufacturer’s warranty. B. Coverage: Provide self-adhering underlayment over entire roof including fascia substrate. 2.3 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured by metal roof panel manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. 1. Provide the same insulation material where board insulation is noted as the substrate for metal roof panel panels on vertical surfaces such as wall flashing within the drawings. New Electrical Building Page 18 of 497 B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 20 PSI minimum. 1. Minimum board insulation R-value: 5.0 per inch 2. Minimum insulating value for entire roof: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1, v2007 for continuous insulation. a. Climate Zone 3A (Augusta, Georgia – Richmond County): R-20 continuous roof insulation. 2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Roof Insulation and Cover Board adhesive: Membrane roofing system manufacturer’s recommendations adhesive. Use application rates per roofing system manufacturer’s recommendations for one of following adhesive applications as recommended: 1. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive. 2. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive. 2.5 VAPOR RETARDER A. Polyethylene-film Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. 2.6 DECK BOARD A. Fiberglas Mat Faced Gypsum Board as recommended by roofing system manufacturer with the following recommended characteristics. 1. Thickness: 13-mm (1/2 inch). 2. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat with non-asphaltic coating. 3. Water Absorption (ASTM C 1177/C 1177M): Less than 10 percent of weight. 2.7 METAL RIDGE CAP A. Provide metal roof panel manufacturer’s standard factory-formed vented metal ridge cap at horizontal ridge line with barrier from wind-driven and rain. Solid metal ridge caps to be provided at roof hips. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation that balances out the combined values of soffit ventilation. Ridge ventilation shall not be less the combined value of the soffit ventilation and not more than 10% above the combined value of the soffit ventilation. New Electrical Building Page 19 of 497 2. Color: Match roof panels 3. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard; provide intermediate stiffening ribs as required to prevent sag. 4. Splice Plate: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape of exposed ridge vent cover. 2.8 METAL SOFFIT PANELS A. General Requirements: Metal roof panel manufacturer to provide factory-formed metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners and factory-applied sealant in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. 1. Profile: Flat pan with vents. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full line of standard colors. 3. Venting: Provide half or fully vented soffit panels. Panel type required to be determined by natural attic ventilation as calculated in accordance with Chapter 12 of the 2012 International Building Code. 4. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard; provide intermediate stiffening ribs as required to prevent panel sag. 2.9 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING A. Roof-Edge Fascia: Metal roof panel manufacturer to provide factory formed, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 3658 mm (12 feet) and a continuous formed- or extruded aluminum anchor bar with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover. Provide matching corner units. 1. Color: Match roof panels 2. Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard; provide intermediate stiffening ribs as required to prevent panel sag. 3. Corner Construction: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 4. Splice Plate: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components approved by roof panel manufacturer and as required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, clips, roof penetrations (roof curbs and pipe penetrations), flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closures, and similar items. Match material of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated. Finish all accessories to match metal roof panels. 1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed- cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 25 mm (1-inch-) thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. New Electrical Building Page 20 of 497 3. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim to match metal roof panels. C. Roof Drainage Sheet Metal Fabrications: 1. Size gutters and downspouts in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 11 of the 2012 International Plumbing Code. 2. Hanging Gutters: Formed from same material roof panels. Fabricate rectangular gutters complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 2438 mm- (96-inch-) long sections, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced a maximum of 914 mm (36 inches) o.c., fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide wire ball strainers of compatible metal at outlets. Finish gutters to match metal roof panels. 3. Downspouts: Formed from same material as roof panels. Fabricate rectangular gutters in 3048 mm- (10-foot-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets, of size and metal thickness according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Finish downspouts to match roof panels. 4. Roof Curbs: Fabricated from same material as roof panels with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles, and welded top box and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of minimum 1.5 mm- (0.0598-inch-) thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads, of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels. 2.11 PRECAST SPLASH BLOCKS A. Provide pre-formed gray precast splash blocks at the bottom of each downspout, 2”Hx12”W x 24”L 2.12 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. End Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. New Electrical Building Page 21 of 497 3. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.13 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine metal roof deck to verify that deck joints are supported by framing and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 DECK BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install substrate board to comply with metal roof panel manufacturer’s requirements to meet metal roof panel manufacturer’s warranty. 3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) and 6 inches (150 mm) respectively. Continuously seal side and end laps with tape. New Electrical Building Page 22 of 497 3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Install rigid board insulation to comply with metal roof panel manufacturer’s requirements to meet metal roof panel manufacturer’s warranty. 3.6 COVER BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install cover board over installation per roofing manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.7 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply at locations indicated in “Self-Adhering Underlayment” Article. Unless noted otherwise by underlayment manufacturer’s installation instructions, install underlayment wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 152 mm (6 inches) staggered 610 mm (24 inches) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 89 mm (3-1/2 inches). Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Provide a second layer as flashing around roof penetrating elements for a distance from element of 457 mm (18 inches). B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply manufacturer’s requirements to meet metal roof panel manufacturer’s warranty. 3.8 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge. B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure as required by metal panel manufacturer. C. Install metal roof panels, closures, ridge and hip caps as required by metal panel manufacturer. 1. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted. 2. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 3. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. 4. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. E. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where required by metal roof panel manufacturer and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. New Electrical Building Page 23 of 497 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 3.9 METAL SOFFIT PANEL AND FASCIA INSTALLATION A. In addition to complying with requirements in "Metal Roof Panel Installation, General" Article, install metal soffit panels to comply with requirements in this article. B. Metal Soffit Panels: Provide metal soffit panels full width of soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. 1. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where metal soffit panels meet walls and at perimeter of all openings. C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 3.10 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. 2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. 3.11 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form New Electrical Building Page 24 of 497 hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 3048 mm (10 feet) with no joints allowed within 610 mm (24 inches) of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 25 mm (1 inch deep), filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Roof Curbs: Install curbs as required for rooftop equipment including flashing around bases where they meet metal roof panels to comply metal roof panel manufacturer’s warranty. D. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels to comply metal roof panel manufacturer’s warranty. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.13 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 074115 SECTION 081113 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. New Electrical Building Page 25 of 497 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Glazed lites in door leaf. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance rating, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified. B. Shop Drawings: Provide a schedule of standard steel doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers and products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following. 1. Ceco Door Products. 2. Curries. 3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 2.2 EXTERIOR HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Door Characteristics: 1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A, (Maximum-Duty), Model 2 (Seamless) doors and frames. 2. Door Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm) 4. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 14 gauge, with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating. 5. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush 6. Core: Manufacturer’s standard polyurethane insulation. a. Thermal Performance: Provide doors fabricated with thermal resistance value (R- value) of not less than 10.0. New Electrical Building Page 26 of 497 7. Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated above by referencing ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 8. Glazing: Door manufacturer to factory install 1-inch (25-mm) fully tempered insulated glass in doors where shown in the door schedule and door elevation types on the drawings. a. Coating Color: Clear B. Frame Characteristics: 1. Level 4 and Physical Performance Level A, (Maximum-Duty 2. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, 14 gauge with minimum A40 (ZF120 coating) 3. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and welded face corners and seamless face joints. 4. Jamb Anchors: Concealed masonry*type; not less than 0.042 inch thick. a. Post Installed Anchors: Not Permitted. 5. Frame Insulation Fill: Closed cell polyurethane spray foam insulation. 2.3 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating designation. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS) 04Z (12 G) coating designation, mill phosphatized. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching standard steel door frames of type indicated. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thick- ness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.5 FABRICATION New Electrical Building Page 27 of 497 A. General: Fabricate standard steel doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Doors: 1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch (0.66 mm), steel vertical stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical webs spaced not more than 6 inches (152 mm) apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more than 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber insulation. 2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 6. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: 1. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 2. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the door hardware provided on the drawings, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. New Electrical Building Page 28 of 497 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. 2.6 STEEL FINISHES A. Factory priming: B. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. C. Field-Applied Paint Finish: Field paint all hollow metal doors and frames in accordance with architectural finish schedule and “Painting” in Division 9 of the specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow frames for doors other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. New Electrical Building Page 29 of 497 2. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of openings. 3. Install door silencers in frames before filling with foam insulation. 4. Solidly fill space between frames and wall construction at jambs and head with spray foam frame insulation fill. 5. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. D. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 2. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove spray-fill insulation and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 081113 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 30 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 31 of 497 SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed aluminum-framed windows for exterior locations. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1. AW: Architectural. B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS: 1. Design pressure number in pascals (pounds force per square foot) used to determine the structural test pressure and water test pressure. C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size). Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to comply with requirements for performance class. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified, and that are of minimum test size indicated below: 1. Size indicated on Drawings. B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for Project that pass AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test: 1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in meters per second (miles per hour) at 10 m (33 feet) above grade, according to ASCE 7, Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 40 m/s (90 mph). New Electrical Building Page 32 of 497 b. Importance Factor: 1.0 c. Exposure Category: C 2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 19 mm (3/4 inch), whichever is less, at design pressure based on testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Deflection Test or structural computations. C. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide glazed windows capable of resisting impact from windborne debris, based on the pass/fail criteria as determined from testing glazed windows identical to those specified, according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 or AAMA 506 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 67 deg C (120 deg F), ambient; 100 deg C (180 deg F) material surfaces. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following: 1. Joinery details. 2. Expansion provisions. 3. Thermal-break details. 4. Glazing details. 5. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication and assembly of aluminum windows and used to determine the following: a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated. b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranties: Completed manufacturer’s warranty as described in the “Warranties” Article of this specification section. New Electrical Building Page 33 of 497 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations. C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Contracting Officer, except with Contracting Officer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Contracting Officer for review. E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating aluminum windows without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure to meet performance requirements. New Electrical Building Page 34 of 497 b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass. 2. Warranty Period: a. Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. c. Metal Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers and products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following. The Government will not preapprove Contractors. 1. Wausau Window and Wall Systems; 4250i INvent windows. 2.2 WINDOW A. Operation: Fixed. B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent performance requirements are indicated. 1. Performance Class and Grade: HC 50. C. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum indicated at 24-km/h (15-mph) exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested according to AAMA 1503. 1. U-Factor: 2.3 W/sq. m x K (0.31 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F) or less. D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window SHGC maximum of 0.43, determined according to NFRC 200 procedures. E. Window Accessories: 1. Formed steel slide-in anchors. 2. Rigid PVC Caulk Backer. New Electrical Building Page 35 of 497 2.3 GLAZING A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glass & Glazing" for requirements. Glass type shall be “Insulated Glass.” 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed, low- conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. 1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years and has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to show adequate strength and security of glass retention. 2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable design shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505. 3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water penetration. F. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glass & Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS. G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glass & Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES New Electrical Building Page 36 of 497 A. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation. 1. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag; without sharp edges or offsets at joints. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within windows to the exterior. E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. New Electrical Building Page 37 of 497 C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 085113 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 38 of 497 SECTION 088100 – GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Insulated glass for fixed exterior aluminum windows. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on the Drawings are for detailing only. Design glass to comply with ASTM E 1300 and International Building Code (IBC) according to the following requirements: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As required by ASCE 7. See structural drawings for further information regarding site related parameters required for wind design. 2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. New Electrical Building Page 39 of 497 4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units with lites 1/4- inch- thick and a nominal 1/2- inch- wide interspace. 3. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.5 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. Insulating Glass: ASTM E773, Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units and ASTM E774, Sealed Insulating Glass Units. Certification through Insulating Glass Certification Council, Class A level. B. Flat Glass: ASTM C1036, Flat Glass. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide for structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, and special handling or installation requirements. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranties: Completed manufacturer’s warranty as described in the “Warranties” Article of this specification section. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. FGMA Publication: "FGMA Glazing Manual." 2. LSGA Publication: "LSGA Design Guide." 3. SIGMA Publication: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing Guidelines". New Electrical Building Page 40 of 497 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 5. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." B. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. C. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer. D. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. E. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated. 2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated. 3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's printed instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing materials manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg. 1.11 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating- glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's printed instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass, includes replacement of failed units. 1. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years from Date of Substantial Completion. New Electrical Building Page 41 of 497 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 1/4 inch. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat- treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat- treated float glass. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 1/4 inch thick. 2. For laminated glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 2.2 GLASS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers and products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following. The Government will not preapprove Contractors. 1. Guardian Industries Corp. 2. Interpane Glass Company 3. Pilkington North America, Inc. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 5. Viracon, Inc. B. Glass Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide glass products specified in the Glazing Schedule at end of Part 3 of this Section. New Electrical Building Page 42 of 497 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Kind HS (heat-strengthened) where recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Kind FT (fully-tempered) where Safety Glass is indicated or, if not indicated, required by governing building code. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. B. Tinted Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class 2 (tinted) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Kind HS (heat-strengthened) where recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Kind FT (fully-tempered) where Safety Glass is indicated or, if not indicated, required by governing building code. 3. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 4. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Classification of Units: Class CB or CBA. 2. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary. 3. Spacer: Aluminum with black color anodic finish. 4. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. B. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating Glass Units" Article. 2.5 PREFORMED GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded black gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following: 1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. New Electrical Building Page 43 of 497 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene, EPDM, silicone, or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. 1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing. C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black. D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide preformed glazing gasket products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Advanced Elastomer Systems, L.P. 2. Schnee-Morehead, Inc. 3. Tremco, Inc. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' printed instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: Match Base standard. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 890. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1. 2. Applications: Exterior glazing unless indicated otherwise. New Electrical Building Page 44 of 497 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with printed instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined printed instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. New Electrical Building Page 45 of 497 B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place New Electrical Building Page 46 of 497 against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.6 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four (4) days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.8 GLAZING SCHEDULE New Electrical Building Page 47 of 497 A. General: Provide types of glazing products manufactured from glazing components specified in Part 2 of this Section, for locations shown on the Drawings and according to the following Glazing Schedule. GL-1: Insulated, Clear 1. Low-E-Coated Insulating Glass: exterior silicone cap bead, 1" insulating glass, interior EPDM drive-in wedge or Santoprene™ bulb gasket threaded into aluminum glazing beads; glazed by the window manufacturer: 2. Exterior Insulating Glass Unit: Cardinal LoE-270, Solarban 60, Viracon or equivalent by other manufacturer. a. Materials 1) Spacer: polymer-coated stainless steel. 2) Spacer color: light gray. 3) Primary seal: polyisobutylene. 4) Secondary seal: silicone. 5) Airspace fill: argon. b. Exterior Glass Lite: 1) Thickness: 1/4". 2) Tint: Clear. 3) Type: annealed. 4) Coating: Soft coat low E on #2 surface. c. Interior Glass Lite: 1) Thickness: 1/4". 2) Tint: clear. 3) Type: annealed. END OF SECTION 088100 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 48 of 497 SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 4 - GENERAL 4.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 4.2 SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Hat channels for interior perimeter wall construction. 2. Hat channels for suspended interior ceilings. 4.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Delivery: In original unopened packaging or bundles, with manufacturer’s labels intact and legible. Handling: Promptly remove damaged or deteriorated products from site. 4.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Conditions: In cold weather and during gypsum board application and finishing, maintain temperature within building between 55 degrees F and 70 degrees F. PART 5 - PRODUCTS 5.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: compliant with ASTM c 645. 5.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: compliant with ASTM c 645. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 5.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: New Electrical Building Page 49 of 497 2. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 3. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8-inch-thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 6 - EXECUTION 6.1 EXAMINATION Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 6.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also, comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to ceiling framing installation. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, or similar construction END OF SECTION 092216 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 50 of 497 SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 7 - GENERAL 7.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 7.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 7.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 7.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 8 - PRODUCTS 8.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 8.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD New Electrical Building Page 51 of 497 A. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 8.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint. 8.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting- type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 8.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. New Electrical Building Page 52 of 497 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Thermal Insulation and Vapor Retarders: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation." PART 9 - EXECUTION 9.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 9.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 9.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 9.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES New Electrical Building Page 53 of 497 A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. 9.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 5 9.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 54 of 497 SECTION 099000 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C). D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of standard colors. 2.2 PREPARATORY COATS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. New Electrical Building Page 55 of 497 B. Exterior Primer: Exterior alkyd or latex-based primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous-Metal and Aluminum Substrates: Rust-inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat. C. Interior Primer: Interior latex-based or alkyd primer of finish coat manufacturer and recommended in writing by manufacturer for use with finish coat and on substrate indicated. 1. Ferrous-Metal Substrates: Quick drying, rust-inhibitive metal primer. 2. Zinc-Coated Metal Substrates: Galvanized metal primer. 3. Where manufacturer does not recommend a separate primer formulation on substrate indicated, use paint specified for finish coat. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers and products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following. The Government will not preapprove Contractors. 1. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore). 3. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 2.4 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint: 1. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Flat House & Trim Paint A6 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Flat Latex House Paint No. 171. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-600 Series SpeedHide Exterior House Paint Flat Latex. B. Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint: 1. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Exterior Latex Satin House & Trim Paint A82 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Low Lustre Latex House Paint No. 185. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2000 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Satin--Acrylic Latex. C. Exterior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi-Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint. D. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Concrete, Masonry, and Wood: 1. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28. New Electrical Building Page 56 of 497 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90 Line Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels. E. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals: 1. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Acrylic Coating Gloss (Waterborne) B66W100 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-300 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels. F. Exterior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 1. Sherwin-Williams; Industrial Enamel B-54 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel M22. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel. 2.5 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint. B. Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size: 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat-Latex Paint. C. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg-Shell Enamel B20W200 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel. D. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31W200 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex. E. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21W201. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No. M28. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamels. F. Interior Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel B34W200 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 271. New Electrical Building Page 57 of 497 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-1110 Series SpeedHide Interior Enamel Wall & Trim Semi-Gloss Oil. G. Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Gypsum Board and Plaster: 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No. M22. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Series Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel. H. Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Wood and Metal Surfaces: 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35W200 Series. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No. M22. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Series Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. a. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 2. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. New Electrical Building Page 58 of 497 b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 3. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. E. Material Preparation: 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 5. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. L. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. New Electrical Building Page 59 of 497 M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. O. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. P. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. B. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by COR. C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. D. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint. B. Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint. C. Ferrous Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed items). b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. 2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. New Electrical Building Page 60 of 497 a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer (not required on shop-primed items). b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel. D. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. 2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel. E. Aluminum: 1. Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under acrylic finishes. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. 2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Exterior aluminum primer under alkyd finishes. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel. 3.4 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coat over a primer. a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. B. Concrete Unit Masonry: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a filled surface. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coat: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. New Electrical Building Page 61 of 497 C. Gypsum Board: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. D. Ferrous Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. E. Zinc-Coated Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel. 2. Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel. F. All-Service Jacket over Insulation: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex-emulsion size. END OF SECTION 099000 New Electrical Building Page 62 of 497 SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following features: 1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Remote-mounting control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Load banks. 6. Outdoor enclosure. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. LP: Liquid petroleum. B. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following: 1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified. 2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. New Electrical Building Page 63 of 497 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For installer manufacturer and testing agency. B. Source quality-control test reports. 1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. New Electrical Building Page 64 of 497 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles (321 km) of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. F. Comply with ASME B15.1. G. Comply with NFPA 37. H. Comply with NFPA 99. I. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system. J. Comply with UL 2200. K. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements. L. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 150 feet (46 m). New Electrical Building Page 65 of 497 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. B. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations for remote radiators. These items are specified in Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: three years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set. B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments. 1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity. C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated. 2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component. D. Generator-Set Performance: 1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. New Electrical Building Page 66 of 497 2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds. 3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds. 6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. 7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components. 8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements. E. Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads: 1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance. a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed. 2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. 3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second. 4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds. 7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. 8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components. 9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load. a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator. 10. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements. New Electrical Building Page 67 of 497 2.2 ENGINE A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2 B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm (11.4 m/s). D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid: 1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow. 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. E. Engine Fuel System: 1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. 2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source. 3. Dual Natural Gas with LP-Gas Backup (Vapor-Withdrawal) System: a. Carburetor. b. Secondary Gas Regulators: One for each fuel type. c. Fuel-Shutoff Solenoid Valves: One for each fuel source. d. Flexible Fuel Connectors: One for each fuel source. F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity. G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator- set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump. 1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock. 4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum. b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections. New Electrical Building Page 68 of 497 I. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with remote radiator and integral engine-driven coolant pump. 1. Configuration: Horizontal air discharge. 2. Radiator Core Tubes: Aluminum. 3. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 4. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock. 5. Fan: Driven by multiple belts from engine shaft. 6. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 7. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. J. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. 1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall 85 dBA or less. K. Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator. L. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground. 1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories. 6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place. 7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating. 8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. New Electrical Building Page 69 of 497 c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates. e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet. 2.3 FUEL OIL STORAGE A. Comply with NFPA 30. B. Base-Mounted Fuel Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel oil tank. Features include the following: 1. Tank level indicator. 2. Capacity: Fuel for 24 hours' continuous operation at 100 percent rated power output. 3. Vandal-resistant fill cap. 4. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set. B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set. C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration. D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common wall-mounted control and monitoring panel. E. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, engine gages, instrument transformers, generator disconnect switch or circuit breaker, and other indicated components shall be grouped in a combination control and power panel. Control and monitoring section of panel shall be isolated from power sections by steel barriers. Panel features shall include the following: New Electrical Building Page 70 of 497 1. Wall-Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complying with NEMA ICS 6. Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and temperature rise shall comply with UL 891. 2. Switchboard Construction: Freestanding unit complying with Section 262413 "Switchboards." 3. Switchgear Construction: Freestanding unit complying with Section 262300 "Low-Voltage Switchgear." 4. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class. F. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following: 1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 12. Generator overload. G. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: 1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Start-stop switch. 11. Overspeed shutdown device. 12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. 13. Coolant low-level shutdown device. 14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device. 15. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 16. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 17. Generator overload. H. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated. I. Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data-link transmission of indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections to terminals are covered in Section 260913 "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control." New Electrical Building Page 71 of 497 J. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel. 1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. Control switch not in auto position. 4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 5. Battery low-voltage alarm. K. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed below without differentiating between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. 1. Engine high-temperature shutdown. 2. Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown. 3. Overspeed shutdown. 4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown. 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm. 6. Lube-oil, low-pressure prealarm. 7. Fuel tank, low-fuel level. 8. Low coolant level. L. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated. M. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation. 2.5 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489. 1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. B. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489. 1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. C. Generator Circuit Breaker: Insulated-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489. New Electrical Building Page 72 of 497 1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel. D. Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case type, 100 percent rated. 1. Rating: Matched to generator output rating. 2. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector or by other protective devices. E. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector shall perform the following functions: 1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms. 2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds. 3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator set. 4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot. F. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for ground-fault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarm indications. 2.6 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F. D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. F. Enclosure: Dripproof. G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. New Electrical Building Page 73 of 497 1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band. I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point. J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum. 2.7 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph (160 km/h). Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. B. Description: Prefabricated or pre-engineered walk-in enclosure with the following features: 1. Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed building erected on concrete foundation. 2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads. 3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation. 4. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. 6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 7. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by engine-generator-set components. 8. Muffler Location: External to enclosure. C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. 1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow. 2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating. D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vapor proof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection. 1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available. 2. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both unavailable. E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection. New Electrical Building Page 74 of 497 2.8 MOTORS A. General requirements for motors are specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in electrical Sections. 2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Material: Standard neoprene. 2. Durometer Rating: 30. 3. Number of Layers: One. B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 2.10 FINISHES A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion- resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. 2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. 1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115. B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. New Electrical Building Page 75 of 497 2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by Owner's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance. B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110. B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance. C. Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimum deflection of 1 inch (25 mm) on 4-inch- (100-mm-) high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Section 260548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." D. Install remote radiator with [elastomeric isolator pads] [restrained spring isolators] having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on concrete base on grade. E. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints for cooling water piping between engine- generator set and heat exchanger. Piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping." F. Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." 1. Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with welded joints. Flexible connectors and piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Section 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties." New Electrical Building Page 76 of 497 G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and [remote radiator] [heat exchanger] with flexible connectors. D. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector. E. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector. 1. Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems are specified in Section 231113 "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping." 2. Natural-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution are specified in Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping." 3. LP-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas piping are specified in Section 231126 "Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping." F. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." G. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. D. Tests and Inspections: New Electrical Building Page 77 of 497 1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. 3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages. a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full- charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. 4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions. 5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. 6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine. 7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified. 9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. 10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at [four] <Insert number> locations [on the property line] <Insert location for measurement>, and compare measured levels with required values. E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request. G. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. H. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. J. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. K. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. New Electrical Building Page 78 of 497 L. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. M. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner. 1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device. 3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." END OF SECTION 263213 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 79 of 497 SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following: 1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Bypass/isolation switches. 3. Nonautomatic transfer switches. 4. Remote annunciation systems. 5. Remote annunciation and control systems. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. Manufacturer shall be the same as the generator system. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions, including software, where applicable. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing New Electrical Building Page 80 of 497 Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3. C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch through one source from a single manufacturer. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1. F. Comply with NFPA 99. G. Comply with NFPA 110. H. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Contactor Transfer Switches: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. B. Transfer Switches Using Molded-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated. B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008. New Electrical Building Page 81 of 497 1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location. C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C. D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1. E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor- operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions. F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources. 1. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 2. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts. G. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched simultaneously with phase poles. H. Battery Charger: For generator starting batteries. 1. Float type rated 2 A. 2. Ammeter to display charging current. 3. Fused ac inputs and dc outputs. I. Annunciation, Control, and Programming Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote programming devices, annunciators, or annunciator and control panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device. J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated. 2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. 3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips. K. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated. New Electrical Building Page 82 of 497 C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. E. Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and characteristics: 1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation. 2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power sources not exceeding 100 ms. 3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and sensors confirming both sources are present and acceptable. a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator. b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only when the 2 sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus 5 percent maximum voltage difference. 4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer. F. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage. G. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer. Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external to automatic transfer switch. Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds, and settings are as indicated. Relay contacts handling motor-control circuit inrush and seal currents are rated for actual currents to be encountered. H. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live. I. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features: 1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent. 2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second. 3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent. New Electrical Building Page 83 of 497 4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored. 5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available." b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available." 8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac. 9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status. 10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum. 11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Instantaneous; shall initiate shutdown sequence at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source. 12. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source. 13. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following: a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer. b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available. 2.4 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110. B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch: 1. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch operation, except for testing or maintenance. 2. Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations. 3. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase arrangement and number of poles. New Electrical Building Page 84 of 497 4. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load. 5. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less. 6. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall describe operating instructions. 7. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front without removing other parts or main power conductors. C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory-installed copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit current. 2.5 NONAUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES A. Operation: Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternate Source." In addition, removable manual handle provides quick-make, quick-break manual- switching action. Switch shall be capable of electrically or manually transferring load in either direction with either or both sources energized. Control circuit disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation. B. Double-Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during switching sequence. C. Nonautomatic Transfer-Switch Accessories: 1. Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 2. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and alternate-source sensing circuits. a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available." b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Alternate Source Available." 3. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: One set of normally closed contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac. 2.6 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM A. Functional Description: Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions for indicated transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following: 1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch controls. 2. Switch position. 3. Switch in test mode. 4. Failure of communication link. B. Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch. 1. Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored. New Electrical Building Page 85 of 497 2. Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and identity of load it serves. 3. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lamp Test: Push-to-test or lamp-test switch on front panel. 2.7 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM A. Functional Description: Include the following functions for indicated transfer switches: 1. Indication of sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch controls. 2. Indication of switch position. 3. Indication of switch in test mode. 4. Indication of failure of digital communication link. 5. Key-switch or user-code access to control functions of panel. 6. Control of switch-test initiation. B. Malfunction of annunciator, annunciation and control panel, or communication link shall not affect functions of automatic transfer switch. In the event of failure of communication link, automatic transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained operation. Automatic transfer- switch sensing, controlling, or operating function shall not depend on remote panel for proper operation. C. Remote Annunciation and Control Panel: Solid-state components. Include the following features: 1. Controls and indicating lights grouped together for each transfer switch. 2. Label each indicating light control group. Indicate transfer switch it controls, location of switch, and load it serves. 3. Digital Communication Capability: Matched to that of transfer switches supervised. 4. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting. B. Annunciator and Control Panel Mounting: Flush in wall, unless otherwise indicated. C. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock. New Electrical Building Page 86 of 497 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation- resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation. 4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available. b. Verify time-delay settings. c. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. d. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch operations. e. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown. 5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. New Electrical Building Page 87 of 497 D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training." B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment. END OF SECTION 263600 BALANCE OF PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY New Electrical Building Page 88 of 497 BID FORM New Electrical Building Page 89 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 90 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 91 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 92 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 93 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 94 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 95 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 96 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 97 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 98 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 99 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 100 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 101 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 102 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 103 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 104 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 105 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 106 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 107 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 108 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 109 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 110 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 111 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 112 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 113 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 114 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 115 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 116 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 117 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 118 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 119 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 120 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 121 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 122 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 123 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 124 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 125 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 126 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 127 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 128 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 129 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 130 of 497 BID FORM New Electrical Building Page 131 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 132 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 133 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 134 of 497 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS New Electrical Building Page 135 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 136 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 137 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 138 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 139 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 140 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 141 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 142 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 143 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 144 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 145 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 146 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 147 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 148 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 149 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 150 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 151 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 152 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 153 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 154 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 155 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 156 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 157 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 158 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 159 of 497 New Electrical Building Page 160 of 497 Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Southeast Site Services, LLC Department:Augusta Regional Airport Presenter:Herbert Judon Caption:Motion to approve the Southeast Site Services Contract for the Airport Electrical Vault. Background:The Airport received two (2) compliant bids in response to the Airport’s Solicitation for Augusta Regional Airport New Electrical Vault Building; Southeast Site Services, LLC, submitted the lowest bid. Augusta Regional Airport recommends that Southeast Site Services, LLC be selected for bid and contract award. Analysis:Airport New Electrical Vault Building Construction project was re-advertised in August 2018. Three (3) potential primary bidders attended the pre-bid conference and site visit on September 20, 2018 and two (2) bidder’s submitted packages on the specified close date of October 01, 2018. Both packages were deemed compliant and responsive. Southeast Site Services, LLC was the lowest financial bidder at $1,640,825.00. This project is one of three that will be funded by AIP grant funding. Financial Impact:$1,640,825.00 AIP Grant Funded Alternatives:To Deny Recommendation:Approved by the Aviation Commission on November 01, 2018. Requesting approval by the County Commission. Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: 551081303-5413130 REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Upkeep/maintenance/cleaning cemeteries Department: Presenter:Commissioner Marion Williams Caption:Report from the Recreation Department regarding a plan for the upkeep/maintenance/cleaning and the grass cutting at the city's cemeteries. (Referred from the November 13 Public Services Committee) Background: Analysis: Financial Impact: Alternatives: Recommendation: Funds are Available in the Following Accounts: REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Public Service Committee Meeting 11/27/2018 1:00 PM Window World Contract Amendment #1 Department:Augusta Regional Airport Presenter:Herbert Judon Caption:Motion to approve Window World Contract Amendment #1 in the amount of $7,375.00. Background:Aviation Commission approved Change Order #1 Window World, for the installation of an additional window and front entrance door, framing modifications to three (3) lower windows, along with size modifications to sixteen (16) hangar windows located at Hangar One. Total cost is $7,375. BACKGROUND: This is the First Amendment to the original contract to Bid #18-178 for the window installation at Hangar One performed by Window World of Augusta. Analysis:This is to properly complete the work at Hangar One caused by the abatement procedure of the existing upper hangar windows being more extensive than anticipated with respect to the existing windows in their respective steel frames. Age of the existing surrounding materials failed upon removal, changing the size characteristics of the openings, resulting in increased labor, materials, and size of window. This also contributed to three (3) lower windows to be re-framed due to collapse of its support framing. Financial Impact:$7,375.00 Alternatives:To Deny Recommendation:Augusta Aviation Commission approved on November 01, 2018 and is requesting approval from the County Commission. Funds are Available in the 551081306-5413120 Following Accounts: REVIEWED AND APPROVED BY: Finance. Procurement. Law. Administrator. Clerk of Commission